Electroencephalograph: Operator's Manual

Operator’s Manual
Electroencephalograph
EEG-1200A
EEG-1200J
EEG-1200K
0614-010086Q
About This Manual
In order to use this product safely and fully understand all its functions, read this manual before using the
product. Keep this manual near the instrument or in the reach of the operator and refer to it whenever the
operation is unclear.
Accompanying Documentation
The electroencephalograph comes with the following manuals. Refer to the manual depending on your
needs.
Operator’s Manual (this manual)

Describes the operation and settings of the electroencephalograph. Read this manual before use.
Service Manual
For qualified service personnel. Describes information on servicing the electroencephalograph. Only
qualified service personnel can service the electroencephalograph.
Copyright Notice
The entire contents of this manual are copyrighted by Nihon Kohden. All rights are reserved. No part of this
document may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical,
photocopied, recorded, or otherwise) without the prior written permission of Nihon Kohden.
Trademark
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Other models and trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This product stores personal patient information. Manage the information appropriately.
Patient names on the screen shots and recording examples in this manual are fictional and any resemblance to
any person living or dead is purely coincidental.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. If you have any comments or suggestions
on this manual, please contact us at: https://www.nihonkohden.com/
Contents 1
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................. i 3

WARRANTY POLICY.......................................................................................................... ii
EMC RELATED CAUTION ..................................................................................................iii 4
Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument .............................................................. v
Warnings, Cautions and Notes.................................................................................. v 5
Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument.................................... vi
Precautions for Input Jack Use..........................................................................................viii 6
7
Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1
Introduction....................................................................................................................... 1.2 8
General Safety Information............................................................................................... 1.3
General................................................................................................................... 1.3 9
Installation.............................................................................................................. 1.5
10
Operation................................................................................................................ 1.8
Photic Stimulation and Activation Test.......................................................... 1.8
11
SpO2 Measurement...................................................................................... 1.8
CO2 Measurement...................................................................................... 1.10
12
Maintenance......................................................................................................... 1.11
CD/DVD Disk Handling and Storing..................................................................... 1.11
System.................................................................................................................. 1.12
Features.......................................................................................................................... 1.13
Acquiring the EEG Waveforms............................................................................. 1.13
Reviewing the EEG Waveforms............................................................................ 1.15
Communication..................................................................................................... 1.17
Other..................................................................................................................... 1.17
General Functions and Screens..................................................................................... 1.18
Main Windows and Programs............................................................................... 1.18
NeuroWorkbench Window.................................................................................... 1.19
System Program Window..................................................................................... 1.19
Acquisition and Review Windows......................................................................... 1.20
Disk Capacity.................................................................................................................. 1.21
Composition.................................................................................................................... 1.22
Panel Descriptions.......................................................................................................... 1.23
Component Example............................................................................................ 1.23
CC-120A PC Unit................................................................................................. 1.24
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box.......................................................................... 1.25
SM-120AJ Isolation Unit....................................................................................... 1.27
SM-120AK Isolation Unit...................................................................................... 1.27
LS-120A Photic Stimulator Control Unit (Option)................................................. 1.28
LS-703A and LS-706A Flash Lamp Assemblies (Option)..................................... 1.29
QD-120A Analog Output Unit (Option)................................................................. 1.29
QI-122A Input Box Converter (Option)................................................................. 1.31
SD-120AJ Multiple Portable Socket Outlet (Option)............................................. 1.32
SD-120AK Multiple Portable Socket Outlet (Option)............................................. 1.32
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.1

CONTENTS
Section 2 Installation.............................................................................. 2.1

Instrument Location.......................................................................................................... 2.2
Cable Connection............................................................................................................. 2.4
Connection Diagram (Example).............................................................................. 2.5
Connecting the AC Power Cord and Equipotential Grounding......................................... 2.7
Connecting the AC Power Cord.............................................................................. 2.7
Equipotential Grounding......................................................................................... 2.8
Cutting Off the Power Supply to the Instrument..................................................... 2.8
Connecting External Instruments..................................................................................... 2.9
Connecting the LS-703A or LS-706A Flash Lamp Assembly................................. 2.9
Attaching a Ferrite Core to the Cable of the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box....... 2.9
Mounting the CC-120A PC Unit on the Optional Cart............................................ 2.9
Connecting to a Local Area Network.............................................................................. 2.12
Connecting or Disconnecting from the Network................................................... 2.12
Backing Up and Restoring the Settings in the System Program.......................... 2.13
Setting the Computer Name................................................................................. 2.14
Windows Network Settings................................................................................... 2.16
Setting the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)........................................................ 2.16
Checking the Network Connection............................................................. 2.18
Sharing Drives for Data Storage........................................................................... 2.19
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems................................ 2.21
EEG-1200A.......................................................................................................... 2.21
EEG-1200J/K........................................................................................................ 2.23
Example of PATIENT ENVIRONMENT................................................................. 2.25
Section 3 Preparation............................................................................. 3.1

Power On Procedure........................................................................................................ 3.3
Closing the EEG-1200 Program............................................................................. 3.5
Power Off Procedure........................................................................................................ 3.6
Changing Settings before Measurement.......................................................................... 3.7
Setting the Date and Time...................................................................................... 3.7
Changing the Settings in the System Program....................................................... 3.7
Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk.................................................................. 3.8
Entering a Patient Information.......................................................................................... 3.9
Preparing the Electrodes................................................................................................ 3.10
Guidelines for Input Jack Use............................................................................... 3.10
When the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box or Optional JE-922A Mini
Junction Box is Used.................................................................................. 3.10
When the Optional JE-208A, JE-210A Mini Junction Box is Used............. 3.10
When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box or JE-225AK,
JE-226AK or JE-227AK Mini Flat Junction Box is Used............................. 3.11
Checking Original Electrode Potentials for All Active Electrodes............... 3.12
Introduction to Electrode Position, Derivation and Montage................................. 3.12
Electrode Position....................................................................................... 3.12
Derivation................................................................................................... 3.12
Monopolar Derivations (Referential Derivation).......................................... 3.12
BN (Balanced Noncephalic Reference) Derivation..................................... 3.13
Bipolar Derivation....................................................................................... 3.13
C.2 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

CONTENTS
T1 and T2 Electrodes................................................................................. 3.14 1

PG1 and PG2 Electrodes........................................................................... 3.14
Montage (Pattern)...................................................................................... 3.14 2
Attaching the Electrodes to the Patient................................................................. 3.14
EEG Scalp Disk Electrodes........................................................................ 3.14 3
Electrode Positions..................................................................................... 3.14
Ear Clip Electrodes..................................................................................... 3.15 4
ECG Clip-on Electrodes (Fastclip).............................................................. 3.16
Connecting Electrode Leads to the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box.................. 3.16 5
Connecting the JE-922A Mini Junction Box............................................... 3.16
EEG Electrodes.......................................................................................... 3.17
6
ECG Electrodes.......................................................................................... 3.17
7
Respiration Sensor..................................................................................... 3.18
Preparing for SpO2 Measurement................................................................................... 3.19
8
SpO2 Probe........................................................................................................... 3.20
Reusable Probes........................................................................................ 3.20 9
Disposable Probes..................................................................................... 3.21
Connecting the Probe to the Electrode Junction Box........................................... 3.22 10
Settings for the SpO2 Measurement..................................................................... 3.22
Attaching the Probe to the Patient........................................................................ 3.22 11
Preparing for CO2 Measurement.................................................................................... 3.23
CO2 Sensor Kit..................................................................................................... 3.24 12
Connecting CO2 Sensor Kit to the Electrode Junction Box................................... 3.25
Settings for the CO2 Measurement....................................................................... 3.25
Attaching the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Patient......................................................... 3.25
Connecting the DC Input Cable...................................................................................... 3.26
Connecting the DC Input Cable............................................................................ 3.26
Settings for the DC Input Signal Measurement.................................................... 3.26
Section 4 NeuroWorkbench................................................................... 4.1

General............................................................................................................................. 4.3
Main Windows........................................................................................................ 4.3
EEG Window................................................................................................ 4.3
Workbench Window...................................................................................... 4.4
Data Manager Window................................................................................. 4.4
Explanation of Menu Commands on the Main Windows.................................................. 4.5
File Menu................................................................................................................ 4.5
Edit Menu............................................................................................................... 4.6
Help Menu.............................................................................................................. 4.6
Option Buttons........................................................................................................ 4.6
Examination Workflow Using NeuroWorkbench............................................................... 4.7
Menu Window for EEG Examination................................................................................. 4.8
User Accounts................................................................................................................ 4.10
Creating a New User Account.............................................................................. 4.10
Editing and Deleting User Accounts..................................................................... 4.12
Explanation of the User Account Dialog Box.............................................. 4.12
Adding a User Account............................................................................... 4.12
Deleting a User Account............................................................................. 4.12
Editing a User Account............................................................................... 4.13

CONTENTS
Using the Active Directory Accounts when Logging in to NeuroWorkbench........ 4.13

Changing User Account Settings.......................................................................... 4.14
Entering User Name and Password........................................................... 4.14
Setting Access Rights................................................................................ 4.14
Selecting a Reference Account.................................................................. 4.14
Setting the Patient Information Security..................................................... 4.15
Setting Function Access Right................................................................... 4.15
Setting Weekly Schedule Functions........................................................... 4.15
Selecting Available Examinations............................................................... 4.15
Selecting the Default Examination for a New Examination Schedule......... 4.16
Setting Report Application Security............................................................ 4.16
Limiting the Applications............................................................................. 4.16
Limiting Patients Displayed in the Patient List and Data List...................... 4.17
Edit Menu Window.......................................................................................................... 4.18
Opening the Edit Menu Window........................................................................... 4.18
Adding a New Tab Page....................................................................................... 4.19
Deleting a Tab Page.............................................................................................. 4.20
Changing the Order of Tab Pages........................................................................ 4.21
Changing the Name of a Tab Page....................................................................... 4.21
Importing Tab Pages............................................................................................. 4.22
Exporting Tab Pages............................................................................................. 4.22
Saving All Tab Page Settings...................................................................... 4.22
Saving the Current Tab Page Settings........................................................ 4.23
Setting the Current Menu as the Default.............................................................. 4.23
Restoring the Default Menu.................................................................................. 4.23
Restoring the Previous Tab Page and Protocol Button Settings........................... 4.24
Setting Up Protocol Buttons................................................................................. 4.24
Opening the EEG System Settings Window to Change EEG System
Settings...................................................................................................... 4.25
Copying a Protocol Button.................................................................................... 4.25
Deleting a Protocol Button.................................................................................... 4.25
Importing a Protocol............................................................................................. 4.26
Exporting a Protocol............................................................................................. 4.27
Initializing a Protocol Button................................................................................. 4.27
Preventing Changes to Protocol Button Settings in the Acquisition Program....... 4.28
Setting the Preset Number of Copies for CD/DVD Disks................................................ 4.29
Using Optional Programs................................................................................................ 4.30
Opening the Setting Option Button Window......................................................... 4.30
Assigning or Changing an Optional Program....................................................... 4.30
Renaming an Option Button................................................................................. 4.31
Clearing an Option Button.................................................................................... 4.32
Section 5 System Program.................................................................... 5.1

General............................................................................................................................. 5.4
Opening the System Program........................................................................................... 5.5
Setting Up the Acquisition System......................................................................... 5.5
Setting Up the Review System............................................................................... 5.6
System Program Window....................................................................................... 5.7
Closing the System Program............................................................................................ 5.9

CONTENTS
Programming Patterns.................................................................................................... 5.10 1

General................................................................................................................. 5.10
Opening the Pattern Table.................................................................................... 5.10 2
Selecting the Pattern............................................................................................ 5.10
Changing the Pattern Name................................................................................. 5.11 3
Changing the Montage......................................................................................... 5.11
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation............................................... 5.12 4
Changing an Amplifier Setting.............................................................................. 5.13
Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform................................................................. 5.14 5
Changing a Waveform Color................................................................................. 5.14
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform............................................... 5.15
6
Annotating a Channel with a Comment................................................................ 5.15
7
Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar................................ 5.16
Changing the Channel Spacing............................................................................ 5.16
8
Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals.................................... 5.17
Setting the Read-only Attribute for the Selected Pattern...................................... 5.19 9
Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes........................................................ 5.20
When Using the WEE-1200 Wireless Input Unit and QI-123A Input Box 10
Converter.............................................................................................................. 5.21
Editing Event List for Waveform Annotations and Item List in the Patient Information 11
Window........................................................................................................................... 5.23
Editing the Event List for Waveform Annotations.................................................. 5.23 12
Setting the Annotation Color...................................................................... 5.23
Setting Periodic Annotations...................................................................... 5.24
Editing the Item List in the Patient Information Window........................................ 5.25
Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box............................................. 5.26
General................................................................................................................. 5.26
Opening the System Settings Dialog Box............................................................. 5.26
Settings in the General Page................................................................................ 5.27
Selecting Storage Drive.............................................................................. 5.27
Changing Montage Description.................................................................. 5.28
Selecting EEG Sampling Frequency.......................................................... 5.28
Changing the Waveform Display Size........................................................ 5.28
Automatically Saving the Waveforms......................................................... 5.28
Using the Current System Settings in the Review Program....................... 5.28
Saving the Current System Settings with a Part of EEG Waveforms......... 5.29
Selecting AC Line Frequency..................................................................... 5.29
Selecting Reference Electrodes for Skin-Electrode Impedance Check...... 5.29
Selecting Reference Electrode for Saved EEG Data.................................. 5.29
Displaying the Patient Image...................................................................... 5.29
Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring.............. 5.30
Settings in the Junction Box, Operation, Display Page......................................... 5.32
Resetting the Settings When Pattern Changes.......................................... 5.32
Selecting the Pattern Number When Group Changes................................ 5.32
Selecting the Limitation of the Skin-electrode Impedance Check Time...... 5.33
Selecting the Electrode Junction Box Time Constant................................. 5.33
Selecting the Dynamic Range for the Electrode Junction Box................... 5.33
Selecting the Operation Mode of the Impedance Preset Key..................... 5.33
Selecting the Time Interval of the HV Timer and Post HV Timer Event...... 5.33
Using Acquisition Instrument Pattern......................................................... 5.33
CONTENTS
Selecting the Page Display Time................................................................ 5.33

Selecting the Operation Mode of the Reset Button/Switch........................ 5.34
Selecting the Time Constant Display Format............................................. 5.34
Selecting the Range of Selectable High Cut Filter Frequencies................. 5.34
Substituting the Sensitivity 2.5 for the Sensitivity 3.................................... 5.34
Entering the Event Name for High Speed Review...................................... 5.34
Selecting the Way of Overwriting, Sound and Transmitter Number for
Wireless Transmitter................................................................................... 5.34
Settings in the Standard Page.............................................................................. 5.35
Selecting the Pattern and the ACC Amplifier Settings in Acquisition......... 5.35
Selecting the Pattern and the ACC Amplifier Settings in Review............... 5.35
Selecting the Calibration Mode.................................................................. 5.35
Selecting the Automatic EEG Waveform Recording Mode......................... 5.36
Selecting the Default for Timer Mode......................................................... 5.36
Selecting the Impedance Threshold........................................................... 5.36
Selecting the Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation Settings................. 5.36
Selecting the Waveform Display Speed...................................................... 5.36
Selecting Whether or Not to Record the Calibration Waveform.................. 5.36
Selecting the AC Filter Setting.................................................................... 5.37
Selecting Whether or Not to Display the Patient Image.............................. 5.37
Settings in the DC Input/Output, Pen Recorder Page........................................... 5.37
Selecting the DC Input Sensitivity.............................................................. 5.37
Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition...................................... 5.39
General................................................................................................................. 5.39
Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition............................ 5.39
Selecting and Saving the DC Input Channels....................................................... 5.40
Switching Multiple Connectors and Bipolar Terminals.......................................... 5.42
Setting BN Electrodes.......................................................................................... 5.42
Programming EEG Recording Navigation...................................................................... 5.43
Changing the Acquisition Window and Review Window Display Settings....................... 5.45
Opening the Color, Text, Size, Other Dialog Box.................................................. 5.45
Settings in the Color Page.................................................................................... 5.46
Settings in the Text, Size Page............................................................................. 5.47
Settings in the Transparency Page....................................................................... 5.48
Settings in the Window Items Size Page.............................................................. 5.49
Settings in the Other Page.................................................................................... 5.49
Setting the Digital Video Recording Settings.................................................................. 5.52
Setting the Wireless Input Unit Settings.......................................................................... 5.53
Setting the Input Box Converter Settings........................................................................ 5.53
Adding the Optional Program Command to the Option Menu........................................ 5.54
Saving the System Program Settings in a File................................................................ 5.55
Loading System Program Settings from a File............................................................... 5.56
Resetting All System Program Settings to the Factory Default Settings......................... 5.57
Changing the Electrode Junction Box............................................................................. 5.58
Saving the EEG Data in the Extended File Format.............................................. 5.58
Transferring Data from a Bedside Monitor............................................................ 5.58
Limitation of the Number of Electrodes to be Saved according to the Sampling
Frequency............................................................................................................. 5.59
Multi Channel Display Settings....................................................................................... 5.64
List of Factory Default Settings....................................................................................... 5.65
CONTENTS
Patterns................................................................................................................ 5.65 1
Other Patterns...................................................................................................... 5.73
Automatic Photic Stimulation Settings.................................................................. 5.73 2
EEG Recording Navigation................................................................................... 5.74
Explanation of Menu....................................................................................................... 5.75 3
File Menu.............................................................................................................. 5.75
Junction Box Menu............................................................................................... 5.75 4
Help Menu............................................................................................................ 5.76
5
Section 6 Acquisition Program.............................................................. 6.1 6

General............................................................................................................................. 6.4
Flowchart of Acquiring EEG Waveforms................................................................. 6.6 7
Opening the Acquisition Program..................................................................................... 6.7
Closing the Acquisition Program....................................................................................... 6.8 8
Patient Information Settings.............................................................................................. 6.9
Acquisition Window......................................................................................................... 6.10
9
Extended Channel Bar......................................................................................... 6.10
10
Using the Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu....................................... 6.11
Preparing the Electrodes................................................................................................ 6.12
11
EEG Recording Navigation............................................................................................. 6.12
Starting and Ending EEG Measurement ....................................................................... 6.15 12
Measurement Flow............................................................................................... 6.15
Checking Waveforms............................................................................................ 6.15
Starting Filing....................................................................................................... 6.16
Saving the File...................................................................................................... 6.16
Checking the Skin-electrode Impedance........................................................................ 6.17
Setting Impedance Threshold............................................................................... 6.17
Checking Skin-electrode Impedance.................................................................... 6.18
Displaying the Calibration Waveform.............................................................................. 6.19
Displaying and Saving the Calibration Waveform................................................. 6.19
Changing the Calibration Waveform..................................................................... 6.19
Changing the Pattern...................................................................................................... 6.20
Changing the Measurement Settings............................................................................. 6.21
Changing Amplifier Settings................................................................................. 6.22
Changing the Settings with ACC Function................................................. 6.22
Changing the Amplifier Setting for Individual Channels............................. 6.23
Changing Amplifier Settings Using the Pattern Table................................. 6.24
Changing the Pattern Name....................................................................... 6.26
Changing Electrode Names....................................................................... 6.27
Changing the Reference Electrode............................................................ 6.27
Exporting and Importing the Pattern Settings....................................................... 6.28
Exporting the Pattern Settings.................................................................... 6.28
Importing the Pattern Settings.................................................................... 6.28
Exporting All Pattern Settings..................................................................... 6.28
Importing All Pattern Settings..................................................................... 6.28
Changing the Waveform Display Settings............................................................. 6.28
Changing Waveform Display Positions....................................................... 6.30
Displaying/Hiding a Waveform.................................................................... 6.31

CONTENTS
Changing the Waveform Display Speed..................................................... 6.32

Changing a Waveform Color....................................................................... 6.32
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform..................................... 6.32
Returning All Waveforms to the Baseline................................................... 6.33
Displaying Montage Map...................................................................................... 6.33
Montage Map Window................................................................................ 6.33
Using the AC Filter................................................................................................ 6.34
Using the ECG Filter............................................................................................. 6.34
Changing the Various Settings to the Default Settings......................................... 6.36
Using the Timers............................................................................................................. 6.37
About the Timer Bar.............................................................................................. 6.37
Manual Timer........................................................................................................ 6.37
Record (Recording) Timer.................................................................................... 6.38
HV and Post HV Timer.......................................................................................... 6.38
Annotating EEG Waveforms........................................................................................... 6.39
General................................................................................................................. 6.39
Manually Annotating the Waveforms.................................................................... 6.40
Adding a Preset Annotation........................................................................ 6.40
Adding an Annotation with the Keyboard................................................... 6.40
Using the Annotation Dialog Box................................................................ 6.41
Adding a Screen Comment........................................................................ 6.41
Capturing the Current Waveforms and Patient Image and Saving Them as
a Screen Comment............................................................................................... 6.42
Event Notification............................................................................................................ 6.43
Automatically Starting the Event Notification Software......................................... 6.43
Manually Starting the Event Notification Software................................................ 6.44
Setting the Event Notification Condition............................................................... 6.44
Displaying and Closing the Event Notification...................................................... 6.46
Changing the Event Notification Condition........................................................... 6.46
Notification Condition Settings Window for Seizure and MARK ON........... 6.46
Notification Condition Settings Window for Heart Rate and DC Input
Signals ....................................................................................................... 6.47
Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation......................................................................... 6.48
Activation Bar........................................................................................................ 6.49
Photic Stimulation................................................................................................. 6.51
Automatic Photic Stimulation...................................................................... 6.51
Manual Photic Stimulation.......................................................................... 6.52
Single Photic Stimulation............................................................................ 6.53
Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler........................................... 6.54
Using the Time & Voltage Cursor.......................................................................... 6.54
Using the Ruler..................................................................................................... 6.55
Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph.................................................................... 6.56
Frequency Map............................................................................................................... 6.57
Displaying the Frequency Map............................................................................. 6.57
Frequency Map Settings....................................................................................... 6.58
Map Settings.............................................................................................. 6.58
Scale Range............................................................................................... 6.59
Frequency Band Settings........................................................................... 6.59
Electrode Position Settings......................................................................... 6.60
Scale Color Settings................................................................................... 6.61
CONTENTS
Displaying Heart Rate..................................................................................................... 6.62 1

Settings for Displaying Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs for Review
Program.......................................................................................................................... 6.63 2
Creating Groups of FFT Channles for the DSA Trendgraph................................. 6.64
Creating a Trend Group for Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs.... 6.65 3
Displaying the Camera Image......................................................................................... 6.66
Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring............................................................................ 6.67 4
Long Term Monitoring........................................................................................... 6.68
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation......................................................... 6.70 5
Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation......................................................................... 6.71
Keyboard Operation ....................................................................................................... 6.72
6
EEG Scope – Comparison Mode.................................................................................... 6.73
7
Starting the EEG Scope – Comparison Mode...................................................... 6.73
Closing the EEG Scope – Comparison Mode...................................................... 6.73
8
Display Layout...................................................................................................... 6.74
Auto Refresh......................................................................................................... 6.74 9
Explanation of Menus and Bars...................................................................................... 6.75
File Menu.............................................................................................................. 6.75 10
View Menu............................................................................................................ 6.75
Edit Menu............................................................................................................. 6.77 11
Tools Menu........................................................................................................... 6.77
Option Menu......................................................................................................... 6.78 12
Help Menu............................................................................................................ 6.78
Channel Setting Menu.......................................................................................... 6.78
Amp Bar................................................................................................................ 6.79
Display Size Bar................................................................................................... 6.81
EEG Bar............................................................................................................... 6.81
Option Bar............................................................................................................ 6.81
Tool Bar................................................................................................................ 6.82
WEE Bar............................................................................................................... 6.83
Event Bar.............................................................................................................. 6.83
Section 7 Review Program..................................................................... 7.1

General............................................................................................................................. 7.5
Flowchart of Reviewing EEG Waveforms............................................................... 7.6
Opening and Closing the Review Program....................................................................... 7.7
Opening the Review Program................................................................................. 7.7
Closing the Review Program.................................................................................. 7.8
Review Window................................................................................................................. 7.9
Extended Channel Bar........................................................................................... 7.9
Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu....................................................... 7.10
Waveform Display Area Pop-up Menu.................................................................. 7.11
Reviewing the EEG Waveforms...................................................................................... 7.12
Searching for Waveforms................................................................................................ 7.13
Searching by the Event Name.............................................................................. 7.13
Showing/Hiding Events............................................................................... 7.14
Searching by the Event Jump Bar........................................................................ 7.15
Changing the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA
Trendgraph Display Area............................................................................ 7.15

CONTENTS
Continuously Reviewing the EEG Waveforms Annotated by an Event

Mark........................................................................................................... 7.16
Searching by the DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Jump
Bar........................................................................................................................ 7.16
Searching by Time................................................................................................ 7.16
Searching with the Long Term DSA/Event Window.............................................. 7.17
Changing the Pattern...................................................................................................... 7.18
Reviewing in Trace Mode...................................................................................... 7.18
Changing the Review Settings........................................................................................ 7.20
Changing the Amplifier Settings........................................................................... 7.20
Changing the Pattern Name................................................................................. 7.21
Exporting and Importing the Pattern Settings....................................................... 7.21
Exporting the Current Pattern Settings....................................................... 7.21
Importing the Pattern Settings.................................................................... 7.21
Exporting the Settings of All Patterns......................................................... 7.21
Importing the Settings of All Patterns......................................................... 7.21
Changing the Reference Electrode....................................................................... 7.21
Changing the Waveform Display Settings............................................................. 7.22
Adjusting the Display Scale........................................................................ 7.25
Changing Waveform Display Positions....................................................... 7.25
Displaying/Hiding a Waveform.................................................................... 7.26
Changing the Number of Displayed Waveforms......................................... 7.27
Changing the Waveform Display Speed..................................................... 7.28
Changing a Waveform Color....................................................................... 7.28
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform..................................... 7.29
Centering Waveforms................................................................................. 7.29
Changing the Waveform Display Size........................................................ 7.29
Putting a Mark on the Waveforms.............................................................. 7.30
Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler................................ 7.30
Displaying Channel Groups........................................................................ 7.31
Displaying Montage Map...................................................................................... 7.32
Using the AC Filter................................................................................................ 7.32
Using the ECG Filter............................................................................................. 7.32
Zooming in the Waveform..................................................................................... 7.34
Displaying Information about a Selected Area...................................................... 7.36
Adding and Editing Comments to Measurement Files.................................................... 7.37
Explanation of the Clip Comment......................................................................... 7.37
Adding a Clip Comment to a Measurement File................................................... 7.38
Editing a Clip Comment........................................................................................ 7.38
Editing the Annotation..................................................................................................... 7.39
Adding an Annotation........................................................................................... 7.39
Changing an Annotation....................................................................................... 7.40
Moving an Annotation........................................................................................... 7.41
Deleting an Annotation......................................................................................... 7.41
Adding a Screen Comment.................................................................................. 7.43
Editing a Screen Comment................................................................................... 7.45
Deleting a Screen Comment................................................................................ 7.45

CONTENTS
Capturing the Current Waveforms and Patient Image and Saving Them as 1
a Screen Comment............................................................................................... 7.45
Selecting a Section of the Waveforms............................................................................ 7.46 2
Selecting All Waveforms on a Page...................................................................... 7.48
Displaying a DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph................................ 7.49 3
Displaying the DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Jump Bar... 7.49
About the Trendgraph Jump Bar........................................................................... 7.50
4
DSA Jump Bar............................................................................................ 7.50
5
Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Jump Bar.......................................... 7.51
Group List on the Jump Bar........................................................................ 7.51
6
Changing the Range of the Display Area for DSA, Heart Rate and DC Input
Parameter Trendgraph.......................................................................................... 7.52
7
Displaying the DSA Trendgraph in Detail.............................................................. 7.52
Printing the Long Term DSA/Event Window............................................... 7.52 8
Changing the Heart Rate Display Mode............................................................... 7.53
Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph......................................................... 7.53 9
FFT Settings............................................................................................... 7.53
FFT Analysis.............................................................................................. 7.54 10
Creating the Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph............................. 7.54
Heart Rate Analysis................................................................................... 7.54 11
DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Analysis.................................................. 7.55
Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings.................................................. 7.55 12
Changing the Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Display
Settings................................................................................................................. 7.57
Displaying Voltage Maps................................................................................................. 7.58
General................................................................................................................. 7.58
Displaying the 3D Mapping Window..................................................................... 7.59
Types of Map........................................................................................................ 7.60
Display Mode........................................................................................................ 7.60
Buttons on the Tool Bar........................................................................................ 7.61
Selecting the Electrodes for the Voltage/CSD Maps............................................. 7.62
Displaying the 3D Map for the Specified Time...................................................... 7.63
Setting the Interval for the 3D Map and Cursor.................................................... 7.63
Changing the Display Mode.................................................................................. 7.63
Changing the Number of the Maps in the Time Sequence Mode............... 7.64
Changing the Scale of the 3D Map....................................................................... 7.64
Printing the 3D Map.............................................................................................. 7.64
Wide-band EEG Analysis............................................................................................... 7.65
Analysis................................................................................................................ 7.65
Explanation of Wide-band EEG Analysis Window................................................ 7.67
Explanation of Result Display Area............................................................ 7.68
Displaying the Time and Amplitude of a Selected Area.............................. 7.69
Setting the Number of Display Channels.............................................................. 7.71
Displaying Specified Channels............................................................................. 7.72
Changing the Time-frequency Analysis Result Display........................................ 7.73
Adjusting the Baseline.......................................................................................... 7.74
Setting Waveform Display Settings....................................................................... 7.74
Adjusting the Display Amplitude (Aspect Ratio)......................................... 7.75
Displaying or Hiding Items on the Screen............................................................. 7.76

CONTENTS
Displaying or Hiding Display Areas on the Screen..................................... 7.76

Displaying or Hiding Individual Waveform Types........................................ 7.76
Analyzing with More Detailed Analysis Conditions............................................... 7.77
Reanalyzing.......................................................................................................... 7.78
Saving the Analysis Result................................................................................... 7.78
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation......................................................... 7.79
Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation......................................................................... 7.80
Changing the Calibration Voltage.................................................................................... 7.80
Entering Patient Information........................................................................................... 7.81
General................................................................................................................. 7.81
Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box......................................................... 7.81
Copying Parts of Waveforms – Note Waveform.............................................................. 7.82
Displaying the Note Waveform Window................................................................ 7.82
Displaying the Note Waveform List....................................................................... 7.84
Copying a Section of the Waveforms.................................................................... 7.85
Copying a Section of the Waveforms with a Mouse................................... 7.85
Copying a Section of the Waveforms at the Center of the Review
Window....................................................................................................... 7.86
Registering the Copied Waveforms as Sample Data............................................ 7.87
Changing and Checking the Title and Information of the Copied Waveforms....... 7.87
Displaying the Copied Waveforms........................................................................ 7.88
Displaying the Copied Waveforms for the Current Patient.......................... 7.88
Displaying the Copied Waveforms for All Patients (Sample Data).............. 7.88
Displaying Copied Waveforms with the Conditions When They were
Registered............................................................................................................ 7.89
Deleting the Copied Waveforms........................................................................... 7.89
Printing the Copied Waveforms............................................................................ 7.89
Reviewing Long Term EEG Waveforms.......................................................................... 7.90
Changing the Pattern for Long Term EEG Monitoring.......................................... 7.91
Reviewing Two or More EEG Waveform Files Consecutively......................................... 7.92
Reviewing EEG Waveforms with Different Pattern Settings at the Same Time on
Multiple Review Windows............................................................................................... 7.93
Slide Show for an Original Measurement File................................................................. 7.95
Creating a Slide Show.......................................................................................... 7.95
Reviewing a Slide Show....................................................................................... 7.96
Editing a Slide Show............................................................................................. 7.96
Exporting a Slide Show in an Original Measurement File as a Library................ 7.97
Creating and Editing the Settings to Clip Slides for a Library..................... 7.97
Grouping Waveforms for Review – EEG Library............................................................. 7.99
Creating a New Library......................................................................................... 7.99
Editing a Library.................................................................................................. 7.101
Reviewing a Library............................................................................................ 7.101
Exporting an EEG Library to a Portable Media................................................... 7.101
Printing.......................................................................................................................... 7.102
Setting Up the Printer......................................................................................... 7.102
Printing Waveforms and Patient Information....................................................... 7.102
Selecting the Information for Waveform Printing................................................. 7.104
Printing the Currently Displayed Page................................................................ 7.106
Saving the EEG Waveforms.......................................................................................... 7.107

CONTENTS
Saving the Changed Data in the Currently Selected File................................... 7.107 1

Saving All or Part of the File as a New File........................................................ 7.108
ASCII File Format and File Name....................................................................... 7.109 2
Event Viewer................................................................................................................. 7.111
Opening the Event Viewer.................................................................................. 7.111 3
Displaying Waveforms from the Event Viewer.................................................... 7.112
Editing a Slide Show with the Event Viewer Window.......................................... 7.113 4
Adding an Event to a Slide Show from the Review Window............................... 7.114
Reviewing a Slide Show from the Event Viewer Window.................................... 7.114 5
Filtering Events................................................................................................... 7.115
Selecting with Keywords........................................................................... 7.115
6
Changing the Filtering Options........................................................................... 7.116
7
Setting Event Viewer Window Display................................................................ 7.116
Setting Event Tabs.............................................................................................. 7.117
8
Keyboard Operation...................................................................................................... 7.118
Keys on the Keyboard......................................................................................... 7.118 9
Assigning Shortcut Keys..................................................................................... 7.118
Setting the Shortcut Key for a Function.................................................... 7.118 10
Resetting all Functions to the Default Shortcut Keys............................... 7.119
Importing and Exporting Shortcut Key Settings....................................... 7.120 11
Removing All Shortcut Keys from All Functions....................................... 7.120
Explanation of Menus and Bars.................................................................................... 7.121 12
File Menu............................................................................................................ 7.121
View Menu.......................................................................................................... 7.121
Edit Menu........................................................................................................... 7.123
Tools Menu......................................................................................................... 7.124
Option Menu....................................................................................................... 7.125
Help Menu.......................................................................................................... 7.125
Channel Setting Menu........................................................................................ 7.125
Amp Bar.............................................................................................................. 7.126
EEG Bar............................................................................................................. 7.127
Tool Bar.............................................................................................................. 7.128
Page Control Bar................................................................................................ 7.129
Jump Bar............................................................................................................ 7.130
Section 8 Workbench.............................................................................. 8.1

General............................................................................................................................. 8.2
Examination Status................................................................................................. 8.2
Explanation of the Main Window and Each Mode.................................................. 8.3
Schedule Mode............................................................................................ 8.3
Examination Mode........................................................................................ 8.3
Review Mode................................................................................................ 8.4
Patient List Mode.......................................................................................... 8.4
Displaying Examinations by Workflow Status................................................................... 8.5
Working with Examination Schedules............................................................................... 8.6
Entering a New Schedule....................................................................................... 8.6
Editing a Schedule.................................................................................................. 8.7
Importing and Exporting Schedules....................................................................... 8.8
Importing a Schedule................................................................................... 8.8

CONTENTS
Exporting a Schedule................................................................................. 8.10

Displaying a Schedule for a Specified Date.......................................................... 8.12
Adding a Memo to a Schedule............................................................................. 8.13
Starting an Examination from a Schedule...................................................................... 8.15
Changing the Workflow Status of an Examination.......................................................... 8.16
Filtering the Displayed Examinations.............................................................................. 8.17
By Criteria............................................................................................................. 8.17
By Archive Status................................................................................................. 8.18
By Selecting Patient.............................................................................................. 8.19
Searching for a Patient................................................................................................... 8.20
By ID, Patient Name and Date.............................................................................. 8.20
By Detailed Patient Information............................................................................ 8.20
Reviewing an Examination.............................................................................................. 8.23
Changing the Review Application Program for Reviewing EEG files.................... 8.24
Editing Patient Information in the Database.................................................................... 8.25
Copying, Deleting and Archiving Files............................................................................ 8.26
Copying Files........................................................................................................ 8.26
Deleting Files........................................................................................................ 8.28
Archiving Files...................................................................................................... 8.28
File Management............................................................................................................ 8.31
Removing Read Only Attribute............................................................................. 8.31
Combining Files.................................................................................................... 8.31
Linking Files.......................................................................................................... 8.32
Copying an LIF (Long-term) File to a Disk Drive.................................................. 8.33
Checking the Patient Information for Consistency................................................ 8.34
Exporting a Library to a Portable Media............................................................... 8.35
Remote Monitoring......................................................................................................... 8.36
Creating Reports............................................................................................................ 8.37
Starting NeuroReport........................................................................................... 8.37
Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk.......................................................................... 8.38
Creating a Review Disk........................................................................................ 8.38
Reviewing a Review Disk...................................................................................... 8.42
Section 9 Data Manager......................................................................... 9.1

General............................................................................................................................. 9.2
Explanation of the Main Window for Each Mode.................................................... 9.4
Database Mode............................................................................................ 9.4
File Mode...................................................................................................... 9.4
Explanation of Icons..................................................................................... 9.5
Displaying Data................................................................................................................. 9.6
Selecting the Data Source...................................................................................... 9.6
Grouping Data by Patient or Examination.............................................................. 9.6
Displaying All Data for a Patient............................................................................. 9.7
Sorting the Data List............................................................................................... 9.7
Searching for a Patient..................................................................................................... 9.8
By ID, Patient Name and Date................................................................................ 9.8
By Detailed Patient Information.............................................................................. 9.8
Filtering the Data List...................................................................................................... 9.10
Reviewing an Examination.............................................................................................. 9.12

CONTENTS
Changing the Review Application Program for Reviewing EEG Files................... 9.13 1
Handling Information in the Database............................................................................ 9.14
Printing the Patient Information and Data List...................................................... 9.14 2
Backing Up the Database..................................................................................... 9.15
Restoring the Database........................................................................................ 9.16 3
Editing Patient Information in the Database......................................................... 9.17
Deleting an Examination....................................................................................... 9.18 4
Adding a Memo to an Examination....................................................................... 9.19
Managing Measurement Files........................................................................................ 9.21 5
Copying Files to Another Drive or Media.............................................................. 9.21
Moving Files to Another Drive or Media................................................................ 9.23
6
Archiving Files...................................................................................................... 9.24
7
Adding an Examination in the Database.............................................................. 9.26
Deleting Files........................................................................................................ 9.26
8
Removing Read Only Attribute of Files................................................................. 9.27
Combining Files.................................................................................................... 9.28 9
Linking Files.......................................................................................................... 9.29
Copying an LIF (Long-term) File to a Disk Drive.................................................. 9.30 10
Checking the Patient Information for Consistency................................................ 9.30
Disk Management........................................................................................................... 9.32 11
Assigning and Changing a Disk Number.............................................................. 9.32
Creating Reports............................................................................................................ 9.33 12
Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk.......................................................................... 9.34
Section 10 Troubleshooting................................................................... 10.1

How to Troubleshoot....................................................................................................... 10.2
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 10.3
Instrument............................................................................................................. 10.3
Closing the Program and Shutting Down Windows when Program
Malfunction Occurs..................................................................................... 10.5
EEG Measurement............................................................................................... 10.6
DVD Drive............................................................................................................. 10.7
Printer................................................................................................................... 10.7
Error Messages.............................................................................................................. 10.8
Acquisition Program/Review Program.................................................................. 10.8
System Program................................................................................................. 10.11
SpO2 Error Messages......................................................................................... 10.12
CO2 Error Messages........................................................................................... 10.13
Input Box Converter............................................................................................ 10.13
Connection of the Optional JE-120A Electrode Junction Box............................. 10.13
Errors on the Optional JE-120A Electrode Junction Box.................................... 10.14
Acquiring Clear EEG Waveforms.................................................................................. 10.15
Instrument Location............................................................................................ 10.15
AC Interference .................................................................................................. 10.15
Occasional Noise................................................................................................ 10.16
Unstable Waveform Fluctuation.......................................................................... 10.16
ECG Artifact........................................................................................................ 10.16
Flash Lamp Artifact............................................................................................. 10.16

CONTENTS
Section 11 Maintenance......................................................................... 11.1

Check Items After Use.................................................................................................... 11.2
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing ............................................................................ 11.3
System Components............................................................................................ 11.3
Cleaning..................................................................................................... 11.3
Disinfecting................................................................................................. 11.3
KD-029A/KE-122A Cart........................................................................................ 11.4
Cleaning..................................................................................................... 11.4
Electrodes and Leads........................................................................................... 11.4
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing......................................................... 11.4
Optional Instrument.............................................................................................. 11.4
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing......................................................... 11.4
Checking the Electrode Lead.......................................................................................... 11.5
Periodic Inspection.......................................................................................................... 11.6
Repair Parts Availability Policy........................................................................................ 11.7
Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 11.7
Section 12 Reference.............................................................................. 12.1

Specifications.................................................................................................................. 12.2
Data Acquisition.................................................................................................... 12.2
Data Processing................................................................................................... 12.2
Display.................................................................................................................. 12.3
Acquisition Program.............................................................................................. 12.3
Photic Stimulator.................................................................................................. 12.3
Review Program................................................................................................... 12.4
Safety.................................................................................................................... 12.4
Mechanical Strength............................................................................................. 12.5
Electromagnetic Compatibility.............................................................................. 12.5
Dimensions and Weight........................................................................................ 12.5
Power Requirements............................................................................................ 12.5
Operation Conditions............................................................................................ 12.6
Transport and Storage Conditions........................................................................ 12.6
Electromagnetic Emissions.................................................................................. 12.6
Electromagnetic Immunity.................................................................................... 12.7
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF
Communications Equipment............................................................................... 12.10
System Composition for EMC Test..................................................................... 12.11
EEG-1200A.............................................................................................. 12.11
EEG-1200J/K........................................................................................... 12.11
Standard Accessories................................................................................................... 12.12
Options and Consumables........................................................................................... 12.14
Options............................................................................................................... 12.14
Consumables...................................................................................................... 12.15
Reference Literature: Wide-band EEG Analysis........................................................... 12.17

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.
Use only Nihon Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products
or in a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. This
includes, but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrode
leads, input boxes and AC power.
Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.
1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.
2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, dust, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures,
poorly ventilated areas, and saline or sulphuric air.
(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.
(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.
(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product
specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.
(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.
3. Before Operation
(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.
(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.
(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.
(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is in combination with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other
problems.
(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.
(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.
4. During Operation
(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.
(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient’s safety.
(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.
5. To Shutdown After Use

(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.
(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.
(3) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.
6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is
not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to prevent use while it is out of order.
7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.
8. Maintenance and Inspection

(1) The instrument and specified parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at the interval which is specified
after the GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS section.
(2) If stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect
operating condition.
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 i

(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for
qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden representative.
9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or
location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.
10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator
discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.
WARRANTY POLICY
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one year
from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded
from the warranty.
NKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,
provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator’s and service manuals.
No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for NKC’s products. NKC will not recognize any
other warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change
performed by someone other than NKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of NKC may be cause for voiding
this warranty.
Defective products or parts must be returned to NKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure.
Shipping costs must be pre-paid.
This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Nihon
Kohden approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism,
water or other casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been
removed.
In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.
CAUTION
United States law restricts this product to sale by or on the order of a physician.
ii Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

EMC RELATED CAUTION
This equipment and/or system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 International Standard for electromagnetic
compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment that
exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in IEC 60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the equipment
and/or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function or degrade
its intended performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if there is any
undesired deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and resolve the
adverse electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.
The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:
1. Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station
or cellular phone:
Install the equipment and/or system at another location. Keep the emitter source such as cellular phone
away from the equipment and/or system, or turn off the cellular phone.
2. Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment and/
or system:
Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not
possible, use a different power supply.
3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or
indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.
4. Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:
If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or
system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.
5. Interference of lightning:
When lightning occurs near the location where the equipment and/or system is installed, it may induce
an excessive voltage in the equipment and/or system. In such a case, disconnect the AC power cord
from the equipment and/or system and operate the equipment and/or system by battery power, or use
an uninterruptible power supply.
6. Use with other equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, the equipment
and/or system may affect the other equipment. Before use, check that the equipment and/or system
operates normally with the other equipment.
7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

When an unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable is connected to this equipment and/or system,
it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity. The specified
configuration of this equipment and/or system complies with the electromagnetic requirements with the
specified configuration. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 iii

Caution – continued
8. Use of unspecified configuration:
When the equipment and/or system is used with the unspecified system configuration different than
the configuration of EMC testing, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the
surrounding electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.
10. Use with radiation therapy equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is used in a radiotherapy room, it may cause failure or malfunction
due to electromagnetic radiation or corpuscular radiation. When you bring the equipment and/or system
into a radiotherapy room, constantly observe the operation. Prepare countermeasures in case of failure
or malfunction.
If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden
representative for additional suggestions.
iv Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions and notes are used in this manual to alert or signal the reader to specific information.
WARNING
A warning alerts the user to possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the instrument.
CAUTION
A caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or
misuse such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other
property.
NOTE
A note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative methods or
supplemental information.
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 v

Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument
The following symbols are used with the electroencephalograph. The names and descriptions of each symbol are as shown
in the table below.
NOTE
Symbols on the PC unit differ according to model. Refer to the Operator’s manual of the PC unit. For the
symbols of the following equipment, refer to each Operator’s manual.
• Printer
• Display
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Standby (power on/off) Video connector
Headphone connector Network connector
Audio jack (Microphone) Serial port
Audio jack (LINE OUT) USB connector
*1
Audio jack (LINE IN) USB 3.0 connector
EEG-1200A: A ttention consult

operator’s manual Protective earth
EEG-1200J/K: Caution
Confirmation question that indicates
Display of list box
a warning or caution for operation.
Message that indicates a warning or

Scrolling of data, list and other items
caution for operation.
Window maximize/resize/minimize
Check box
Maximize Resize Minimize button
Option button Close button
*2
Breaker off Static electricity discharge
Breaker on MR unsafe
Type BF applied part Type CF applied part
Serial number Date of manufacture
Hot surface Fuse
vi Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Symbol Description Symbol Description
CSA mark Equipotential ground terminal
Alternating current General warning sign

Background color: yellow
Follow instructions for use Warning; Hot surface

Background color: blue Background color: yellow
Products marked with this symbol
The CE mark is a protected
comply with the European WEEE
conformity mark of the European
directive 2012/19/EU and require
Community. Products marked
separate waste collection. For Nihon
with this symbol comply with the
Kohden products marked with this
requirements of the Medical Device
symbol, contact your Nihon Kohden
Directive 93/42/EEC.
representative for disposal.
This way up Keep away from rain
Stacking limit by number

Fragile n
(“n” is the limiting number)

CAUTION: United States law
restricts this product to sale by or on
the order of a physician.
*1 This connector is not used for the electroencephalograph.
*2 NOTE: Do not touch the multiple connector on the JE-921A electrode junction box. Before connecting,
discharge the static electricity by touching the grounded metallic parts. Otherwise, the static electricity
may cause malfunction.
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 vii

Precautions for Input Jack Use
NOTE
Do not perform EEG measurement without the Z, C3, C4, A1 and A2 electrodes.*1
Use of input jack Z

Connect the lead from the electrode (Z electrode) attached on the patient’s nasion to the input jack Z on the electrode
junction box. The purpose of this input jack is to eliminate AC interference positively.
NOTE
The input jack Z is also used for checking electrode impedance.
Use of input jacks C3 and C4

Connect the leads from the electrodes attached on the positions C3 and C4 to the input jacks C3 and C4 respectively.*2
NOTE
• The C3 and C4 electrodes are the system reference electrodes for EEG measurement.
• The input jacks C3 and C4 must be attached for EEG measurement even when C3 and C4 are not
programmed in any montage.
Use of input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2), C3 and C4 during skin-electrode impedance check
When checking each electrode impedance, connect the leads from the electrodes on positions A1, A2, C3 and C4 to the
input jacks A1, A2, C3 and C4 respectively.*3
NOTE
• The A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2) electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-electrode impedance check.
• The input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2) in addition to Z, C3 and C4 must be attached for the electrode
impedance check.
PG1 PG2
22 23
Z
FP1 FP2
1 2
T1 F7 F8 T2
25 F3 Fz F4 26
13 3 19 4 14
A1 T3 C3 Cz C4 T4 A2
11 15 5 24 6 16 12
T5 P3 Pz P4 T6
17 7 20 8 18
OI O2
9 10
*1 For the JE-921A electrode junction box (standard accessory). Other electrode may be used for other electrode junction boxes.
*2 For the JE-921A electrode junction box (standard accessory).
- For the optional JE-208A/JE-210A mini junction box, F3 and F4 can be used instead of C3 and C4.
- For the optional JE-213A mini junction box, A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) are used instead of C3 and C4.
- For the optional JE-120A electrode junction box with the JE-225AK mini flat junction box, A5 and A6 or COM are used instead of
C3 and C4. (COM is available only when the JE-120A electrode junction box is used with the JE-125A mini flat junction box.)
*3 For the JE-921A electrode junction box (standard accessory).
- For the optional JE-208A/JE-210A mini junction box, FP1 and FP2 cannot be used and F3 and F4 can be used instead of C3 and
C4.
- For the optional JE-213A mini junction box, A11, A12, A5 (or A3) and A6 (or A4) are used instead of A1, A2, C3 and C4.
- For the optional JE-120A electrode junction box, A11, A12, A5 and A6 are used instead of A1, A2, C3 and C4.
viii Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Checking original electrode potentials for all active electrodes
Check the original electrode potential for all active electrodes by programming a montage with the system reference
electrode (Use the pattern VA (factory default setting) or select the 0 V button for reference electrode on the Montage
dialog box). Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 5. The digital EEG displays the EEG waveform in each channel
by subtracting two electrode potentials selected to a montage. The subtracted result will be incorrect if the electrode
attachment is incorrect, the original electrode potential is flat or unstable, or artifact is superimposed on the original
electrode potential. Omit the measurement result if the displayed EEG waveform is incorrect.
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 ix

Section 1 General 1
Introduction........................................................................................................................................................... 1.2
General Safety Information................................................................................................................................... 1.3
General....................................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Installation.................................................................................................................................................. 1.5
Operation.................................................................................................................................................... 1.8
Photic Stimulation and Activation Test............................................................................................. 1.8
SpO2 Measurement.......................................................................................................................... 1.8
CO2 Measurement.......................................................................................................................... 1.10
Maintenance............................................................................................................................................. 1.11
CD/DVD Disk Handling and Storing......................................................................................................... 1.11
System..................................................................................................................................................... 1.12
Features............................................................................................................................................................. 1.13
Acquiring the EEG Waveforms................................................................................................................. 1.13
Reviewing the EEG Waveforms................................................................................................................ 1.15
Communication........................................................................................................................................ 1.17
Other........................................................................................................................................................ 1.17
General Functions and Screens......................................................................................................................... 1.18
Main Windows and Programs................................................................................................................... 1.18
NeuroWorkbench Window........................................................................................................................ 1.19
System Program Window......................................................................................................................... 1.19
Acquisition and Review Windows............................................................................................................. 1.20
Disk Capacity...................................................................................................................................................... 1.21
Composition........................................................................................................................................................ 1.22
Panel Descriptions.............................................................................................................................................. 1.23
Component Example................................................................................................................................ 1.23
CC-120A PC Unit..................................................................................................................................... 1.24
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box.............................................................................................................. 1.25
SM-120AJ Isolation Unit........................................................................................................................... 1.27
SM-120AK Isolation Unit.......................................................................................................................... 1.27
LS-120A Photic Stimulator Control Unit (Option)..................................................................................... 1.28
LS-703A and LS-706A Flash Lamp Assemblies (Option)........................................................................ 1.29
QD-120A Analog Output Unit (Option)..................................................................................................... 1.29
QI-122A Input Box Converter (Option)..................................................................................................... 1.31
SD-120AJ Multiple Portable Socket Outlet (Option)................................................................................. 1.32
SD-120AK Multiple Portable Socket Outlet (Option)................................................................................ 1.32
Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 1.1

1. GENERAL
Introduction
* Essential performance The EEG-1200A/J/K Electroencephalograph records electroencephalogram and

related vital signals and displays the electroencephalogram and vital signals as
waveforms.*
This electroencephalograph is designed for both clinical and research use.

This electroencephalograph (referred to as “the instrument” in this Operator’s
Manual) realizes the conventional EEG’s functions in a GUI (graphical user
interface) environment.
Its compact and paperless design enables you to save a lot of space. The EEG
waveforms and patient information are saved in a large capacity media (hard
disk, CD-R or DVD-R disk). Its compact design also allows free movement of
the instrument and easier measurements.
For simplicity, the suffix A/G/J/K for the instrument and its options are omitted
in this manual. There is no difference in operation among models with different
suffixes unless otherwise specified.
NOTE
• Use only Nihon Kohden recommended parts and accessories to assure
maximum performance from the instrument.
• This instrument is not a bedside monitor. For patient monitoring, use a
bedside monitor.
• For brain death diagnosis, follow the local guidelines and use specified
instruments.
1.2 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

1. GENERAL
1
General Safety Information
General
WARNING WARNING
Never use the instrument in the presence of any Never use the instrument in a hyperbaric oxygen
flammable anesthetic gas or high concentration chamber. Failure to follow this warning may cause
oxygen atmosphere. Failure to follow this warning explosion or fire.
may cause explosion or fire.
WARNING WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based only on data • When using with an MRI, use the disk
acquired by the electroencephalograph. Overall electrodes for MRI and refer to the
judgement must be performed by a physician accompanying document of the disk electrodes
who understands the features, limitations and for attachment and connection. Otherwise, local
characteristics of the electroencephalograph and heating caused by induced electromotive force
by reading the biomedical signals acquired by may cause skin burn to the patient.
other instruments. • When using with an MRI, also refer to the MRI
manual and follow the instructions
WARNING WARNING
Do not install the EEG-1200 System Program Do not place this instrument in an MRI
into a personal computer which is not specified examination room. The instrument might not
by Nihon Kohden. function properly due to high-frequency magnetic
• If the personal computer does not satisfy noise from the MRI.
the performance specifications and safety
standards which are required by Nihon Kohden,
WARNING
the patient and operator may receive electrical
When performing MRI test, remove all electrodes
shock.
and transducers from the patient which are
• Nihon Kohden has no responsibility if hardware
connected to this instrument. Failure to follow this
or software becomes defective after installation.
warning may cause skin burn on the patient. For
details, refer to the MRI manual.
CAUTION
Only install the specified software in the system.
Unspecified software may cause the system to
malfunction. Nihon Kohden has no responsibility
for any problem caused by unspecified software.

1. GENERAL
Using with an electrical surgical unit (ESU)
WARNING WARNING
While using an ESU, needle electrodes, silver When using an ESU, do the following. Otherwise,
ball electrodes and intracranial electrodes must current from the ESU flows into the electrodes
not be used for monitoring unless no other and causes skin burn.
alternatives are available. If needle electrodes, • Ensure that there is enough distance between
silver ball electrodes and intracranial electrodes the electrodes and the ESU tip or return plate.
are used, whenever possible, disconnect the • Ensure that no electrodes are attached near
electrode leads from the electrode junction box the high frequency current path between the
or disconnect the cable of the electrode junction ESU tip and return plate. If the electrodes are
box from the mini electrode junction box while too close to the high frequency current path
using the ESU. Otherwise, current from the ESU between the ESU tip and the return plate,
might cause skin burn where the electrodes are - Disconnect the electrode leads from the
attached. electrode junction box.
- Disconnect the cable of electrode junction
box from the mini electrode junction box.
WARNING
• During long term monitoring, periodically check
When the electroencephalograph is used with an
that the electrodes are attached properly.
electrosurgical unit (ESU), firmly attach the entire
area of the ESU return plate. Otherwise, the
current from the ESU flows into the electrodes
of the electroencephalograph, causing electrical
burn where the electrodes are attached. For
details, refer to the ESU manual.
When performing defibrillation
WARNING WARNING
Before defibrillation, remove all electrodes and Before defibrillation, remove everything including
transducers from the patient. If you cannot electrodes and patches from the patient’s chest. If
remove electrodes from the patient, disconnect the defibrillator paddle contacts an object on the
the electrode leads from the electrode junction patient’s chest, the discharged energy may be
box or disconnect the mini flat junction box cable insufficient and cause skin burn.
from the electrode junction box. Otherwise, the
operator may receive electrical shock.
WARNING
Before defibrillation, all persons must keep clear
of the bed and must not touch the patient or any
equipment connected to the patient. Failure to
follow this warning may cause electrical shock or
injury.

1. GENERAL
Installation 1
WARNING WARNING
Only use the provided power cord and connect it When several medical instruments are used
to a 3-pin AC outlet which is properly grounded. together, ground all instruments to the same one-
Otherwise, it may result in electrical shock or point ground. Any potential difference between
injury to the patient and operator. instruments may cause electrical shock to the
patient and operator.
WARNING WARNING
Connect only the specified instrument to the Always connect the flash lamp assembly cable
electroencephalograph and follow the specified to the PHOTIC LAMP connector on the photic
procedure. Failure to follow this warning may stimulator control unit. When you do not use the
result in electrical shock or injury to the patient flash lamp assembly or it is disconnected from
and operator, and cause fire or instrument the photic stimulator control unit, attach the
malfunction. PHOTIC LAMP connector cap to the PHOTIC
LAMP connector. When the instrument power is
on, about 560 V is present at the PHOTIC LAMP
connector on the photic stimulator control unit.
Touching the PHOTIC LAMP connector causes
electrical shock.
WARNING
Install the external instruments other than
specified instruments outside the patient
environment. If they are installed inside the
patient environment, the patient or operator may
receive electrical shock or injury.
CAUTION CAUTION
Before connecting or disconnecting instruments, Do not connect unspecified USB devices such
make sure that each instrument is turned off as USB memory to this instrument because the
and the power cord is disconnected from the AC device may have a computer virus.
socket. Otherwise, the patient or operator may
CAUTION CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Do not sit or lean on the cart. It may tip over.
PC unit, isolation unit and cart.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use the optional LS-120AK photic stimulator Do not move the KD-029A or KE-122A cart when
control unit (maximum light level of 1.28 J) for the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph is mounted
EEG-1200 electroencephalograph. If you use on it. After installation, lock the cart casters.
other instruments, intended examination might
not be performed.

1. GENERAL
External instruments
WARNING WARNING
Do not use an additional multiple portable socket To use non-medical equipment that requires
outlet or extension cord. The impedance of the an isolation transformer, only connect it to a
protective earth increases and the patient and specified SD-120AJ or SD-120AK multiple
operator may receive electrical shock or injury. portable socket outlet. Do not connect the non-
medical equipment to a wall AC socket or to a
multiple portable socket that does not have an
WARNING
isolation transformer. Do not connect unspecified
Do not put the multiple portable socket outlet on
electrical instruments to a multiple portable
a floor. If the multiple portable socket outlet gets
socket outlet in the system. Failure to follow this
dusty, damaged or contacts liquid, it may cause
warning may cause leakage current to increase
instrument malfunction and electrical shock to the
and the patient and operator may receive
patient and operator.
electrical shock or injury.
Connecting to a local area network
WARNING WARNING
Connect the electroencephalograph to the Do not use a damaged network cable. The patient
network as specified. Otherwise the patient and or operator may receive electrical shock when the
operator may receive electrical shock or injury. To damaged part is touched.
connect the network, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Electrodes and electrode junction box
WARNING WARNING
Before connecting or disconnecting the DC When a mini junction box is not used, make sure
input cable to the DC input connector on the that the cover is firmly attached to the multiple
electrode junction box, make sure that the power connector on the electrode junction box. If the
of the external instrument is turned off and DC multiple connector is touched by conductive
signal is not output from the external instrument. material, the patient or operator may receive
Otherwise, the patient or operator may receive electrical shock.
WARNING WARNING
Do not leave the electrodes which are not During acquisition, do not touch a connector
attached to the patient connected to the electrode which is not connected to an electrode. Failure to
junction box. If the electrode touches metal or follow this warning may result in electrical shock
a conductive object, the patient may receive or injury to the patient and operator if the other
electrical shock. instrument connected to the patient malfunctions.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use the sub-dermal straight needle Never check the skin-electrode impedance with
electrode for more than one hour as a the needle electrode or intracranial electrode
measurement electrode for the EEG or evoked inserted in the patient. Failure to follow this
potential measurement. When measuring the caution causes electrical burn where electrodes
EEG or evoked potential for over one hour, use are inserted.
the EEG disk electrode.
CAUTION
When using a mini electrode junction box
or headcap EEG electrode kit with the
electroencephalograph, do not connect electrode
leads to the electrode junction box. This may
cause problems such as distorted waveforms.
Others
CAUTION CAUTION
When using the instrument for brain death • When archiving data, make multiple copies and
diagnosis, before examination, check and adjust manage the archived data properly.
the date and time of the system. The date and • After copying data to a CD-R, DVD-R or DVD-
time on the screen and recording result are part RAM disk, check that the data was copied
of important information for the medical record. correctly by opening the files.

1. GENERAL
Operation
Photic Stimulation and Activation Test
WARNING
Do not perform hyperventilation activation
when the patient has serious heart disease,
acute cerebrovascular disease or respiratory
insufficiency.
CAUTION CAUTION
All activation testing must be applied under the Do not use the flash lamp assembly continuously
supervision of a physician. over 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of continuous
use, the flash lamp assembly gets very hot and
causes burn if touched.
CAUTION CAUTION
If photo-paroxymal response appears during During photic stimulation and for 30 minutes after
photic stimulation, immediately stop the the photic stimulation, do not touch the glass of
stimulation to prevent evoking seizure in the the flash lamp assembly. The glass gets very hot
patient. and causes burn if touched.
After photic stimulation, it tales up to 30 minutes until the

glass of the flash lamp assembly gets cold. The time differs
depending on the condition of the stimulation duration and
frequency.
SpO2 Measurement
WARNING WARNING
SpO2 measurement may be incorrect in the Check the circulation condition by observing the
following cases. skin color at the measurement site and pulse
• When the patient’s carboxyhemoglobin or waveform. Change the measurement site every
methemoglobin increases abnormally. 8 hours for disposable probes and every 4 hours
• When dye is injected in the blood. for reusable probes. The skin temperature may
• When using an electrosurgical unit. increase at the attached site by 2 or 3°C (4 or
• During CPR. 5°F) and cause a burn or pressure necrosis.
• When measuring at a site with venous pulse. When using the probe on the following patients,
• When there is body movement. take extreme care and change the measurement
• When the pulse wave is small (insufficient site more frequently according to symptoms and
peripheral circulation). degree.
• Patient with a fever
• Patient with peripheral circulation insufficiency
• Neonate or low birth weight infant with delicate
skin

1. GENERAL
1
WARNING WARNING
• When using the TL-201T finger probe, do When not monitoring SpO2, disconnect the SpO2
not fasten the probe and cable to the finger adapter cable from the electrode junction box.
by wrapping with tape. This may cause burn, Otherwise, noise from the probe sensor may
congestion or pressure necrosis from poor interfere and incorrect data is displayed on the
blood circulation. screen.
• When using probes other than the TL-201T
finger probe, to avoid poor circulation, do
not wrap the tape too tight. Check the blood
circulation condition by observing the skin
color and congestion at the skin peripheral to
the probe attachment site. Even for short-term
monitoring, there may be burn or pressure
necrosis from poor blood circulation, especially
on neonates or low birth weight infants whose
skin is delicate. Accurate measurement cannot
be performed on a site with poor peripheral
circulation.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use Nihon Kohden specified options and While a patient is on medication which causes
consumables such as electrodes, sensors, vasodilation, the pulse waveform may change
probes and transducers. Otherwise, the maximum and in rare cases the SpO2 value might not be
performance from the electroencephalograph displayed.
cannot be guaranteed.
CAUTION
CAUTION Turn off the power of mobile phones, small
When the probe is attached on an appropriate wireless devices and other devices which
site with sufficient circulation and an error produce strong electromagnetic interference
message about probe attachment repeatedly around a patient (except for devices allowed by
appears, the probe may be deteriorated. Replace the hospital administrator). Radio waves from
it with a new one. devices such as mobile phones or small wireless
devices may be mistaken as pulse waves and the
displayed data may be incorrect.
CAUTION CAUTION
If the attachment site is dirty with blood or bodily Normal external light does not affect monitoring
fluids, clean the attachment site before attaching but strong light such as a surgical light or sunlight
the probe. If there is nail polish on the attachment may affect monitoring. If affected, cover the
site, remove the polish. Otherwise, the amount of measuring site with a blanket.
transmitted light decreases, and measured value
may be incorrect or measurement cannot be
performed.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION
When a message indicates a faulty probe or
faulty SpO2 adapter, stop monitoring and replace
the probe or SpO2 adapter with a new one.
CO2 Measurement
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use Nihon Kohden specified options and When the “CO2 sensor not working” or “CO2
consumables such as electrodes, sensors, adapter abnormality” message is displayed,
probes and transducers. Otherwise, the maximum check the CO2 sensor kit and replace it if
performance from the electroencephalograph necessary. CO2 cannot be monitored while the
cannot be guaranteed. message is displayed.
CAUTION CAUTION
The CO2 data may be inaccurate when The measured value may be incorrect when the
monitoring a patient with an extremely high operating temperature changes greatly.
respiration rate or irregular respiration. Read the
measured values carefully.
CAUTION WARNING
With the TG-921T3 CO2 sensor kit, When using the YG-101T airway adapter on a
measurements are based on the assumption patient with low ventilatory volume, check the
of no CO2 gas in the inspiration. The CO2 ventilation taking into consideration the 5 mL
concentration in the respiration is calculated by dead space of the airway adapter. The CO2 may
taking the CO2 concentration in the inspiration as mix in the inspiration due to the airway adapter’s
0 mmHg (0 hPa). Therefore, measuring CO2 gas dead space, resulting in inaccurate measured
may be present in the inspiration gas may result value or difficulty in detecting no breath.
in the acquired data being lower than the actual
value.
CAUTION
When using the YG-121T nasal adapter on a
patient, observe the patient condition all the time.
The mouth guide touches the mouth and may
cause pressure sores.

1. GENERAL
Maintenance 1
CAUTION CAUTION
Before maintenance, cleaning or disinfection, turn Dispose of Nihon Kohden products according
the electroencephalograph power off, disconnect to your local laws and your facility’s guidelines
the power cord from the AC socket and then for waste disposal. Otherwise, it may affect
remove the electrodes, sensors and probes the environment. If there is a possibility that
connected to the electroencephalograph from the the product may have been contaminated
patient. Failure to follow this instruction may result with infection, dispose of it as medical waste
in electrical shock and electroencephalograph according to your local laws and your facility’s
malfunction. guidelines for medical waste. Otherwise, it may
cause infection.
CD/DVD Disk Handling and Storing

NOTE
• The EEG-1200 system program of the electroencephalograph is
protected by copyright law and international treaties. Unauthorized
reproduction or distribution of this software, or any portion of it, may
result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to
the maximum extent possible under law.
• Keep the disk away from strong magnetic objects such as a magnet, TV
set or speaker. Otherwise, data in the disk may be lost.
• During measurement, do not insert or remove a CD or DVD disk
into or from the DVD drive. Otherwise, the Acquisition program may
malfunction.
• Do not touch the disk surface of the recorded side (CD or DVD disk:
opposite side of the label side). If the surface of the disk becomes
contaminated with any foreign substances such as fingerprints, reading
data may be impossible.
• Keep the disk away from direct sunlight and high temperature.
Otherwise, the disk may become deformed.
• Do not handle the disk while smoking or eating.
• Do not get the disk wet.
• Do not put a label on top of another label. Remove the old label before
applying a new label.
• Do not write on the label after the label is attached on the disk.
Otherwise, the disk may be damaged and reading may be impossible.
• Do not bend the disk, put heavy material on the disk, or give a strong
impact to the disk.
• Clean the disk with a disk cleaner. Do not use organic solvents such as
acetone.
• The system program CD is not an audio CD and cannot be played with
an audio CD player.
• When using the EEG application program, close all other programs.
Otherwise, the system program might not function properly.
• Turn off any screen saver before opening the EEG application program.

1. GENERAL
System
NOTE
Do not delete any system file in the hard disk. Otherwise the instrument
may malfunction.

1. GENERAL
1
Features
Acquiring the EEG Waveforms

1. 10-20 Type JE-921A Electrode Junction Box
25 electrode jacks in the electrode position layout, 14 bipolar jacks (7 pairs)
for extra signal measurement and respiration signal measurement, SpO2
connector, CO2 connector and 4 DC input connectors with a remote mark
connector.

Multi-Channel Electrode Junction Box (Option)
64, 128, 192 or 256 channel electrode junction boxes are available. Sampling
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box rate is 10 kHz (maximum). High performance amplifier; input impedance
200 MΩ, rejection ratio 110 dB or more, input noise 1.5 μVp-p at most.
QI-122A Input Box Converter (Option)

You can connect the JE-921A electrode junction box to the EEG-1200
electroencephalograph using LAN cable. Up to 50 m cable can be used.
QI-123A Input Box Converter (Option)

You can connect the JE-120A or JE-921A* electrode junction box to the
EEG-1200 electroencephalograph using LAN cable.
* To connect the JE-921A to the QI-123A, the revision of the QI-123A must
be BA or later and the Acquisition Program version on the EEG-1200 must
be 05-10 or later.
Digital Data Processing

Digital data processing improves the accuracy of the data.
2. Auto Recording
You can set several measurements as one routine in advance and
automatically record EEG waveforms. This function saves preparation time.
3. One-touch Selection of Measurement Settings

You can assign different measurement settings to 36 different patterns.
A pattern includes the preset montage, amplifier settings and waveform
display settings. Waveform display settings are position, display on/off,
color, amplitude limit and comment for waveform. Selecting different
patterns lets you quickly and easily set up the desired measurement settings.
4. Easy Skin-Electrode Contact Impedance Check

You can check all electrodes for skin-electrode contact impedance by
pressing the IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the electrode junction box or
clicking the Impedance check button on the screen. The impedance check
results are indicated on the electrode position layout on the electrode
junction box and screen.

1. GENERAL
5. Variety of Reference (Monopolar) Derivations

You can easily switch from same-side hemispheric earlobe derivation
(standard) to single-side hemispheric earlobe (A1 → A2, A1 ← A2, A1 ↔
A2, A1 + A2), vertex (VX), averaged (AV), balanced non-cephalic (BN),
source derivation (SD) or an original (Org) reference derivation. The original
reference (Org) switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged voltage of C3 and C4
(system reference potential).
6. 300 Channel EEG Waveform Display with Various Information

(Option)
Up to 300 channels of 10 second waveforms can be simultaneously
displayed on a high resolution (1600 × 1200) color display. Time marks,
marker channel, montage name, cursors and events can also be displayed
on the screen. Maximum 300 channel EEG waveform can be displayed and
settings such as display on/off, color, width can be set for each channel.
7. Waveform Annotation (Attaching Event Names)

While acquiring the EEG waveforms, you can annotate the EEG waveforms
with an event name from the preset event list or with the keyboard. Also
when you change the pattern, the pattern name is automatically entered. The
event names (annotations) are displayed beside the EEG waveforms and
saved with the waveforms as an event.
8. Waveform Amplitude and Time Interval Measurement

The amplitude, frequency and time interval of the EEG waveforms can
be measured by vertical and horizontal cursors and EEG scale when the
waveforms are frozen.
9. ECG Rejection Filter

This filter reduces ECG artifact superimposed on the EEG waveforms. This
filter is available during both waveform acquisition and review.
10. Versatile Photic Stimulator

There are three preset photic stimulation programs for adults and children for
routine and special use. Single, double and random pulse stimulation are also
available.
11. Hyperventilation (HV) Timer

A hyperventilation timer is available. When the HV timer is started,
annotations are automatically marked every 30 seconds (default) on the EEG
waveforms.
12. Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring and DSA function

The long term monitoring function enables you to display long term
trendgraph of frequency and amplitude by performing FFT analysis during
measurement and review. When the optional QI-120A Camera Capture Unit
and QP-110AK Digital Video Software or QV-101A Digital Video Unit
(with WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit) is installed, you can save the patient
image during long term EEG waveform monitoring. The optional QP-
251AK Spike Detector Software can be used in long term monitoring (online
spike detection).
1. GENERAL
13. Customizing a Window 1

There are several bars on each window. Each bar contains buttons for
changing settings. You can move the bar to any position on the screen by
dragging it, and turn the display setting on/off. When moving the mouse
cursor on a button, a pop-up hint shows its function.
14. EEG Scope – Comparison Mode

In the EEG Scope – Comparison mode, you can display the currently
acquired waveforms on the acquisition window and a previous part of the
same waveforms on the review window – EEG scope window. You can also
review the previous part of the waveforms by changing the pattern settings.
15. Heart Rate Calculation

The instrument calculates and displays heart rate during EEG measurement.
Heart rate can be displayed on the extended channel bar.
Reviewing the EEG Waveforms

1. File Management
The EEG data files with patient information and volume name of the disk are
automatically registered in the database. To review EEG data, you can search
for a data file by several methods: patient name, ID number, examination
date, or any combination of search items and in a specified range.
2. Displaying Specific Waveforms

You can display any part of a waveform by a variety of methods. For
example, you can display the EEG waveforms as they were during the
measurements (TRACE mode). If you specify an event name, a waveform
which contains the specified event name is displayed on the screen. You
can also display any part of the waveform by using the event jump bar and
DSA trendgraph, etc. From the Event Viewer window, you can display the
waveforms by selecting the event. In the Event Viewer, you can select events
and sequentially display the waveforms for the selected events (Slide show
function).
3. Re-format and Re-filtering

You can review waveforms and data using different montage settings,
amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter, time constant), and display
speeds. (The raw data originally sampled is saved in the reference format.)
4. Variety of Review Modes

• Review the waveforms at the acquisition display speed.
• Review the waveforms forward or backward at high speed.
• Scroll the displayed waveforms forward or backward one second.
• Scroll the displayed waveforms forward or backward one page.
• Move the specified waveform to the center.
5. Event Name (Annotation) Editing

While reviewing waveforms, you can add, delete, and change event names.

1. GENERAL
6. Complete, High-Quality Documentation with a Printer

You can print the currently displayed waveforms or any part of the EEG
waveforms with event log, patient information, impedance and pattern on a
locally purchased printer.
7. EEG Data File Compatibility

EEG data files saved in EEG-1100, EEG-1200, EEG-2110, EEG-9100,
EEG-9200 digital EEG, or digital EEG system (PC with the QP-111A,
QP-223A Acquisition Program Kit) can be reviewed in this digital EEG.
8. DSA Trendgraph
The instrument analyzes the EEG waveform data to examine the frequency
components and displays amplitude for each frequency as a DSA (Density
Spectral Array) trendgraph on the review window and EEG Scope –
Comparison mode. The DSA trendgraph lets you easily find the EEG
waveforms when epileptic seizure occurs or a specific frequency band of the
EEG waveform, such as alpha wave, delta wave or spindles in sleep study.
9. Voltage Map/CSD Map

Voltage maps in six different view points or CSD (current source density)
maps can be displayed on the 3D Mapping window. Maps are displayed
based on electrode potential.
10. Wide-band EEG Analysis

You can analyze low frequency and high frequency activity simultaneously
and view the results. Wide-band EEG analysis allows you to see if there is
low frequency baseline shift or low amplitude high frequency waveforms
which are difficult to observe with typical filters.
11. Waveform Comparison

You can copy any part of waveforms into the note waveform window and
compare them to the current waveforms.
12. EEG Scope – Remote Mode

You can simultaneously review the waveforms while they are being acquired
from 4 different EEG acquisition instruments connected to a network. You
can also display the value of the inputs from external instruments.
13. Digital Video Player

The digital video player displays the patient video images recorded with
the EEG waveforms. When the patient image is recorded by another
electroencephalograph connected to a network, the patient image can be
displayed with the EEG waveforms by using the EEG Scope – Remote
mode.
14. Heart Rate and DC Input Trendgraphs

The value of heart rate can be displayed on the extended channel bar. Up
to eight trendgraphs of heart rate and/or DC input data (such as SpO2 or
ETCO2) can be displayed on the lower part of the review window.

1. GENERAL
Communication 1
Neuro PortaView
Neuro PortaView function creates a reference disk of EEG data files. EEG
data on a reference disk can be reviewed on any Windows PC. This is useful
for research or academic use.
Other
Combining EEG Data Files
You can append EEG data files for a patient. This function is useful if an
EEG data file for a patient is accidentally saved as separate different files
during recording. When patient images are recorded, patient image files can
be appended. For EEG data files that are measured with the long term EEG
monitoring function, you can continuously review these files by using a long
term monitoring information file. You do not have to combine these files.
Improved Safety
An isolation unit provides safe-cable connection. The amplifier and
converter are connected to an electrode junction box and not connected to
the PC unit directly.

Sample EEG Data Files
Sample EEG data files are provided in a CD with the system program.

Quick Start of Optional Software
Optional software can be added to the Option menu in the system program.

1. GENERAL
General Functions and Screens
Main Windows and Programs
NeuroWorkbench
EEG
Workbench Acquisition Program
Schedule mode
Examination mode
Review Program
Review mode
Patient List mode
Data Manager
Database mode
System Setup Program
File mode
When you turn on the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph, the NeuroWorkbench

main window opens. The NeuroWorkbench main window contains three tab
pages: EEG tab page, Workbench tab page and Data Manager tab page. You can
start examination or review from these tab pages.
You can change the system settings for acquisition and review using the system
program. For details on the System Setup program, refer to Section 5 “System
Program”.

1. GENERAL
NeuroWorkbench Window 1
EEG main window Workbench main window
Data Manager main window
For details on the EEG main window, refer to Section 4 “NeuroWorkbench”.

For details on the Workbench functions, refer to Section 8 “Workbench”.
For details on the Data Manager functions, refer to Section 9 “Data Manager”.
System Program Window

System Setup Program Functions
System setup program • Program patterns
• Program the automatic photic stimulation mode
• Edit the list of preset selectable items for patient information records
• Change the electrodes to be saved
• Change settings for auto recording
• Change settings for the electrode junction box and/or input box
converter (when the QI-122A or QI-123A is used)
• Change settings for the receiver (when the WEE-1000 is used)
• Change settings for the optional digital video software (QP-110AK)
• Change system settings
• Add the optional software to the option menu
• Save the system settings in a file
• Load previously saved system settings from a file
• Return all settings to the default settings

1. GENERAL
Acquisition and Review Windows

Acquisition program Acquisition Program Functions
• Enter patient information
• Check skin-electrode contact impedance
• Enter events
• Save the acquired EEG waveforms, patient information and
events in a file
• Set and perform the activation (photic stimulation and
hyperventilation)
• Using the timer
• Review previous parts of waveforms on the EEG Scope
window (EEG Scope – comparison mode)
• Display frequency maps
Acquisition Program and Review Program Common

Functions
• Change the calibration voltage
• Change the patterns
• Change the amplifier settings
• Change the montage
• Change the waveform display mode
• Change the FFT analysis settings
• Measure waveform amplitude and time interval
• Use the ECG filter
• Select and delete electrodes for AV derivation
• Display heart rate
Review program Review Program Functions

• Save the acquired EEG waveforms, patient information and
events in a file
• Select the review mode
• Change the waveform display mode
• Edit events
• Display the DSA trendgraph
• Display the voltage or CSD maps
• Adjust BN balance for BN derivation
• Display heart rate and DC input trendgraphs

1. GENERAL
1
Disk Capacity
The following table shows how long an EEG waveform data can be saved in a
hard disk or CD-R disk. The file space to save an EEG data file depends on the
sampling frequency and the number of electrodes. If either decreases, the file
capacity increases. If the file includes video data, the file capacity decreases. To
change the sampling frequency and the number of electrodes, refer to Section
5 “System Program”. The following table assumes 30 minutes per patient
recording for a file.
Disk capacity (bytes)

Recording time (hours) =
No. of saved electrodes and mark channels × Sampling frequency × 2 bytes × 60 s × 60 min
25 electrodes and 2 mark channels for 30 minutes recording

Sampling frequency
1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz
50 GB 257 hours 514 hours 1285 hours
hard disk space (514 files) (1028 files) (2570 files)
650 MB 3.3 hours 6.6 hours 16.5 hours
CD-R (6.6 files) (13.2 files) (33 files)

Sampling frequency
1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz
CD-R (5 files) (9.8 files) (24.6 files)

Sampling frequency
1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz
192 electrodes and no mark channels for 30 minutes recording
Sampling frequency
1,000 Hz 500 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz
50 GB 35 hours 70 hours 180 hours 360 hours
hard disk space (70 files) (140 files) (360 files) (720 files)

1. GENERAL
Composition
WARNING
Do not install the EEG-1200 System Program into a personal
computer other than the CC-120A PC unit.
• If the personal computer does not satisfy the performance
specifications and safety standards which are required by Nihon
Kohden, the patient and operator may receive electrical shock.
• Nihon Kohden has no responsibility if hardware or software
becomes defective after installation.
CAUTION
Only install the specified software in the system. Unspecified
software may cause the system to malfunction. Nihon Kohden has
no responsibility for any problem caused by unspecified software.
• PC unit CC-120A
• Isolation unit SM-120A
• Electrode junction box JE-921A
• LCD display (Local purchase)
Option
• Photic stimulator control unit LS-120A
• Flash lamp assembly LS-703A
• Analog output unit QD-120A
• Input box converter QI-122A
• Input box converter QI-123A
For details on the QI-122A input box converter, refer to the QI-122A operator’s
manual.
For details on the QI-123A input box converter, refer to the operator’s manual for
the JE-120A electrode junction box and the QI-123A input box converter.
Regarding other options, refer to Section 12 “Reference”.

1. GENERAL
1
Panel Descriptions
Component Example
LCD display Flash lamp assembly

(locally purchased) (option) LS-703A
Electrode junction box Keyboard Mouse

JE-921A
PC unit
CC-120A
Cart (option)
KC-001A
Cart (option)
KC-001A
Analog output unit (option) Photic stimulator control unit (option)

QD-120A LS-120A
Cart (option) Isolation unit

KD-029A SM-120A

1. GENERAL
CC-120A PC Unit
CAUTION
Do not connect unspecified USB devices such as USB memory to
this instrument because the device may have a computer virus.
Front panel Rear panel
1 14 4
2 13
Refer to “Cable 5
Connection” in section 2. 3 12
6
11 7
10
8
Name Functions
1. PC power switch Turns the PC unit on.

2. Eject button Slides in or out the DVD tray to insert or remove the disk.
3. DVD drive For a CD and DVD.
4. Mouse connector Connects to the mouse.
5. RS-232C connector Connects to the optional LS-120A photic stimulator control unit.
6. USB connector Connects to the optional QD-120A analog output unit.
7. LAN connector Connects to the optional QI-122A or QI-123A input box converter.
8. Protective earth terminal Connects the earth lead of the JE-921A electrode junction box.
9. AC socket Connects to the first 3-prong AC outlet on the SM-120A isolation unit with the
AC power cord to supply AC power to the PC unit.
10. Protective earth terminal Connects to SM-120A isolation unit with the protective earth lead.
11. USB connector Connects to the JE-921A electrode junction box.
12. VGA connector Connects to the display.
13. Display port connector For dual display. Connects to the secondary display with a DVI adapter cable.
14. Keyboard connector Connects to the keyboard.

1. GENERAL
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box 1
WARNING
Connect only the specified instrument to the electroencephalograph
and follow the specified procedure. Failure to follow this warning may
result in electrical shock or injury to the patient and operator, and
cause fire or instrument malfunction.
Front panel
1 2 3
6 4
9 12
10
5 8
11
Name Function
1. Impedance display LED After the skin-electrode contact impedance check, a lit LED indicates an
electrode impedance higher than the preset value.
2. Z jack Reduces the artifact when the electrode for Z on the patient is connected
to the Z jack. Be sure to attach the Z electrode to the patient during
measurement.
3. Extra input jacks Inputs biological signals other than EEG. The X5 to X7 jacks for
respiration pickup (RESP F, RESP C, RESP A jacks) are not used.
4. Electrode jacks Connects the EEG disk electrode.
5. SpO2 adapter/CO2 sensor kit jack Connects the optional SpO2 adapter or the CO2 sensor kit. Both jacks are
available for both the SpO2 adapter and CO2 sensor kit.
6. IMPEDANCE CHECK key Measures skin-electrode contact impedance at the electrode junction
box. Press for about one second. The check result is displayed on the
screen and a lit LED on the electrode junction box indicates an electrode
impedance higher than the preset value.

1. GENERAL
Name Function
7. Impedance threshold selector Selects a preset impedance (threshold) for evaluation from 2, 5, 10, 20 or
50 kΩ. The LED indicates the selected impedance.
8. Multiple connector Connects the JE-922A mini electrode junction box or the EEG electrode
set. The connector cover can be removed with a flat blade screwdriver;
hook the pre-cut on the cover with the screwdriver.
NOTE
Do not touch the multiple connector. Before connecting, discharge
the static electricity by touching the grounded metallic parts.
Otherwise, the static electricity may cause malfunction.
9. USB connector Connects to the PC unit.
NOTE
Do not disconnect the connector during operations. Data in the PC
unit may be lost.
10. Earth lead Connects to the protective earth terminal of the PC unit.
11. PHOTO MARK connector Connects to the QD-120A analog output unit or LS-120A photic
stimulator control unit.
12. Cable hanger Hooks the electrode leads to prevent leads from tangling and keep them
off the floor.
Left panel
DC 3
DC 4
13 DC 5
DC 6
MARKER
14
Name Function
13. DC input connectors Input analog signals from external instruments. Wrap the DC input cable
around the GTFC-41-27-16 ferrite core (accessory, in the blue bag) at
least five times. Maximum input voltage: ±5 V, Input impedance: 1.5 MΩ
14. Remote mark connector Connects the marker cord (accessory).

1. GENERAL
SM-120AJ Isolation Unit 1
5
3
4
2
Name Function
1. Output (AC outlet) Connects the AC power cord of the PC unit and display. These outlets are
isolated. Maximum power supply: 600 VA.
2. Protective earth terminal Connects to the PC unit with the protective earth lead.
3. AC SOURCE socket Connects the power cord.
4. Equipotential ground terminal Connect this terminal to the equipotential ground terminal on the wall
with the ground lead when the equipotential grounding is required to
ensure electrical safety.
5. Breaker Turns off when the output current exceeds 10 A.
SM-120AK Isolation Unit
5
1
2
4
3
Name Function
1. Output (AC outlet) Connects the AC power cord of the PC unit and display. These outlets are
isolated. Maximum power supply: 600 VA.
2. Protective earth terminal Connects to the PC unit with the protective earth lead.
4. Equipotential ground terminal To ensure electrical safety, connect this terminal to the equipotential
ground terminal on the wall with the earth lead when equipotential
grounding is required.
5. Breaker Turns off when the output current exceeds 4.5 A.

1. GENERAL
LS-120A Photic Stimulator Control Unit (Option)

Front panel
1
Name Function
1. Trigger lamp Blinks in synchronization with the stimulation.

2. SINGLE button Performs single photic stimulation. Use for the photic stimulator control
unit operation check.
3. Power indicator Lights while the power is on.
4. POWER switch Turns the power on/off.
Rear panel
5 6 7 8
14 13 12 11 10 9
Name Function
5. MIC/SPEAKER connector Not used.

6. HV connector Not used.
7. PHOTO MARK connector Connects to the electrode junction box.
8. RS-232C connector Connects to the PC unit.
9. PHOTIC LAMP connector Connects to the flash lamp assembly.
10. TRIGGER in/out connector Inputs a trigger signal from an external instrument to activate the photic
stimulation and outputs a photic stimulation trigger signal to an external
instrument in phase with a flash lamp.
11. LINE in/out Not used.
with the earth lead when the equipotential ground is required to ensure
electrical safety.
14. Fuse holder Contains the power line protection fuses. To replace the fuse, pry loose
the holder with a flat blade screw driver and remove the fuse.
1. GENERAL
LS-703A and LS-706A Flash Lamp Assemblies (Option) 1

LS-703A LS-706A
Name Function
1. Flash lamp Flashes in synchronization with the stimulation.
QD-120A Analog Output Unit (Option)

Front Panel
Name Function
1. Power indicator Lights while the power is on.

2. Power switch Turns the power on/off.

1. GENERAL
Rear Panel
8 4
T630mAL / 250V
7 6 5
Name Function
3. EXT OUT connector Outputs analog signals.

4. PC connector Connects to the PC unit.
with the earth lead when the equipotential grounding is required to ensure
electrical safety.
6. PHOTO MARK connector (IN/OUT)
IN: Connects to the photic stimulator control unit.
OUT: Connects to the electrode junction box.
8. Fuse holder Contains the power line protection fuses. To replace the fuse, pry loose
the holder with a flat blade screw driver and remove the fuse.

1. GENERAL
QI-122A Input Box Converter (Option) 1

Side Panel
10
9
1
2
8
3
11
7
4
6
Name Function
1. Additional protective ground terminal Not used.
with the earth lead when the equipotential grounding is required to
3. AC source socket Connects the power cord.
4. Fuse holder Contains the power line protection fuses. To replace the fuse, pry
loose the holder with a flat blade screw driver and remove the fuse.
5. PC connector Connects to the PC unit.
6. JE-921A connectors JE1/JE2: Connects the JE-921A electrode junction box.

SYNC: Connects to the JE-921A electrode junction box with the
accessory cable.
7. REMOTE MARK connector Connects the mark cord (accessory).
8. LS connectors RS-232C: onnects to the photic stimulator control unit with

C
the accessory cable.
PHOTO MARK: Connects the photo mark cable from the photic
stimulator control unit with the accessory cable.
9. MULTI connector Not used.
10. DC INPUT Inputs analog signals from external instruments.
11. Protective ground terminal Connects the earth lead of the JE-921A electrode junction box.

1. GENERAL
SD-120AJ Multiple Portable Socket Outlet (Option)
1 4
Name Function
1. AC inlet Connects the power cord.
2. Protective earth terminal Connects the protective earth lead.
4. AC outlet Connects the AC power cord of the SM-120AJ isolation unit, LS-120A
photic stimulator control unit and QD-120A analog output unit.
Output: AC 110 V to 120 V, Maximum power supply: 1 kVA
SD-120AK Multiple Portable Socket Outlet (Option)
4
1
Name Function
1. AC inlet Connects the power cord.
2. Protective earth terminal Connects the protective earth lead.
4. AC outlet Connects the AC power cord of the SM-120A isolation unit, LS-120A
photic stimulator control unit and QD-120A analog output unit.
Output: AC 220 V to 240 V, Maximum power supply: 1 kVA

Section 2 Installation
2
Instrument Location.............................................................................................................................................. 2.2

Cable Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2.4
Connection Diagram (Example)................................................................................................................. 2.5
Connecting the AC Power Cord and Equipotential Grounding............................................................................. 2.7
Connecting the AC Power Cord.................................................................................................................. 2.7
Equipotential Grounding............................................................................................................................. 2.8
Cutting Off the Power Supply to the Instrument......................................................................................... 2.8
Connecting External Instruments......................................................................................................................... 2.9
Connecting the LS-703A or LS-706A Flash Lamp Assembly..................................................................... 2.9
Attaching a Ferrite Core to the Cable of the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box.......................................... 2.9
Mounting the CC-120A PC Unit on the Optional Cart................................................................................ 2.9
Connecting to a Local Area Network.................................................................................................................. 2.12
Connecting or Disconnecting from the Network....................................................................................... 2.12
Backing Up and Restoring the Settings in the System Program.............................................................. 2.13
Setting the Computer Name..................................................................................................................... 2.14
Windows Network Settings....................................................................................................................... 2.16
Setting the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)........................................................................................... 2.16
Checking the Network Connection................................................................................................. 2.18
Sharing Drives for Data Storage.............................................................................................................. 2.19
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems................................................................... 2.21
EEG-1200A.............................................................................................................................................. 2.21
EEG-1200J/K........................................................................................................................................... 2.23
Example of PATIENT ENVIRONMENT.................................................................................................... 2.25

2. INSTALLATION
Instrument Location
The instrument measures very small electrical potential changes (5 to 200 µV).
Ideally the instrument should be installed in a shielded room which provides
constant environmental conditions. Select the examination locations as follows
and also refer to “GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS”.
WARNING WARNING
Never use the instrument in the presence of any Never use the instrument in a hyperbaric oxygen
flammable anesthetic gas or high concentration chamber. Failure to follow this warning may cause
oxygen atmosphere. Failure to follow this warning explosion or fire.
may cause explosion or fire.
WARNING WARNING
Do not place this instrument in an MRI Connect only the specified instrument to the
examination room. The instrument might not electroencephalograph and follow the specified
function properly due to high-frequency magnetic procedure. Failure to follow this warning may
noise from the MRI. result in electrical shock or injury to the patient
and operator, and cause fire or instrument
malfunction.
WARNING WARNING
Connect the electroencephalograph to the Before connecting or disconnecting the DC
network as specified. Otherwise the patient and input cable to the DC input connector on the
operator may receive electrical shock or injury. To electrode junction box, make sure that the power
connect the network, contact your Nihon Kohden of the external instrument is turned off and DC
representative. signal is not output from the external instrument.
Otherwise, the patient or operator may receive
WARNING
Install the external instruments other than
specified instruments outside the patient
environment. If they are installed inside the
patient environment, the patient or operator may
NOTE
• Do not install the instrument near equipment with a high power
consumption, such as large X-ray equipment.
• Do not install the instrument near an electrosurgical unit or RF
therapeutic equipment.
• Install the instrument in a room with no excessive noise, vibration,
sunlight, high humidity or water splashes.
• Make sure that the electrode junction box is not over the patient.
Because the electrode junction box might fall off and cause injury.

2. INSTALLATION
For external instrument connection and local area network connection, refer
to “General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems” in this
section. 2
NOTE
• Install the instrument where the screen can be seen clearly and does
not reflect light.
• Do not place blankets or cloth over the instrument.
• Do not install the instrument in dusty area.
• Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which can supply enough AC
current to the instrument. The instrument cannot function properly with
low current.
• When using the instrument in a high-frequency electric field, the
displayed waveform trace may be thicker.
Arrange the instrument and other equipment so that the radiation noise caused by
other equipment with a CRT display is reduced as much as possible.
Measuring EEG Waveforms in an ICU or Operating Room

To measure the EEG waveforms, when the patient is connected to transducers
or sensors from other medical equipment, a floating type electroencephalograph
is required and shielded type EEG disk electrodes are recommended to reduce
artifact.
Confirm the following when measuring EEG waveforms in an ICU or OR:

• The EEG electrode is a shielded type.
• Connect the electrode attached to the nasion (Z electrode) to the Z jack on
electrode junction box.
• Ground the instrument to an equipotential ground.
NOTE
When measuring very small electrical potentials, place the instrument
more than 50 cm from the patient and electrode junction box so that the
radiation noise caused by the instrument is reduced as much as possible.

2. INSTALLATION
Cable Connection
Connecting to a local area network
WARNING WARNING
Connect only the specified instrument to the Before connecting or disconnecting the DC
electroencephalograph and follow the specified input cable to the DC input connector on the
procedure. Failure to follow this warning may electrode junction box, make sure that the power
result in electrical shock or injury to the patient of the external instrument is turned off and DC
and operator, and cause fire or instrument signal is not output from the external instrument.
malfunction. Otherwise, the patient or operator may receive
WARNING WARNING
Connect the electroencephalograph to the Do not use a damaged network cable. The patient
network as specified. Otherwise the patient and or operator may receive electrical shock when the
operator may receive electrical shock or injury. To damaged part is touched.
connect the network, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
CAUTION CAUTION
Before connecting or disconnecting instruments, Do not connect unspecified USB devices such
make sure that each instrument is turned off as USB memory to this instrument because the
and the power cord is disconnected from the AC device may have a computer virus.
socket. Otherwise, the patient or operator may
NOTE
• Only supply AC power to the CC-120A PC unit, display and specified
instruments from the SM-120A isolation unit. Otherwise, the instrument
may malfunction.
• Bind the cable with the cable tie or cable clamp so that the cable is
not accidentally pulled or caught. Otherwise, the connector may be
damaged or the components on the cart may fall off and cause injury.
• The connector positions and symbols of the PC unit differ according to model.
Refer to the operator’s manual of the PC unit.
• When connecting an external equipment to the system, refer to the operator’s
manual of each external equipment.
• For external instrument connection and local area network connection, refer
section.
After connecting the cables, check the cable connection and each instrument
operation. Refer to “Power On Procedure” in Section 3 of this operator’s manual
and the operator’s manual for each instrument.

2. INSTALLATION
Connection Diagram (Example)

The shape of the connection cable, connector, AC power cord plug holder
and AC power cord socket holder differ according to the country where the 2
instrument is used.
Mouse Display
Keyboard
Wrap cable around
GRFC-8 ferrite core
(accessory of PC unit)
one time.
Electrode junction box

Wrap cable around GRFC-8
ferrite core (accessory of PC
unit) two times.
PC unit
Wrap cable around
RFC-H13 ferrite core
one time.
Wrap cable around

E04SR301334 ferrite
core one time.
Wrap cable around

MRFC-13 ferrite core
(accessory of analog
output unit) two *2
times.
Isolation unit*1
Photic stimulator
control unit
Analog
output unit
To the flash lamp

assembly

ferrite core (accessory, in pink
bag) one time.
To the outlet
Multiple portable
socket outlet*3
*1 The shape of the isolation unit differs according to the country where the instrument is used.
*2 When the photic stimulator control unit is not connected, this cable is not used.
When the analog output unit is not used, connect this cable to the electrode junction box.
*3 The illustration is the SD-120AJ for the optional KD-029A cart. When you mount the instrument on the KE-122A cart,
the SD-903A is used. The shape of the plug differs according to the country where you use the instrument.

2. INSTALLATION
When Connecting Two Displays:

The shape of the connection cable, connector, AC power cord plug holder
and AC power cord socket holder differ according to the country where the
instrument is used.
Keyboard Mouse Secondary display Primary display
Wrap cable around

GRFC-8 ferrite core
(accessory of PC unit)
one time.
ferrite core (accessory of
PC unit) two times.
Wrap cable
around
Electrode E04SR170730A
junction box ferrite core
(accessory of PC
unit) one time.
Wrap cable around

PC unit
RFC-H13 ferrite core
(accessory, in blue
bag) one time.
Wrap cable around

E04SR301334 ferrite
core one time.
Wrap cable around

MRFC-13 ferrite core
(accessory of analog *2
output unit) two
times.
Isolation unit*1
Photic stimulator
control unit
Analog output
unit
To the flash
lamp assembly

ferrite core (accessory, in pink
bag) one time.
To the outlet
Multiple portable
socket outlet*3
*1 The shape of the isolation unit differs according to the country where the instrument is used.
*2 When the photic stimulator control unit is not connected, this cable is not used.
When the analog output unit is not used, connect this cable to the electrode junction box.
*3 The illustration is the SD-120AJ for the optional KD-029A cart. When you mount the instrument on the KE-122A cart,
the SD-903A is used. The shape of the plug differs according to the country where you use the instrument.

2. INSTALLATION
Connecting the AC Power Cord and Equipotential Grounding

2
Connecting the AC Power Cord
WARNING
Only use the provided power cord and connect it to a 3-pin AC outlet
which is properly grounded. Otherwise, it may result in electrical
shock or injury to the patient and operator.
Connect the provided 3-prong power cord to the AC SOURCE socket on the
isolation unit. Plug the cord into an AC outlet.
When a 3-prong power cord is used, the instrument is automatically grounded.
Secure the AC power cord to the unit with the AC power cord holder.
Power line security

If a large power-consuming instrument is used on the same power line, the large
power-consuming instrument may be adversely affected. A single line should be
secured for the system.
The power cord is only 2 m long; use an AC outlet close to the system.

2. INSTALLATION
Equipotential Grounding
WARNING
When several medical instruments are used together, ground all
instruments to the same one-point ground. Any potential difference
between instruments may cause electrical shock to the patient and
operator.
If this instrument is used where equipotential grounding is required, connect the

equipotential ground terminal ( mark) on the rear panel to the equipotential
terminal on the wall with the ground lead.
Use a thick braided wire to securely connect the ground leads to the equipotential
terminal. If multiple ground leads are directly connected to the equipotential
terminal, the ground lead may be disconnected from the terminal.
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical
potential difference between the instruments. The potential difference between
the instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the
instruments, resulting in electrical shock.
Always perform equipotential grounding when required. It is often required in

the operating room, ICU room, CCU room, cardiac catheterization room and
cardiovascular X-ray room. Consult with a biomedical engineer to determine if it
is required.
Cutting Off the Power Supply to the Instrument

To cut off the power supply to the instrument, disconnect the power cord of the
instrument from the wall AC outlet. When installing the instrument, position
the instrument so that it is easy to disconnect the power cord from the wall AC
outlet.

2. INSTALLATION
Connecting External Instruments

2
Connecting the LS-703A or LS-706A Flash Lamp Assembly

1. Connecting flash lamp assembly cable to the PHOTIC LAMP connector
on the rear of the LS-120A photic stimulator control unit and turn the ring
clockwise.
2. Secure the ring with two allen screws.
Attaching a Ferrite Core to the Cable of the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box
Attach a ferrite core to the far end of the JE-921A electrode junction box cable,
near the branch. Wrap the cable around the ferrite core as shown.
Electrode junction
box cable
Ferrite core
(E04SR301334)
Mounting the CC-120A PC Unit on the Optional Cart

When using the optional KD-029A or KE-122A cart, mount the CC-120A PC
unit on the cart with the PC holders provided with the CC-120A PC unit. When
mounting the PC unit on the cart, also refer to the installation guide for the cart.
The following illustrations show the example of the KD-029A cart.
1. When using the KD-029A cart, remove the four screws and washers from the
corners of the upper shelf plate of the cart.
When using the KE-122A cart, remove the four screws and washers from the
shelf of the cart.
2. Attach the four adhesive tapes (accessory of the PC unit) to the PC unit as
shown in the illustration.
Adhesive tape
Right side of the PC unit

2. INSTALLATION
NOTE
Before attaching the adhesive tape, wipe the attachment place with
alcohol.
3. Attach one of the PC holders (accessory of the PC unit) to the upper plate or
shelf of the cart with two of the screws removed in step 1.
Rear
Front
Push the PC holder to
the edge so that the PC holder
screw is on an inner
side of the hole.
NOTE
When attaching the PC holder to the cart, push the PC holder to the
edge of the upper plate or shelf of the cart, then tighten the screw.
4. Place the PC unit on the upper plate of the cart or shelf top aligning the PC
unit corner with the PC holder.
Left side of the PC unit
5. Push the PC unit onto the upper plate or shelf of the cart.

2. INSTALLATION
6. Attach the remaining PC holder with two screws removed in step 1.
PC holder
2
7. Connect the earth lead (accessory of the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph)

to the PC unit with a screw.
Attach the lead tip

with the smaller
terminal.
Attach the lead in the

direction shown in the
illustration.
8. Connect the power cord of the PC unit to the SM-120A isolation unit.

2. INSTALLATION
Connecting to a Local Area Network
The acquisition program uses drive D (hard disk) as the data storage drive. To
review the EEG data file saved in a drive through a network, drive D in this
instrument needs to be shared as a virtual drive in another EEG instrument. The
EEG waveform which is being saved can be reviewed through the network.
WARNING
Connect the electroencephalograph to the network as specified.
Otherwise the patient and operator may receive electrical shock
or injury. To connect the network, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
For external instrument connection and local area network connection, refer
section.
Connecting or Disconnecting from the Network

When connecting or disconnecting the instrument from the network, make sure
to connect or disconnect the cable from the connector on the PC.
Make sure to use the HIT-100 hyper isolation transformer.
WARNING
Do not use a damaged network cable. The patient or operator may
receive electrical shock when the damaged part is touched.
NOTE
• To disconnect cables connected to the hyper isolation transformer, use
the specified tool.
• Discharge static electricity before touching a network connector. The
connector is easily affected. When not using the network connector,
make sure to put a connector cover on the connector.
• Put the hyper isolation transformer where the instrument cannot get wet
or accidentally stepped on.

2. INSTALLATION
Backing Up and Restoring the Settings in the System Program

The settings in the System program are saved in the registry. The Acquisition
program and Review program use these settings. Windows has a different 2
registry for each user. To log in as a different user or change the “Domain” or
“Workgroup” to connect to a local area network, do the following procedure.
1. Back up the settings in the System program. Refer to “Saving the System
Program Settings in a File” in Section 5.
2. Change the User name or Domain name. Refer to the following sections.
NOTE
If you change or add the user name, add this user name to the
Administrator group before changing the network setting. To change
the user name, refer to the Windows online help.
3. Run the “nkeeg.reg” program.

i) Click the (Start) button on the taskbar to open the menu.
ii) In the “Search program and files” text box on the menu, type C:\nfx11\
E12V****\nkeeg.reg. “E12V****” in the typed path is the system
program version. Change the version according to your instrument.
(****: the EEG-1200 system program version)
iii) Press the Enter key on the keyboard. The confirmation message dialog
box opens.
iv) Click the Yes button to change the registry setting. The following
message box opens.
v) Click the OK button.
4. Restore the settings to the System Program. Refer to “Calling Up Saved

System Program Settings” in Section 5.

2. INSTALLATION
Setting the Computer Name

Do the following procedure to identify each instrument in the Windows Network.
For the computer name and other identification settings, consult your network
administrator.
1. Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select “Properties” from the pop-up menu. The System window opens.
3. On the System window, click “Change settings” in the “Computer name,

domain and workgroup settings” area. The System Properties window opens.
4. Click the Computer Name tab. The Computer Name page opens.

2. INSTALLATION
5. Click the Change button. The Computer Name/Domain Changes dialog box
opens.
2
6. Type the computer name and domain or workgroup name and click the OK
button.
7. Click the OK button on the Computer Name/Domain Changes dialog box

and System Properties dialog box to close the boxes.

2. INSTALLATION
Windows Network Settings

The following network settings are necessary to share a drive in the network.
Other settings may be required depending on your network configuration.
Setting the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)

One IP address must correspond to only one instrument. For the IP address and
other network settings, consult your network administrator.
1. Right-click Network icon on the desktop. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select Properties. The Network and Sharing Center window opens.
3. Click “Connections: Local Area Connection” in the View your active

networks area. The Local Area Connection Status window opens.
4. On the Local Area Connection Status window, click the Properties button.
The Local Area Connection Properties window opens.

2. INSTALLATION
5. On the Local Area Connection Properties window, select “Internet Protocol

Version 4 (TCP/IP)” option and click the Properties button. The Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) Properties window opens. 2
6. Check the “Use the following IP address” option button.
7. Enter the IP address and Subnet mask and click the OK button.
Set a unique IP address for each instrument and a common Subnet mask for
all the instruments connected to the same local area network.
8. Click the OK button on the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) Properties

window and close the window.

2. INSTALLATION
Checking the Network Connection

To check the network connection of the instruments, do the following procedure.
1. Click the (Start) button on the task bar.
2. Select All Programs → Accessories → Command Prompt.
The Command Prompt window opens.
Step 3
Step 4
3. On the Command Prompt window, enter “>ping [IP address]”. (Ex. If the IP
address is 192.168.1.10, enter “>ping 192.168.1.10”.)
4. Press the Enter key on the keyboard. If the instruments are connected
properly, “Reply from [IP address]” text appears on the screen.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 and check all the instruments.
5. Close the Command Prompt window.

2. INSTALLATION
Sharing Drives for Data Storage

You can share the data drive (drive D) with other PCs on the network.
2
1. Double-click the Computer icon on the desktop. The Computer window
opens.
2. Right-click the drive icon to share. The pop-up menu opens.
3. Select Properties. The Properties dialog box for the selected drive opens.
4. Click the Sharing Tab. The Sharing page opens.
5. Click the Advanced Sharing button. The Advanced Sharing window opens.
6. On the Advanced Sharing window, click the “Share this folder on the
network” check box to share the drive.
7. Enter the Share name if necessary.

2. INSTALLATION
8. Click the Permissions button. The Permissions window opens.
9. In the “Group or user names” area, select “everyone”.
10. In the “Permissions for Everyone” area, check “Allow” box for “Full
Control”.
11. Click the OK button on the Permissions window to close the Permissions
window.
12. Click the OK button on the Advanced Sharing window to close the
Advanced Sharing window.
13. Click the OK button on the Properties window to close the Properties
window.

2. INSTALLATION
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems

2
EEG-1200A
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical potential difference between the instruments.
Potential difference between instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the instruments, resulting in
electrical shock. Therefore, electrical instruments must be appropriately installed as specified in IEC 60601-1-1: 2000.
The following is an extract from IEC 60601-1-1 “Medical electrical equipment Part 1: General requirements for safety”.
For details, refer to IEC 60601-1-1 and consult with a biomedical engineer.
Examples of combinations of MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and non-medical electrical equipment

Medically used room
Feasible solution (See
Outside the Non-medically used
Situation No. Inside the PATIENT clause 19 in all
PATIENT room
ENVIRONMENT situations)
ENVIRONMENT
1 1a Items A and B in
PATIENT A B
ENVIRONMENT
IEC IEC
60601 60601
1b Items A and B in For B: Additional

PATIENT A B protective earth or
ENVIRONMENT separating transformer
IEC IEC
60601 XXXXX
1c Item A powered For B: Additional
from specified power A protective earth or
IEC 60601
supply in item B in separating transformer
PATIENT B
ENVIRONMENT IEC XXXXX
2 2a Item A in
PATIENT A B
ENVIRONMENT and
IEC IEC
item B in medically
60601 60601
used room
2b Item A in For B: See 19.201 and its
PATIENT A B rationale
ENVIRONMENT and
IEC IEC
item B in medically
60601 XXXXX
used room
3 3a Item A in For B: See 19.201 and its
PATIENT A B rationale
ENVIRONMENT and IEC 60601
IEC or
item B in non-medically
60601 IEC XXXXX
used room
common protective earth
3b Item A in For B: Additional
A B
PATIENT protective earth or
IEC 60601
ENVIRONMENT and SEPARATION DEVICE
IEC or
item B in non-medically
60601 IEC XXXXX
used room
protective earth with
protective earth
potential difference

2. INSTALLATION
KEY TO TABLE
• Additional protective earth: If necessary, provide additional protective earthing, which is permanently connected (see also
58.201).
NOTE: Equipment modification may be required.
• Separating transformer: If necessary, limit the ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE CURRENT, by using an additional separating
transformer according to annex EEE.
NOTE 1: No equipment modification is required.
NOTE 2: A separating transformer is a transformer with one or more input winding(s) separated from the output
winding(s) by at least basic insulation [IEC 60989].
• SEPARATION DEVICE: If necessary, apply SEPARATION DEVICE.
• IEC 60601: MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT in compliance with IEC 60601.
• IEC XXXXX: Non-medical equipment in compliance with relevant IEC safety standards.

2. INSTALLATION
EEG-1200J/K
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical potential difference between the instruments.
Potential difference between instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the instruments, resulting in 2
electrical shock. Therefore, electrical instruments must be appropriately installed as specified in IEC 60601-1:2005+
Amendment 1:2012.
The following is an extract from IEC 60601-1:2005+Amendment 1:2012 “Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General
requirements for basic safety and essential performance”. For details, refer to IEC 60601-1:2005+Amendment 1:2012 and
consult with a biomedical engineer.
Examples of combinations of MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and non-medical electrical equipment

Medically used room
Examples of possible Practical means of
Non-
Outside the causes for exceeding compliance
Situation No. Inside the medically
PATIENT LEAKAGE CURRENT Apply 16.5 in all
PATIENT ENVIRONMENT used room
ENVIRONMENT limits situations
1a Items A and B are Multiplied APPLIED – Verify total PATIENT

ME EQUIPMENT Mains Mains PARTS of the same type can LEAKAGE CURRENT
Plug Plug cause the total PATIENT
A B
IEC 60601 IEC 60601 LEAKAGE CURRENT to
exceed limits
See Note 1.
1b Items A and B are Earth conductor of the – A
dditional
ME EQUIPMENT A B MULTIPLE SOCKET- PROTECTIVE EARTH
IEC 60601 IEC 60601
powered via OUTLET is broken CONNECTION
a MULTIPLE
See also 1a. (for A or B) or,
SOCKET-OUTLET
MULTIPLE SOCKET-OUTLET
– Separating transformer
1c Item A is ME Due to high TOUCH – A
dditional
EQUIPMENT CURRENT of B PROTECTIVE EARTH
and B is Non-ME Mains Mains CONNECTION
EQUIPMENT Plug Plug
A B (for B) or,
IEC 60601 IEC xxxxx
1 (for B)
1d Item A is ME The earth conductor of – A
dditional
EQUIPMENT A B the MULTIPLE SOCKET PROTECTIVE EARTH
and B is non-ME IEC 60601 IEC xxxxx OUTLET is broken or, CONNECTION
EQUIPMENT
Due to high TOUCH (for A or B) or,
powered via
CURRENT of B
a MULTIPLE MULTIPLE SOCKET-OUTLET – Separating transformer
SOCKET-OUTLET
1e Item A is ME Mains Due to high TOUCH – A
dditional
EQUIPMENT A Plug CURRENT of B PROTECTIVE EARTH
powered from IEC 60601 CONNECTION
specified power B (for B) or,
supply in item B IEC xxxxx
1f Item A is ME
EQUIPMENT Mains (for B)
powered from B Plug
A
NON-ME IEC xxxxx
IEC 60601 DC/AC
EQUIPMENT
power supply in B

2. INSTALLATION
Medically used room Examples of possible Practical means of

Outside the Non-medically used causes for exceeding compliance
Situation No. Inside the
PATIENT room LEAKAGE CURRENT Apply 16.5 in all
PATIENT ENVIRONMENT
ENVIRONMENT limits situations
2a Items A and B are Mains Mains No causes of exceeding – N
o further measures are
ME EQUIPMENT Plug
A B
Plug LEAKAGE CURRENT necessary
IEC 60601 IEC 60601
2b Items A and Earth conductor of the – A

dditional
item B are ME A B MULTIPLE SOCKET- PROTECTIVE EARTH
EQUIPMENT IEC 60601 IEC 60601 OUTLET is broken CONNECTION (for A
powered via or B) or,
a MULTIPLE
SOCKET- MULTIPLE SOCKET-OUTLET
OUTLET
2 2c Item A is ME Due to high TOUCH – D
o not use metal
Mains Mains
EQUIPMENT and Plug Plug CURRENT of B connector housing or,
item B is non-ME A B
IEC 60601 IEC xxxxx See rationale for 16.5. – S
EPARATION
EQUIPMENT
DEVICE
2d Item A is ME The earth conductor of the – A
dditional
EQUIPMENT and MULTIPLE SOCKET- PROTECTIVE EARTH
A B
item B is non-ME OUTLET is broken CONNECTION (for A
IEC 60601 IEC xxxxx
EQUIPMENT or B) or,
powered via
a MULTIPLE
SOCKET- MULTIPLE SOCKET-OUTLET
OUTLET
3a Items A and B are Mains Mains No causes of exceeding – N
o further measures are
ME EQUIPMENT Plug
A B
Plug LEAKAGE CURRENT necessary
IEC 60601 IEC 60601
Common protective earth

3b Item A is ME Due to high TOUCH – D
o not use metal
EQUIPMENT and Mains Mains CURRENT of B connector housing
Plug Plug
item B is non-ME A B for SIGNAL INPUT/
IEC 60601 IEC xxxxx See rationale for 16.5.
EQUIPMENT OUTPUT PART or,
Common protective earth – S

EPARATION
3 DEVICE
3c Item A is ME a) Potential – A
dditional
EQUIPMENT difference between PROTECTIVE EARTH
Mains Mains
and item B is ME B PROTECTIVE EARTH CONNECTION for (A),
Plug Plug
EQUIPMENT A IEC 60601 CONNECTIONs of A or
or non-ME IEC 60601 or and B
IEC xxxxx – S
EPARATION
EQUIPMENT
b) Due to high TOUCH DEVICE, or
Common protective earth Protective earth CURRENT of B
with potential – D
o not use metal
difference See rationale for 16.5. connector housing
in the PATIENT
ENVIRONMENT
NOTE 1 No causes of TOUCH CURRENT or EARTH LEAKAGE CURRENT exceeding limits.

NOTE 2 IEC 60601: MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT in compliance with IEC 60601.
NOTE 3 IEC xxxxx: Non-medical equipment in compliance with relevant IEC safety standards.
NOTE 4 Separating transformer: see 16.9.2.1.
NOTE 5 If equipment “B” is outside the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT and if equipment “A” is a CLASS II equipment
and has accessible conductive parts connected to the PROTECTIVE EARTH CONNECTION of equipment “B”
then additional safety measures could be necessary, for example: additional protective earth for “B” or separating
transformer or SEPARATION DEVICE.

2. INSTALLATION
Example of PATIENT ENVIRONMENT

The following is an extract from IEC 60601:2005+Amendment 1:2012 Clause 3
Subclause 3.79 Figure A.9 . 2
It is difficult for this standard to define dimensions for the volume in which
diagnosis, monitoring or treatment occurs. The dimensions for the PATIENT
ENVIRONMENT given in Figure A.9 have been justified in practice.
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
NOTE The dimensions in the figure show minimum extent of the PATIENT
ENVIRONMENT in a free surrounding.
Figure A.9 - Example of PATIENT ENVIRONMENT

Section 3 Preparation
3
Power On Procedure............................................................................................................................................ 3.3

Closing the EEG-1200 Program................................................................................................................. 3.5
Power Off Procedure............................................................................................................................................ 3.6
Changing Settings before Measurement.............................................................................................................. 3.7
Setting the Date and Time.......................................................................................................................... 3.7
Changing the Settings in the System Program.......................................................................................... 3.7
Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk...................................................................................................... 3.8
Entering a Patient Information.............................................................................................................................. 3.9
Preparing the Electrodes.................................................................................................................................... 3.10
Guidelines for Input Jack Use................................................................................................................... 3.10
When the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box or Optional JE-922A Mini Junction Box is Used........ 3.10
When the Optional JE-208A, JE-210A Mini Junction Box is Used................................................. 3.10
When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box or JE-225AK, JE-226AK or JE-227AK Mini Flat
Junction Box is Used...................................................................................................................... 3.11
Checking Original Electrode Potentials for All Active Electrodes................................................... 3.12
Introduction to Electrode Position, Derivation and Montage..................................................................... 3.12
Electrode Position.......................................................................................................................... 3.12
Derivation....................................................................................................................................... 3.12
Monopolar Derivations (Referential Derivation)............................................................................. 3.12
BN (Balanced Noncephalic Reference) Derivation........................................................................ 3.13
Bipolar Derivation........................................................................................................................... 3.13
T1 and T2 Electrodes..................................................................................................................... 3.14
PG1 and PG2 Electrodes............................................................................................................... 3.14
Montage (Pattern).......................................................................................................................... 3.14
Attaching the Electrodes to the Patient.................................................................................................... 3.14
EEG Scalp Disk Electrodes............................................................................................................ 3.14
Electrode Positions........................................................................................................................ 3.14
Ear Clip Electrodes........................................................................................................................ 3.15
ECG Clip-on Electrodes (Fastclip)................................................................................................. 3.16
Connecting Electrode Leads to the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box...................................................... 3.16
Connecting the JE-922A Mini Junction Box................................................................................... 3.16
EEG Electrodes.............................................................................................................................. 3.17
ECG Electrodes............................................................................................................................. 3.17
Respiration Sensor......................................................................................................................... 3.18
Preparing for SpO2 Measurement...................................................................................................................... 3.19
SpO2 Probe.............................................................................................................................................. 3.20
Reusable Probes............................................................................................................................ 3.20
Disposable Probes......................................................................................................................... 3.21
Connecting the Probe to the Electrode Junction Box............................................................................... 3.22
Settings for the SpO2 Measurement......................................................................................................... 3.22
Attaching the Probe to the Patient............................................................................................................ 3.22
Preparing for CO2 Measurement........................................................................................................................ 3.23
CO2 Sensor Kit......................................................................................................................................... 3.24

Connecting CO2 Sensor Kit to the Electrode Junction Box...................................................................... 3.25
Settings for the CO2 Measurement........................................................................................................... 3.25
Attaching the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Patient............................................................................................. 3.25
Connecting the DC Input Cable.......................................................................................................................... 3.26
Connecting the DC Input Cable................................................................................................................ 3.26
Settings for the DC Input Signal Measurement........................................................................................ 3.26

3. PREPARATION
Power On Procedure
3
WARNING
Only use the provided power cord and connect it to a 3-pin AC outlet
which is properly grounded. Otherwise, it may result in electrical
shock or injury to the patient and operator.
NOTE
• To perform the photic stimulation, the optional photic stimulator control
unit is required. Before opening the Acquisition program, check the
cable connection between the photic stimulator control unit and PC unit
and power status of the photic stimulator control unit.
• Turn on the power of the units connected to the PC unit before starting
the Acquisition or Review program so that the units operate correctly.
• The breaker of the SM-120A isolation unit is set to off at the factory.
When using the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph for the first time,
check that the breaker is set to on.
1. Before turning the power on, check the following items. If there is any
damage or the instrument is suspected to be faulty as a result of checking,
attach an “Unusable” or “Repair required” label to the instrument and
contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Overview
• Instrument is not dirty, damaged or in contact with liquid.
• No label is peeled or torn.
• Power cord is not damaged.
• No key or switch is broken.
• No electrode is dirty or damaged.
• No electrode lead is frayed or damaged.
Connection and Setting
• Power cord and ground lead are properly connected.
• Electrode junction box is properly connected to the PC unit.
• Photic stimulator control unit is properly connected to the PC unit.
• Flash lamp is properly connected to the photic stimulator control unit.
• Recording paper is loaded in the printer.
• External equipment is properly connected.
• Optional equipment is properly connected.
Accessories
• There are enough clean or sterilized electrodes.
• Electrodes are not wet.
• There is enough EEG paste.
• There is enough paper for the printer.

3. PREPARATION
2. Turn the power on.

Turn the power of the PC unit, photic stimulator control unit, printer and
all the connected external instruments to on. The Windows opening screen
appears and the EEG-1200 application program starts automatically.
If the user account function is available, the NeuroWorkbench dialog box

opens. Enter the user name and password and click the OK button. For
details of the NeuroWorkbench and user account function, refer to Section 4.
NOTE
• Do not use the Windows power management function.
• Turn off any screen saver and close all application programs before
starting the EEG-1200 application program. Otherwise, the
EEG-1200 application program might not function properly.
3. After turning the power on, check the following items.

• No fire, smoke or smell.
• The power indicator lights.
• No electrical shock when touching the instrument.
• Instrument is not too hot.
• Instrument does not affect surrounding equipment.
• All operation indicators light.
• There is no error message on the screen or malfunction.
• The screen display is correct.
• The clock display is correct.
• The mouse operates properly.
• All keys on the keyboard operate properly.
• All programs operate correctly.
• All settings (such as montage and amplifier settings) are correct.
• The hard disk drive operates correctly.
• The hard disk has enough space to save EEG data files.
• The printer operates correctly (paper feed, intensity, no jamming).
• Calibration waveform is properly displayed.
• No noise on the calibration waveform.
• Amplitude of the calibration waveform is correct.
• Nothing abnormal happened during operation.
• There are no chemicals or liquids near the instrument.

3. PREPARATION
• All the equipments are maintained properly.

• Optional equipment operates correctly.
• External equipment operates correctly.
3
Closing the EEG-1200 Program
There are two ways to close the program.
Using the File menu

1. Click File to open the pull down menu.
2. Click Exit.
Using the Close button

Click the Close button in the upper right corner on the window.
To start the EEG-1200 program after closing the NeuroWorkbench window,

double-click the EEG 1200 icon on the desktop.
NOTE
When turning the instrument off, follow the procedure in “Power Off
Procedure”.

3. PREPARATION
Power Off Procedure
NOTE
Do not turn the instrument off while programs are running. If the
instrument is turned off while a program is running, the system program
and data files saved on the hard disk may be damaged. If a file is
damaged, the saved data will be damaged and the program might not
run.
1. Check the following before turning the power off.

• All necessary files are saved.
• All programs are closed.
• The hard disk access lamp is off.
• Settings are returned to the default settings.
2. Turn the power off.

i) Close all programs which are running.
ii) Click the (Start) button on the taskbar.
iii) Click the Shut down button. The PC unit is automatically turned off.
iv) Turn off the power of all the connected instruments.
3. Turn off the power of all connected instruments.
4. Check the following items after turning the power off.

• Power of all external instruments is turned off.
• No key on the keyboard is broken.
• Nothing abnormal happened during the operation.
• There are no chemicals or liquids near the instrument.
• All equipment is maintained properly.
• No electrode is dirty or damaged.

• There are enough electrodes.

• There is enough EEG paste.
• There is enough paper for the printer.

3. PREPARATION
Changing Settings before Measurement
Setting the Date and Time 3
CAUTION
When using the instrument for brain death diagnosis, before
examination, check and adjust the date and time of the system.
The date and time on the screen and recording result are part of
important information for the medical record.
After the EEG-1200 application program starts, check the time displayed on the
task bar. To change the date and time, double click the time display on the task
bar. For setting the date and time, refer to Windows online help.
NOTE
Do not change Windows settings unless there is an instruction in this
manual.
Changing the Settings in the System Program

Open the System program to change the followings settings, if necessary. Refer
to Section 5 “System Program” for details. These settings are saved in memory.
The Acquisition program and Review program use these settings. These settings
can be saved in a file or read from the file.
• EEG pattern setting

• Automatic photic stimulation setting
• Contents of the list of the Patient Information and Annotation dialog box
• System Program Settings
• DC input/output settings
• Number of electrodes which are saved in a file
• Changing the electrode junction box
• Setting acquisition navigation mode

3. PREPARATION
Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk
To check the hard disk drive, perform error checking.
1. Double-click the Computer icon on the desktop. The Computer window

opens.
2. Right-click the drive icon to check. The pop-up menu opens.
3. Select Properties. The Properties window opens.
4. Click the Tools tab. The Tools page opens.
5. Click the Check Now button in the Error-checking area. The Check Disk
dialog box opens.
6. Select options if necessary and click the Start button.

To cancel checking, click the Cancel button.
7. If an error is found during the disk check, a dialog box opens to fix the error.
Follow the instructions in the dialog box.
8. When the disk check is complete, the “Disk Check Complete” message
appears. Check the contents and click the OK button.

3. PREPARATION
Entering a Patient Information
You must enter patient information before acquiring EEG data. 3
NOTE
Make sure to enter the patient ID and name. Otherwise the acquired files
cannot be saved.
1. Click the New Patient button on the EEG main window. The EEG Patient
information window opens.
2. Enter the patient information. “ | ” and “ ‘ ” cannot be used.
Search button
Enter patient ID or name and
click this button. The instrument
automatically searches the database
and enters the Sex and DOB and the
age.
ID: Up to 30 characters
Name: Up to 40 characters
Sex: Select male or female.
DOB: Date of birth, 10 characters
Age: When the DOB is entered, calculated automatically.
Height: Enter the height. Up to 5 digits.
Weight: Enter the weight. Up to 5 digits.
Exam date: Date of examination. Up to 10 characters. To change the
format of date, refer to Windows online help.
Exam number: Examination number. Up to 30 characters.
Refer Dept: Up to 20 characters
Doctor: Up to 40 characters
Examiner: Up to 40 characters
Comment: Up to 160 characters
3. Click the OK button and close the EEG Patient Information window.

3. PREPARATION
Preparing the Electrodes
Guidelines for Input Jack Use

22 PG1 23 PG2 Follow these guidelines to obtain correct EEG recordings.
Z
1 FP1 2 FP2
25 T1 26 T2
When the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box or Optional JE-922A Mini
13 F7 3 F3 19 FZ 4 F4 14 F8 Junction Box is Used
11 A1 15 T3 5 C3 24 CZ 6 C4 16 T4 12 A2
Required Electrodes
17 T5 7 P3 20 PZ 8 P4 18 T6
Do not perform EEG measurement without the Z, C3, C4, A1 and A2 electrodes.
9 O1 10 O2
Input Jack Z
Connect the lead from the electrode (Z electrode) attached on the patient’s nasion
to input jack Z on the electrode junction box. This input jack is used to eliminate
AC interference.
Input Jacks C3 and C4

The C3 and C4 electrodes are the system reference electrodes for EEG
measurement. Input jacks C3 and C4 must be used for EEG measurement even if
C3 and C4 are not programmed in any montage.
Connect the leads from the electrodes on positions C3 and C4 to input jacks C3
and C4, respectively.
Input Jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2)

The A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2) electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-
electrode impedance check. Input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2) in addition
to Z, C3 and C4 must be used for the electrode impedance check.
When checking electrode impedance, connect the leads from the electrodes on
positions A1 and A2 to input jacks A1 and A2, respectively.
When the Optional JE-208A, JE-210A Mini Junction Box is Used
Required Electrodes
Do not perform EEG measurement without the Z, C3, C4 (or F3, F4), A1 and A2
electrodes.
Input Jack Z
AC interference.

3. PREPARATION
Input Jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4)

The C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) electrodes are the system reference electrodes for
EEG measurement. Input jacks C3 and C4 (or F3 and F4) must be used for EEG
measurement even if C3 and C4 are not programmed in any montage.
3
Connect the leads from the electrodes on positions C3 and C4 to input jacks C3
and C4, respectively.
Input Jacks A1 and A2

The A1 and A2 electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-electrode
impedance check. Input jacks A1 and A2 in addition to Z, C3 and C4 (or F3 and
F4) must be used for the electrode impedance check.
When the Optional JE-213A Mini Junction Box or JE-225AK,

JE-226AK or JE-227AK Mini Flat Junction Box is Used
Required Electrodes
Do not perform EEG measurement without the Z, A5, A6 (or A3, A4), A11 and
A12 electrodes.
Input Jack Z
AC interference.
Input Jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4)

The A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) electrodes are the system reference electrodes for
EEG measurement. Input jacks A5 and A6 (or A3 and A4) must be used for EEG
measurement even if A5 and A6 are not programmed in any montage.
Connect the leads from the electrodes on positions A5 and A6 to input jacks A5
and A6, respectively.
Input Jacks A11 and A12

The A11 and A12 electrodes are the reference electrodes for skin-electrode
impedance check. Input jacks A11 and A12 in addition to Z, A5 and A6 (or A3
and A4) must be used for the electrode impedance check.

3. PREPARATION
Checking Original Electrode Potentials for All Active Electrodes

Check the original electrode potential for all active electrodes by programming a
montage with the system reference (Use the pattern VIIA (factory default setting)
or select the 0 V button for reference electrode on the Montage dialog box).
Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 5.
The digital EEG displays the EEG waveform in each channel by subtracting two
electrode potentials selected to a montage. The subtracted result will be incorrect
if the electrode attachment is incorrect, the original electrode potential is flat, or
unstable or artifact is superimposed on the original electrode potential. Omit the
measurement result if the displayed EEG waveform is incorrect.
Introduction to Electrode Position, Derivation and Montage

Electrode Position
There are various systems of electrode position, such as Illinois, Montreal, Aird,
Cohn, etc. Of these, the International 10-20 system, shown below, is currently the
most common. Each system has a different number of electrodes and different
electrode locations. To compensate for different sized heads, the distances
between electrodes are given as ratios.
Nasion
FP1 FP2
1 2
F7 F8
F3 FZ F4
13 14
3 19 4
T3 C3 CZ C4 T4
15 5 24 6 16
11 12
A1 A2
P3 P4
T5 T6
7 20 8
17 PZ 18
O1 O2
9 10
Inion
10-20 system electrode positions
After determining the electrode position system, measure the head of the patient
and calculate the electrode positions according to the distance ratio between
each electrode position. The number of electrodes should be reduced for EEG
recording on infants and small children.
Derivation
Derivation is the electrode combination for one channel. All derivations have two
electrodes: reference and active. In monopolar derivation, one “electrode” can be
several physical electrodes connected together. There are 3 kinds of derivations.
Monopolar Derivations (Referential Derivation)

In the monopolar derivation, one electrode is common to all channels and
regarded as electrically inactive (“reference electrode”). Each amplifier has two
inputs (G1 and G2). The reference electrode is connected to the G2 (+) input of
the amplifier and the active electrode is connected to the G1 (−) input.

3. PREPARATION
Monopolar Derivations Using Ear Reference Electrodes:

• Normal Monopolar Derivation
Left ear for left hemispheric derivation and the right ear for right hemispheric
derivation.
• A1 + A2 3
Shorting both ears (in the electrode junction box).
• A1 → A2 or A1 ← A2
Only one ear.
• A1 ↔ A2
Left ear for right hemispheric and right ear for left hemispheric derivation.
Monopolar Derivations Using Other Site Reference Electrodes:

• Vx (Vertex reference derivation)
Mid-line central position Cz as the reference electrode.
• AV (Average reference derivation)
All electrodes on the scalp, except for the extra inputs (X*) and BN (+) and
BN (−) electrodes, are connected by resistors to one averaged point which is
the AV reference electrode.
* The number of extra inputs changes depending on the electrode junction box.
If one or more of the electrodes in the AV electrode contain ECG artifact, or two
or more electrodes show simultaneous abnormal potentials, you need to exclude
any unstable electrodes.
BN (Balanced Noncephalic Reference) Derivation

An electrode on the vertebra prominens spine and an electrode near the right
sternoclavicular joint are connected by a variable resistor to form a noncephalic
reference electrode. The variable resistor lets you balance the ratio of these two
electrode signals in order to minimize the ECG. You can use any three input
jacks.
Right sternoclavicular
joint electrode
Vertebra pominens
spine electrode
G1
G2
(Inside the EEG instrument)
Variable resistor Noncephalic reference electrode

(inside the EEG instrument) (inside the EEG instrument)
: buffer amplifier
Bipolar Derivation
Electrode pairs are connected to the G1 and G2 inputs of channels. The potential
difference between two electrodes is recorded on each channel.

3. PREPARATION
T1 and T2 Electrodes
The T1 and T2 electrodes are placed on a line 1/3 of the distance from the
external acoustic pore to the lateral orbital margin.
PG1 and PG2 Electrodes

PG1 and PG2 are the pharyngeal electrodes. A silver ball electrode on the tip of a
thick copper stick is inserted from the nasal foramen and the silver ball electrode
is attached at the rhinopharynx posterior. The EEG of the brainstem, internal
temporal lobe and posterial frontal lobe can be recorded.
Montage (Pattern)
Montage is the combination of derivations for all channels. The instrument
contains 36 patterns per set file and you can program a different montage and
other settings for each pattern.
Attaching the Electrodes to the Patient

EEG Scalp Disk Electrodes
1. Clean the area where the electrodes are to be mounted with a gauze pad
moistened in alcohol or a medical soap solution to remove oil from the skin.
Wipe the site with dry gauze.
Correct Wrong 2. Apply a small amount of EEG paste in a 1 cm diameter circle on the cleaned
skin. Avoid spreading the paste too thin or creating too large a space.
Disk electrode Lead 3. Apply a small amount of paste to the disk electrode. Press the electrode
down gently on the pasted skin spot.
Paste
Scalp 4. Cover the electrode with a small gauze pad and press the pad around the
Scalp Disk Electrode Placement electrode. Attach the electrode with surgical tape.
Electrode Positions
This procedure is for the Ten Twenty System.
Fig. 1 1. Divide the longitudinal line of the head into halves and attach an electrode at
CZ
the Cz point (Fig. 1).
FZ PZ
FPZ OZ
2. Divide the distance between Cz and the nasion in proportions as shown in
Fig. 1 and attach an electrode at Fz and Pz. (Do not attach electrodes at Fpz
and Oz.)

3. PREPARATION
Fig. 2 3. Divide the transverse line of the head into proportions of 10%, 20%, 20%,
CZ
20%, 20% and 10% as shown in Fig. 2 and attach electrodes at T3, T4, C3
C4 C3
and C4.
T4 T3
3
Fig. 3 4. Divide the peripheral line passing over Fpz, T4, Oz and T3 into proportions
T4
F8 T6 as shown in Fig. 3 and attach electrodes at Fp2, F8, T6, O2, Fp1, F7, T5 and
O1.
FP2 O2
FPZ OZ
FP1 O1
F7 T5
T3
Fig. 4
5. Take the line passing over F7, Fz and F8 and attach an electrode at the mid-
FP1
1
FP2
2
point (F3) between F7 and Fz as shown in Fig. 4. Attach another electrode at
F7
F3 F4
F8 the mid-point (F4) between F8 and Fz.
13 FZ 14
3 19 4
T3 C3 CZ C4 T4
15 5 24 6 16
11
A1
12
A2 6. Take the line passing over T5, Pz and T6 and attach an electrode at the mid-
P3 P4
T5
17
7 20
PZ
8
T6
18 point (P3) between T5 and PZ. Attach another electrode at the mid-point
O1 O2
(P4) between T6 and PZ.
9 10
Ear Clip Electrodes

1. Apply a small amount of EEG paste to both earlobes. Gently clip on the
earlobe electrodes.
2. Secure the electrode lead to the neck with surgical tape to prevent electrode
lead movement.
NOTE
Do not apply excessive pressure to the electrode because this may
cause direct electrode-to-skin contact (not through the paste), and
generate unnecessary polarization voltage.

3. PREPARATION
ECG Clip-on Electrodes (Fastclip)

1. Clean the patient’s skin with alcohol and apply cardioCream (ECG paste) to
the electrode site.
2. Apply cardioCream to the electrode surface of the ECG clip-on electrode

and clip the limb electrode on the patient’s arm or leg as required.
Connecting Electrode Leads to the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box
WARNING WARNING
When a mini junction box is not used, make sure Do not leave the electrodes which are not
that the cover is firmly attached to the multiple attached to the patient connected to the electrode
connector on the electrode junction box. If the junction box. If the electrode touches metal or
multiple connector is touched by conductive a conductive object, the patient may receive
material, the patient or operator may receive electrical shock.
electrical shock.
CAUTION
When using a mini electrode junction box
or headcap EEG electrode kit with the
electroencephalograph, do not connect electrode
leads to the electrode junction box. This may
cause problems such as distorted waveforms.
Connecting the JE-922A Mini Junction Box

1. Open the multiple connector cover on the bottom of the electrode junction
box by prying the cover off with a flat blade screwdriver.
2. Connect the mini junction box cable to the multiple connector of the
Multiple connector cover electrode junction box and secure it with the two jackscrews.
Mini junction box

Electrode
junction box
Multiple junction box cable
NOTE
The mark on the mini junction box must align with the mark on
the mini junction box cable connector.
3. PREPARATION
3. Connect the mini junction box cable to the multiple output connector of the
mini junction box.
To remove the cable from the mini junction box, press and hold the lock
release plates, then remove the cable.
3
EEG Electrodes
After placing the electrodes on the patient’s scalp, connect the electrode lead
plugs to the corresponding jacks on the electrode junction box. Make sure that
each electrode position corresponds to the correct jack.
ECG electrode lead plug
EEG electrode lead plug
ECG Electrodes
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box Procedure:
Connect ECG electrode leads Connect one end of each ECG electrode lead to the ECG clip on the limb.
Connect the other ends of the electrode leads to any two jacks (X1 to X4) on the
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1 X2
X5
RESP F
electrode junction box. Refer to the following chart when selecting the ECG lead
X3 X4
22
PG1
23
PG2
X6
(Lead I, Lead II or Lead III).
Z
RESP C
SELECTOR(K )
FP1 FP2
1 2
ECG Lead G1 (−) G2 (+)

2 5 10 20 50
T1 F7 F8 T2
25 F3 Fz F4 26
13 3 19 4 14
X7
IMPEDANCE
Fz T3 C3 Cz C4 T4 A2 RESP A
Lead I Right arm Left arm

CHECK
11 15 5 24 6 16 12
T5 P3 Pz P4 T6
17 7 20 8 18
SpO2/CO2
DC1/DC2
Lead II Right arm Left leg

OI O2
9 10
Lead III Left arm Left leg
JE-922A Mini Junction Box Typical ECG settings:

These settings let you record Lead I on the 19th channel.
Connect the left and right arms to input jacks X1 and X2, respectively. Program
the electrode combination for the 19th channel so that X2 is set to input G1 (−)
and X1 is set to input G2 (+). Set the sensitivity to 200 µV/mm and the time
constant to 1.0 s on the display.
The bipolar jacks are pairs of (+) an (−) jacks. The X1 (+) to X4 (+) bipolar jacks
can be used as an extra jack. To select bipolar jack or extra jack, refer to Section
5 “System Program”.
Connect ECG electrode leads

3. PREPARATION
Respiration Sensor
NOTE
When the respiration waveform is measured, use any of the X5, X6 and
X7 electrodes. Set the respiration electrode as the electrode to be saved
in measurement file. Refer to “Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for
Acquisition” in Section 5.
You can use the following sensors to measure the respiration waveform.
• Pro-Tech Airflow Sensor®
• Pro-Tech Effort Sensor®
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box Program the montage for respiration measurement. The E electrode can be used
Connect respiration sensors instead of “0V”. When using the E electrode, save the E electrode with the
respiration electrode. If the respiration waveform is unstable, use “0V” for G1
X1 X2
X3 X4
X1
X3
X2
X4
X5
RESP F
electrode. For sleep analysis, select G1 (−) to “0 V”.
PG1 PG2
22 23 X6
Z
RESP C
In the default setting, channels 17 of the pattern IA to VIA and channels 9 and 10
SELECTOR(K )
FP1 FP2
1 2
2 5 10 20 50
T1 F7 F8 T2
25 F3 Fz F4 26
13 3 19 4 14
of the pattern IB to IIB are programmed for respiration measurement.

X7
IMPEDANCE
CHECK Fz T3 C3 Cz C4 T4 A2 RESP A
11 15 5 24 6 16 12
T5 P3 Pz P4 T6
17 7 20 8 18
SpO2/CO2
DC1/DC2
OI O2
9 10
Respiration Sensor for Sleep Analysis
Model Terminal
Pro-Tech Airflow Sensor X5
Pro-Tech Effort Sensor X6 or X7
JE-922A Mini Junction Box Connection of the lead tips of the respiration sensor
Jacks/ Montage G1 (−) G2 (+)

X1 to X7 0V X1 to X7
The bipolar jacks are pairs of (+) and (−) jacks. The X1 (+) to X4 (+) bipolar
jacks can be used as an extra jack. To select bipolar jack or extra jack, refer to the
System program.
Connect respiration sensors

3. PREPARATION
Preparing for SpO2 Measurement
3
WARNING WARNING
SpO2 measurement may be incorrect in the When not monitoring SpO2, disconnect the SpO2
following cases. adapter cable from the electrode junction box.
• When the patient’s carboxyhemoglobin or Otherwise, noise from the probe sensor may
methemoglobin increases abnormally. interfere and incorrect data is displayed on the
• When dye is injected in the blood. screen.
• When using an electrosurgical unit.
• During CPR.
• When measuring at a site with venous pulse.
• When there is body movement.
• When the pulse wave is small (insufficient
peripheral circulation).
WARNING WARNING
Check the circulation condition by observing the • When using the TL-201T finger probe, do
skin color at the measurement site and pulse not fasten the probe and cable to the finger
waveform. Change the measurement site every by wrapping with tape. This may cause burn,
8 hours for disposable probes and every 4 hours congestion or pressure necrosis from poor
for reusable probes. The skin temperature may blood circulation.
increase at the attached site by 2 or 3°C (4 or • When using probes other than the TL-201T
5°F) and cause a burn or pressure necrosis. finger probe, to avoid poor circulation, do
When using the probe on the following patients, not wrap the tape too tight. Check the blood
take extreme care and change the measurement circulation condition by observing the skin
site more frequently according to symptoms and color and congestion at the skin peripheral to
degree. the probe attachment site. Even for short-term
• Patient with a fever monitoring, there may be burn or pressure
• Patient with peripheral circulation insufficiency necrosis from poor blood circulation, especially
• Neonate or low birth weight infant with delicate on neonates or low birth weight infants whose
skin skin is delicate. Accurate measurement cannot
be performed on a site with poor peripheral
circulation.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use the specified probes. Otherwise SpO2 Do not use a damaged or disassembled probe.
cannot be monitored properly. It causes incorrect measurement and may injure
the patient.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use a probe which is deteriorated If the skin gets irritated or redness appears on
by aging. Accurate measurement cannot be the skin from the probe, change the attachment
performed. site or stop using the probe. Take extreme care
for the patients with delicate skin.

3. PREPARATION
CAUTION CAUTION
Normal external light does not affect monitoring While a patient is on medication which causes
but strong light such as a surgical light or sunlight vasodilation, the pulse waveform may change
may affect monitoring. If affected, cover the and in rare cases the SpO2 value might not be
measuring site with a blanket. displayed.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the probe is attached on an appropriate When a message indicates a faulty probe or
site with sufficient circulation and an error faulty SpO2 adapter, stop monitoring and replace
message about probe attachment repeatedly the probe or SpO2 adapter with a new one.
appears, the probe may be deteriorated. Replace
it with a new one.
NOTE
CAUTION • When the “Searching for SpO2 pulse” message is
If the attachment site is dirty with blood or bodily displayed for a long time, it means that the detected
fluids, clean the attachment site before attaching pulse is too small to measure. Reposition the probe.
the probe. If there is nail polish on the attachment • When there is an extreme power surge, an
site, remove the polish. Otherwise, the amount of “SpO2 UNSTABLE PULSE” message appears. To
transmitted light decreases, and measured value prevent noise from the AC power line, ground the
may be incorrect or measurement cannot be electroencephalograph with a low impedance ground
performed. lead (i.e. 1.5 m or less), connect the AC power cord
to another AC outlet and/or turn off the power of
surrounding equipment.
SpO2 Probe
Select the appropriate probe according to the purpose.
CAUTION
Only use the specified probes. Otherwise SpO2 cannot be monitored
properly.
Reusable Probes
Model Subject (Weight) Attachment Site SpO2 Adapter

Finger Probe TL-201T Adults, children Finger JL-550T1/JL-550T2*
(20 kg or more)
Multi-site Probe TL-220T Adults, children, infants Finger or toe
(3 kg or more)
Neonates Instep and sole
(3 kg or less)
* JL-550T2 is not available for EEG-1200A.

3. PREPARATION
Disposable Probes
CAUTION
The disposable probe is not sterilized. Use the disposable probe only
for a single patient. Never reuse the disposable probe for another 3
patient because it causes cross infection.
Model Subject (Weight) Attachment Site SpO2 Adapter

TL-260T* Neonates, children Finger or toe JL-550T1/JL-550T2*
(3 kg or more)
Neonates Instep and sole
(3 kg or less)
Low birth weight infants Instep and sole
(1 kg or less)
TL-271T Adults Finger or toe
(30 kg or more)
TL-272T Children
(10 to 50 kg)
TL-273T Neonates Instep and sole
(3 kg or less)
Adults Finger or toe
(40 kg or more)
TL-274T Infants
(3 to 20 kg)
TL-051S/052S Adults Finger
Cable length TL-051S: 80 cm (50 kg or more)
TL-052S: 160 cm Neonates Instep and sole
(3 kg or less)
TL-061S/062S Adults, children Finger
Cable length TL-061S: 80 cm (15 to 50 kg)
TL-062S: 160 cm Infants Toe
(3 to 15 kg)
* TL-260T and JL-550T2 are not available for EEG-1200A.

3. PREPARATION
Connecting the Probe to the Electrode Junction Box

1. Connect the probe to the sensor connector on the JL-550T1/T2 SpO2 adapter.
JL-550T1/T2
SpO2 adapter
Probe
X1 X2 X1 X2
X5
RESP F
X3 X4
X3 X4
PG1 PG2
22 23 X6
Z
RESP C
SELECTOR(K )
FP1 FP2
1 2
2. Connect the JL-550T1/T2 SpO2 adapter cable to the SpO2/CO2 connector on

2 5 10 20 50
T1 F7 F8 T2
25 F3 Fz F4 26
13 3 19 4 14
the electrode junction box. Make sure that the arrow mark on the adapter
X7
IMPEDANCE
11 15 5 24 6 16 12
cable connector is aligned with the mark on the SpO2/CO2 connector.

T5 P3 Pz P4 T6
17 7 20 8 18
SpO2/CO2
DC1/DC2
OI O2
One SpO2 adapter and one CO2 sensor kit can be connected to either
9 10
connector at the same time.
NOTE
• When connecting or removing the SpO2 adapter cable to/from the
electrode junction box, hold the adapter cable connector. If the adapter
cable is pulled, this may damage the adapter cable.
• Before connecting the SpO2 adapter to the electrode junction box, make
sure there is no damaged pin on the adapter cable connector.
• If two SpO2 adapters are connected, only the measurement with the
earlier connected connector is available. If the power is turned on with
two SpO2 adapters connected, only the measurement with the right
connector is available.
Settings for the SpO2 Measurement

The SpO2 data and pulse waveform can be displayed on the screen.
1. In the System Program window, click the Pattern icon. The Pattern table
opens.
2. Click the TC column. The TC (s) dialog box opens.
3. Select the DC input channel.

SpO2 data: SpO2
Pulse wave: Pulse

4. Click the OK button.
Attaching the Probe to the Patient

For proper SpO2 probe attachment and use, refer to the operator’s manual of the
SpO2 probe.

3. PREPARATION
Preparing for CO2 Measurement
3
WARNING WARNING
When using the airway adapter or nasal adapter Select the airway adapter or nasal adapter
on a patient with low ventilatory volume, the taking into consideration the patient weight and
CO2 may mix in the inspiration due to the airway ventilation volume. If an inappropriate airway
adapter’s or nasal adapter’s dead space, resulting adapter or nasal adapter is used, the resistance
in inaccurate measured values or difficulty in in the respiration circuit increases and it causes
detecting apnea. Perform ventilation taking into incorrect measurement value.
consideration the dead space of the adapters.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use the specified CO2 sensor kit. Otherwise When using the YG-121T nasal adapter on a
CO2 cannot be monitored properly. patient, observe the patient condition all the time.
The mouth guide touches the mouth and may
cause pressure sores.
CAUTION CAUTION
The CO2 data may be inaccurate when When using an anesthetic instrument with a
monitoring a patient with an extremely high volatile anesthetic agent, the CO2 measurement
respiration rate or irregular respiration. Read the may be inaccurate.
measured values carefully.
CAUTION CAUTION
With the TG-921T3 CO2 sensor kit, When the "CO2 sensor not working" or "CO2
measurements are based on the assumption adapter abnormality" message is displayed,
of no CO2 gas in the inspiration. The CO2 check the CO2 sensor kit and replace it if
concentration in the respiration is calculated by necessary. CO2 cannot be monitored while the
taking the CO2 concentration in the inspiration as message is displayed.
0 mmHg (0 hPa). Therefore, measuring CO2 gas
may be present in the inspiration gas may result
in the acquired data being lower than the actual
value.
NOTE
• The measurement may be inaccurate when the instrument is used in
the following conditions. Read the measured values carefully.
- When there is high concentration nitrous oxide gas in the airway
adapter.
- When used in places with low atmospheric pressure such as at high
altitude.
- When used in environments with sudden temperature changes.
- When used in environments with severe humidity.
- When used for patients with irregular spontaneous respiration.

3. PREPARATION
• When using the TG-921T3 CO2 sensor kit, it performs calibration

automatically every minute and when any of the following occurs.
- Instrument power on
- Patient’s first respiration
- Nasal adapter is removed from the CO2 sensor and connected again.
- Respiration stops for 20 seconds.
- Signal changes rapidly due to temperature change.
• During calibration, the CO2 waveform becomes flat (0 mmHg) but the
respiration rate and measured value are not affected.
CO2 Sensor Kit
CAUTION
Only use the specified CO2 sensor kit and nasal adapters. Otherwise
CO2 cannot be monitored properly.
CAUTION
The airway adapter/nasal adapter is non-sterilized and disposable.
Use only for a single patient and single use. Failure to follow this
instruction causes cross infection.
TG-921T3 CO2 Sensor Kit
TG-121T CO2 sensor

M
AR
AL
HOPER/
R
TE
AP
AD
2
CO
JG-921T3 CO2 adapter
YG-120T YG-121T
(for nasal breathing) (for naso-oral breathing)
Nasal tube
Clip Mouth guide
Description Model Q’ty Code No.

Nasal adapter (for nasal breathing) YG-120T 30 V921
Nasal adapter (for naso-oral breathing) YG-121T 30 V922
For patients over 10 kg

3. PREPARATION
X1 X2 X1 X2
X5
RESP F
X3 X4
X3 X4
Connecting CO2 Sensor Kit to the Electrode Junction Box

PG1 PG2
22 23
Connect the CO2 sensor kit cable to the SpO2/CO2 connector on the electrode
X6
Z
RESP C
SELECTOR(K )
FP1 FP2
1 2
junction box. Make sure that the arrow mark on the sensor kit cable connector
2 5 10 20 50
T1 F7 F8 T2
25 F3 Fz F4 26
13 3 19 4 14
X7
is aligned with the mark on the SpO2/CO2 connector. One SpO2 adapter and
IMPEDANCE
11 15 5 24 6 16 12
SpO2/CO2
DC1/DC2
17
T5
7
P3
20
Pz
8
P4
18
T6
one CO2 sensor kit can be connected to either connector at the same time. 3
OI O2
9 10
NOTE
• When connecting or removing the CO2 sensor kit cable to/from the
electrode junction box, hold the sensor kit cable connector. If the sensor
kit cable is pulled, this may damage the sensor kit cable.
• Before connecting the CO2 sensor kit to the electrode junction box,
make sure there is no damaged pin on the sensor kit cable connector.
• If two CO2 sensor kits are connected, only the measurement with the
earlier connected connector is available. If the power is turned on with
two CO2 sensor kits connected, only the measurement with the right
connector is available.
Settings for the CO2 Measurement

The ETCO2 data and CO2 waveform can be displayed on the screen.
opens.

ETCO2 data: EtCO2
CO2 waveform: CO2Wave
Attaching the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Patient

For proper CO2 sensor kit attachment and use, refer to the operator’s manual of
the CO2 sensor kit.

3. PREPARATION
Connecting the DC Input Cable
Connecting the DC Input Cable
WARNING
Before connecting or disconnecting the DC input cable to the DC
input connector on the electrode junction box, make sure that the
power of the external instrument is turned off and DC signal is
not output from the external instrument. Otherwise, the patient or
operator may receive electrical shock or injury.
NOTE
• When connecting an external instrument to the DC input connector, an
unwanted radio frequency signal is generated from this connection. This
affects devices such as radio and television receivers operating near
the instrument. To reduce the unwanted radio frequency signal, attach
the provided ferrite core to the DC input cable.
• Use a DC input cable that is 3 m or less.
• For the DC input connectors, the maximum input voltage is ±5 V and
the input impedance is 1.5 MΩ.
Ferrite core 1. Attach and fix the GTFC-41-27-16 ferrite core (accessory, in the blue bag)
near the connector of the DC input cable that connects to the DC input
connector on the left side of the electrode junction box.
2. Wrap the DC input cable around the ferrite core at least five times.
DC input connectors 3. Connect the DC input cable to the DC input connector.
Settings for the DC Input Signal Measurement

The DC input signal can be displayed on the screen.
opens.

DC signal: DC03 to DC06

To convert the DC input signal to the numeric value, refer to “Programming

Patterns – Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals” in
Section 5.

Section 4 NeuroWorkbench
4
General................................................................................................................................................................. 4.3
Main Windows............................................................................................................................................ 4.3
EEG Window.................................................................................................................................... 4.3
Workbench Window......................................................................................................................... 4.4
Data Manager Window..................................................................................................................... 4.4
Explanation of Menu Commands on the Main Windows...................................................................................... 4.5
File Menu.................................................................................................................................................... 4.5
Edit Menu................................................................................................................................................... 4.6
Help Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 4.6
Option Buttons............................................................................................................................................ 4.6
Examination Workflow Using NeuroWorkbench................................................................................................... 4.7
Menu Window for EEG Examination.................................................................................................................... 4.8
User Accounts.................................................................................................................................................... 4.10
Creating a New User Account.................................................................................................................. 4.10
Editing and Deleting User Accounts......................................................................................................... 4.12
Explanation of the User Account Dialog Box................................................................................. 4.12
Adding a User Account.................................................................................................................. 4.12
Deleting a User Account................................................................................................................ 4.12
Editing a User Account................................................................................................................... 4.13
Using the Active Directory Accounts when Logging in to NeuroWorkbench............................................ 4.13
Changing User Account Settings............................................................................................................. 4.14
Entering User Name and Password............................................................................................... 4.14
Setting Access Rights.................................................................................................................... 4.14
Selecting a Reference Account...................................................................................................... 4.14
Setting the Patient Information Security......................................................................................... 4.15
Setting Function Access Right....................................................................................................... 4.15
Setting Weekly Schedule Functions............................................................................................... 4.15
Selecting Available Examinations.................................................................................................. 4.15
Selecting the Default Examination for a New Examination Schedule............................................ 4.16
Setting Report Application Security............................................................................................... 4.16
Limiting the Applications................................................................................................................ 4.16
Limiting Patients Displayed in the Patient List and Data List.......................................................... 4.17
Edit Menu Window.............................................................................................................................................. 4.18
Opening the Edit Menu Window............................................................................................................... 4.18
Adding a New Tab Page........................................................................................................................... 4.19
Deleting a Tab Page................................................................................................................................. 4.20
Changing the Order of Tab Pages............................................................................................................ 4.21
Changing the Name of a Tab Page.......................................................................................................... 4.21
Importing Tab Pages................................................................................................................................. 4.22
Exporting Tab Pages................................................................................................................................ 4.22
Saving All Tab Page Settings......................................................................................................... 4.22
Saving the Current Tab Page Settings........................................................................................... 4.23
Setting the Current Menu as the Default.................................................................................................. 4.23

Restoring the Default Menu...................................................................................................................... 4.23
Restoring the Previous Tab Page and Protocol Button Settings............................................................... 4.24
Setting Up Protocol Buttons..................................................................................................................... 4.24
Opening the EEG System Settings Window to Change EEG System Settings............................. 4.25
Copying a Protocol Button........................................................................................................................ 4.25
Deleting a Protocol Button........................................................................................................................ 4.25
Importing a Protocol................................................................................................................................. 4.26
Exporting a Protocol................................................................................................................................. 4.27
Initializing a Protocol Button..................................................................................................................... 4.27
Preventing Changes to Protocol Button Settings in the Acquisition Program.......................................... 4.28
Setting the Preset Number of Copies for CD/DVD Disks.................................................................................... 4.29
Using Optional Programs................................................................................................................................... 4.30
Opening the Setting Option Button Window............................................................................................. 4.30
Assigning or Changing an Optional Program........................................................................................... 4.30
Renaming an Option Button..................................................................................................................... 4.31
Clearing an Option Button........................................................................................................................ 4.32

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
General
Main Windows
When the PC unit is turned on or the EEG-1200 icon on the desktop is double-
clicked, the NeuroWorkbench main window opens. If the user account function 4
is active, a dialog box for the user name and password opens. Enter the user
name and password and click the OK button. For details of the user account
function, refer to the “Creating a New User Account” in this section.
All operations such as measurement, editing, system setup, patient information

management and data management can be performed from the NeuroWorkbench
main window. The main window has three windows: the EEG window, the
Workbench window and the Data Management window. Click the tab for the
window to display the window.
EEG Window
The EEG window has up to 10 examination protocol buttons. Each button has
settings for an examination. Settings can be changed and saved for different
examination conditions.
To open a measurement window, click the examination protocol button for the
examination.
Tab
Examination
protocol button
Option button

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Workbench Window
In the Workbench window, you can manage the entire examination workflow,
from saving examination to ending and reviewing examination. For details on the
Workbench window, refer to Section 8 “Workbench”.
Select mode from the pull

down menu.
The screen is the Patient List mode.
Data Manager Window

The Data Manager tab page lets you manage patient information and measured
data. When you start an examination from the NeuroWorkbench, patient
information and examination information for the examination are automatically
registered in the database when the examination ends.
You can edit or delete patient information and examination information in the
database. You can also add measurement data to the database for examinations
that are not started from the NeuroWorkbench. For details on reviewing the EEG
waveforms, refer to Section 7.
For details on the Data Manager tab page, refer to Section 9 “Data Manager”.
Select a drive or database

from the pull down menu.
When you select a drive, the
window changes to the File
mode and when you select
the database, the window
changes to the Database
mode.
The screen is the Database mode.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Explanation of Menu Commands on the Main Windows
File Menu
Load:
Opens the Load dialog box to call up a saved setting file. This function is only 4
available when no EEG examination window or EEG review window is opened.
The Main window settings (settings for all tab pages, extension:*.MMS) and
settings for selected examination category (extenstion: *.EEGC) are available.
Save all settings:

Opens the Save As dialog box to save all settings on the Main window as a file
(extension: *.MMS).
Save selected settings:

Saves the settings of the menu window for the displayed EEG examination
category as a file (extension: *.EEGC). Not available on the Data Manager
window and Workbench window.
Examination category
Restore previous settings:

Restores the previous tab page and protocol button settings.
Restore Protocols:
NeuroWorkbench automatically saves main window settings when the
NeuroWorkbench is closed. This command restores the main window settings for
the specified date.
Exit:
Closes the Main window.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Edit Menu
Edit Menu:
Opens the Edit Menu dialog box to edit the examination setting (examination
category/examination setting). For details on the Edit Menu window, refer to
“Edit Menu Window” in this section.
Input Memo:
Available only when you use the user account function. You can enter or check
the memo for the current user account.
Edit User Accounts:

Opens the Edit User Accounts dialog box to edit the user account. This function
is only available when the user account is not set or the currently logged on user
is an Administrator. Refer to “Creating a New User Account” in this section.
Help Menu
Help Topics:
Not available in this version.
About:
Displays information about the NeuroWorkbench.
Option Buttons
Registered optional programs are displayed as buttons at the bottom of the Main
window. You can open a program by pressing the button for it.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Examination Workflow Using NeuroWorkbench
Following is the workflow using NeuroWorkbench. The icons beside each step
are displayed beside the examinations in the Workbench tab page and show the
workflow status. This icons are automatically assigned when the examination 4
workflow stage changes. To change the workflow status icons manually, refer to
“Changing the Workflow Status of an Examination” in Section 8.
1. Start the NeuroWorkbench

Turn the instrument on and double-click the EEG-1200 icon on the desktop.
2. Select the Workbench tab page

Select the Workbench tab page on the main window.
3. Enter a schedule (schedule)

Create a new schedule. Refer to “Entering a New Schedule” in Section 8.
4. Start examination (now examining)

Select a schedule, click the Examination function button and select the
protocol to start examination.
To start examination, refer to “Starting an Examination from a Schedule” in

Section 8.
To set up the protocol buttons, refer to “Edit Menu” in this section.
For details on examination, refer to Section 6 “Acquisition Program”.
5. End measurement
Stop measuring and save the measurement file in the instrument.
6. Start review (reviewing)

Select the examination to review from the Workbench tab page or Data
Manager tab page and click the Review function button. Edit measurement
files or add comments if necessary.
For details on review, refer to Section 7 “Review Program”.
7. End review (completed)

When reviewing finishes, click the Review End function button.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Menu Window for EEG Examination
The menu window for EEG examination has various examination protocol
buttons to open different EEG examination windows. You can set different
measurement settings for each examination window.
Examination protocol button
Protocol Button – Pop-up Menu

You can open the Protocol button – pop-up menu by right-clicking the
examination protocol button.
Edit Menu:
Opens the Edit Menu dialog box. For details on the Edit Menu window, refer to
“Edit Menu Window” in this section.
Settings:
Opens the EEG Protocol Settings dialog box to set the examination settings.
Refer to “Setting Up the Acquisition System” in Section 5.
Import:
Imports the EEG examination protocol settings.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Export:
Exports the EEG examination protocol settings.
Copy:
Copies the protocol settings. To paste the protocol, right-click the protocol button
to copy and select “paste” from the pop-up menu.
4
Paste:
Pastes the protocol settings. This command is available when you right-click a
protocol button and select “copy” from the pop-up menu.
Initialize this protocol:

Restores the previously saved protocol settings for the selected button. To restore
the protocol button, the menu settings have to be saved. Refer to “Setting the
Current Menu as the Default” in this section.
Delete this protocol:

Deletes the protocol settings for the selected protocol button and makes the
selected protocol button blank.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
User Accounts
The log on account function requires the user to log on with a password in order
to use NeuroWorkbench functions.
Use this function to restrict the users who can edit patient information and
measured data or review measured data.
Creating a New User Account

For setting details on user accounts using Edit User dialog box, refer to
“Changing User Account Settings” in this section.
1. From the Edit menu, select “Edit User Accounts...”. The Edit User Accounts
dialog box opens.
2. Click the “Enable user accounts service” check box on the Edit User
Accounts dialog box.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
3. Click the Add button. The Edit User dialog box opens.
4. Enter the user information and password in the user account area.
5. Select the access rights in the Access Rights area.
6. Change the settings such as function access rights.
7. Click the OK button to close the Edit User dialog box.
8. In the Edit User Accounts dialog box, click the Apply button, then click the
OK button.
To cancel the setting, click the Cancel button.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Editing and Deleting User Accounts

Explanation of the User Account Dialog Box
A new user account can be created with the Edit User Accounts dialog box. To
open the Edit User Accounts dialog box, select “Edit User Accounts...” from the
Edit menu. Any user in the Administrator group can create a new user account.
Enable user accounts service:

Check this box to enable the user account function.
Add:
Opens the Edit User dialog box to add a new user.
Delete:
Deletes the selected user account.
Edit:
Opens the Edit User dialog box for the selected user to display the account
settings.
Screen lock:
Check the “If the specified time passes, the system is locked automatically”
check box to close the Main window automatically when there is no user
action for the specified time. When the Main window is closed, the “Log on
to NeuroWorkbench” dialog box opens. This function is not available when
the Acquisition or Review program is open.
Adding a User Account

Check the “Enable user account service” check box on the Edit User Account
dialog box and click the Add button. The Edit User dialog box opens. Set the
details and click the OK button. For details on the Edit User dialog box, refer to
“Changing User Account Settings” in this section.
Deleting a User Account

Select an account on the Edit User Account dialog box and click the Delete
button.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Editing a User Account

Select an account on the Edit User Account dialog box and click the Edit button.
The Edit User dialog box opens. Change the details and click the OK button. For
details on the Edit User dialog box, refer to “Changing User Account Settings” in
this section.
4
Using the Active Directory Accounts when Logging in to NeuroWorkbench
You can use the AD (Active Directory) domains in your facility when logging in
to NeuroWorkbench.
When “Enable Active Directory Login” on the Edit User Accounts window is on,
the Domain text box appears when you log in to NeuroWorkbench. You can log
in to NeuroWorkbench with the user name and password set in Active Directory
in your facility.
To use AD accounts, on the Edit User Accounts window, check the “Enable
Active Directory settings” check box and set the necessary settings on the Active
Directory Settings window.
For details on settings for AD accounts, refer to Section 8 of the

NeuroWorkbench operator’s manual.
NOTE
To use Active Directory when logging in to NeuroWorkbench, consult the
network administrator of your facility.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Changing User Account Settings

Details on a user account such as access rights can be changed using the Edit
User dialog box. To open the Edit User dialog box, click the Add button on the
Edit User Accounts dialog box.
User Account area
Entering User Name and Password

Enter the user name, description and password in the user account area.
Setting Access Rights

Select access rights from the Access Rights area.
Explanation of the Access Rights area

Administrator: Only an administrator can open the Edit User Account dialog box
and manage the user accounts. Any operation is allowed.
Normal: Some functions such as editing user accounts and saving default
of the main window settings are limited.
Browse: Not used for this version of EEG.
Selecting a Reference Account

You can apply the same account settings as another user by selecting an existing
user account as a reference account. You can quickly create a new account by
selecting a reference account and changing the user name and password.
To select a reference account, click the arrow button beside the Reference
Account text box.
The settings such as function access rights depend on the settings of the reference
account. The settings of accounts which are based on a reference account
automatically change when the settings of their reference account change.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Explanation of the Reference Account pull-down list

Nothing: Does not select a reference account.
Setting the Patient Information Security

These settings are not available for EEG.
4
Setting Function Access Right
To allow or deny access to different functions, uncheck the check boxes
in the Workbench and Data Manager areas of the Function Access Rights
area. The function button for the function with the unchecked check box
becomes grey and cannot be used. For the Workbench tab page, you can
limit the available functions for each mode.
Function Access Rights area

Workbench: Selects the function buttons available on the Workbench
tab page.
Change Workflow Status:
Check this check box to allow the user to change the
workflow status.
Show “Under Exam” Status on Review:
To display the “Now Examination” status examinations on
the data list in the Review mode, check this check box.
Data Manager: Selects the function buttons available on the Data
Manager tab page.
Enable Data Manager:
To use Data Manager, check this check box.
Edit Database: Enables editing information of the examinations in the
data list.
Allow examination start with protocol button:
Check this button to use examination protocol buttons.
When this box is unchecked, all examination protocol
buttons are disabled and examination cannot be
performed.
Setting Weekly Schedule Functions

Check the check boxes in the Weekly Schedule area to allow the user to add
comments to a schedule or change the schedule status to “attention” or “locked”.
Selecting Available Examinations

To limit reviewing or performing examinations for a specified category, click
the arrow button beside the text boxes in the examination area and select the
restriction level from the pull-down list.
Explanation of the Examination area

Available: Enables all operations for the examination category.
Visible: Enables only review functions and disables performing
examination and editing data for the examination category.
Not available: Disables all operations for the category.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Selecting the Default Examination for a New Examination Schedule

You can select the examination which is initially selected when you create a
new examination schedule by clicking the New Schedule function button on the
Workbench tab page.
To change the default examination, click the arrow button beside the Default
select the examination category in the Examination area.
Setting Report Application Security

To limit available functions or change the settings for the NeuroReport program,
uncheck the check boxes or fill in the text boxes in the Report Application
Security area. For details of the NeuroReport program, refer to the NeuroReport
operator’s manual.
Explanation of the Report Application Security area

Confirm/Review Settings:
When the Use Password check box is checked, the user needs to enter the
password when confirming or reviewing reports.
Review Button
Enable: Enables the Review button on the ReportViewer window.
Close: Automatically closes the ReportViewer window when the
Review button on the ReportViewer window is clicked.
Confirm Function
Enable: Enables the Confirm button on the ReportViewer window.
Close: Automatically closes the ReportViewer window when the
Confirm button on the ReportViewer window is clicked.
Finalize: Finalize the report when the Confirm button on the
ReportViewer window is clicked.
Print: Check the check box to permit printing reports.

Export:
Check the check box to permit exporting reports.
Edit Report after Finalize:
Check the check box to permit editing finalized reports.
Template Edit Mode:
Select Standard or Advanced. Advanced cannot be used for this version.
Digital Signature:
Check the Enable check box to use digital signatures.
P12 or PFX file path: Select the digital signature (P12 or PFX) file.
Limiting the Applications

You can disable optional applications that are assigned to the option buttons
using the allowed application area.
The factory default is all applications enabled and “All” is displayed in the
Allowed Application area.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Specifying Allowed Applications

1. Click “All” in the Allowed Applications text box and click the Delete button.
2. Enter the file name of the allowed applications in the text box.
Example: ReviewSetting.exe
Click the Add button to add the application to the list. 4
Enabling All Applications

Enter “All” in the text box and the click the Add button.
Limiting Patients Displayed in the Patient List and Data List

Patients can be included or not included according to
physician, operator or department by using the patient filter
in the Allowed Patient Display area. Only patients that
meet all filter criteria are displayed in the patient list.
Adding a Patient Filter

1. Click the Add button in the Allowed Patient Display area. The Edit Patient
Filter window opens.
2. Enter the operator, physician and department in the text boxes and click the
OK button. The filter is displayed in the list in the Allowed Patient Display
area.
To cancel adding a patient filter, click the Cancel button.
Editing a Patient Filter

1. Select a filter in the Allowed Patient Display area and click the Edit button.
The Edit Patient Filter window opens.
2. Change the operator, physician or department and click the OK button.
To cancel editing, click the Cancel button.
Deleting a Patient Filter

Select a filter in the Allowed Patient Display area and click the Delete button. If
the patient filter list is blank, all patients are included in the patient list.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Edit Menu Window
Opening the Edit Menu Window

You can change the tab page and protocol button settings from the Edit Menu
window.
To open the Edit Menu window, select “Edit Menu” from the Edit menu on the
NeuroWorkbench main window or right-click the protocol button and select
“Edit Menu” from the pop-up menu.
Edit Menu Window

List
Tab Page
Protocol area
Protocols
Category area
Not used
Category
text box

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Adding a New Tab Page

Select an examination type to add from the examination category text box and
click the Add Category button.
A new category appears in the list and a new tab page is added to the
NeuroWorkbench main window.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Deleting a Tab Page

1. Select an examination type to delete from the list and click the “Delete this
category” button in the Category area.
A confirmation message appears.
2. Click the Yes button.
The selected category is deleted from the list and the NeuroWorkbench main
window.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Changing the Order of Tab Pages

Select the tab page to move and click the Up or Down button in the Category
area.
The selected tab page moves up or down and the order of the tab pages changes.
Changing the Name of a Tab Page

Select a tab page from the list and enter the new name in the Category name of
the Category area.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Importing Tab Pages

1. Close the Acquisition and Review windows.
2. Select Load from the File menu. The Load dialog box opens.
3. Select a NeuroWorkbench setting file (extension: *.MMS) or setting file for

an examination protocol tab page (extension: *.EEGC) and click the OK
button.
Exporting Tab Pages

Saving All Tab Page Settings
1. Select “Save all settings” from the File menu. The Save As dialog box opens.
2. Enter the file name in the File name text box and click the Save button. The
file is saved as a NeuroWorkbench setting file (extension: *.MMS).

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Saving the Current Tab Page Settings

This function is not available on the Data Manager and Workbench page.
1. Select “Save selected settings” from the File menu. The Save As dialog box
opens.
2. Enter the file name in the File name text box and click the Save button. The
file is saved as a category file (extension: *.EEGC).
Setting the Current Menu as the Default

NOTE
There are no factory default menu settings. To restore the settings, save
the menu settings after you customize the menu settings.
You can use save the current tab page and protocol button settings as the default.
Click the “Set this menu as default” button on the Edit Menu dialog box.
If you enter a password at log in, the confirmation window opens. Enter the
password and click the OK button.
Restoring the Default Menu

NOTE
If there is no saved menu file, the menu settings cannot be restored. To
save the menu settings, refer to “Setting the Current Menu as the Default”
in this section.
To restore the default menu, click the “Initialize to default menu” button on the
Edit Menu window. For saving a new default, refer to “Setting the Current Menu
as the Default” in this section.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Restoring the Previous Tab Page and Protocol Button Settings

You can restore the previous tab page and protocol button settings. Select
“Restore previous settings” from the File menu.
Setting Up Protocol Buttons

1. Select the protocol and click the “Use this protocol” button in the Protocol
area.
2. Enter the protocol name and protocol sub title.
To use the protocol as the startup protocol, check “Use as Startup Protocol”.
Not used

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Opening the EEG System Settings Window to Change EEG System

Settings
Select the protocol and click the “Settings...” button or right-click the protocol
button on the tab page and select “Settings...” from the pop-up menu.
To change the EEG system settings, refer to Section 5 “System Program”.

4
Click the OK button to close the EEG Protocol Settings window.
Copying a Protocol Button

1. On the tab page, right-click the protocol button to copy and select Copy from
the pop-up menu.
2. Right-click the protocol button to paste to and select Paste from the pop-up
menu.
Deleting a Protocol Button

1. Select the protocol to delete in the Edit Menu window.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
2. Click the “Delete this protocol” button in the Protocol area.
The confirmation message appears.
3. Click the Yes button. The selected protocol is deleted.
You can delete a protocol button by right-clicking the protocol button on the tab
page and selecting the Delete from the pop-up menu.
Importing a Protocol
Select a protocol in the list and click the Import button in the Protocol area or
right-click the protocol button on a tab page. The Open dialog box opens.
Select a protocol file (extension: .EGP) and click the OK button.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Exporting a Protocol
Select a protocol and click the Export button in the Protocol area. The Save As
dialog box opens.
Select the folder to save the protocol file (extension: EGP) and click the Save
button. The selected protocol is saved as a protocol file.
4
Initializing a Protocol Button

You can restore a protocol button to the user default settings.
NOTE
“Unused” protocols cannot be initialized.
In the Edit Menu window, select a protocol and click the “Initialize this protocol”
button in the Protocol area.
Or,
Right-click a protocol button and select “Initialize this protocol” from the pop-up
menu. The default settings are restored.
For EMG/EP, if the protocol type selected in the Protocol text box differs from
the default protocol type, a confirmation message appears. Click the Yes button
to restore the default settings and the No button to cancel initializing.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Preventing Changes to Protocol Button Settings in the Acquisition Program

NOTE
Only a user who has an administrator account can enable this function.
Protocol settings can also be changed in the Acquisition Program. To prevent

other users from changing settings, you can require a password to change the
protocol settings.
When this setting is on, a confirmation message appears when you close the
Acquisition program and the protocol settings can be changed only when you
enter the correct password.
1. In the Edit Menu window, check the “Confirm changing protocol settings at
exam end” check box.
2. Enter the password in the Password text box.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Setting the Preset Number of Copies for CD/DVD Disks
When you archive or copy the data onto CD/DVD disks using the Workbench or
Data Manager page of NeuroWorkbench, the preset number of copied disks are
created. Set the number of copies before copying or archiving. 4
1. Click the (Start) button on the task bar to open the menu.
2. On the menu, select “All Programs → Nihon Kohden → Tools →

NeuroWorkbench Settings” to open the NeuroWorkbench Setting window.
3. On the Copies setting in the Disk burning settings (except for DVD-RAM)
area, enter the number of copies with the keyboard or select the number by
clicking the arrow buttons beside the text box.
NOTE
To prevent data loss, set the preset number of copies to 2 or more.
4. Check the Verify after burning box in Disk burning settings (except for
DVD-RAM) area.
5. Click the Apply button on the NeuroWorkbench settings window to apply

the settings and close the window.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
Using Optional Programs
To use an optional program, you have to assign the optional program to an option
button. Assign the optional program using the Main Menu Setting window and
the Setting Option Button window.
You can also rename or clear option buttons.
Opening the Setting Option Button Window

1. Click the (Start) button on the task bar to open the menu.
2. On the menu, select “All Programs → Nihon Kohden → Tools →

NeuroWorkbench Settings” to open the NeuroWorkbench Setting window.
3. Click the Option Buttons button on the NeuroWorkbench Setting window.

The Option Buttons window opens.
Assigning or Changing an Optional Program

1. In the Option Buttons window, click the option button to assign or change an
optional program. The selected button is highlighted.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
2. Click the Assign/Change button. The Option Button Functions window

opens.
3. Select the optional program from the Functions list box and click the OK
button. The selected optional program is displayed on the selected option
button.
Renaming an Option Button

1. In the Option Buttons window, click the option button to rename. The
selected button is highlighted.
2. Click the Rename button. The Rename Buttons window opens.

4. NEUROWORKBENCH
3. Enter a new name in the New Name text box and click the OK button. The
option button is renamed.
Clearing an Option Button

1. In the Option Buttons window, click the option button to clear. The selected
button is highlighted.
2. Click the Clear button. A confirmation message opens.
3. Click the OK button. The selected option button is cleared.

Section 5 System Program
General................................................................................................................................................................. 5.4
Opening the System Program.............................................................................................................................. 5.5 5
Setting Up the Acquisition System............................................................................................................. 5.5
Setting Up the Review System................................................................................................................... 5.6
System Program Window........................................................................................................................... 5.7
Closing the System Program................................................................................................................................ 5.9
Programming Patterns........................................................................................................................................ 5.10
General..................................................................................................................................................... 5.10
Opening the Pattern Table........................................................................................................................ 5.10
Selecting the Pattern................................................................................................................................ 5.10
Changing the Pattern Name..................................................................................................................... 5.11
Changing the Montage............................................................................................................................. 5.11
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation.................................................................................. 5.12
Changing an Amplifier Setting.................................................................................................................. 5.13
Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform..................................................................................................... 5.14
Changing a Waveform Color.................................................................................................................... 5.14
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform.................................................................................. 5.15
Annotating a Channel with a Comment.................................................................................................... 5.15
Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar.................................................................... 5.16
Changing the Channel Spacing................................................................................................................ 5.16
Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals....................................................................... 5.17
Setting the Read-only Attribute for the Selected Pattern.......................................................................... 5.19
Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes............................................................................................ 5.20
When Using the WEE-1200 Wireless Input Unit and QI-123A Input Box Converter................................ 5.21
Editing Event List for Waveform Annotations and Item List in the Patient Information Window.......................... 5.23
Editing the Event List for Waveform Annotations...................................................................................... 5.23
Setting the Annotation Color.......................................................................................................... 5.23
Setting Periodic Annotations.......................................................................................................... 5.24
Editing the Item List in the Patient Information Window........................................................................... 5.25
Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box................................................................................. 5.26
General..................................................................................................................................................... 5.26
Opening the System Settings Dialog Box................................................................................................ 5.26
Settings in the General Page................................................................................................................... 5.27
Selecting Storage Drive................................................................................................................. 5.27
Changing Montage Description...................................................................................................... 5.28
Selecting EEG Sampling Frequency.............................................................................................. 5.28
Changing the Waveform Display Size............................................................................................ 5.28
Automatically Saving the Waveforms............................................................................................. 5.28
Using the Current System Settings in the Review Program........................................................... 5.28
Saving the Current System Settings with a Part of EEG Waveforms............................................. 5.29
Selecting AC Line Frequency......................................................................................................... 5.29
Selecting Reference Electrodes for Skin-Electrode Impedance Check......................................... 5.29
Selecting Reference Electrode for Saved EEG Data..................................................................... 5.29

Displaying the Patient Image.......................................................................................................... 5.29
Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring................................................. 5.30
Settings in the Junction Box, Operation, Display Page............................................................................ 5.32
Resetting the Settings When Pattern Changes.............................................................................. 5.32
Selecting the Pattern Number When Group Changes................................................................... 5.32
Selecting the Limitation of the Skin-electrode Impedance Check Time......................................... 5.33
Selecting the Electrode Junction Box Time Constant.................................................................... 5.33
Selecting the Dynamic Range for the Electrode Junction Box....................................................... 5.33
Selecting the Operation Mode of the Impedance Preset Key........................................................ 5.33
Selecting the Time Interval of the HV Timer and Post HV Timer Event.......................................... 5.33
Using Acquisition Instrument Pattern............................................................................................. 5.33
Selecting the Page Display Time.................................................................................................... 5.33
Selecting the Operation Mode of the Reset Button/Switch............................................................ 5.34
Selecting the Time Constant Display Format................................................................................. 5.34
Selecting the Range of Selectable High Cut Filter Frequencies.................................................... 5.34
Substituting the Sensitivity 2.5 for the Sensitivity 3........................................................................ 5.34
Entering the Event Name for High Speed Review......................................................................... 5.34
Selecting the Way of Overwriting, Sound and Transmitter Number for Wireless Transmitter......... 5.34
Settings in the Standard Page.................................................................................................................. 5.35
Selecting the Pattern and the ACC Amplifier Settings in Acquisition............................................. 5.35
Selecting the Pattern and the ACC Amplifier Settings in Review................................................... 5.35
Selecting the Calibration Mode...................................................................................................... 5.35
Selecting the Automatic EEG Waveform Recording Mode............................................................. 5.36
Selecting the Default for Timer Mode............................................................................................. 5.36
Selecting the Impedance Threshold............................................................................................... 5.36
Selecting the Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation Settings..................................................... 5.36
Selecting the Waveform Display Speed......................................................................................... 5.36
Selecting Whether or Not to Record the Calibration Waveform..................................................... 5.36
Selecting the AC Filter Setting....................................................................................................... 5.37
Selecting Whether or Not to Display the Patient Image................................................................. 5.37
Settings in the DC Input/Output, Pen Recorder Page.............................................................................. 5.37
Selecting the DC Input Sensitivity.................................................................................................. 5.37
Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition......................................................................... 5.39
General..................................................................................................................................................... 5.39
Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition............................................................... 5.39
Selecting and Saving the DC Input Channels.......................................................................................... 5.40
Switching Multiple Connectors and Bipolar Terminals.............................................................................. 5.42
Setting BN Electrodes.............................................................................................................................. 5.42
Programming EEG Recording Navigation.......................................................................................................... 5.43
Changing the Acquisition Window and Review Window Display Settings.......................................................... 5.45
Opening the Color, Text, Size, Other Dialog Box...................................................................................... 5.45
Settings in the Color Page........................................................................................................................ 5.46
Settings in the Text, Size Page................................................................................................................. 5.47
Settings in the Transparency Page........................................................................................................... 5.48
Settings in the Window Items Size Page.................................................................................................. 5.49
Settings in the Other Page....................................................................................................................... 5.49
Setting the Digital Video Recording Settings...................................................................................................... 5.52
Setting the Wireless Input Unit Settings............................................................................................................. 5.53
Setting the Input Box Converter Settings........................................................................................................... 5.53

Adding the Optional Program Command to the Option Menu............................................................................ 5.54
Saving the System Program Settings in a File................................................................................................... 5.55
Loading System Program Settings from a File................................................................................................... 5.56
Resetting All System Program Settings to the Factory Default Settings............................................................ 5.57
Changing the Electrode Junction Box................................................................................................................ 5.58
Saving the EEG Data in the Extended File Format.................................................................................. 5.58
Transferring Data from a Bedside Monitor................................................................................................ 5.58
Limitation of the Number of Electrodes to be Saved according to the Sampling Frequency.................... 5.59
Multi Channel Display Settings........................................................................................................................... 5.64 5
List of Factory Default Settings........................................................................................................................... 5.65
Patterns.................................................................................................................................................... 5.65
Other Patterns.......................................................................................................................................... 5.73
Automatic Photic Stimulation Settings...................................................................................................... 5.73
EEG Recording Navigation...................................................................................................................... 5.74
Explanation of Menu........................................................................................................................................... 5.75
File Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 5.75
Junction Box Menu................................................................................................................................... 5.75
Help Menu................................................................................................................................................ 5.76

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
General
You can change the following settings with the System program. These settings
are automatically saved in memory. The Acquisition program and the Review
program use these settings. These settings can be saved in a file or called up from
the file.
• EEG pattern settings

• Automatic photic stimulation settings (Photic stimulator is an optional unit)
• Contents of the table list of the Patient Information and Annotation dialog box
• Settings in the System Settings dialog box
• Electrodes setting used for waveform acquisition
• Settings for EEG recording Navigation
• Long term EEG waveform monitoring settings
• Automatic EEG waveform recording settings
• Access point settings of the optional WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit*
• Optional QI-122A or QI-123A Input Box Converter settings*
• Optional QP-110AK Digital Video Software and QV-101A Digital Video Unit
setting
• Optional software settings
• Detailed settings for the circumstances
• Save or read the settings
• Change the type of the electrode junction box
* You can use either the WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit or the QI-122A or
QI-123A Input Box Converter. The system setting display changes depending
on the connected unit.
NOTE
System Program settings cannot be changed while the Acquisition or
Review program is open.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Opening the System Program
To set up the system, follow the instructions below. Acquisition settings and
Review settings are set separately.
Setting Up the Acquisition System 5

1. Right click the protocol button. A pop-up menu appears.
2. Select Settings from the pop-up menu. The EEG Protocol Settings window
opens.
Acquisition ID:
Not used. Do not change.
Not used.
3. Click the System settings button. The System Program window opens.
4. Click a button to open each setting window. For details of each setting, refer
to “System Program Window” in this section.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Setting Up the Review System

1. Click the Review Settings button at the bottom left of the NeuroWorkbench
main window.
The Review Setting window opens. Check the “Read setting file” check box
if necessary.
Enables long term review. You
cannot change patient information
during the long term reviewing. To
change the patient information in
the long term EEG files, uncheck
this box.
Check this box to read the

file with the conditions
when acquired.
Check or uncheck this box to

switch between MultiView and
EEGFocus.
2. Click the System Setting button. The System Program window opens.
3. Click a button to open each setting window. For details of each setting, refer
to the next “System Program Window” section.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
System Program Window

Click the button on the System Program window to open each setting window.
The display changes according to the electrode junction box selected in the
Junction Box menu in the menu bar.
When JE-921A is selected in the Junction Box menu. When JE-011A/012A/013A electrode junction box
(with WEE-1000 wireless input unit) is selected in the
Junction Box menu.
When “Use Input box converter (QI-122A)” or “Use When “Use JE-120A” is selected in the Junction Box menu.
Input box converter (QI-123A)” is selected in the
Junction Box menu.
Pattern
Opens the Pattern table. The instrument contains 36 patterns per set file. The
pattern is the combination of the settings: montage setting, amplifier settings
(sensitivity, time constant, high-cut filter and calibration voltage), waveform
display on/off, waveform color, amplitude limitation of the waveform and
comment setting for each channel. You can change the settings for each pattern.
Photic
Opens the Photic Stimulation dialog box. The instrument has three
programmable automatic photic stimulation modes (Auto 1, Auto 2 and Auto 3)
with up to 30 steps each. You can change the photic stimulation frequencies for
each step. (When using optional photic stimulator control unit)
Table
Opens the Table Items dialog box to change or add contents (texts) of the table
list on the Patient Information dialog box and Annotation dialog box.
Receiver
Opens the Receiver dialog box to select the access point settings. This function is
only available when the optional WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit is installed.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Input box converter

Sets the IP address of the optional input box converter when using the optional
QI-122A or QI-123A Input Box Converter.
JE-120A
Sets the IP address of the optional input box converter when using the optional
QI-123A Input Box Converter and the JE-120A Electrode Junction Box. For
details, refer to the operator’s manual of the JE-120A electrode junction box and
QI-123A input box converter.
Color/Character
Opens the Color/Character dialog box to change the Acquisition window and
Review window display settings.
System
Opens the System Settings dialog box to change the several options provided in
the instrument.
Electrodes
Opens the Electrodes to be Saved dialog box to select the electrodes that are used
for waveform acquisition. The instrument saves the waveforms as an electrode
potential for each electrode.
Navigation
Opens the Navigation dialog box to select the automatic EEG waveform
recording mode and settings. You can select the pattern, recording time and
activation settings for each stage.
Digital Video
Opens the DV Configuration dialog box to set the optional QP-110AK Digital
Video Software and QV-101A Digital Video Unit setting. For the setting, refer to
each operator’s manual.
Optional Software
Opens the Optional Software dialog box to add the optional program command
to the option menu. For detailed settings, refer to the operator’s manual for the
optional program.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Closing the System Program
1. Select Close from the File menu to close the System Program window.
The EEG Protocol Settings window becomes active when changing

acquisition settings.
5
The Review Setting window appears when changing review settings.
Acquisition ID
Not used. Do not change.
Not used.
Enables long term review. You

cannot change patient information
during the long term reviewing. To
change the patient information in
the long term EEG files, uncheck
this box.
Check this box to read the

file with the conditions
when acquired.
Check or uncheck this box to

switch between MultiView and
EEGFocus.
2. Click the OK button to save the settings and close the window. The new
settings become available when using the protocol button or starting the
Review program the next time.
Click the Cancel button to cancel the acquisition settings. Settings in the
System Program window are not saved when the settings are canceled.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Programming Patterns
General
The instrument contains 36 patterns per set file. The pattern is the combination of
the settings: montage setting, amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant, high-
cut filter and calibration voltage), waveform display on/off, waveform color,
amplitude limitation of the waveform and comment setting for each channel. You
can change the settings for each pattern. During acquisition or review, you can
temporarily change pattern settings without losing the original pattern settings.
Opening the Pattern Table

Click the Pattern button in the System Program window. The Pattern table opens.
Selected electrode junction box
You can change settings of all channels

at a time. Click header of the column to
show the setting list and select item to
change the settings.
You can check this box to prevent the

pattern settings from accidentally being
changed during review.
From the File menu, you can do the following operations.

Import: Calls up the pattern settings which were saved in a file.
Export: Saves the current pattern settings as a file.
Print this pattern: Prints the current pattern settings.
Selecting the Pattern

1. Click the Pattern box arrow. The Pattern name list box opens.
2. Click the pattern name. The selected pattern table opens on the table and the
selected pattern name is displayed in the Edit pattern name text box.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing the Pattern Name

1. Click the Edit pattern name text box. The cursor appears in the box.
2. Type in the new name with up to 6 characters. The old pattern name is
replaced with the new name.
Changing the Montage

5
2. Click a pattern name. The selected pattern opens on the table.
3. Select the electrode(s) to change on the pattern table. All selected electrodes
are highlighted. The Montage dialog box opens.
To select one electrode:

Click the electrode name on the table.
To select two or more consecutive channels:

Drag the cursor to select the electrodes.
To select all channel electrodes:

Click the G1 or G2 button at the top of the column.
Montage
To change the G1 or G2 electrode continuously:
Uncheck the “Set G1 and G2 alternately” check box.
Electrode position layout 4. Click an electrode in the electrode position layout to select.
The selected G1 or G2 electrode(s) is replaced with the selected
new electrode.
0 V button:
When this is set to the G1 or G2 electrode, the channel displays
the potential between the system reference electrodes (C3/C4)
and selected electrode – whichever G1 or G2 electrode is not set
to “0 V”.
TC:
When acquiring SpO2 signal, CO2 signal and/or DC signals from
an external instrument, set “TC” as follows on the pattern table.
Check to display JE-921A:

the montage map. SpO2 data: SpO2
ETCO2 data: EtCO2
Pulse wave: Pulse
5. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
NOTE
The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition must be selected
and saved on the Electrodes to be saved dialog box. Otherwise, you
cannot review the EEG waveform in a montage which includes unsaved
electrodes. Unselected electrodes are displayed in red on the pattern
table and electrode position layout. To save an electrode, refer to
“Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in this
section.
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation

2. Click the pattern name. The selected pattern opens on the pattern table.
3. Click the AV Derivation button. The Average Derivation Reference

Electrodes dialog box opens.
Electrode position layout
Electrode position layout:

The available electrode name is displayed on the electrode position layout.
The clicked (down) electrode is used for reference voltage calculation (AV
derivation). To add or delete an electrode on the electrode position layout,
click the electrode.
4. Click the electrode for AV derivation.
To delete all the electrodes for AV derivation, click the Initialize button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing an Amplifier Setting

NOTE
The selectable high-cut filter frequency settings depend on the sampling
frequency shown below.
Sampling Frequency (Hz) Selectable High-cut Filter

100 30 Hz*1 or less
200 60 Hz*2 or less
500 120 Hz or less 5
1000 300 Hz or less
2000 600 Hz or less
5000 1200 Hz or less
10000 3000 Hz or less
*1 Default setting. You can select 35 Hz instead of 30 Hz.

*2 Default setting. You can select 70 Hz instead of 60 Hz.
3. Select the Sens, TC, HF or Cal setting to change on the pattern table. The
selected setting is highlighted.
To select one setting:

Click the setting on the table.

Drag the cursor to select the settings.
To select the settings for all channels:

Click the Sens, TC, HF button at the top of the column.
The selection list box for the setting appears.

Amplifier setting
When acquiring SpO2 signal, CO2 signal and/or DC signals from an external
instrument, set “TC” as follow on the pattern table.
JE-921A
SpO2 data: SpO2
ETCO2 data: EtCO2
Pulse wave: Pulse
4. Click the new setting in the selection list box. The highlighted settings
change to the new settings.
5. Click the OK button to close the selection list.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Displaying/Not Displaying a Waveform

3. Select the channel to display or not display the waveform. The selected
channel is highlighted.
To select one channel:


To select all channels:

Click the Display button at the top of the column.
The selection list box for the display on/off appears.

Display
4. Click On or Off in the Display box.
5. Click the OK button to close the list box.
Changing a Waveform Color

3. Select the channel to change the waveform color. The selected channel is
highlighted.



Click the Color button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the color appears.
Color
4. Click the new color in the selection list box.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform

You can change the maximum amplitude of a waveform. When the waveform
exceeds the limit, it is clipped.
5
3. Select the channel to change the maximum amplitude. The selected channel
is highlighted.



Click the Width button at the top of the column.

The selection list box for the maximum amplitude appears.
Width
4. Click the new maximum amplitude in the selection list box.
Annotating a Channel with a Comment

You can show comments for each channel. The comment is displayed beside the
channel number on the waveform screen.
3. Select the channel to change the comment. The selected channel is

highlighted.



Click the Comment button at the top of the column.

The Channel Comment dialog box opens.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
4. Select or type the comment in the text box.
Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar

You can display either the montage or comment on the extended channel bar on
the Acquisition window and Review window.
3. Select the channel to change the item. The selected channel is highlighted.



Click the Ch bar button at the top of the column.
The selection dialog box for the extended channel bar appears.
4. Select “Montage” or “Comment” in the dialog box.

Channel bar
Changing the Channel Spacing

You can change the channel spacing. For example, 3 corresponds to 3 channel
space. This setting applies to the waveform display position “Even Layout”.
3. Select the channel to change the spacing. The selected channel is

highlighted.


Spacing
5. SYSTEM PROGRAM

Click the Spacing button at the top of the column. The selection list box for
the channel spacing appears.
4. Click the new channel spacing in the selection list box.
5
Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals
When the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box is used, DC input signals from an
external instrument can be displayed on the screen. You can convert the DC input
signal to the numeric value. The converted numeric value is displayed on the
extended channel bar.
1. Click the DC Conversion button on the pattern table. The DC Input

Conversion Display Setting dialog box opens.
Example: JE-921A
Initialize button
Change the settings to the factory default settings
2. Select the channel that you want to set. The “Set a Channel” dialog box
opens.
Selected channel
3. Select the input/output range, unit and number of scales. To change the
previous or next channel settings, use the Previous or Next channel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Dialog box options

Previous/Next channel:
Click this button to go to the previous or next channel.
On/Off:
Check this box to use the settings for the channel. When this box is checked,
the conversion values are displayed on the extended channel bar of the
Acquisition window and Review window.
Input/Output:
Enter the input range (low and high limit) and conversion value of the DC
input signal. The corresponding scales appear on the Acquisition window
and Review window when the extended channel bar is displayed.
Unit:
Select the unit for the conversion value.
Scale lines:
Select the number of scales between the low and high limits.
4. When all settings are complete, click the OK button. The Select a Channel
dialog box closes.
5. Click the OK button on the DC Input Conversion Display Setting dialog box.
DC Conversion Table
The conversion value changes depending on the connected units. Refer to the
operator’s manual for each unit.
Example 1 Example 2
Conversion Unit for
Input Calculated Input Calculated Descriptions
Value Calculation
(V) Value (V) Value
SpO2 × 100 % 0.8 80 1 100 For SpO2 conversion.
CPAP × 20 cm 0 0 1 20 For CPAP conversion.
For CPAP conversion.
The number in the end of
CPAP × 19.6 hPa1* 0 0 1 19.6 the unit (in this example:
1) stands for the decimal
places.
For ETCO2 conversion
when the JE-921A/AG
ETCO2 × 100 mmHg 0 0 1 100
electrode junction box is
used.
For ETCO2 conversion
when the JE-921A/AG
electrode junction box is
ETCO2 × 13.3 kPa1** 0 0 1 13.3 used. The number in the
end of the unit (in this
example: 1) stands for the
number of decimal places.
* The instrument calculates using 1 cmH2O = 0.950665 hPa.
** The instrument calculates using 1 mmHg = 0.13332 kPa.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Setting the Read-only Attribute for the Selected Pattern

On the Pattern Settings window, check the Read-only check box. The read-
only patterns are displayed in orange on the Pat list box on the Acquisition and
Review window and the Pattern Table for the Acquisition and Review programs.
You cannot change the settings of read-only patterns on the Review program.
Pat list box Pattern table

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Programming Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes
The instrument has three programmable automatic photic stimulation modes

(Auto 1, Auto 2, and Auto 3) with up to 30 steps each. You can change the photic
stimulation frequencies for each step.
NOTE
To use the photic stimulation, check the “Use photic stimulation” check
box on the “Photic Stimulation” dialog box. If the check box is not
checked, photic stimulation cannot be performed.
1. Click the Photic button in the System Program window. The Photic
Stimulation dialog box opens.
2. Check the “Use photic stimulation” check box and select the “EEG-1200
(LS-120A)/EEG-9000 (LS-901A)” radio button.
3. Select the step. A selected step is displayed as a dotted rectangle.
4. Select frequency from the Frequency list box. The figure in the dotted
rectangle is replaced with a selected frequency and you can set the next step.
• To select a new frequency, click the new frequency in the Frequency list
box.
• To clear all frequency settings, click the Clear button.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set the frequency for up to 30 steps if necessary.
6. Select the stimulation time and pause time for each stimulation mode.
7. Click the OK button to close the Photic Stimulation dialog box.
To cancel the setting, click the Cancel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
When Using the WEE-1200 Wireless Input Unit and QI-123A Input Box Converter
When performing the photic stimulation with the WEE-1200 wireless input unit
and QI-123A input box converter, change the settings as follows. Refer to the
manuals of the wireless input unit together with this manual.
1. Click the Photic button in the System Program window. The Photic
Stimulation dialog box opens.
2. Check the “Use photic stimulation” check box and select the “Input box
converter (QI-123A)” radio button.
3. Click the “Use TRIGGER OUT connector” or “Use PHOTO MARK

connector” radio button in the “Photic stimulation mark input to WEE-1200”
area according to the socket to which the trigger input cable is connected.
4. Check that the step, frequency, stimulation time and pause time are selected
and click the OK button. The Photic Stimulation dialog box closes.
5. Click the WEE-1200 button on the System Program window.

The WEE-1200 window appears.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
6. Click “QI-123A for connecting Photoic unit/PE-210A”. The QI-123A

window appears.
7. Set the IP address of the input box converter. For details, refer to the
operator’s manual of the JE-120A electrode junction box and QI-123A input
box converter.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Editing Event List for Waveform Annotations and Item List in

the Patient Information Window
Using the Tables Item window of the System program, you can customize the list
in the Annotation window displayed on the Acquisition and Review window and
item list of the Patient Information window. 5
Editing the Event List for Waveform Annotations

You can edit the event list in the Annotation window on the Acquisition and
Review window.
1. Click the Table button in the System Program window. The Table Items
window opens.
Group selection button
Text box
List box
2. Click the Event button on the top. The event list appears in the list box.
3. Select the item to edit or add from the list box and type a new event name in
the text box. Up to 40 items can be set and up to 40 characters can be entered
for one item.
4. Click the OK button to close the Table Items window.
Setting the Annotation Color

You can set the color for events. In the Color line settings at specified events
area, enter the event name and color. The annotations for the event in this list are
displayed in the Acquisition and Review window as a vertical line of the selected
color.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
1. Click the Color button. The Color window opens.
2. Select the desired color and click the OK button. The color is set for the
event.
You can register a custom color. Click the Define Custom Colors button
and make a color to register. Then click the Add Custom Colors button. The
color appears in the Custom colors column.
Setting Periodic Annotations

You can automatically enter events at fixed intervals.
1. Click any column of the Periodic Annotation. The Periodic Annotation

window appears.
2. Set Annotation, Interval and Offset.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Editing the Item List in the Patient Information Window

You can edit the item list displayed in the Patient Information window.
1. Click the Table button in the System Program window. The Table Items
window opens.
Group selection button
Text box
List box
2. Click the group selection button on the top to select the item list. The item
list appears in the list box.
3. Select the item to edit or add from the list box and type a new item in the
text box. Up to 40 items can be set and up to 40 characters can be entered for
one item.
4. Click the OK button to close the Table Items window.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box
General
The following sections explain the several options in the System Settings dialog
box. The System Settings dialog box has four pages to select:
• General settings
• Electrode junction box, operation and display settings
• Standard settings for measurements
• DC input/output and pen recorder settings*
* Pen recorder is not available for this instrument.
Opening the System Settings Dialog Box

1. Click the System button in the System Program window. The System
Settings dialog box opens.
2. To open a page, click the tab of the page. For details of each page, refer to
the instructions for each function in this section.
3. To close the System Settings dialog box, click the OK button.
To cancel setting, click the Cancel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Settings in the General Page
Not used
Selecting Storage Drive

Storage drive:
Select the drive in which to save the acquired waveforms and measurement data
(Default setting: drive D (hard disk)).
Automatic backup at file close:

Check this box to make a copy (backup) of the EEG data file when the EEG data
file is closed. To change the drive or folder, click the Change folder button.
Copy digital video files:

Check this box to make a copy of the patient image file. The patient image file is
saved in the same drive or folder as the backed up EEG data file.
This function is only available when a digital video software is installed.
Confirm before copying:

Check this box to show a confirmation message box before copying digital video
files.
NOTE
• Do not select the DVD drive as the storage drive.
• The “Automatic backup at file close” setting is not available when the
“Use long term monitoring” check box is checked.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing Montage Description

Montage description:
Select the montage description to display the EEG waveforms. You can rename
electrodes with up to 4 characters.
Selection list: 10-20 (default), NK (Nihon Kohden), User, etc.
NOTE
Select 10-20 in the montage description area on the General page in the
normal case. Electrode map cannot be displayed in the modes other than
10-20.
To change montage name or rename an electrode:

1. Click the Change button in the Montage description area. The Electrode
Name dialog box opens.
2. Select the montage.

• To define the electrode name, select User. You can define the electrode
name with up to 4 characters.
• To restore the default 10-20 electrode name, click the Initialize button.
• To rename the DC channel, click the DC channel button. Another dialog
box for DC channel rename opens. The DC03 to DC06 can be renamed.
This is available only when the JE-921A electrode junction box is used.
3. Click the OK button to close the Electrode Name dialog box.
Selecting EEG Sampling Frequency

Displays the selected sampling frequency in the System Settings – Electrode to
be Saved page. (Default setting: 500 Hz)
Changing the Waveform Display Size

Waveform display size:
Select the waveform display size with the number of dots per 50 µV. The default
setting is 19 dots/50 µV. To restore the setting to the default, click the Initialize
button.
Automatically Saving the Waveforms

Automatically save selected waves:
Check this box to automatically save the selected part of waveforms and patient
information when the Review window is closed.
Using the Current System Settings in the Review Program

Use current system settings in review:
Check this box to use the current system settings in the Review program.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Saving the Current System Settings with a Part of EEG Waveforms

Save current system settings with EEG data when exporting selected wave:
In the Review window, a part of EEG waveforms and its information can be
saved as a new file. Check this box to save the system settings in the file together
with part of the EEG waveforms. The EEG waveforms can be reviewed with the
saved system settings.
Selecting AC Line Frequency

5
AC filter:
Select the AC line frequency. This setting is used by the AC filter to reduce AC
interference.
Selection list: 50 Hz (default), 60 Hz
Selecting Reference Electrodes for Skin-Electrode Impedance Check

Reference electrodes for Imp check:
Select the reference electrodes for skin-electrode impedance check.
Selection list: A1/A2 (default), Fp1/Fp2, A11/A12*
* Only when the optional JE-120A electrode junction box is used. When using
JE-120A, reference electrode setting is fixed at A11/A12.
NOTE
The input jacks A1 and A2 (or FP1 and FP2) must be attached to the
patient for the electrode impedance check.
Selecting Reference Electrode for Saved EEG Data

Reference electrodes for EEG:
The reference electrodes (system reference) are set to C3/C4 for this instrument.
When using the JE-120A electrode junction box with the JE-125A mini flat
junction box, you can select COM instead of C3/C4.
NOTE
The input jacks C3 and C4 (or COM) must be attached to the patient for
EEG measurement even when C3 and C4 (or COM) are not programmed
in any montage.
Displaying the Patient Image

Patient image:
To record patient images, check the following check box when using the
QI-120A Camera Capture Unit, QP-110AK Digital Video Software, or
QV-101A Digital Video Unit (with WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit). Refer to the
operator’s manual for each instrument.
QV-101AA/AK
QI-120A QP-110AK
(for WEE-1000A/K)
Enable video camera
Show video window in review
To review the patient image with the Digital Video Player, check the Use video
link check box.
5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring

Long term monitoring:
The long term monitoring function lets you save long term EEG by linking
multiple EEG files. You can specify the recording time for one file up to a
maximum of 2 GB (when not using the extended file format). The recording time
depends on sampling frequency and number of the electrodes to be saved.
During long term monitoring, when a file reaches the specified recording time,
another file is automatically created and linked. The instrument continues
creating files until monitoring ends or the free disk space becomes low. The
instrument creates a “LIF file” which has the link information for the linked
long term EEG files. You can use the LIF file to review the long term EEG files
consecutively, as if they are one EEG file. Refer to “Long Term EEG Waveform
Monitoring” in Section 6.
To change the setting, click the stage, the Set a
Stage dialog box opens. Enter the storage drive for
EEG waveforms and the region for digital video
link for each stage.
Initialize
Restores the settings to the factory
default settings.
Dialog box options:

Stage/Storage drive region table
Storage drive:
Enter the storage drive to save the EEG waveforms. Up to 2 GB EEG data
file can be created for each stage (when not using the extended file format).
The maximum file size differs depending on the combination of the sampling
frequency and the number of electrodes to be saved. Properly select the sampling
frequency and the number of electrodes to be saved. Refer to “Disk Capacity”
in Section 1. If the file size exceeds 2 GB, the long term monitoring cannot be
started.
Recording time/stage:
Select the recording time per stage.
Maximum number of stages:

Select the number of stages.
Number of cycles of long term monitoring:

To repeat the long term EEG monitoring, check the “Keep repeating” check box.
You can also specify the number of repeat times.
5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Overlap time between stages:

Select the overlap time between the stages.
NOTE
Up to 180 seconds can be set for the overlap time.
Option area
Impedance check when stage changes:
Check this to automatically check the skin-electrode contact impedance at 5
the beginning of the stage. You can select from first or second stage to start
impedance check. The duration for impedance check can be selected with the
Duration list box.
Use Spike Detector or Reveal:

The QP-251AK Spike Detection Software can be used in the long term
monitoring (online spike detection). The time delay to start online spike
detection after the beginning of stage can be selected with the Time lag list box.
NOTE
The time delay must be set to 10 seconds or more. Otherwise, the spike
detection software may malfunction.
Spike Detector/Reveal
Spike Detector: For the Spike Detector version 2001.01.08NK or earlier
Reveal: For the Spike Detector version 0401 or later
Set Reveal protocol when LTM starts:

Refer to the QP-251AK Spike Detector Software operator’s manual.
Use Magic Marker:

Check this to use magic marker. This setting only applies when using the Magic
Marker software.
Create LIF file to merge stages in review:

Select to create the long term monitoring information (LIF) file. This file is used
to continuously review the long term EEG waveform monitoring data (saved as
different EEG data files for each stage) in the review program.
NOTE
If this check box is not checked, the LIF file is not created and you cannot
continuously review the long term EEG waveform monitoring data.
Use Auto Editor:

The QV-101A Digital Video Unit or QP-110AK Digital Video Software can be
used in the long term monitoring. The time delay to start saving the patient image
and EEG waveforms for each stage can be selected with the Time lag list box.
Enter the region of the video server (patient image recording area) for each stage
in the DV region column in the table. Refer to the QV-101A Digital Video Unit
or QP-110AK Digital Video Software Operator’s manual.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
NOTE
The time delay must be set to 10 seconds or more. Otherwise, the digital
video software may malfunction.
Settings in the Junction Box, Operation, Display Page
Resetting the Settings When Pattern Changes

Resets the following items when the pattern changes:
ON OFF
Reference electrode Temporary reference electrode settings Temporary reference electrode settings
(default: ON) are lost when you change the pattern. remain when you change the pattern.
AC filter The AC filter is turned off when you The AC filter setting remains when you
(default: OFF) change pattern. change pattern.
Override Temporary pattern setting is lost when Temporary pattern setting remains when
(default: ON) you change pattern. you change pattern.
Record timer The record timer is reset when you The record timer is not reset when you
(default: ON) change pattern. change pattern.
Selecting the Pattern Number When Group Changes

Pattern number when group changes:
When another pattern group is selected, there are two ways to select the pattern
number.
Selection list:
Return to one (default): Number 1 of the selected pattern group is selected.
Same: The same number as the current pattern number is
selected.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Selecting the Limitation of the Skin-electrode Impedance Check

Time
Impedance check:
Select the limitation of the skin-electrode impedance check time.
Selection list: No check, 10 min (default), 30 min
You can start impedance check when filing starts by checking the “Check before
filing” check box.
Selecting the Electrode Junction Box Time Constant 5

Electrode junction box time constant:
The time constant is set to 2 s for this instrument when the JE-921A electrode
junction box is used.
Selecting the Dynamic Range for the Electrode Junction Box

Select the dynamic range.
For electrode junction boxes other than JE-120A, this setting is fixed at
“+-3.2 mV”.
Selecting the Operation Mode of the Impedance Preset Key

Impedance threshold switch:
Select the operation mode of the Impedance preset key on the electrode junction
box.
Selection list: Ascending (2 → 5 → 10 → 20 → 50 kW),
Descending (50 → 20 → 10 → 5 → 2 kW)
Selecting the Time Interval of the HV Timer and Post HV Timer Event
HV timer event interval:
Select the time interval for the “HVT mm:ss” event of the HV timer and the
“POST HVT mm:ss” event of the Post HV timer.
Default setting: 30 s
Post HV auto end:

Selects the post hyperventilation time for the Post HV timer. When the selected
time is elapsed, the Post HV timer automatically stops.
Default setting: 300 s
Using Acquisition Instrument Pattern

Use acquisition instrument pattern:
In the EEG Scope – Remote mode, when the pattern is set to a pattern other
than “Trace at acquisition”, the EEG waveforms are displayed with the pattern
setting of this instrument. To use the current pattern settings of the acquisition
instrument, check this box.
Selecting the Page Display Time

Page display time:
Selects the pause time when reviewing the EEG waveforms continuously at
high speed. This setting applies to the Page Display Time setting in the Display
Control dialog box of the Review program.
Selection list: 0 to 10,000 ms in 1 ms step.
Default setting: Pause 1 (500 ms), Pause 2 (1000 ms), Pause 3 (2000 ms)

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Selecting the Operation Mode of the Reset Button/Switch

Reset switch function:
Select how the Reset button/switch is operated in the Acquisition.
Selection list:
Press and hold (default): The reset function is On while the mouse button is
pressed and held.
Single click: The reset function is on/off by clicking.
Selecting the Time Constant Display Format

Time constant:
Select the time constant display format and unit.
Selection list: seconds (time constant) (default), Hz (low-cut filter)
Selecting the Range of Selectable High Cut Filter Frequencies

High cut filter:
In the Acquisition and Review programs you can change the high-cut filter
frequency. The high-cut filter reduces frequency components over the selected
frequency. Select the frequencies.
Selection list: (30, 60) (default), (35, 70), (30, 70)
Substituting the Sensitivity 2.5 for the Sensitivity 3

Sens 3 or 2.5:
Check the “Substitute sensitivity 2.5 for sensitivity 3” check box when
substituting the sensitivity 2.5 for the sensitivity 3.
Entering the Event Name for High Speed Review

Add events in fast review:
When reviewing the EEG waveforms backward or forward in high speed on the
Review window, you can add an annotation to a waveform by pressing the “+”
key. Enter the event name (annotation) in the Event text box and the time when
the event is added to the waveform before pressing the “+” key.
Selecting the Way of Overwriting, Sound and Transmitter Number for

Wireless Transmitter
Do not overwrite/Overwrite/Overwrite until the MARK switch is pressed:
Select the way of overwriting.
Click sound when a button is pressed:

Check this box to turn the button sound on.
Transmitter number:
Enter a transmitter number.
For details on the setting of the wireless transmitter, refer to the WEE-1000
wireless input unit operator’s manual.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Settings in the Standard Page

The Acquisition program opens with the settings selected in the Standard page
on the System Settings dialog box. During waveform acquisition, you can restore
the changed settings to the settings in the Standard page by selecting “Standard”
from the Tool menu.
Selecting the Pattern and the ACC Amplifier Settings in Acquisition

Pattern and Amp settings in acquisition:
Select the pattern and ACC amplifier settings. These settings take effect when the
Acquisition program opens.
Default settings
Pattern: IA, CAL voltage: 50 µV, Sensitivity: 10 µV/mm,
Time constant: 0.3 s, High cut filter: 120 Hz
Selecting the Pattern and the ACC Amplifier Settings in Review

Pattern and Amp settings in review:
Select the pattern and ACC amplifier settings when the Review program opens.
Check the “Use standard review settings” check box and click the Setting button
to open the “Standard review setting” dialog box. Select Pattern, Reference,
Sensitivity, Time constant and High-cut filter and click the OK button.
Selecting the Calibration Mode

CAL:
Select the calibration mode when the Acquisition program opens.
Selection list: Auto square (default), Manual square, Auto sine, Manual sine

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Selecting the Automatic EEG Waveform Recording Mode

Navigation:
Select the default recording mode from the Navigation area.
Selection list: Previous setting (default), Manual recording, Adult examination,
Neonatal examination, Examination 3, Examination 4
For the automatic EEG waveform recording, refer to “Programming EEG
Recording Navigation” in this section.
Selecting the Default for Timer Mode

Timer mode:
Select the time mode from Latest, Manual, Record or HV.
Selecting the Impedance Threshold

Impedance check threshold:
Select the impedance threshold for skin-electrode impedance check when the
Acquisition program opens.
Selection list: 2, 5, 10 (default), 20, 50 kΩ
Selecting the Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation Settings

Photic/HV:
Select the photic stimulation and hyperventilation mode when the Acquisition
program opens.
Mode:
Select the default mode.
Selection list: Auto 1 (default), Auto 2, Auto 3, Manual, Single, HV
You can save the different stimulation time, pause, period and interval settings
for each mode.
Photic
Stimulation time: Type from 1 to 99 s in 1 second steps. (default: 10 s)
Pause: Type from 0 to 30 s in 1 second steps. (default: 10 s)
Hyperventilation
Period: Type from 1 to 5 min in 1 min steps. (default: 3 min)
Interval: Type from 1.5 to 5 s. (default: 3 s)
Selecting the Waveform Display Speed

Waveform display and paper recorder speed:
Select the waveform display speed when the Acquisition or Review program
opens.
Selection list: Latest setting (default), 5 s, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s, 5 min
The Paper speed option is not available for this instrument.
Selecting Whether or Not to Record the Calibration Waveform

Record CAL wave:
To record the calibration waveform when the Acquisition program opens, check
this box.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Selecting the AC Filter Setting

AC filter:
To turn the AC filter on when the Acquisition program opens, check this box.
Selecting Whether or Not to Display the Patient Image

Display patient image:
To display the patient image window on the screen when the Acquisition
program opens, check this box.
5
Settings in the DC Input/Output, Pen Recorder Page

When the JE-921A electrode junction box is used, up to 4 channels of DC signals
can be input from an external instrument. Settings for pen recorder are not
available for this instrument.
Selecting the DC Input Sensitivity

DC output sensitivity
Select the output sensitivity.
Selection list: 1.0 V/5 mm (default), 0.5 V/5 mm
DC input sensitivity at 200 mV/mm

Select the input sensitivity.
Selection list: 5 mm/1.0 V, 5 mm/0.5 V
Analog output in review

Output current pattern:
Check this box to output current pattern.
Output time mark:

Check this box to output time mark and select M1 or M2.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Mark position:
Select mark position.
(Default setting – PATTERN MARK: M2, SENS: M1, MARK: M1)
The following settings are not available for this instrument.

• Pen parking when not used
• Link Navigation with Filing and Recorder Unit
• Link Navigation with Filing
• Link Navigation with Recorder Unit
• Play button starts recording in review
• Extend pen reset period
• Stop feeding at paper fold

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition
General
The instrument saves the waveforms as an electrode potential for each electrode.
33 electrodes are default settings. The electrode that is not selected here is
displayed in red on the pattern table.
5
CAUTION
The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition must be
selected and saved in System program. If not, EEG waveforms
cannot be reviewed on the Review window.
Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition

1. Click the Electrodes button in the System Program window. The Electrodes
to be Saved dialog box – JE-921A page opens.
Electrode position layout table Selected montage description
Check mark appears in

the check box when the
electrode is selected
Sampling frequency
2. Click an electrode in the electrode position layout to save it.
3. Select the sampling frequency.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Dialog box option

Sampling frequency:
Select the sampling frequency considering the number of electrodes that
are used for waveform acquisition, recording time (filing time) and drive
capacity. Refer to “Disk Capacity” in Section 1.
Selection list: 100, 200, 500 (default), 1000 Hz
When you change the sampling frequency, the high cut filter frequency is
automatically changed to the optimum setting. (Sampling frequency should
be at least three times the high-frequency filter setting.) However, changing
the high cut filter frequency does not automatically change the sampling
frequency setting.
4. Click the OK button to close the Electrodes to be Saved dialog box. The
selected settings are saved in memory.
Selecting and Saving the DC Input Channels

1. Click the Electrodes button in the System Program window. The Electrodes
to be Saved dialog box selected in the Junction box menu opens.
2. Click the DC input tab to open the DC input page.

Selected montage description
To display the DC input channels,

set “TC” to “DC03 to DC06” on
the pattern table.
Dialog box option

Trigger setting:
The input signal from channel 3 to 6 can be used for a trigger. To select
the channel, open the Trigger selection dialog box by clicking the Trigger
column.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
3. Select the DC input channels for DC input signals, trigger channel and
sampling frequency. DC03 to DC06 can be selected for this instrument.
For sampling frequency, refer to “Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for
Waveform Acquisition” in this section.
To select the trigger channel:

i) Click the Trigger column. The Trigger dialog box opens.
ii) Select the channel. To select the previous or next channel, click the
Previous/Next button.
iii) Click the On check box when the selected DC channel is used for the
trigger channel.
iv) Select the Threshold voltage and Condition for triggering. To reset the
electrode junction box with the selected trigger signal, click the Reset
Input Box button.
v) Click the OK button to close the Trigger dialog box.
4. Click the OK button to close the Electrode to be Saved dialog box. The
selected settings are saved in automatically.
The DC input signals can be used for the trigger signals of the QP-211A Analysis
software FOCUS.
DC Input Channel FOCUS Trigger Channel

DC03 1
DC04 2
DC05 4
DC06 8

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Switching Multiple Connectors and Bipolar Terminals

Terminals X1 to X4 of the electrode junction box can be used for both multiple
connector and bipolar terminals. Switch the type of terminal if necessary.
1. Click the electrodes on the Electrodes to be Saved window and switch the
type of the terminal.
2. Click the OK button to close the Electrodes to be Saved window.
When the terminal is set as multiple connector, “EEG”

is displayed on the button.
When the terminal is set as bipolar terminal, “BP” is
displayed on the button.
Setting BN Electrodes
NOTE
This setting is only available for the JE-921A electrode junction box.
You can set PG1, PG2, T1 and T2 as a BN derivation electrode.
1. Check the “Use BN electrodes” check box.
2. Select the BN1 and BN2 electrodes from the list.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Programming EEG Recording Navigation
You can set several measurements as one routine in advance and record the series
of EEG data automatically. You can program the pattern, recording time, photic
stimulation mode, and so on for each stage.
1. Click the Navigation button in the System Program window. The Navigation 5
dialog box opens.
Dialog box options:

Stage change:
Only “Time” is available; “Fold” cannot be set for this instrument.
Time lag at photic stimulation/HV stage:

Select the delay time to start automatic photic stimulation and
hyperventilation.
Initialize:
Restores the settings to the factory default settings.
2. Select the automatic recording mode from the pull down menu in the left-top
of the dialog box.
3. Click any column of the stage to change and click the Stage Setting button.
Individual stage setting dialog box opens.
Click this icon to change

the icon.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
4. Select the settings for the Navigation mode. To change the previous or next
stage settings, use the Previous stage or Next stage button.
Dialog box options

Pattern:
Select the pattern.
Record time:
Select the recording time for the stage.
NOTE
Do not set the Record time to 0 min 0 sec. The navigation may stop
on the way.
Photic/HV:
Select the photic stimulation mode or hyperventilation mode.
Selection list: None, PS Auto1, PS Auto2, PS Auto3, PS Manual, PS Single,
HV
CAL:
Check this box to record the calibration waveforms for the stage.
Impedance Check:
Check this box to perform skin-contact impedance check when the stage is
started.
Pause:
Check this box to temporarily stop automatic recording when the stage is
end.
Paper:
Not available.
Set stage name and icon automatically:

Check this box to set stage name and icon automatically.
5. Repeat step 4 to change the settings for another stage.
6. Click the OK button to close the Individual stage setting dialog box.
7. Click the OK button to close the Navigation dialog box.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing the Acquisition Window and Review Window

Display Settings
This section explains how to change the component display settings in the
5
Opening the Color, Text, Size, Other Dialog Box

Click the Color/Character button in the System Program window. The Color,
Text, Size, Other dialog box opens.
• To open another page, click the tab of the page.

• To close the Color, Text, Size, Other Settings dialog box, click the OK button.
• To return the settings to the factory default settings, click the Initialize button.
• To cancel setting, click the Cancel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Settings in the Color Page

In the Color page, you can change the color of the following components in the
Acquisition and Review window (Common area)

Select the color of the background in the waveform display area, ruler, mark
channel, time scale, annotation line, text and its background in the video status
indication area of the Camera window when the optional QI-120A Camera
Capture Unit is installed, time and voltage cursor active line, and time and
voltage cursor non-active line.
Acquisition window
Select the color of the background in the waveform display area while filing,
clock and elapsed time in the Amp bar, total elapsed time and remaining time
in each stage in the LTM bar for long term EEG waveform monitoring and
remaining available data acquisition time in the tool bar.
Review window
Select the color of the part of the waveforms which is being selected and the part
of the waveforms which is already selected.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Settings in the Text, Size Page

In the Text, Size page, you can change the font size of the following texts and
messages in the Acquisition window and Review window.
Acquisition and Review window (Common area)

Select the font size of the channel number and montage, date and time in the
video status indication area of the Camera window when the optional
QI-120A Camera Capture Unit is installed, event on a waveform display area,
and application title.
Acquisition window
• Set the event name (annotation on the waveform) when the marker button is
pressed.
• Set the event name when the marker button is released. You can select whether
or not to add the annotation when the marker button is released. You can also
select whether or not to add the annotation when the marker button is released
within the specified time.
• Select type of the message, blink interval, color and font size. You can change
the message name before EEG filing is started (default setting: Not Filing) and
the message name after EEG filing is started (default setting: Filing).
• Select whether or not to add an event when the EEG file storage drive becomes
full. You can change this event name (default setting: Disk Full).
• Set the event name when the electrode junction box is disconnected.
• Set the message when there is a time delay in sending the waveform data from
the telemetry unit. You can also set the message when the telemetry unit is
moved outside the receiving area of the access point. These settings are only
available when the WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit is connected.
Review window
Set the font size of the screen comments. Up to 72 point can be set.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Settings in the Transparency Page

In the Transparency page, you can adjust the transparency of the following items.
Acquisition window and Review window (Common area)

Pattern table
Acquisition window
Patient information dialog box, Montage map window, Auto record dialog box,
Message window, Wireless unit status window and Waiting for connection dialog
box (Transmitter disconnected window setting).
Review window
Patient Information dialog box, montage map window and calibration mark.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Settings in the Window Items Size Page

In the Window Items Size page, you can change the size of components on the
Acquisition window, Review window and EEG scope – comparison mode, such
as the Amp bar, Tool, etc. The size of the components and font size of the text are
automatically adjusted according to the screen resolution.
Select screen resolution.
To change the settings,

double-click the item.
Settings in the Other Page

In the Other page, you can change the following settings.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Acquisition window and Review window (Common area)

• Changing the Amp bar display type.
Button: The amplifier settings are provided in a dialog box as a button.
Combo box: The amplifier settings are listed in the pull-down menu.
• Selecting the waveform thickness and event line thickness
• Selecting whether or not to reset the amplifier settings when you change the
pattern. This setting is not available for the JE-921A Electrode Junction Box.
• Selecting whether or not to display the channel number and montage with the
same color of the waveform.
• Selecting whether or not to display the splash window (Neurofax logo screen)
when opening the Acquisition window and Review window.
• Selecting whether or not to set month and day for patients less than 1 year old.
• Changing the height of the Photo/HV mark and digital mark. To set the trigger
for the digital mark, refer to “Selecting and Saving the DC Input Channels” in
this section.
• Selecting whether or not to set the resolution of the Acquisition and Review
window. When set, enter the width and height.
Acquisition window
• Selecting whether or not to display the same patient information of the
previous measurement when the Acquisition program opens. The Patient
Information dialog box can be opened in transparent mode.
• Selecting whether or not to display the Timer bar when the Activation bar
opens.
• Selecting whether or not to operate the HV timer together with the optional
Hyperventilation Unit. (Not used)
• Selecting whether or not to display the date and time on the Camera window
when the optional QI-120A Camera Capture Unit is installed.
• Selecting whether or not to keep the unsaved EEG waveform data after the
Acquisition window is closed. The time limit when the unsaved waveform data
is deleted can be set.
• Selecting whether or not to make space for the Camera window.
• When the “SpO2 UNSTABLE PULSE” message appears, you can select
whether or not to save this event as an event. This is only available when the
JE-921A Electrode Junction Box or JE-912A PSG Input Box is installed.
• Selecting whether to enter a pattern event when the stage of the EEG
navigation changes.
• Selecting whether to hide or show the patterns from the Pat list box where
channel 1 is set to the same electrode.
Review window
• Selecting whether or not to add a mark on the waveform to indicate where
printing starts.
• Selecting the mouse wheel operation to scroll the displayed waveform forward
or backward.
• Selecting the number of DSA trendgraphs in the Long Term DSA/Event
window.
• Selecting whether or not to make space for the Camera window.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
• Selecting whether or not to disable the “Keep current trace setting” function.
When you uncheck the “Disable Keep current trace settings for Review
function” check box, the “Keep current trace settings for Review” setting in
the Display Control window is automatically cleared.
• Selecting whether to hide or show the patterns from the Pat list box where
channel 1 is set to the same electrode.
• Select the waveform drawing mode tool buttons on the Review screen. Select
“High-Res” or “Fast” for the “Raw” setting and select “Fast” or “Smoothed”
for the “Processed” setting. 5
Raw
Displays the waveforms precisely. There may be small fluctuations looks like
noise.
Hi-Res: Displays all data points of the EEG waveforms. (Corresponds to
“Detailed” method in version 01-80 or earlier.)
Fast: Displays EEG waveforms in almost the same precision as the
Hi-Res mode. When the sampling rate is high or the displayed
duration is long, the waveforms are processed and displayed faster
than Hi-res mode. (Corresponds to “Peak Bottom” method in
version 01-80 or earlier.)
Processed
Displays waveforms which are processed to reduce small fluctuations.
Therefore small fluctuations or high frequency waveforms might not be
precisely displayed in this mode. When using this mode, also check the
waveforms in the Raw waveform drawing mode at the same time.
Smoothed: Smooths the waveforms by filtering small fluctuations and image
processing (anti-aliasing). (Available only for version 01-90 or
later.)
Fast: Displays simplified EEG waveforms. The amount of processing
depends on the resolution of the display. This is the fastest method.
(Corresponds to “High Speed” method in version 01-80 or earlier.)
• Select the events display position on the screen. You can select display
position from “Normal”, “ Screen top” and “Screen bottom”. When you select
“Normal”, there is no specific area for events display on the review screen and
events are displayed at the bottom of the review screen.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Setting the Digital Video Recording Settings
When the optional QP-110AK Digital Video Software or QV-101A Digital

Video Unit is installed, you can set digital video recording settings in the DV
Configuration dialog box. For the settings, refer to each operator’s manual of the
optional unit.
To open the DV Configuration dialog box, click the Digital Video button on the
System Program window.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Setting the Wireless Input Unit Settings
When the optional WEE-1000 Wireless Input unit is installed, you can set
wireless input unit settings in the Receivers dialog box. For the setting, refer to
the operator’s manual of the optional unit. The Receiver button is only available
when the JE-011A, JE-012A or JE-013A is selected in the Junction Box menu.
5
To set the wireless input unit, click the Receiver button on the System Program
window.
Setting the Input Box Converter Settings
When an optional input box converter is used with the EEG-1200

electroencephalograph, set the IP address for the input box converter.
When using the QI-122A or QI-123A When using the QI-122A or QI-123A input box converter, click the Input
input box converter box converter button on the System Program window to open the Input Box
Converter dialog box and change the settings on the dialog box. The Input Box
Converter button is only available when “Use input box converter (QI-122A)”
or “Use input box converter (QI-123A)” is selected in the Junction Box menu.
For detail on settings, refer to the operator’s manual for the QI-122A or QI-123A
input box converter.
When using the JE-120A electrode When using the JE-120A electrode junction box and the QI-123A input box
junction box and the QI-123A input converter, click the JE-120A button on the System Program window to open the
box converter JE-120A dialog box and change the settings on the dialog box. The JE-120A
button is only available when “Use JE-120A” is selected in the Junction Box
menu. For details on settings, refer to the operator’s manual for the JE-120A
electrode junction box and the QI-123A input box converter.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Adding the Optional Program Command to the Option Menu
When the optional program is installed, you can add the optional program to
the option menu of the Acquisition window, Review window and/or EEG scope
window in the Option program entry editor. For details, refer to the operator’s
manual for the optional program.
To open the Option program entry editor, click the Optional Software button on
the System Program window.
• To add the optional program, select the program name in the lower list and
click the upward arrow.
• To change the settings, double click the option program name.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Saving the System Program Settings in a File
The system settings in the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph can be copied and

used with an EEG-1100/1200/9100/9200 series electroencephalograph or a PC
with the QP-112A review program. To copy the system settings, save the settings
as a file with the extension .reg and copy this file to the electroencephalograph
or PC with QP-112A. These system settings cannot be used with an EEG-2100 5
series electroencephalograph.
The following settings are saved in the file.

• EEG pattern settings
• Automatic photic stimulation settings
• Contents of the table list of the Patient Information and Annotation dialog box
• Settings in the System Settings dialog box
• The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition and saved in a file with
the EEG waveforms.
• Long term EEG waveform monitoring settings
• Automatic EEG waveform recording settings
1. From the File menu, select “Save As EEG-1000/9000 setting”. The Save As
dialog box opens.
To change the drive or folder, click the “Save in” box arrow.
2. Type the file name and the extension “reg” in the File name text box.
Example: Test.reg
3. Press the Enter key on the keyboard or click the Save button. All the current
System program settings are saved in the file.
To cancel saving, click the Cancel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Loading System Program Settings from a File
The EEG-1200 electroencephalograph can load and use the system settings
from an EEG-1100/1200/9100/9200 electroencephalograph or a PC with
the QP-112A review program. The system settings in the EEG-2100 series
electroencephalograph cannot be used with the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph.
1. From the File menu, select “Load EEG-1000/9000 setting”. The Open dialog
box opens.
To change the drive or folder, click the Look in box arrow.
2. Click the file name and click the Open button.
Or double-click the file name.
To cancel loading, click the Cancel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Resetting All System Program Settings to the Factory Default

Settings
You can reset all settings in the System program to the factory default settings
(listed in “List of Factory Default Settings”). All changed settings are lost if you
do the following procedure. 5
1. From the File menu, select Initialize. The confirmation dialog box opens.
To cancel, click the Cancel button.

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Changing the Electrode Junction Box
When using the optional electrode junction box and/or mini junction box, select
the electrode junction box or mini junction box from the Junction Box menu and/
or number of channels from the Multi-Channel sub-menu.
When the electrode junction box is changed, the following settings are changed.
• Pattern settings
• The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition and saved in a file with
the EEG waveforms.
• Sampling frequency
• User-defined electrode names
• Contents of the Annotation dialog box when annotating waveform and adding
annotations.
NOTE
Before changing the electrode junction box, save the current system
settings in a file. Otherwise, the above settings are lost.
Saving the EEG Data in the Extended File Format

You can save more than 2 GB data with the extended file format. With the
optional JE-120A electrode junction box, you can record D1 to D64 and bipolar
electrodes, which means more than 192 channels, at high sampling frequency.
But these data cannot be reviewed on the EEG-1100 or EEG-1200 V1 software.
To review extended file format data on these software, it may be necessary to
upgrade the software.
If necessary, check “Extended File Format” on the Junction Box menu to save
data in the extended file format.
Software and Versions that do NOT Support the Extended File Format
The extended file format is not available for the following software.
Software Version
NeuroReport 03-11 or older
QP-150AK EEG examination support program 01-10 or older
QP-160AK EEG trend program 01-30 or older
QP-214AK multiview software 02-02 or older
QP-220AK EEG mapping program 05-10 or older
QP-251AK spike detector software 10-01NK or older
QP-260AK polysmith software 7.0.5692 or older
Transferring Data from a Bedside Monitor

You can transfer data acquired by a bedside monitor to this
electroencephalograph. To use this function, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative. For details on the function, refer to the operator’s manual for the
Interface for Bedside Monitor software (code number of the manual:
0614-906385)
5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Limitation of the Number of Electrodes to be Saved according to the Sampling

Frequency
When the optional electrode junction box JE-207A, JE-209A or JE-212A is
used, EEG waveforms can be measured at the 10,000 Hz (maximum) sampling
frequency. The number of electrodes to be saved is limited by the of sampling
frequency setting.
NOTE
5
When the sampling frequency setting is 2000, 5000 or 10000 Hz, the
data cannot be output as analog data.
When using QI-122A input box converter, JE-207A electrode junction box
(64 channels) and JE-208A mini electrode junction box:
Electrodes
Sampling
to be Saved Selectable Electrodes
Frequency
(Max)
100 Hz Not limited
200 Hz • Electrode junction box: 65 (All)
83 • DC INPUT: 16 (DC1 to DC16)
500 Hz
• Mark: 2 (Mark1, Mark2)
1000 Hz
• Electrode junction box: 65 (All)
2000 Hz 71 • DC INPUT: 16 (DC1 to DC16)
• Electrode junction box: 33
(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7,
5000 Hz 37 F8, T7, T8, P7, P8, Fz, Cz, Pz, PG1, PG2, A1, A2,
T1, T2, X1 to X7, E)
• DC INPUT: 16 (DC1 to DC16)
(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7,
10000 Hz 19
F8, T7, T8, P7, P8, A1, A2)

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
When using QI-122A input box converter, JE-209A electrode junction box (128
channels) and JE-210A mini electrode junction box:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
100 Hz Not limited
200 Hz • Electrode junction box: 129 (All)
500 Hz
1000 Hz
(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7,
F8, T7, T8, P7, P8, Fz, Cz, Pz, PG1, PG2, A1,
2000 Hz 71 A2, T1, T2, F1, F2, X1 to X33, X38 to X47, BN1,
BN2, BP1 to BP4, E)
Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7, F8,
5000 Hz 37 T7, T8, P7, P8, Fz, Cz, Pz, PG1, PG2, A1, A2,
T1, T2, X1 to X7, E)
(Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1, O2, F7,
10000 Hz 19
F8, T7, T8, P7, P8, A1, A2)
When using QI-122A input box converter and JE-212A electrode junction box
(192 channels):
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
100 Hz • Electrode junction box: 193
200 Hz 201 (A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to C64, E)
500 Hz • DC INPUT: 16 (DC1 to DC16)
1000 Hz 193
(A1 to A64, B1 to B12, E)
2000 Hz 71
5000 Hz 37 (A1 to A32, E)
10000 Hz 19 (A1 to A18)

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
When Using the JE-120A Electrode Junction Box (Extended File Format
Settings is On)
For 64 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz (A1 to A64)
500 Hz • Bipolar: 4 5
1000 Hz 88
• SpO2: 2 (SpO2, pulse)
2000 Hz • CO2: 2 (CO2 wave, ETCO2)
5000 Hz
10000 Hz
For 128 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz (A1 to A64, B1 to B64)
500 Hz • Bipolar: 4
1000 Hz
5000 Hz
(Selectable from A1 to A64, B1 to B64)
10000 Hz 88
• Bipolar: 4
• CO2: 2 (CO2 wave, ETCO2)

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
For 192 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz (A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to C64)
216
1000 Hz
(Selectable from A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to
C64)
5000 Hz 152 • Bipolar: 4
C64)
• Bipolar: 4
For 256 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz (A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to C64, D1 to D64)
1000 Hz
C64, D1 to D64)
• Bipolar: 4
C64, D1 to D64)
• Bipolar: 4

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
When Using the JE-120A Electrode Junction Box (Extended File Format
Settings is Off)
For 64 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz (A1 to A64)
84 • DC INPUT: 16 (DC1 to DC16) 5
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz 71
5000 Hz 37
10000 Hz 19
For 128 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz (A1 to A64, B1 to B64)
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz 71
5000 Hz 37
10000 Hz 19
For 192/256 channels:
Electrodes
Sampling
Frequency
(Max)
200 Hz 201 (A1 to A64, B1 to B64, C1 to C64)
500 Hz • DC INPUT: 16 (DC1 to DC16)
1000 Hz 193
2000 Hz 71
5000 Hz 37
10000 Hz 19

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Multi Channel Display Settings
When you select MultiChannel from the Junction Box menu, multi channel
display is available for Acquisition window and Review window.
NOTE
This function is available only when one of the following is selected from
the Junction Box menu on the System Program window.
• JE-208A
• JE-210A
• JE-213A, 214A
• JE-225AK, 224AK, 227AK, 228A (using with the JE-120A electrode
junction box)
• JE-125AK, 226AK, 227AK, 228A (using with the JE-120A electrode
junction box)
To select the number of the channels, click the MultiChannel from the Junction
Box menu then select the number of channels from the sub-menu.
Menu Description
128ch Displays up to 128 channels.
300ch Displays up to 300 channels. (JE-120A only)
32ch Displays up to 32 channels when the sampling frequency is
(High Sampling) 5000 Hz or 10000 Hz.
Off Turns Multi Channel Display mode off. (Default)

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
List of Factory Default Settings
Patterns
IA to VIA: for adult and child
IB to VB: for neonate
IC: for PSG
VIIA, VIIB and IIC: for system reference 5
Pattern IA Pattern IIA

CH Montage Amplifier Setting Montage Amplifier Setting
G1 (−) G2 (+) SENS TC HF CAL G1 (−) G2 (+) SENS TC HF CAL
1 Fp1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - F7 ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 Fp2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F7 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 F3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - T5 ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 F4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T5 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 C3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 C4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
7 P3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 P4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC P3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 O1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp2 - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 O2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F4 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 F7 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 F8 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC P4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
13 T3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp2 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC
14 T4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC F8 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
15 T5 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC T4 - T6 ACC ACC ACC ACC
16 T6 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T6 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
17 0V - X5 20 2.0 30 50 0V - X5 20 2.0 30 50
18 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000
19 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100
20 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500
21 –-– 20 Pulse – 100 –-– 20 Pulse – 100
22 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200
23 or
Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
later
Unit µV/mm s Hz µV Unit µV/mm s Hz µV

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern IIIA Pattern IVA

1 Fp1 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - Fp2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 F3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC F7 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 C3 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC F3 - Fz ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 P3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fz - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 Fp2 - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC F4 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 F4- C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC A1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
7 C4 - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 P4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - Cz ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 Fp1 - F7 ACC ACC ACC ACC Cz - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 F7 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 T3 - T5 ACC ACC ACC ACC T4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 T5 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC T5 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
13 Fp2 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC P3 - Pz ACC ACC ACC ACC
14 F8 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC Pz - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
15 T4 - T6 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
16 T6 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
17 0V - X5 20 2.0 30 50 Fp1 - Fp1 200 2.0 30 50
18 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000 Fp1 - Fp1 200 1.0 60 1000
19 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100
20 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500
21 –-– 20 Pulse – 100 –-– 20 Pulse – 100
22 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200
23 or
later

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern VA Pattern VIA

1 O1 - T5 ACC ACC ACC ACC F3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 T5 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC F4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 T3 - F7 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 F7 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 Fp1 - Fp2 ACC ACC ACC ACC O1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 Fp2 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC O2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 5
7 F8 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC F7 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 T4 - T6 ACC ACC ACC ACC F8 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 T6 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - F3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 O2 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp2 - F4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 Fz - F7 ACC ACC ACC ACC F3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 F7 - F8 ACC ACC ACC ACC F4 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
13 F8 - Fz ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - P3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
14 Cz - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - P4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
15 T3 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC P3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
16 T4 - Cz ACC ACC ACC ACC P4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
17 0V - X5 20 2.0 30 50 0V - X5 20 2.0 30 50
18 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000
19 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100
20 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500
21 –-– 20 Pulse – 100 –-– 20 Pulse – 100
22 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200
23 or
later
Unit μV/mm s Hz µV Unit µV/mm s Hz µV

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern VIIA
Montage Amplifier Setting
CH
G1 (−) G2 (+) SENS TC HF CAL
1 Fp1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 Fp2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 F3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 C3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 C4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
7 P3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 P4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 O1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 O2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 A1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 A2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
15 T3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
19 Fz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
20 Cz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
21 Pz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
22 PG1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
26 X1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
Unit µV/mm s Hz µV

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern IB Pattern IIB

1 Fp1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 Fp2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 C3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp1 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 C4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC C3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 O1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp2 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 O2 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC C4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 5
7 T3 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC Fp2 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 T4 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC T4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 0V - X5 10 2.0 30 50 0V - X5 10 2.0 30 50
10 0V - X6 10 2.0 30 50 0V - X6 10 2.0 30 50
11 T1 - T2 20 2.0 30 100 T1 - T2 20 2.0 30 100
12 0V - X3 20 0.03 120 100 0V - X3 20 0.03 120 100
13 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000
14 or
later

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern IIIB Pattern IVB

CH Montage Amplifier Setting CH Montage Amplifier Setting
1 Fp1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC 1 Fp1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 T3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 2 T3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 Fp1 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC 3 Fp1 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 C3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 4 C3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 Fp2 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC 5 Fp2 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 C4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 6 C4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
7 Fp2 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC 7 Fp2 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 T4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 8 T4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 0V - X5 10 2.0 30 50 9 T3 - O3 ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 0V - X6 10 2.0 30 50 10 C3 - Cz ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 T1 - T2 20 2.0 30 100 11 Cz - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 0V - X3 20 0.03 120 100 12 C4 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC
13 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000 13 0V - X5 10 2.0 30 50
14 or
Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 14 0V - X6 10 2.0 30 50
later
Unit Unit µV/mm s Hz µV 15 T1 - T2 20 2.0 30 100
16 0V - X3 20 0.03 120 100
17 0V - X1 200 1.0 60 1000
18 or
Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
later

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern VB Pattern VIIB

1 Fp1 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC 1 Fp1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 C3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 2 Fp2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 Fp2 - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC 3 F3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 C4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 4 F4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 Fp1 - T3 ACC ACC ACC ACC 5 C3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 T3 - O1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 6 C4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC 5
7 Fp2 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC 7 P3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 T4 - O2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 8 P4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 T3 - C3 ACC ACC ACC ACC 9 O1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 C3 - Cz ACC ACC ACC ACC 10 O2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 Cz - C4 ACC ACC ACC ACC 11 A1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 C4 - T4 ACC ACC ACC ACC 12 A2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
13 0V - X5 10 2.0 30 50 13 F7 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
14 0V - X6 10 2.0 30 50 14 F8 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
15 T1 - T2 20 2.0 30 100 15 T3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
16 0V - X3 20 0.03 120 100 16 T4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
18 or
Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 18 T6 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
later
Unit Unit µV/mm s Hz µV 19 Fz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
20 Cz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
21 Pz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Pattern IC Pattern IIC

1 C3 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 1 Fp1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
2 C4 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 2 Fp2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
3 O1 - A2 ACC ACC ACC ACC 3 F3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
4 O2 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 4 F4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
5 PG1 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 5 C3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
6 PG2 - A1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 6 C4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
7 T1 - T2 20 0.03 60 100 7 P3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
8 X1 - 0V 100 0.03 15 500 8 P4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
9 X5 - 0V 20 1.0 15 100 9 O1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
10 X6 - 0V 100 1.0 15 500 10 O2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
11 X7 - 0V 100 1.0 15 500 11 A1 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
12 X2 - 0V 100 0.03 60 500 12 A2 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
13 –-– 20 SpO2 – 100 13 F7 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
14 –-– 100 EtCO2 – 500 14 F8 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
15 –-– 100 DC03 – 500 15 T3 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
16 –-– 100 DC04 – 1000 16 T4 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
18 –-– 20 Pulse – 100 18 T6 - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
19 –-– 50 CO2Wave – 200 19 Fz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
20 or
Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC 20 Cz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
later
Unit Unit µV/mm s Hz µV 21 Pz - 0V ACC ACC ACC ACC
30 or
Fp1 - Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
later

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Other Patterns
Montage Amplifier Setting

G1 (−) G2 (+) SENS TC HF CAL
Fp1 – Fp1 ACC ACC ACC ACC
Automatic Photic Stimulation Settings 5

Frequency
Step
AUTO 1 AUTO 2 AUTO 3
1 3 Hz 1 Hz 0.5 Hz
2 6 3 –
3 9 5 –
4 12 7 –
5 15 9 –
6 18 11 –
7 21 13 –
8 24 15 –
9 27 17 –
10 30 19 –
11 33 21 –
12 – 23 –
13 – 25 –
14 – 27 –
15 – 29 –
16 – 31 –
17 – 33 –
18 – – –
19 – – –
20 – – –
21 – – –
22 – – –
23 – – –
24 – – –
25 – – –
26 – – –
27 – – –
28 – – –
29 – – –
30 – – –

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
EEG Recording Navigation

Adult examination
Record Photo/ Impedance

Number Stage Name Pattern CAL Pause
Time HV Check
1 Impedance, CAL IA 00:20 – ON ON –
2 System reference VIIA 00:20 – – – –
3 IA Monopolar IA 03:00 – – – –
4 IIA Bipolar IIA 03:00 – – – –
5 IVA Bipolar IVA 03:00 – – – On
PS
6 Photic Stimulation IA 05:00 – – On
Auto1
7 HV IA 06:00 HV – – –
8 Impedance, CAL IA 00:20 – On On –
9 or later – IA 00:00 – – – –
Neonatal examination
Record Photo/ Impedance

Number Stage Name Pattern CAL Pause
Time HV Check
1 Impedance, CAL IB 00:20 – On On –
2 System reference VIIB 00:20 – – – –
3 IB Monopolar IB 03:00 – – – –
4 IIB Bipolar IIB 03:00 – – – –
5 IVB Bipolar IVB 03:00 – – – On
PS
6 Photic stimulation IB 05:00 – – On
Auto2
7 HV IB 06:00 HV – – –
8 Impedance, CAL IB 00:20 – On On –
9 or later – IB 00:00 – – – –

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
Explanation of Menu
File Menu
Load EEG-1000/9000 setting
Loads a system setting file. The EEG-1200 electroencephalograph
can load a system setting file saved by the EEG-1100/1200/9100/9200
electroencephalograph or the PC with QP-112AK review program. 5
Save As EEG-1000/9000 setting

Saves the current system settings as a file (extension: .reg). You can load and use
this setting file with the EEG-1100/1200/9100/9200 electroencephalograph or the
PC with QP-112AK review program.
Initialize
Initializes the system settings.
Close without Saving

Closes the System program without saving the system settings.
Close
Closes the System program.
Junction Box Menu

Select the electrode junction box to use. Regarding the wireless input unit, refer
to the wireless input unit’s operator’s manual.
JE-921A/922A (10-20 System) (9)

JE-208A (10-20 System 64 electrodes) (T)*1
JE-210A (10-10 System) (E)*1
JE-213A, 214A/JE-225A, 226A, 227A 228A (Matrix) (M)*1
JE-125A, 226A, 227A, 228A (Matrix)
JE-910A, 911A (10-20 System) (U)
JE-912A/914A (Sleep)*1
JE-011A (Wireless 32ch)
JE-012A (Wireless PSG)
JE-013A (Wireless 64ch)
AE-120A (EEG Head Set)
JE-208A (10-20 System 64 electrodes) with AAA-16247
JE-213A/214A (Matrix) with AAA-16247/16248
Use Input box converter (QI-122A)*2
Use Input box converter (QI-123A)*2, *3
Use JE-120A
Additional JE-120A*4
Use WEE-1200
Additional WEE-1200
Connect Patient Monitor*4
Extended File Format*5
Multi-Channel*6

5. SYSTEM PROGRAM
*1 If the input box converter is not used, you cannot select these settings.
*2 When using an input box converter to connect the JE-921A electrode junction
box, check this command.
* To connect the QI-123A input box converter to the JE-921A electrode
3
junction box, the revision of the QI-123A must be BA or later and the
Acquisition Program version on the EEG-1200 must be 05-10 or later.
*4 Not used.
*5 Enables saving of more than 2 GB of data file. The software and versions
which supports extended file format are limited. For details, refer to
“Changing the Electrode Junction Box” in this section.
*6 When one of the following is selected, you can select multi channel display
settings from 128ch, 192ch, 250ch, 300ch (only for JE-120A), 32ch (High
frequency) and Off. (default: Off)
• JE-208A
• JE-210A
• JE-213A, 214A
• JE-225AK, 224A, 227AK, 228A (using with the JE-120A electrode
junction box)
• JE-125A, 226AK, 227AK, 228A (using with the JE-120A electrode
junction box)
Help Menu
Shows the version information of the program.

Section 6 Acquisition Program
General................................................................................................................................................................. 6.4
Flowchart of Acquiring EEG Waveforms.................................................................................................... 6.6
Opening the Acquisition Program......................................................................................................................... 6.7
Closing the Acquisition Program.......................................................................................................................... 6.8 6
Patient Information Settings................................................................................................................................. 6.9
Acquisition Window............................................................................................................................................. 6.10
Extended Channel Bar............................................................................................................................. 6.10
Using the Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu.......................................................................... 6.11
Preparing the Electrodes.................................................................................................................................... 6.12
EEG Recording Navigation................................................................................................................................. 6.12
Starting and Ending EEG Measurement ........................................................................................................... 6.15
Measurement Flow................................................................................................................................... 6.15
Checking Waveforms................................................................................................................................ 6.15
Starting Filing........................................................................................................................................... 6.16
Saving the File.......................................................................................................................................... 6.16
Checking the Skin-electrode Impedance............................................................................................................ 6.17
Setting Impedance Threshold.................................................................................................................. 6.17
Checking Skin-electrode Impedance........................................................................................................ 6.18
Displaying the Calibration Waveform.................................................................................................................. 6.19
Displaying and Saving the Calibration Waveform..................................................................................... 6.19
Changing the Calibration Waveform......................................................................................................... 6.19
Changing the Pattern.......................................................................................................................................... 6.20
Changing the Measurement Settings................................................................................................................. 6.21
Changing Amplifier Settings..................................................................................................................... 6.22
Changing the Settings with ACC Function..................................................................................... 6.22
Changing the Amplifier Setting for Individual Channels................................................................. 6.23
Changing Amplifier Settings Using the Pattern Table..................................................................... 6.24
Changing the Pattern Name........................................................................................................... 6.26
Changing Electrode Names........................................................................................................... 6.27
Changing the Reference Electrode................................................................................................ 6.27
Exporting and Importing the Pattern Settings.......................................................................................... 6.28
Exporting the Pattern Settings....................................................................................................... 6.28
Importing the Pattern Settings....................................................................................................... 6.28
Exporting All Pattern Settings........................................................................................................ 6.28
Importing All Pattern Settings........................................................................................................ 6.28
Changing the Waveform Display Settings................................................................................................ 6.28
Changing Waveform Display Positions........................................................................................... 6.30
Displaying/Hiding a Waveform........................................................................................................ 6.31
Changing the Waveform Display Speed......................................................................................... 6.32
Changing a Waveform Color.......................................................................................................... 6.32
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform........................................................................ 6.32
Returning All Waveforms to the Baseline....................................................................................... 6.33

Displaying Montage Map.......................................................................................................................... 6.33
Montage Map Window.................................................................................................................... 6.33
Using the AC Filter................................................................................................................................... 6.34
Using the ECG Filter................................................................................................................................ 6.34
Changing the Various Settings to the Default Settings............................................................................. 6.36
Using the Timers................................................................................................................................................ 6.37
About the Timer Bar................................................................................................................................. 6.37
Manual Timer............................................................................................................................................ 6.37
Record (Recording) Timer........................................................................................................................ 6.38
HV and Post HV Timer............................................................................................................................. 6.38
Annotating EEG Waveforms............................................................................................................................... 6.39
General..................................................................................................................................................... 6.39
Manually Annotating the Waveforms........................................................................................................ 6.40
Adding a Preset Annotation........................................................................................................... 6.40
Adding an Annotation with the Keyboard....................................................................................... 6.40
Using the Annotation Dialog Box................................................................................................... 6.41
Adding a Screen Comment............................................................................................................ 6.41
Capturing the Current Waveforms and Patient Image and Saving Them as a Screen Comment............ 6.42
Event Notification................................................................................................................................................ 6.43
Automatically Starting the Event Notification Software............................................................................ 6.43
Manually Starting the Event Notification Software................................................................................... 6.44
Setting the Event Notification Condition................................................................................................... 6.44
Displaying and Closing the Event Notification.......................................................................................... 6.46
Changing the Event Notification Condition............................................................................................... 6.46
Notification Condition Settings Window for Seizure and MARK ON.............................................. 6.46
Notification Condition Settings Window for Heart Rate and DC Input Signals .............................. 6.47
Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation............................................................................................................. 6.48
Activation Bar........................................................................................................................................... 6.49
Photic Stimulation..................................................................................................................................... 6.51
Automatic Photic Stimulation......................................................................................................... 6.51
Manual Photic Stimulation.............................................................................................................. 6.52
Single Photic Stimulation............................................................................................................... 6.53
Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler.............................................................................. 6.54
Using the Time & Voltage Cursor............................................................................................................. 6.54
Using the Ruler......................................................................................................................................... 6.55
Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph....................................................................................................... 6.56
Frequency Map................................................................................................................................................... 6.57
Displaying the Frequency Map................................................................................................................. 6.57
Frequency Map Settings.......................................................................................................................... 6.58
Map Settings.................................................................................................................................. 6.58
Scale Range................................................................................................................................... 6.59
Frequency Band Settings............................................................................................................... 6.59
Electrode Position Settings............................................................................................................ 6.60
Scale Color Settings....................................................................................................................... 6.61
Displaying Heart Rate........................................................................................................................................ 6.62
Settings for Displaying Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs for Review Program........................ 6.63
Creating Groups of FFT Channles for the DSA Trendgraph..................................................................... 6.64
Creating a Trend Group for Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs........................................ 6.65
Displaying the Camera Image............................................................................................................................ 6.66

Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring............................................................................................................... 6.67
Long Term Monitoring............................................................................................................................... 6.68
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation............................................................................................. 6.70
Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation............................................................................................................ 6.71
Keyboard Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 6.72
EEG Scope – Comparison Mode....................................................................................................................... 6.73
Starting the EEG Scope – Comparison Mode.......................................................................................... 6.73
Closing the EEG Scope – Comparison Mode.......................................................................................... 6.73
Display Layout.......................................................................................................................................... 6.74
Auto Refresh............................................................................................................................................ 6.74
Explanation of Menus and Bars.......................................................................................................................... 6.75
6
File Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 6.75
View Menu................................................................................................................................................ 6.75
Edit Menu................................................................................................................................................. 6.77
Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................... 6.77
Option Menu............................................................................................................................................. 6.78
Help Menu................................................................................................................................................ 6.78
Channel Setting Menu.............................................................................................................................. 6.78
Amp Bar................................................................................................................................................... 6.79
Display Size Bar....................................................................................................................................... 6.81
EEG Bar................................................................................................................................................... 6.81
Option Bar................................................................................................................................................ 6.81
Tool Bar.................................................................................................................................................... 6.82
WEE Bar................................................................................................................................................... 6.83
Event Bar.................................................................................................................................................. 6.83

6. ACQUISITION PROGRAM
General
The Acquisition program acquires the EEG waveforms and can display up to 300
channels of EEG waveforms. You can save the EEG waveforms with the patient
information, annotations, amplifier settings and display settings in a hard disk as
an EEG data file.
Before or during recording, you can temporarily change the measurement

settings and enter patient information. Temporary setting changes are lost when
you close the Acquisition program. Temporary setting changes are either lost or
still apply when you change the pattern – this depends on the Reset when pattern
changes setting. Refer to “Settings in the Junction Box, Operation, Display Page”
in Section 5. Temporary setting changes are indicated on the pattern table (refer
to “Changing the Measurement Settings” in this section).
To keep the changed pattern setting (montage, amplifier settings, waveform

color and maximum amplitude of the waveform), use the Overwrite button on
the pattern table. The pattern settings of the corresponding pattern in the System
Program can be changed. Refer to “Changing the Measurement Settings” in this
section.
CAUTION
When using the instrument for brain death diagnosis, before
examination, check and adjust the date and time of the system. The
date and time on the screen and recording result are part of
important information for the medical record.
CAUTION
During measurement, do not change the date and time. This makes
the order of the saved event data and the time of the saved
waveforms incorrect.

NOTE
• During measurement, do not insert or remove a CD-R or DVD-R disk
into or from the DVD drive. Otherwise, the Acquisition program may
malfunction.
• To use the Acquisition program, 100 MB or more hard disk free space is
required.
opening the Acquisition program. Otherwise, the Acquisition program
might not function properly.
• When the USB cable from the electrode junction box is not connected
to the PC unit, the Acquisition program cannot open. If the Acquisition
6
program does not open, check the USB cable connection. After
connecting the USB cable, restart Windows.
• During operation, do not remove the USB cable from the PC unit.
• To perform the photic stimulation, the optional LS-120A Photic
Stimulator Control Unit is required. Before opening the Acquisition
program, check the cable connection between the photic stimulator
control unit and PC unit and power status of the photic stimulator
control unit.
* 2 GB is the maximum file size • Capacity of one measurement file is 2 GB*. When the measurement
when not using extended file data excess 2 GB, save the data as two or more files. To save a long
format. time data, set the sampling frequency as low as possible and save only
necessary electrodes.
• Set a drive for Automatic backup. Set the drive other than the
destination of the saved EEG data in case of drive malfunction.
• If the measurement continues for more than 5 minutes, the
measurement data is automatically saved. If the file is not necessary,
delete the file from the Data Manager window (file mode).

Flowchart of Acquiring EEG Waveforms
1. Enter the patient information.
2. Start the Acquisition program.
3. Check the patient information.
4. Attach electrodes to the patient.
5. Set the Auto Recording function.
6. Check skin-electrode contact impedance.
7. Display and record the calibration waveforms.
8. Check that the waveforms are recorded correctly.
9. Start EEG measurement (recording).
10. Measure the waveforms.
11. Measure the waveforms with activation.
12. Display and record the calibration waveforms.
13. End the EEG measurement.
14. Close and save the EEG data file.
15. Close the Acquisition program.
After measurement, use the Review program to review and print the EEG
waveforms.

Opening the Acquisition Program
NOTE
Turn off any screen saver and close all application programs before
opening the Acquisition program. Otherwise, the Acquisition program
might not function properly.
1. Click the Workbench tab in the NeuroWorkbench main window, select the
examination schedule in the data list. For details on the data list, refer to 6
Section 8 “Workbench” and Section 9 “Data Manager”.
2. Click the examination function button. The Select Protocol widow

opens.
3. Click the protocol button to start examination. The Acquisition program

opens.

You can also open the Acquisition Program from the EEG tab page.
NOTE
It is recommended to start examinations from the Workbench tab page or
the Data Manager tab page because workflow status is not automatically
assigned for the examinations started from the EEG tab page. If the
Workbench tab page does not appear due to trouble such as network
failure, start the examination from the EEG tab page.
Click the EEG tab in the NeuroWorkbench main window and click the protocol
button to start the Acquisition program. The patient information window opens
when the Acquisition program starts. Check or enter the patient information
before measurements. Refer to “Patient Information Settings” in this section.
Protocol buttons
Closing the Acquisition Program
To close the Acquisition program, select Exit from the File menu. The
Acquisition program closes.

Patient Information Settings
The Patient Information window automatically opens when the Acquisition

program starts. The patient information that is entered on the NeuroWorkbench
main window appears in the Patient Information window. Check or change the
patient information in this window.
If the Patient Information window does not open automatically, click the
Display Patient Information button on the Tool bar to open the Patient 6
Information window. You can also open the Patient Information window by
selecting “Patient information” from the View menu.
1. Check the patient information in the page 1 and change the patient
information if necessary. Refer to “Creating a New Patient Information” in
Section 3 for details.
2. Click the 2 tab and enter the items in the patient information page 2 if
necessary. The pipe “ | ”and apostrophe “ ’ ” character cannot be used.
To enter the items from the item lists, click the Table button for each
category and click the item from the item list.
3. Click OK to close the Patient Information window.

Acquisition Window
Amp bar
You can change the amplifier setting for all channels whose amplifier setting is ACC.
EEG bar
Menu bar
Tool bar
Shortcut buttons
frequently used for
measurement
Waveform
display area
EEG recording
navigation
Electrode name
display area
Event bar You can move the bars to any position on the screen by dragging it.
You can manually add the To display hidden bars, select each bar from the “Bar” command of the View menu.
annotations on the waveforms.
While filing is not performed, the “Not Filing” message appears.
Extended Channel Bar

Channel number Montage Extended channel bar
To display the extended channel bar, check the “Display extended channel bar” check box in the
Display Control dialog box. Refer to “Changing the Measurement Settings – Changing the Waveform
Display Settings” in this section.
The heart rate and DC conversion value with the scale corresponding to the DC low and high limit
are displayed on the extended channel bar. To display the heart rate, refer to “Displaying Heart Rate
and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs” in this section. To change the DC conversion settings, refer to
“Programming Patterns – Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals” in Section 5.
You can display either the montage or comment on the extended channel bar. Refer to “Programming
Patterns – Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar” in Section 5.

Using the Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu

You can easily change the measurement settings using the pop-up menu.
To display the pop-up menu, right-click the channel number display area or
extended channel bar.
To select channels, click the channel numbers pressing the Shift or Ctrl key, or
drag the pointer on the extended channel bar.
When a channel is selected, the sensitivity setting buttons are displayed. You can
change the sensitivity by clicking the + and − buttons.
6
Sensitivity setting buttons
Show Selected Channel: Displays only the waveforms for the selected channels.
Hide Selected Channel: Hides the waveforms for the selected channels.
Reset Hidden Channel: Displays all waveforms.
Pattern Table: Displays the pattern table for the currently selected
pattern.
Sensitivity, Time Constant, High Cut Filter:

Displays the corresponding amplifier selection dialog
box. You can change the amplifier settings for all
channels which amplifier settings are set to ACC at the
same time.
Restore Setting to ACC: Changes the amplifier settings for the selected channels
to the ACC amplifier settings.
Unselect All: Resets the channel selection.
Even Layout, Channel Layout, Superimpose:

Changes the layout of the displayed waveforms. Refer
to “Changing Waveform Display Positions” in this
section for details.

Preparing the Electrodes
Refer to “Preparing the Electrodes” in Section 3.
EEG Recording Navigation
The instrument lets you perform the skin-electrode contact impedance check,
calibration waveform recording, pattern changing and activation according to the
EEG recording navigation. To program the automatic recording settings, refer to
“Programming EEG Recording Navigation” in Section 5.
To open the EEG recording navigation window:

From the View menu, select EEG recording navigation. The EEG recording
navigation window opens.
Select a
measurement
mode.
Auto: Stages and times for

Records waveforms each stage
automatically.
Restore:
Initialize the window for
Save: the next examination.
Saves measurement
data.
Event:
Photo/HV: Opens the “Annotation”
Displays Photo/HV window.
bar.

To minimize the EEG recording navigation window:

Click the “Minimize” button to minimize the EEG recording navigation window.
Click the “B” button to restore the window size.
To show the detailed settings: 6

To check the current settings, click the “Detail” button on the EEG recording
navigation window. Details for each stage appear.

To acquire the data automatically:
1. Click the Auto button. The button

turns green and the time for each
stage appear.
2. Click the Start button to perform

the measurement and filing. The
measurement starts automatically.
The Start button turns into Stop
button during the measurements. To The remaining time is displayed in
pause the measurements, click this the time box for the stage.
button. To restart the measurement,
click this button again. When the measurement of the last
stage is finished, the measurement
automatically stops.
3. Click the Save button to save the

acquired data. Refer to “Starting and
Ending EEG Measurement – Saving
the File” in this section for details.
Click the Extend button to extend the

current measurement. To cancel the
extension, click the Extend button again.
To perform the routine EEG recording manually:

To select or change a stage in the navigation program, do the following
procedure.
1. Check that the Auto button is not

green. The setting time for each stage
are displayed as “00:00”.
2. Click the Start button to start

measurements and filing. The Start
button turns into Next button and the
elapsed time is counted.
3. Click the Next button to move to the

next stage.
When the measurement of the last

stage is finished, the measurement
stops.
4. Click the Save button to save the

acquired data. Refer to “Starting and
Ending EEG Measurement – Saving
the File” in this section for details.
To start measuring from the selected stage:

Click the button for the stage and click the Start button.

Starting and Ending EEG Measurement
Measurement Flow
The acquired data is stored in the hard disk of the instrument. The procedure of
filing and saving the data is as follows:
1. Start the Acquisition program.
2. File the acquired data.

6
3. Save the file.
4. Close the Acquisition program.
NOTE
• You cannot save the data until the data is filed. You cannot review or
print the file until the file is saved.
• Up to 2 GB of EEG waveforms can be saved as an EEG data file for a
patient. When the EEG data file exceeds 2 GB, use the Long Term EEG
Waveform Monitoring function.
• Before measurement, check the following.
- The electrodes that are used for waveform acquisition and sampling
frequency are properly selected considering the disk capacity and
recording time (refer to “Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for
Waveform Acquisition” in Section 5).
- Storage drive is correctly selected. Refer to “Selecting Storage Drive”
in Section 5.
• The DVD drive cannot be set as a storage drive for EEG data.
Checking Waveforms
Confirm that all waveforms are recorded correctly.
To check the waveforms easily, set the electrodes as G1 and 0V as G2 in the

montage.

Starting Filing
NOTE
The data cannot be saved until the filing finishes even if the waveforms
are displayed on the screen.
1. Click the Start/Stop Filing button to start filing. The Start/

Stop Filing button turns into green.
2. Click the Start/Stop Filing button again to stop filing. The color of
the Start/Stop Filing button is restored.
Saving the File

1. Select “Save” from the File menu. The Close window opens.
2. Check the file information. Click the Cancel button and change the
information if necessary.
3. Click the OK button to save the data as a file. The new file is automatically
created.
If a file with the same ID number and a different patient name, sex or date of
birth is registered in the database, the Information dialog box opens. Select
the proper option and click the OK button.
NOTE
The patient’s ID and name must be entered in order to save the EEG file.

Checking the Skin-electrode Impedance
CAUTION
Never check the skin-electrode impedance with the needle electrode
or intracranial electrode inserted in the patient. Failure to follow this
caution causes electrical burn where electrodes are inserted.
NOTE 6
• The impedance can only be checked in the Acquisition program.
• Attach the Z and electrode specified in the System program (default:
C3 and C4, A1 and A2) to the patient. Otherwise, the impedance check
result may be incorrect.
When the skin-electrode impedance is high, the waveforms are easily affected by
noise. Set the impedance threshold and check that the skin-electrode impedance
is not too high. You can check skin-electrode impedance with either the PC unit
or electrode junction box.
Setting Impedance Threshold

To select the impedance threshold for the skin-electrode impedance check, press
the impedance preset key on the electrode junction box to select 2, 5, 10, 20 or
50 kW.
Impedance display LED
X1 X2 X1 X2
X5
RESP F
X3 X4
X3 X4
PG1 PG2
22 23 X6
2, 5, 10, 20, 50 SELECTOR (KW)

Z
RESP C
SELECTOR(K )
FP1 FP2
(Impedance preset key)

1 2
2 5 10 20 50
T1 F7 F8 T2
25 F3 Fz F4 26
13 3 19 4 14
X7
IMPEDANCE
11 15 5 24 6 16 12
T5 P3 Pz P4 T6
17 7 20 8 18
SpO2/CO2
DC1/DC2
OI O2
9 10
IMPEDANCE CHECK key

Checking Skin-electrode Impedance

On the electrode junction box
1. Press and hold the IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the electrode junction box
for about two seconds to start skin-electrode contact impedance check. After
about one second, the impedance check result is displayed by LEDs on the
electrode junction box and on the screen. The LED continuously lights if the
corresponding electrode’s impedance exceeds the preset value (threshold).
2. Press the IMPEDANCE CHECK key again to complete the impedance

check.
On the screen
1. Click and hold the Impedance Check button on the tool bar for about
two seconds. The Impedance Check window opens. The montage of the
current pattern appears.
2. Check the impedance. Each impedance is displayed in the Impedance Check

window and if the electrode impedance exceeds the preset value (threshold)
on the electrode junction box, the impedance is highlighted.
The electrodes whose impedance result is shown on the screen or electrode

junction box differ depending on whether CAL waveforms or acquired
waveforms are currently displayed on the screen.

CAL waveform: shows the result of all electrodes that are set as G1 or
G2 in any pattern.
Acquired waveform: shows the result of all the electrodes that are set as G1
or G2 in the currently selected pattern.
3. Click the OK button to close the Impedance Check window.

Displaying the Calibration Waveform
Usually calibration waveforms are recorded before and after EEG waveform
measurement as a record for the calibration and measurement conditions.
Displaying and Saving the Calibration Waveform

Click the CAL Signal button on the tool bar. The calibration waveforms are
displayed on the screen.
6
• To stop displaying the calibration waveform and start measuring the EEG
waveforms, click the EEG Signal button on the tool bar.
• To save the calibration waveforms, click the Start/Stop Filing button
on the tool bar. When the calibration waveforms are displayed, the calibration
waveforms are saved in an EEG data file with the EEG waveforms.
Changing the Calibration Waveform

1. Select CAL Control from the Edit menu. The CAL Control dialog box opens.
2. Select the new CAL mode.

<CAL Mode>
There are four types of calibration modes.
AUTO : Every two seconds, an upgoing or downgoing pulse is
generated. The polarity of the pulse alternates each time.
The calibration wave stops when the EEG button is
clicked.
AUTO : Generates a sine wave when the CAL button is clicked.
The calibration wave stops when the EEG button is
clicked.
MANUAL : When the CAL button is pressed and held, an upgoing
pulse is generated and when the CAL button is released, a
downgoing pulse is generated.
MANUAL : Generates a sine wave while the CAL button is pressed
and held.
3. Select the calibration voltage in the CAL Voltage selection list box. All
channels whose CAL Voltage settings are set to ACC are changed to the
selected calibration voltage.

Changing the Pattern
36 patterns (I to VIII A, B, C, D and Free A, B, C, D) are available for a file. A

pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter
and time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveform color
and amplitude limit. You can change the preset pattern settings with the System
program (Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 5).
To change the pattern, click the Pat box arrow on the Amp bar and select the
pattern from the pull down list.

Changing the Measurement Settings
During waveform acquisition, you can temporarily change the pattern settings
without losing the original pattern settings. The changed settings, except for
free pattern, are lost when another pattern is selected or when the Acquisition
program is closed. In order to keep the changes, click the “Save Changings”
button on the pattern table. The pattern settings of the corresponding pattern in
the System program are also changed.
6
There are three ways of changing the amplifier conditions. Refer to “Changing
Amplifier Settings” in this section.
• Changing the settings using ACC function
• Changing the settings for individual channels
• Changing the settings using Pattern Table
NOTE
The selectable options for high-cut frequency settings in the High Cut
filter dialog box and pattern differ depending on the sampling frequency
when acquired. For details of the sampling frequency setting, refer
to “Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in
Section 5.
Amplifier Condition Settings
Amplifier
Settings
Conditions
1, 2, 3 (2.5*), 5, 7, 10, 15, 20,
Selected voltage is displayed as 1 mm of
30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300,
Sensitivity the ruler.
500, 700, 1000 μV/mm
OFF Displays the baseline.
0.001, 0.003, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6,
Time Constant Attenuates at the selected time constant.
1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10 s
15, 30, 35, 60, 70, 120, 300, Attenuates a frequency that exceeds the
600 Hz, 1.2, 3.0 kHz selected value.
High-Cut
Filter Turns 50 Hz-18 dB/oct filter ON. Turn the
50 RP setting ON only when the noise caused by
the myoelectricity cannot be eliminated.
* If the “Substitute sensitivity 2.5 for sensitivity 3” check box of the System Setting is checked,
2.5 is displayed instead of 3.
NOTE
When using the JE-921A electrode junction box, the 5.0 s and 10 s
settings are obtained by digital filtering which extends the 2.0 s time
constant. This may result in a larger offset voltage.

Changing Amplifier Settings

The ACC (All Channel Control) setting lets you change amplifier settings for
more than one channel on all patterns at the same time. All channels which
have the amplifier settings set to ACC are linked together. When you change
the Sens, TC, HF on the amp bar or CAL setting, setting of all ACC channels
automatically changes.
Changing the Settings with ACC Function

To change the amplifier setting using ACC function, set ACC.
1. Click the Display Pattern Table button on the tool bar, or select Pattern
Table from the Edit menu. The pattern table opens.
2. Select the settings to be set to ACC. A dotted rectangle encloses the selected
settings.



Click the Sens, TC or HF button at the top of column.
The selection list box for the setting appears in the right side of the pattern
table.
3. Click ACC.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other settings, if necessary.
5. Click the OK button to close the pattern table.

To change the Sens, TC or HF settings of all the channels that are set to ACC,
click the Sens, TC or HF text box arrow on the Amp bar and select settings from
the pull down menu.
Selected channel Changing the Amplifier Setting for Individual Channels
NOTE 6
The change is temporary. The changed settings are lost when another
pattern is selected or when the Acquisition program is closed.
1. Click the channel number to change the settings. The selected channel is
displayed highlighted.
2. Click the Sens, TC or HF text box arrow on the Amp bar and select settings

Changing Amplifier Settings Using the Pattern Table

1. Click the Display Pattern Table button on the Tool bar, or select Pattern
2. Select the settings to change on the pattern table. The selected settings are
enclosed by a dotted rectangle.



Click the Sens, TC, HF or CAL button at the top of column.
The selection list box for the setting appears in the right side of the pattern
table.
3. Click the new setting in the selection list box. The settings enclosed by the
dotted rectangles change to the new settings.
Changed settings and ACC are indicated on the pattern table as follows:
Mark Meaning
$ Temporarily changed reference electrode
* Any other temporarily changed settings
Highlighted Sensitivity, TC, HF or CAL setting which is not set to ACC
Not highlighted Sensitivity, TC, HF or CAL setting which is set to ACC
When you change Sens, TC, HF or CAL on the amp bar, all ACC settings are
changed. If you select and change individual setting in the pattern table, only
that setting is changed. If an ACC setting is set to an individual value, it can be
changed individually.

4. Add or delete channels if necessary.
To insert a new channel, click the channel number, then click the “Insert”
button. The new channel is inserted with the following settings:
G1 and G2: 0 V Sens, TC, HF and CAL: ACC Display: ON
Color: black Width: 120
When a new channel is inserted, the last channel is deleted.
To delete a channel, click the channel number, then click the Delete button.
When the channel is deleted, channels are shifted up and a new channel is
added to the last channel.
6
5. Click “Save Changes” to save the changes.
NOTE
The change is temporary. The changed settings are lost when another
pattern is selected or when the Acquisition program is closed unless
you save the settings.
6. Click the OK button on the Pattern Table or click the Display Pattern
Table button to close the window.

You can change the montage by changing electrodes. An “*” mark to the right of
all changed electrodes indicates temporary changes.
NOTE
Electrodes that are not saved with EEG waveforms are displayed in red
on the Pattern table and Electrode position layout. You cannot review
the EEG waveforms in a montage which includes unsaved electrodes.
To save an electrode, refer to “Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for
Waveform Acquisition” in Section 5.

2. Select the electrode(s) to change on the pattern table. All selected electrodes
are enclosed by dotted rectangles. The Electrode position layout table opens.
Electrode position layout table To select one electrode:

Click the electrode name on the table.

Drag the cursor to select the electrodes.
To select all channel electrodes:

Click the G1 or G2 button at top of column.
To change the G1 or G2 electrode continuously:

Uncheck the Set G1 and G2 alternately check box on the pattern
table.
Reference electrode:
Check to display the montage map.
AV: The reference for AV derivation.
Before filing, you can change the electrode name AV1*: The reference for AV1 derivation
in the Edit Electrode Name dialog box. To open the BN: The reference for BN derivation.
dialog box, right-click the electrode to change the
SD : The reference for Laplacian derivation.
name.
Aav: The averaged reference of A1 and A2.
* The AV1 button appears only when the Electrode position layout
table is displayed from the Review Program. AV1 to AV16 can
be selected by right-clicking the AV1 button.
0 V button:
When this is selected to either G1 or G2 electrode, the channel
displays the potential between the system reference (C3/C4) and
selected electrode which is not set to “0V”.
3. Click an electrode in the Electrode position layout table. The selected G1

or G2 electrode(s) enclosed by the broken rectangle is replaced with the
selected new electrode. The dotted rectangle moves to the next electrode.
4. Click the “Save Changes” button. The Select Pattern window appears.
5. Select the pattern to save the changed montage settings and click the “OK”
button.
NOTE
The changed settings, except for free pattern, are lost when another
pattern is selected or when the Acquisition program is closed. In order to
keep the changes, click the “Save Changes” button on the pattern table.

On the Pattern Table, select the pattern to rename from the Pattern list box and
enter the new name in the Edit text box.

Changing Electrode Names

You can change electrode names using the Pattern Table.
1. Click the electrode name on the Pattern Table. The Electrode position layout
table opens.
2. Right-click the electrode name. The Edit Electrode Name window opens.
3. Change the electrode name.
4. Click the OK button to close the window.
Changing the Reference Electrode

NOTE
When the reference electrode is set to A1 + A2 in acquisition, you cannot
change this setting during review.
When the EEG waveforms are displayed with monopolar montages using A1 and
A2 electrodes, you can change the reference electrode. Changed electrodes are
displayed with a “$” mark.
Click the Ref text box arrow on the amp bar and select the reference electrode
Reference electrode selection list:

A1 → A2: Switches all A1 to A2.
A1 ← A2: Switches all A2 to A1.
A1 ↔ A2: Switches A1 and A2.
A1 + A2: Short-circuits A1 and A2 to each other in the electrode junction box.
Vx: Switches all A1 and A2 to CZ.
AV: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for AV derivation.
BN: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for BN derivation. (Available
when the JE-208A or 210A is used.)
SD : Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for Laplacian derivation.
Aav: Switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged reference of A1 and A2.
Org: Switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged voltage of C3 and C4 for the
original reference derivation (system reference).
OFF: Cancels the selection of reference electrode and returns to the
programmed setting.

Exporting and Importing the Pattern Settings

Exporting the Pattern Settings
You can save the current pattern settings as a file (extension: .ptn) and call them
up again. To save the current pattern settings, select Export from the File menu
of the pattern table.
Importing the Pattern Settings

You can call up the pattern settings which were previously saved in a file. To call
up the pattern settings, select Import from the File menu of the pattern table. This
function is only available when the currently used electrode junction box type is
as the same as that was used for the pattern setting.
Exporting All Pattern Settings

You can save all pattern settings as files (extension: .ptn) and call them up again.
To save all pattern settings, select All Patterns → Export from the File menu of
the Acquisition Program main window and select the folder to save in.
Importing All Pattern Settings

You can call up all pattern settings which were previously saved in files. To call
up all pattern settings, select All Patterns → Import from the File menu of the
Acquisition Program main window and select the folder. This function is only
available when the currently used electrode junction box type is as the same as
that was used for the pattern setting.
Changing the Waveform Display Settings

You can select the waveform display settings in the Display Control dialog box.
To open this dialog box, select Display Control from the View menu.

Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment beside Each Channel

You can display or hide the derivation beside each channel. To display the
derivation and/or comment beside each channel, click the “Display montage”
and/or “Display comment” check box in the Montage and Comment area. You
can select the derivation and comment display position by clicking the “Left” or
“Right” option button.
Displaying the Time Scale

To display the time scale in the Time Mark area, select the 1 s or 200 ms option
on the Time Scale area.
Off: A vertical line is not displayed.
6
1 s: Displays a vertical line every one second.
200 ms: Displays a vertical line every 200 milliseconds.
Displaying the Remaining Acquisition Time

The Free box beside the Start/Stop Filing button shows the remaining available
data acquisition time based on the remaining free disk space. To display the
* 2 GB is the maximum file size
when not using extended file remaining available data acquisition time for the currently recorded file (Max.
format. 2 GB*), select “File” in the Remaining Display area.
Selecting the Waveform Line

Smoothed: Smooths the waveforms by filtering small fluctuations and image
processing (anti-aliasing). (Available only for version 03-01 or later.)
Normal: Displays all data points of the EEG waveforms. (Corresponds to the
method in version 02-21 or earlier.)
You can also change this setting by clicking the button on the EEG bar.

The waveform display gain can be changed in steps of one (3 to 100) with the
slider in the Waveform Display Size area.
Displaying the Extended Channel Bar

You can display the montage and calibration voltage on the extended channel
bar. To display the extended channel bar, check the “Display extended channel
bar” check box.
You can display the CAL scale on the extended channel bar. Check the “Display
extended channel bar CAL scale” check box to display the scales.
Changing the Display Speed Automatically

When the EEG Scope window and/or extended channel bar is displayed, the
waveform display area becomes small. To automatically change the display
speed so that all waveforms corresponding to the selected display speed are
displayed on the smaller waveform display area, check the “Adjust display speed
to match window size” check box.
Displaying the System Reference Electrodes

The system reference electrodes can be displayed on the screen. To display the
system reference electrodes, check the “System reference” check box.

Displaying the Power Status of the Transmitter

You can check the power status of the transmitter on the screen. Check the
“Display power status of the Transmitter” check box to display the status.
Displaying Amplifier Gain

To display amplifier gain, check the “Display amplifier gain” check box.
Indicating smoothed waveform drawing mode

To display a “Processed wave” message on the acquisition window when
smoothed waveform mode is selected, check “Indicate smoothed waveform
drawing mode”.
Changing the Length of the Vertical Lines for the Events

You can change the length of the vertical light gray lines beside the manually
entered annotations. To change the length of the vertical lines, select the
appropriate length from the Annotation line list box. For the specified event,
you can assign a color vertical line. Refer to “Editing Event List for Waveform
Annotations and Item List in the Patient Information Window” in Section 5.
Editing Annotation List

To edit the event list, click the “Edit annotation list” button and open the Event
setting window. Changes for this settings are also applied to the event list in the
System program.
Adjusting the Display Scale

You can adjust the display speed and gain by sliders. To display the Adjust
Display Scale window, click the “Adjust display scale” button in the Display
Control dialog box.
Changing Waveform Display Positions

To change the position of all channels:
There are three waveform display positions.
Even Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in
channel order. Channels that are temporarily turned off are
omitted.
Channel Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in
channel order. Blank spaces are left for hidden channels.
Superimpose: Overlaps consecutive odd and even channels. Channels are
omitted if their time constant is not set to ACC.
From the View menu, select the appropriate layout command to select the
waveform display position.

Even layout Channel layout Superimpose

6
To change the position of a specific channel:
1. Click the channel number on the left side of the screen to select the channel.
The selected channel number is highlighted.
2. Drag the highlighted channel to the appropriate position.
3. Release the mouse button to fix the waveform position.
4. Click the waveform window to release the channel selection.
Display Displaying/Hiding a Waveform

2. Click the Display column of the channel to open the selection list box on the
pattern table. The selected column is enclosed by a dotted rectangle.
3. Click On or Off in the selection list box.
4. Click the OK button to close the table.
You can also hide channels with channel number pop-up menu. Refer to “Using
the Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu” earlier in this section.

Changing the Waveform Display Speed

Click “Display Time” from the View menu and select the speed.
5 s/page: Displays a 5 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording
at 60 mm/s).
at 30 mm/s).
at 20 mm/s).
at 15 mm/s).
at 10 mm/s).
at 5 mm/s).
2 min/page: Displays a 2 minute page on the screen (corresponds to recording
at 2.5 mm/s).
at about 1.7 mm/s).
at 1 mm/s).
User defined: Displays a page of user defined speed (mm/s) page on the screen.
Color
2. Click the Color column of the channel to open the selection list box on the
NOTE
The waveform color can also be changed by right-clicking the channel
and changing it from the channel setting menu.
Width Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform

2. Click the Width column of the channel to open the selection list box on the

Returning All Waveforms to the Baseline

Click the Reset button on the tool bar to return all waveforms to the baseline
position. When this button is clicked, the “RESET ON/OFF” annotation is
displayed at the bottom of the screen and the annotation is saved in a file as an
event.
Displaying Montage Map

The montage map window displays the montage on the electrode position layout.
6
Select “Display Montage Map” from the View menu to display the montage map
window.
Montage map window
Montage Map Window
The electrodes
Channel number corresponding to Fp1
Monopolar derivation and Fp2 are displayed.
The G2 electrode is set to A1 or A2,
the channel number is displayed
beside the G1 electrode. The reference electrode
Bipolar derivation name is displayed when
The channel number is displayed Pattern the reference electrode
between the two electrodes. is not set to “OFF”.
• The electrodes that are selected to be saved in the System program are
displayed with a green circle “ ”. Refer to “Selecting and Saving the
Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in Section 5. The electrodes that are not
selected to be saved in the system program are displayed with a red circle
“ ”.
• The electrode combination is displayed with an electrode combination line.
The blue electrode combination line shows both the G1 and G2 electrodes
are selected to be saved in the System program. The dotted red electrode
combination line shows either electrode or both electrodes are not selected to
be saved in the System program.
• To move the montage map window, drag it.
To change the size of the window, drag the corner of the window.
• To close, minimize or restore the montage map window, right-click anywhere
on the montage map window. Select Close, Minimize or Restore from the pop-
up menu.
NOTE
The electrode combination line can be displayed when:
• The JE-921A electrode junction box is used.
• The G1 or G2 electrode is set to Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4, O1,
O2, F7, F8, T3, T4, T5, T6, A1, A2, Fz, Cz, Pz, T1, T2, PG1 or PG2.
• The reference electrode is set to A1 → A2, A1 ← A2 or A1 ↔ A2.
Using the AC Filter

Use this function only when the electrical circumstances cannot be changed and
AC noise cannot be eliminated.
To turn the AC filter on, click the AC Filter On/Off button on the Tool bar, or
select AC Filter from the View menu.
To change the AC filter frequency, right-click the AC Filter On/Off button and
select the frequency.
Using the ECG Filter

NOTE
The ECG filter function is available only when you acquire ECG
waveforms using the ECG electrodes.
When ECG waveforms are superimposed on the EEG waveforms, use the ECG
filter to reduce the ECG waveform on each EEG channel. This filter works in the
following way to subtract the ECG components from the EEG waveforms.
1. The time point when the ECG waveforms exceed the trigger level of the
trigger channel is used as averaging trigger.
2. The part of the EEG waveforms synchronized with the trigger is averaged in
each channel.
3. The averaged waveform is subtracted from the next trigger point of the EEG
waveform in the averaging period in each channel.

ECG waveforms superimposed on the EEG waveform
Averaged waveforms when the ECG waveforms

exceed the trigger level.
When the ECG filter is turned on, the EEG
waveforms subtracted from the averaged
waveforms are displayed.
Trigger level
When there is a large artifact

Be careful using the ECG filter when there is a large artifact. The ECG filter is
most effective when the EEG waveforms are stable and there is no large artifact.
The ECG filter detects the ECG waveforms superimposed on the EEG
waveforms. The instrument performs averaging of the EEG waveforms using the
QRS waveforms as trigger.
When the ECG filter is turned on, if a large artifact with continuously varying
amplitude, such as body movement, EMG or respiration waveform, is
superimposed on the EEG waveforms, the ECG waveform (averaging result)
cannot be correctly measured. This may distort the EEG waveforms or the EEG
waveforms might not be displayed continuously.
When the EEG waveforms are not displayed continuously, click the Reset button
on the ECG filter dialog box to reset the ECG filter.
1. Select ECG Filter from the View menu. The ECG Filter dialog box opens.
2. Click the Trigger Channel text box arrow to select the ECG trigger channel.

3. Select the trigger mode.

Auto: The trigger level is set automatically. The trigger level cursor is not
Manual: You can set the trigger level manually with the trigger level cursor
displayed over the trigger channel on the screen. Move the cursor
with the Trigger Level ↑ or ↓ arrow so that the cursor position is at
half of the peak amplitude of the QRS wave.
Trigger level cursor
4. Click the “ECG Filter On” check box to turn the ECG filter on. To turn off
the ECG filter, click it again.

When you close the Acquisition program or change the pattern, the ECG
filter is automatically set to Off.
Changing the Various Settings to the Default Settings

You can restore the default setting in the System Program. Refer to “Changing
the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box” in Section 5.
To change the settings to the default settings, select Standard from the View menu.

Using the Timers
About the Timer Bar

The Timer bar provides a Manual, Record, HV and Post HV timer. An LED
indicates the selected timer. The time for the selected timer is displayed in the
time indicator. The timer can count up to 99 minutes 59 seconds.
MAN: The timer can be manually started and stopped by clicking the Start/
Stop button on the Timer bar.
REC: The time indicator displays the total saving time of the selected
pattern.
HV: The time indicator displays the elapsed hyperventilation time.
Timing is started with the Start button. When this button is clicked,
an “HVT START” annotation is automatically marked on the EEG
waveforms.
P HV: The time indicator displays the elapsed post hyperventilation time.
Timing is started with the P HV button. When this button is clicked,
a “HVT END” annotation is automatically marked on the EEG
waveforms.
Start/Stop: Starts and stops the Timer. After the timer is started, the name on
this button changes from Start to Stop.
Reset: Resets the Timer.
To open the Timer bar, select Timer from the View menu.
Manual Timer
1. Select Timer from the View menu. The Timer bar appears.
2. Click the MAN button. The MAN LED lights.
3. Click the Start/Stop button to start the timer.
To reset counting, click the Reset button.
4. Click the Start/Stop button to stop the timer.
The timer is automatically reset when the file is saved.

Record (Recording) Timer

1. Select Timer from the View menu. The Timer bar opens.
2. Click the REC button. The REC LED lights.
If filing started before clicking the REC button, the timer starts counting
automatically.
3. Click the Start/Stop Filing button on the tool bar to start filing the
EEG waveform. The timer starts counting.
To reset counting, click the Reset button. When the pattern is changed, the
timer is reset.
4. Click the Start/Stop button to stop counting. You can restart counting by
clicking this button again. The timer is reset when the file is saved.
HV and Post HV Timer

1. Select Timer from the View menu. The Timer bar opens.
2. Click the HV button to select hyperventilation timer. The HV LED lights.
3. Click the Start/Stop button to start counting elapsed hyperventilation time.

An “HVT START” annotation is marked on the EEG waveforms at the
start of counting and the “HVT mm:ss” event indicating the elapsed time is
marked on the waveform every 30 seconds after that.
To reset the timer to “00:00”, click the Reset button.
Click the Start/Stop button to stop counting temporarily. You can restart the
counting by clicking this button again.
4. Click the P HV button to start counting elapsed post hyperventilation time.

An “HVT END” annotation is marked on the EEG waveforms at the start
of counting and the “Post HVT mm:ss” event indicating the elapsed time is
marked on the waveform every 30 seconds after that.
To reset the timer to “00:00”, click the Reset button.
The time interval of the “HV mm:ss” event and the “Post HV mm:ss” event can
be changed. Refer to “Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box –
Settings in the Junction Box, Operation, Display Page” in section 5.

Annotating EEG Waveforms
General
While acquiring the EEG waveforms, event marks (annotations) can be added
on the waveforms. The following annotations are automatically added on
the waveforms and registered in the event log. You can also manually add
annotations on the waveforms. Up to 5,000 annotations can be saved in the event
log.
6
Annotation Meaning
REC START EEG waveform acquisition started
PAT....EEG Patterns changed
PAT....CAL Calibration waveform applied
PHOTO....Hz Photic stimulation started (When the stimulation
frequency is changed according to the preset program,
this event mark is also saved in the event log.)
HV START Hyperventilation started
HV END Hyperventilation finished
HV mm:ss Elapsed time after start of hyperventilation (every 30
seconds)
POST HV mm:ss Elapsed time after start of post hyperventilation (every
30 seconds)
HVT mm:ss Elapsed time after HV timer started (default setting:
every 30 seconds)
POST HVT mm:ss Elapsed time after Post HV timer started (default
setting: every 30 seconds)
HVT START HV timer started
HVT END HV timer stopped
IMP CHECK ON Impedance check started
IMP CHECK OFF Impedance check finished
MARK ON Mark switch pressed
MARK OFF Mark switch released
RESET ON Reset function on
RESET OFF Reset function off
A1 + A2 ON A1 + A2 reference electrode selected
A1 + A2 OFF A1 + A2 reference electrode released
Recording Gap When the filing is stopped and resumed, this annotation
hhhh:mm:ss is added to indicate a gap in filing.
The time interval of the “HVT mm:ss” event and “Post HVT mm:ss” event can
be changed. Refer to “Changing the Settings in the System Settings Dialog Box –
Settings in the Junction Box, Operation, Display Page” in Section 5.

Manually Annotating the Waveforms

Adding a Preset Annotation
Event name input text box
When the Acquisition program is opened, 10 annotations appear on the event bar
at the bottom of the screen. These annotations correspond to the function keys on
the keyboard. To display different annotations, click the Next button on the event
bar or press the F11 key on the keyboard.
To add an annotation on the waveforms, click the annotation on the event bar
or press the function key on the keyboard. The annotation is added to the latest
point on the waveform.
Adding an Annotation with the Keyboard

1. Click the event name input text box on the event bar or press the F12 key to
start entering an annotation.
If the hotkeys function is turned off, you can skip to step 2.
2. Type an annotation of up to 40 characters.
3. Select the timing to enter the annotation with the radio buttons at the left
corner of the screen.
1st key: The annotation is added to the waveform at the point when you
started typing.
ENTER: The annotation is added to the waveform at the point when you
press the Enter key.
4. Press the Enter key on the keyboard to add the annotation at the selected
timing.

Using the Annotation Dialog Box

Click to sort the annotations. To add an annotation to any specified time on the waveform:
1. Right-click the waveform to add an annotation mark. The Annotation dialog
box opens.
2. Click the annotation on the list box or type the annotation in the Manual
Input text box with up to 40 characters. The annotation is added to the
waveform at the point where you right-clicked. When a new waveform
overwrites the point where you right-clicked, the time of the point is saved in
memory and the annotation is added to the point.
6
3. Click the OK button to close the Annotation dialog box.
To add an annotation to the current time on the waveform:

1. Press the Insert key on the keyboard. The Annotation dialog box opens.
Input text box with up to 40 characters. The annotation is added to the
waveform at the point where you press the Insert key.
To edit the annotations listed in the Event setting dialog box:

1. Click the Edit button on the Annotation dialog box. The Event setting dialog
box opens. You can add, delete or replace the annotations.
2. Click the OK button to close the Event setting dialog box.
Adding a Screen Comment

You can add text and attach an image to a waveform as a screen comment. The
attached file is saved together with the EEG data file.
1. Right-click the waveform to add an annotation mark. The Annotation dialog

box opens.

2. Click the Screen Comment button on the Annotation dialog box. The
Edit Comment dialog box opens.
The pull down menu items correspond to the
list in Table Items dialog box. For details on
Table Items dialog box, refer to “Using the
Annotation Dialog Box” in this section.
Group
Annotation
Comment title
Select the title from the pull down menu. A
comment color is set for each comment title
Check this box to display the screen and the color is changed when you change the
comment in transparency mode. comment.
You can also change the comment by typing the
title with the keyboard.
Color
Select comment color from the pull When you create a report with NeuroReport,
down menu. You can also select you can group screen comments using text in
comment color by pressing the F1 this text box (up to 8 characters). For details,
to F8 key on the keyboard. refer to the NeuroReport operator’s manual.
3. Type a comment with up to 384 characters. You can also enter the comment
set in the Table Items dialog box from the pull down menu on the right side
of the window.

To attach an image file as a screen comment.
i) Click the Ref button on the Comment Edit dialog box. The Open dialog
box opens.
ii) Select the file.
iii) Click the Open button. The Open dialog box closes.
4. Click the OK button. The screen comment is added to the waveform at

the point where you right-clicked. When a new waveform overwrites the
point where you right-clicked, the time of the point is saved in memory and
the comment is added to the point. In the annotation list, this comment is
displayed as an event named “P-COMMENT”.
To cancel adding the comment, click the Cancel button.
The screen comment can be displayed on the Review window. To edit screen
Screen comment in transparent mode comments, refer to “Editing the Annotation” in Section 7.
in the Review window. The attached
picture is shown as an icon.
Capturing the Current Waveforms and Patient Image and Saving Them as a Screen
Comment
Click the “Add current view” button on the Edit Comment window. The
current displayed waveforms and patient image is added to the files as a screen
comment.

Event Notification
NOTE
Do not use an electroencephalograph with this software to monitor the
patient condition. To monitor the patient, use a bedside monitor or other
equipment.
You can set a notification to display when the selected event occurs during EEG
measurement. 6
Automatically Starting the Event Notification Software

The event notification software starts automatically when the software is added
on the Option programs window.
1. Open the System Program window. Refer to “Opening the System Program”
in Section 5.
2. Click the Optional Software button on the System Program window. The
Option programs window displays.
3. Click a blank row of the “Launch when Acquisition program starts” list on
the Acquisition Program tab. The Details window displays.
Click a blank row.

4. Enter the following information and click the OK button.

• Delay Time: 20
• Program ID: (Any number excluding already used ones)
• Status: 0000
• EXE File: C:\nfx11\Notify\E12Notify.exe
• Set Display Type: SW_SHOWNORMAL
• Relative path: Off
• Absolute path: On
Manually Starting the Event Notification Software

Enter “C:\nfx11\Notify\E12Notify.exe” into the “Search programs and files” text
box of the Windows Start menu, or click the E12Notify.exe icon on Windows
Explorer.
Setting the Event Notification Condition

1. Check that the Notification condition icon ( ) is on the notification area of
the Windows taskbar after starting the acquisition program.
2. Click the Notification condition icon. The pop-up menu appears.
NOTE
If the Notification condition icon is not displayed on the notification
area of the Windows taskbar, enter “C:\nfx11\Notify\E12Notify.exe”
into the “Search programs and files” text box of the Windows Start
menu.
3. Select “Notification condition”. The Notification condition window appears.

4. Click the check box of the event. The event notification for the selected
event turns on.
NOTE
• Heart rate is available only when the heart rate is displayed on the
extended channel bar of the acquisition and review windows. For
details, refer to “Displaying Heart Rate” in Section 6.
• DC input signals are available only when they are set to “On” on
the DC Input Conversion Display Setting window. For details, refer
to “Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals” in
Section 5.
6
5. Click the Edit button. The Notification condition settings window for the
selected parameter displays.
6. Set the notification conditions for the selected parameter and click OK.
(The following example shows the Notification condition settings window
for Seizure. For details, refer to the “Changing the Event Notification
Condition” section.)
NOTE
• The “Popup message” setting can also be changed on the “Popup”
column of the Notification condition window.
• The “Event keyword” text box is not case sensitive.
• The notification program automatically closes when the acquisition
program closes.

Displaying and Closing the Event Notification

When the set event is occurred, a notification appears on the upper left corner of
the screen.
Click OK to close the notification.
A notification automatically closes when another notification occurs.
Changing the Event Notification Condition

There are two types of the notification condition settings windows depending on
the parameter.
Notification Condition Settings Window for Seizure and MARK ON

Signal name and settings
Displays the notification message. You can
change this on the “Event keyword” text box.
Event keyword
Enter an event keyword. When the
name of the occurred event matches
with the entered text, a notification
message appears on the screen. The
entered text is also displayed in
“Signal name and settings”.
Popup message Default Sound

Select the time length to display Restores the setting Turns on or off the notification sound.
the notification from the list box. to the factory default.
When “Continuous” is selected, the Select button
notification continues displaying Select the sound file for notification.
until OK is clicked or another
notification occurs. Play button
Plays the selected sound file.

Notification Condition Settings Window for Heart Rate and DC Input

Signals
The following example shows the notification condition settings window for
heart rate.
Shows the parameter setting. For details, refer

to “Displaying Heart Rate” in Section 6 and
Signal name and settings “Changing the Conversion Range of the DC Input
Displays the notification message title. Signals” in Section 5.
Automatic message
6
Lower limit, Upper limit, Duration generation
When the measured value exceeds When this item is checked,
either of the upper or lower limit the notification message
for the set duration, a notification is automatically generated
appears on the screen. Pressing acoording to the setting in
the button decrease the value the “Condition” box. If you
and pressing the button increase want to change the message,
the value. An unchecked item is uncheck the item.
excluded from the notification
condition. Lower, Upper
When the measured value
exceeds the lower limit, the
message beside “Lower” is
Popup message dispalyed on a nottification.
Select the time length to display When the measured value
the notification from the list box. exceeds the upper limit, the
When “Continuous” is selected, message beside “Upper” is
the notification continues displayed on a notification.
displaying until OK is clicked or Default Sound
another notification occurs. Restores the setting Turns on or off the notification sound.
to the factory default.
Select button
Select the sound file for notification.
Play button
Plays the selected sound file.
NOTE
• Heart rate is available only when the heart rate is displayed on the
extended channel bar of the acquisition and review windows. For
details, refer to “Displaying Heart Rate” in Section 6.
• DC input signals are available only when they are set to “On” on the DC
Input Conversion Display Setting window. For details, refer to “Changing
the Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals” in Section 5.

Photic Stimulation and Hyperventilation
WARNING WARNING
Do not perform hyperventilation activation when Always connect the flash lamp assembly cable to
the patient has serious heart disease, acute the PHOTIC LAMP connector on the photic
cerebrovascular disease or respiratory stimulator control unit. When you do not use the
insufficiency. flash lamp assembly or it is disconnected from
the photic stimulator control unit, attach the
PHOTIC LAMP connector cap to the PHOTIC
LAMP connector. When the instrument power is
on, about 560 V is present at the PHOTIC LAMP
connector on the photic stimulator control unit.
Touching the PHOTIC LAMP connector causes
electrical shock.
CAUTION CAUTION
If photo-paroxymal response appears during All activation testing must be applied under the
photic stimulation, immediately stop the supervision of a physician.
stimulation to prevent evoking seizure in the
patient.
CAUTION
Do not use the flash lamp assembly continuously
over 5 minutes. After 5 minutes of continuous
use, the flash lamp assembly gets very hot and
causes burn if touched.
If the flash lamp assembly is used continuously for

5 minutes, do not use it for at least 20 minutes to let it cool
down.
Put the flash lamp 20 to 30 cm from the patient’s eyes.
NOTE
To perform photic stimulation, the optional LS-120A photic stimulator
control unit is required.

Activation Bar
The instrument provides three photic stimulation modes (auto, manual, single)
and a hyperventilation mode. You can start activation and change the stimulation
settings by opening the Activation bar.
NOTE
• To perform photic stimulation, the optional LS-120A photic stimulator
• When the photic stimulator control unit is not connected to the PC
unit or the power of the photic stimulator control unit is turned off, a
6
“Connect” button appears instead of the “Start” button on the activation
bar. To start photic stimulation when the “Connect” button appears,
connect the photic stimulator control unit to the PC unit, turn on the
power of the photic stimulator control unit and click the “Connect”
button. The button changes to “Start” if the photic stimulator control unit
and the PC unit are connected and the power is on.
Mode: Select the photic stimulation mode.

Selection list:
AUTO1, AUTO2, AUTO3:
Performs the programmed automatic photic stimulation.
Up to 30 steps can be set for each automatic photic
stimulation mode.
MANUAL: Performs manual photic stimulation.
SINGLE: Performs manual single photic stimulation.
Frequency: Select the photic stimulation frequency.
Sel: Select the photic stimulation or hyperventilation mode. The LED

indicates the selected activation mode.
Setup: Opens the Photo/HV Setup dialog box to select the photic
stimulation pulse mode, stimulation time, pause time, delay time or
interval time for photic stimulation or hyperventilation.
P HV: Stops the hyperventilation pacing and starts the Post HV timer.
Reset: Cancels the current photic stimulation or hyperventilation activation.
Start: Starts the selected activation.

• To temporarily stop activation, click this button.
• To restart activation, click this button again.
The “Start” button changes into the “Connect” button when the
photic stimulator control unit is not connected to the PC unit or the
power of the photic stimulator control unit is turned off.
To open the Activation bar, click the Display Activation Control button on
the tool bar, or select Activation from the Control menu.
Photo/HV Setup dialog box
Photo
Pulse: Selects the photic stimulation pulse mode for each photic
stimulation mode. The default setting is Normal.
Normal: Sequentially generates regular single pulses at
the preset frequency.
Random: Generates single pulses at a random frequency
which is within ±50% of the preset frequency.
Double: Generates regular double pulses at the preset
frequency. You can change the time interval
between the two pulses.
Stim Time (s): Sets the stimulation time duration from 1 to 99 s in 1 s steps
(available in both automatic and manual photic stimulation).
Pause (s): Sets the stimulation pause time from 0 to 30 s in 1 s steps
(available only in automatic photic stimulation).
Delay (ms): Sets the time interval between double pulses from 10 to
990 s in 10 ms steps (available only in double photic
stimulation).
Time interval: Delay
Double pulses
HV
Interval (s): Sets the duration of one hyperventilation.
Period (min): Sets the total period of all hyperventilations.
OK:
Closes the Photo/HV Setup dialog box.

Photic Stimulation
Photic stimulation is performed from low frequency to about 30 Hz at 2 Hz or
3 Hz intervals. There are two ways to perform photic stimulation:
• With a rest time between stimulation periods
• Continuous stimulation by changing frequency
The instrument provides two photic stimulation modes: automatic and manual.
In automatic mode, the frequency, stimulation time and pause time for each
step are preset and stimulation is completely automatic. Refer to “Programming
Automatic Photic Stimulation Modes” in Section 5. In manual mode, you can
6
change the frequency and start and stop each step manually.
NOTE
• To perform photic stimulation, the optional LS-120A photic stimulator
• When the photic stimulator control unit is not connected to the PC
unit or the power of the photic stimulator control unit is turned off, a
“Connect” button appears instead of the “Start” button on the activation
bar. To start photic stimulation when the “Connect” button appears,
connect the photic stimulator control unit to the PC unit, turn on the
power of the photic stimulator control unit and click the “Connect”
button. The button changes to “Start” if the photic stimulator control unit
and the PC unit are connected and the power is on.
• When the supplied voltage does not meet the specification, or
the frequency is set as 50 Hz/60 Hz, the photic stimulation may
occasionally fail.
Automatic Photic Stimulation

1. Click the Display Activation Control button on the tool bar, or select
Activation from the View menu. The Activation bar appears.
2. Click the Sel button to select the photic stimulation mode. The PS LED
lights.
3. Select “AUTO1”, “AUTO2” or “AUTO3” from the Mode list box.
4. Select the stimulation time (Stim Time), pause time (Pause) and/or photic
stimulation pulse mode (Pulse).
i) Click the Setup button on the Activation bar. The Photo/HV Setup dialog
box opens.
To change the stimulation time:

Click the Stim Time list box arrow, then click the appropriate
stimulation time.

To change the pause time:

Click the Pause Time list box arrow, then click the appropriate pause
time.
To change the photic stimulation pulse mode, click the appropriate

button in the Pulse area. When Double is selected, select the delay time
with the Delay list box.
ii) Click the OK button to close the Photo/HV Setup dialog box.
5. Click the Start button on the Activation bar to start photic stimulation.
Stimulation automatically stops when the preset steps are complete.
• To temporarily stop stimulation, click the Start/Stop button.

• To restart stimulation, click the Start/Stop button again. Automatic
stimulation is restarted from the current step.
• To cancel stimulation, click the Reset button.
Manual Photic Stimulation

lights.
3. Select “MANUAL” from the Mode list box.
4. Select the stimulation frequency from the Frequency list box.
5. Select the stimulation time (Stim Time) and photic stimulation pulse mode
(Pulse).
i) Click the Setup button. The Photo/HV Setup dialog box opens.
To change the stimulation time:

Click the Stim Time list box arrow, then select the appropriate
stimulation time.
To change the photic stimulation pulse mode:

Click the appropriate button in the Pulse area. When Double is selected,
select the delay time with the Delay list box.
ii) Click the OK button to close the PHOTO/HV Setup dialog box.
6. Click the Start button on the Activation bar to start the manual photic
stimulation. The Start button changes to the Stop button. To stop the
stimulation, click the Stop button.

Single Photic Stimulation

You can manually generate a single photic stimulation by pressing the Start
button on the Activation bar or inputting a trigger pulse from an external
instrument.
lights.
6
3. Select “SINGLE” from the Mode list box.
4. Click the Start button on the Activation bar to generate a single photic
stimulation.

Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler
You can measure the voltage (amplitude) and time interval by displaying the two
vertical cursors and horizontal cursors or ruler on the screen when the waveforms
are frozen. The voltage and time cursors are displayed at the same time.
Using the Time & Voltage Cursor

1. Select “Time & Voltage Cursor” from the Tool menu or click the Time-
Voltage Cursor button on the EEG bar. Two horizontal (voltage) cursors
and two vertical (amplitude) cursors appear on the screen. The Cursor dialog
box also opens.
Voltage cursors
To measure the voltage of a

channel, click the channel
No. on the left side of the
screen.
Cursor dialog box
Time cursors
2. Right-click the cursor to select. The selected cursor changes color.
3. Click the appropriate position to move the cursor to, or drag the cursor to
the appropriate position. The time interval, frequency or voltage between the
two cursors is displayed on the Cursor dialog box.
About the Cursor dialog box

Frequency: Displays the frequency calculated from the time
interval.
Amplitude: Displays the amplitude between the two voltage
cursors.
Time: Displays the time interval between the two time
cursors.
Lock cursor interval: When checked, the intervals between the two cursors
are fixed. When the voltage cursors and time cursors
are displayed, the rectangle enclosed by 4 cursors and
the rectangle can be moved with the mouse.

Using the Ruler

1. Select Ruler from the Tool menu or Click the Ruler button on the EEG
bar. The ruler appears on the screen.
Ruler
2. Click the appropriate position to measure the amplitude or time of the

waveform. Or, drag the ruler to the position.
To change the scale of the ruler, right-click the waveform screen.
You cannot use the ruler when the waveform display speed is less then 0.5 s.

Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph
components and displays amplitude for each frequency as a DSA (Density
Spectral Array) trendgraph on the review window, EEG Scope – Comparison
mode and remote monitor. During waveform acquisition, the instrument can
create the FFT data to display the DSA trendgraph.
1. From the Tools menu, select DSA Analysis → FFT setup. The FFT setup
dialog box opens.
2. Select the following options to create the FFT data.
FFT setup dialog box options

Create FFT data during acquisition:
Check this box to create the FFT data during waveform
acquisition.
FFT pattern:
The settings in the FFT pattern area can be saved with a pattern
name. To change the pattern name, click the Rename button.

FFT channel:
Select the electrode for the FFT calculation.
To select all electrodes, click the “Select all” button.
To cancel electrode selection, click the Clear button.

NOTE
When all electrodes are selected, the recording time
becomes shorter. Depending on the number of selected
electrodes, CPU performance is reduced and the display
drawing becomes unsmooth.
Reference:
Select the reference electrode for the FFT calculation.
DSA pattern:
Select the DSA trendgraph display settings. This setting is for
reviewing the DSA trendgraph. Refer to “Displaying a DSA
Trendgraph – Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings”
in Section 7.
To cancel settings, click the Cancel button.

Frequency Map
The EEG data can be shown as a frequency map and you can easily check the
frequency distribution. The frequency map has a 2.5 second time lag due to the
frequency analysis. To display the map, at least 4 channels have to be set as FFT
channels. For details of FFT channel settings, refer to “Creating FFT Data for the
DSA Trendgraph” in this section.
Frequency map
Displaying the Frequency Map

1. Click the Frequency Map button on the EEG bar. The frequency map
appears.
Time
Shows the time at which the EEG
data was acquired. This time might
have a time lag of up to 2.5 seconds. Range
Shows maximum and
Color Scale minimum voltages and
Shows the color and powers.
correspondent frequency.
Frequency map
Shows up to 8 maps: 7 frequency
bands and a total frequency map.
The map can be shown for the
power or voltage.

2. Right-click the frequency map. Pop-up menu appears.
3. Select “Map Operation” → “Map Start” to start analysis.
If the frequency map does not appear, check the following.

• The “Create FFT data during acquisition” is checked in the FFT settings
dialog box. (Refer to “Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph” in this
section.)
• The “Map Start” is checked on the pop-up menu for the frequency map.
To change the map layout, right-click the frequency map and select
Layout → Vertical or Horizontal. This function is only available when the
Frequency maps are 4 or less.
Frequency Map Settings

Map Settings
You can change the frequency map settings such as map display, frequency
bands and electrodes.
1. Right-click the frequency map. Select “Setup” → “Map”. The Map window
appears.
2. Change the settings.
Amplitude
Select Voltage or Power. Interpolation
Select the
calculation method
Electrode positions for the interpolation.
Resolution
Electrode names
When 1 × 1 is
selected, the
Values waveform may
You can display the become unsmooth
electrode value when the due to large
electrodes are displayed calculation amount.
on the frequency map. Background color
Select Show or Hide.
NOTE
When linear, quadratic or cubic, called “nearest neighbor method”, is
selected for interpolation, the contour lines may be unsmooth. If this
happens, set the resolution to 3 × 3 and set the gradations to 17 colors.

Scale Range
1. Right-click the frequency map and select “Setup” → “Scale Range”. The
Scale range window opens.
2. Set the top and bottom value of the scale.

Top
3. Click the OK button to close the Scale range window.
Bottom
Frequency Band Settings
You can change the frequency bands and save up to 7 bands for a frequency band
settings. You can name and save these settings. Up to 8 settings can be saved.
1. Right-click the frequency map and select “Setup” → “Frequency Band”. The
Frequency band window opens.
2. Change or create the band settings.
Lower [Hz]/Upper [Hz] User-Defined

Enter the frequency range. Use keyboard Select the settings from the pull down
or list box arrow to enter the figure. menu or enter a name with the keyboard.
Frequency
Enter the name for bands. To delete the
frequency bands, make the text box
empty.
Default
Initialize the
settings.
Color Display Total

Not used. Check this box to display
the total map.

Electrode Position Settings

You can save the electrodes, montages and the shape of the map. These settings
are saved together.
1. Right-click the frequency map and select “Setup” → “Electrodes”. The

Electrodes window opens.
2. Click the Montage text box arrow and select a montage.
Map
Shows the electrodes and their
positions.
Map type
Select With/No head outline.
Reference
Cannot be set in this window.
To change the reference electrode,
use FFT setup window.
Copy montage from

To change the current montage into
the stored montage, click the text Electrodes
box arrow, select the montage and Shows electrode names and electrode positions. To show
click the “Copy” button. other electrodes, click the “Next” button.
3. Drag the electrodes in the Map area to move the electrodes.
4. Add or delete the electrodes for the montage.

i) Select the electrode to add or delete in the Electrodes area. Electrode
Name window appears.
ii) Click the electrode to add. To delete an electrode, click the OFF button.
NOTE
You can set the electrode names only when the montage is set to
“User”.
To save the montage with its name, enter the name in the montage text box
and click the OK button.
Scale Color Settings

You can change the colors and gradation for the frequency map.
1. Right-click the frequency map and select “Setup” → “Scale Color”. The
Scale colors window opens.
6
2. Select the colors and gradations.
• To select a color scale, click the Scheme box arrow and select a scale from
the pull down menu.
• You can customize the scale color. Click the Custom button and set the
color scale.
• To make the contour line more clear, select 17 or 33 for the gradations.
3. Click the OK button to close the window. The map color changes.

Displaying Heart Rate
The heart rate (bpm) can be displayed on the extended channel bar of the
acquisition and review windows. The heart rate is calculated based on ECG data.
NOTE
If the date of birth is not entered in the patient information, heart rate
is calculated on the assumption that the patient is an adult . Before
displaying heart rate, check that the patient’s date of birth is entered.
Otherwise, heart rate cannot be calculated correctly and noise or P waves
may be counted as QRS.
1. Click Tools on the menu bar and select “Heart Rate” → “Heart Rate Setup”.
The Heart Rate Setup dialog box opens.
2. On the Heart Rate Setup dialog box:

i) Check “Show heart rate”.
ii) In “Primary channel”, select the ECG channels for heart rate calculation.
If measuring two or more ECG channels, you can check “Secondary
channel” and select the channels.
iii) Select the heart rate calculation method.
Average: The heart rate is calculated by a moving average of the
R-R intervals of the latest 12 beats (including VPC).
The heart rate is updated every beat.
Instantaneous: The heart rate is calculated every beat.
iv) Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
ECG channels for HR calculation
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
3. Check that the heart rate is displayed on the extended channel bar of the
selected channel(s).

Settings for Displaying Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter

Trendgraphs for Review Program
Up to 8 trendgraphs of DSA, heart rate and DC input parameter data can be

displayed on the review window, EEG Scope – Comparison mode and remote
monitor.
To display the value of heart rate and trendgraph of DSA, heart rate and/or DC 6
input parameter, the following settings are required.
NOTE
The DC input parameter trendgraph is displayed only when DC
conversion is set to On for the DC input channel. Refer to “Changing the
Conversion Range of the DC Input Signals” in Section 5.
1. Click Tools on the menu bar and select “Trend Display” → “Trend display
setup”. The Trend display setting dialog box opens.
2. On the Trend display setting dialog box,

i) Select a number of trendgraph(s) to display. The maximum number
is 8. The Trend settings 1 to 8 are activated depending on the selected
number.
ii) For each Trend setting, select DSA or Trend and its group from the pull-
down menu.
iii) Click the Setting button to setup the details for the selected group.
A dialog box for DSA or Trend appears.

i) ii) iii)
Setting window for DSA group
Setting window for Trend group
3. Click the OK button to close the Trend Display Setting dialog box.
Creating Groups of FFT Channles for the DSA Trendgraph

Groups of FFT channels for the DSA pattern can be created in the DSA/Event
Setup dialog box.
DSA pattern:
The settings in the DSA Pattern area can be saved with a DSA pattern name of up
to 40 characters. To rename the pattern, click the Rename button.

DSA Pattern area

FFT channels used for DSA:
The FFT data is saved in every derivation that is selected in the FFT channel area
of the FFT settings dialog box. You can select the derivations to display the DSA
trendgraph.
• To select all derivations, click the Select all button.
• To select two or more consecutive derivations, drag the cursor to select the
derivations.
• To select more than one derivation, click the derivations while pressing the
Ctrl key.
6
DSA:
Selects whether or not to display the DSA data in the DSA trendgraph.
Edge (%):
Displays the edge frequency for each analysis period. You can set the percentage
from 0 to 100% in the text box.
Peak (Hz):
Displays the peak frequency for each analysis period. You can set the range of
the peak frequency between 0 to 20 Hz in the text box.
Either “Edge” or “Peak” is selectable.
Creating a Trend Group for Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs
You can save trendgraph settings as a trend group. Trend groups for the heart rate
and DC input parameter trendgraph can be created in the Trend Setup dialog box.
Opens the color palette for
Set the scale range. selecting a waveform color.
Up to two parameters can be

assigned for one trend group.
To set a second parameter,
click Trend 2.

Displaying the Camera Image
When the QI-120A camera capture unit is connected to the instrument, camera
image can be displayed on the screen. For details, refer to the camera capture
unit Operator’s manual. To set the camera capture unit function on or off, use the
System program.
To display the camera image in the Acquisition program:
1. Select “Camera” from the View menu. The Camera window opens.
2. Check that the image is displayed on the screen.
3. Right-click the camera window. Click the “Camera Image” to switch the
display mode. You can change the window size by dragging a corner of the
window.
When the “Camera Image” is on, the image is displayed in the camera
window with the original size, and when the “Camera Image” is off, the
image is automatically enlarged to the window size.
4. Right-click the camera window and select Exit to close the camera window.

Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring
An EEG measurement file has a maximum size of 2 GB when not using the
extended file format (recording time for one file depends on the sampling
frequency and number of electrodes to be saved). The long term monitoring
function lets you save long term EEG by linking multiple EEG files.
You can specify the recording time for one file in the Sytsem program. Refer to
“Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform Monitoring” in Section 6
5. During long term monitoring, when a file reaches the specified recording
time, another file is automatically created and linked. The instrument continues
creating files until monitoring ends or the free disk space becomes low.
The instrument creates a “LIF file” which has the link information for the linked
long term EEG files. You can use the LIF file to review the long term files EEG
consecutively, as if they are one EEG file.
Example:
LIF file
File 1 File 3 File 5
File 2 File 4
12 hours 12 hours 12 hours

(720 min.) 12 hours (720 min.) 12 hours (720 min.)
(720 min.) (720 min.)
Start filing Overlap End filing

(30 sec.)
Recording time for one file: 720 minutes (12 hours)

Overlap time between files: 30 seconds
The number of files depends on the examination time.

24 hours: 2 files
36 hours: 3 files
48 hours: 4 files etc.
When the optional QV-101A Digital Video Unit and QP-110AK Digital Video
Software (digital video link) are installed, you can save the patient image during
* The patient images are saved long term EEG waveform monitoring*. The QP-251AK Spike Detector Software
without overlap. (version 20000714NK or later) can be used in long term monitoring (online spike
detection).
For setting, refer to “Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform
Monitoring” in Section 5.

NOTE
• If you are not sure how long the examination takes and want to
automatically make long term files until examination ends, check the
“Keep repeating” check box on the Long Term Monitoring window. For
details, refer to “Changing the Settings for Long Term EEG Waveform
Monitoring” in Section 5.
* 2 GB is the maximum file size • If the file size for a stage exceeds 2 GB*, the long term monitoring
when not using extended file cannot be started. File size depends on the combination of the
format. sampling frequency and number of electrodes to be saved. Refer to
“Disk Capacity” in Section 1.
• If the long term recording stops because of trouble or error, the links
between the long term EEG waveform files are lost. To link the long
term EEG waveform files again, select the files in the data list and click
the Merge/Link option button in the bottom of the NeuroWorkbench
window. For details, refer to “Linking Files” in Section 9.
Long Term Monitoring

1. Check and change the long term monitoring settings (System program →
System button → System Settings dialog box – General page → Long term
monitoring).
To continuously review the long term EEG waveform monitoring data

(saved as different EEG data files for each stage) in the review program,
check the “Create LIF file to merge stages in review” in the Long Term
Monitoring window.
2. Open the Acquisition program.
3. From the Tool menu, select Long Term. The Long term bar opens.
Displays the settings of the EEG data file storage media,
VTR number and disk region for digital video for each
stage (the disk region is not used when the QV-101A
Digital Video Unit is used). The current stage settings
Lights in green during filing.
are highlighted.
Changes to the Stop button during filing
NOTE
During long term EEG waveform monitoring, other functions are not
available.
4. Select the starting stage to start long term EEG waveform monitoring.
5. Click the Start button. The confirmation window opens.

6. Click the Yes button. A new EEG data file is created in the selected storage
media. The stage is automatically changed at the preset recording time.
To stop the long term monitoring, click the Stop button.
NOTE
The long term monitoring cannot be temporarily stopped.
7. When the filing of all the stages is complete, the LTM End dialog box opens.
Check the filing result and click the OK button.
6
NOTE
The system may be unstable after long term monitoring. It is
recommended to restart the computer after long term monitoring.
8. From the File menu, select Exit to close the Acquisition program.
9. Click the (Start) button on the task bar and click the Shut down button
to turn the PC unit off.
If necessary, restart the computer.

1. Select AV Delete from the Edit menu. The AV Delete dialog box opens and
the Electrode position layout table and the currently selected montage appear
on the dialog box.
Pattern table
You can change the AV electrode name on this

window. To change the name, select the AV
electrode from the AV elec list box and enter the
new name in the Name text box.
Pattern table:
Displays the montage for the current pattern. All channels can be displayed
by using the scroll bar.
Electrode position layout:

The reference electrode names are displayed on the Electrode position
layout. The electrodes used for reference voltage calculation are highlighted.
To add or delete an electrode on the electrode position layout, click the
electrode.
2. Click an electrode to highlight or unhighlight it. Highlighting indicates that

the electrode is selected for AV derivation. “*” appears beside changing (“*”
means temporary changes).
3. Click the Save button to save the changings. The settings are saved in each
pattern.
4. Click the OK button to close the AV Delete dialog box.

Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation
To adjust the voltage balance between the BN1 and BN2 reference electrodes
when the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected, use the BN balance dialog
box.
1. Select BN Balance from the Edit menu. The BN balance dialog box opens.
When the reference electrode is changed to BN, the BN Balance dialog box
automatically opens. 6
Balance:
Shows the voltage balance between the BN1 electrode and the BN2
electrode. The displayed value is the ratio of the BN1 electrode.
2. Click the arrows beside the text box to minimize the ECG waveform
overlapped on the EEG waveform. You can type the ratio with the keyboard.
3. Click the OK button to close the BN Balance dialog box.

Keyboard Operation
You can operate the instrument with the following keys in the Acquisition
window.
To disable the following keyboard operation, set the Hotkey on the Edit menu to
off.
NOTE
Keyboard operation is only available when the Acquisition program
window is active.
Key (Label) Operation

1: Pattern I (Pat I) Changes to the pattern in the current group.
2: Pattern II (Pat II)
3: Pattern III (Pat III)
4: Pattern IV (Pat IV)
5: Pattern V (Pat V)
6: Pattern VI (Pat VI)
7: Pattern VII (Pat VII)
8: Pattern VIII (Pat VIII)
9 (Free) Changes to the free pattern in the current group.
0 (Group) Changes the pattern group. Pattern I is automatically
selected. Each operation changes the selection as follows:
A→B→C→D→A
Q (SENS) Highlights the setting in the Sens text box on the Amp bar.
W (TC) Highlights the setting in the TC text box on the Amp bar.
E (HF) Highlights the setting in the HF text box on the Amp bar.
R (Pat) Highlights the setting in the Pat text box on the Amp bar.
T (Ref) Highlights the setting in the Ref text box on the Amp bar.
Y (AC-F) Turns the AC filter on/off.
A (CAL) Displays the calibration waveforms.
S (EEG) Displays the EEG waveforms.
D (IMP) Performs the skin-electrode contact impedance check.
F (RESET) Returns all waveforms to the baseline position.
Z (Patient) Opens the Patient Information dialog box.
X (Photo) Opens the Activation bar and highlights the Start button.
When the Activation bar is open, highlights the Start
button. You can start the photic stimulation by pressing the
Enter key.
C (Timer) Opens the Timer bar and highlights the Start button. When
the Timer bar is open, highlights the Start button. You can
start counting by pressing the Enter key.
Alt + [Space] (Record) Starts or stops filing.
Ctrl + [Space] (Close) Closes and saves the current file.
N (AutoRecord) Opens the Auto Record Navigation window.
When the setting is highlighted, use the ↑ or ↓ key and Enter key to change the
setting.

EEG Scope – Comparison Mode
In the EEG Scope – Comparison mode, you can display the currently acquired
waveforms on the right side of the screen (acquisition window) and a previous
part of the same waveforms on the left side of the screen (review window: EEG
scope – comparison mode). For operation of each window, refer to Section 7
“Review Program”.
6
Starting the EEG Scope – Comparison Mode
Select EEG Scope (Comparison) from the Option menu in the Acquisition
program.
Review window
Acquisition window
(EEG Scope – comparison mode)
Closing the EEG Scope – Comparison Mode

To close the EEG scope:
• Select Exit from the File menu of the Review window.
• Click the close button on the top right corner of the Review window.
The EEG Scope automatically closes:

• When the Acquisition program is closed.
• When a new acquisition file is created on the Acquisition program.
• When the current file is saved.

Display Layout
You can change the size of the EEG scope window.
Drag the corner or edge of the window or select “Display Window” from the
“View” menu.
To restore the display window setting, check “Save Screen Layout”. The display
window setting automatically saved when the EEG scope window is closed and
the setting is available when the EEG scope window opens again.
Auto Refresh
To show the latest waveform, check the Auto Refresh of the View menu. The
EEG Scope periodically refreshes the waveforms.

Explanation of Menus and Bars
File Menu
New
Use this command to create a new file. If any other files are open when you
select New, a message appears so that you can save the files before creating a
new file.
Save
6
Saves the current file. Check the patient information before saving the file. Refer
to “Starting and Ending EEG Measurement – Saving the File” in this section.
All Patterns (Import/Export)

Saves all pattern settings and called them up again.
Exit
Closes the Acquisition program.
View Menu
Display Control
Opens the Display Control dialog box to select whether or not to display the
electrode name (montage) and vertical lines to indicate time scale, etc.
Display Time
Selects the time of the data displayed on the screen. You can select 5, 10, 20, 30,
60 s, 5 min/page or User. When the User is selected, you can set the display time
freely.
Channel Layout
Even Layout
Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order.
Channels that are temporarily turned off are omitted.
Channel Layout
Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order. Blank
spaces are included to indicate undisplayed channels.
Superimpose
Overlaps consecutive odd and even number channels.
Patient Information
Opens the Patient Information dialog box to enter or check the patient
information.
Activation
Opens the activation bar to select the photic stimulation mode, and optional
pulse, frequency and hyperventilation mode.

Timer
Opens the Timer bar to display the recording timer, hyperventilation and post
hyperventilation timer.
Display Montage Map

Displays the montage map window on the screen.
Navigation
Turns the EEG recording navigation window on/off.
Long Term
Opens the Long Term bar for long term EEG waveform monitoring.
Camera
Displays the patient image on the screen when the optional QI-120A camera
capture unit is installed.
Bar
Event Bar
Displays the Event bar.
EEG Bar
Displays the EEG bar.
Amp Bar
Displays the Amp bar.
Display Size Bar

Displays the Waveform Display Size bar to change the display sensitivity for
all channels.
Option Bar
Displays the option bar. The EEG Scope – Comparison mode is installed.
Tool Bar
Displays the Tool bar.
EEG Bar
Displays the EEG bar.
AC Filter
Turns the AC filter on/off. When the AC filter is on, the AC interference is
reduced. You can select 50 or 60 Hz.
ECG Filter
Opens the ECG Filter dialog box to reduce the ECG waveform superimposed
on the EEG waveform. When another pattern is selected, the ECG filter is
automatically set to off.
Standard
Restores the various settings to the default settings set in the System program.

Edit Menu
Modify Annotation List
Opens the Annotation table to modify annotations.
BN Balance
Opens the BN Balance dialog box to adjust the voltage balance between the BN
reference electrodes when the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected. To set
the BN voltage balance, check the “Use BN electrodes” in the “Electrodes to be
Saved” dialog box of the System program when the JE-921A electrode junction
box is used. Refer to Section 5.
6
AV Delete
Opens the AV Delete dialog box to select or delete reference electrodes in the AV
derivation.
CAL Control
Opens the CAL Control dialog box to select the calibration mode and voltage.
Pattern Table
Opens the pattern table to check or temporarily change the currently selected
montage, amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant, high-cut filter, calibration
voltage), waveform display on/off, waveform color, and amplitude limit for each
channel.
Wireless Unit
This command is available only when the WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit is
connected. Refer to the WEE-1000 Wireless Input Unit operator’s manual for
details.
Hotkeys
Turns hotkeys on/off.
Tools Menu
Time & Voltage Cursor
Displays two horizontal cursors to measure the voltage (amplitude) and
two vertical (time) cursors to measure the time interval. Waveforms stop
automatically when the cursors appear.
Ruler
Displays the ruler to measure amplitude and time interval of the waveform.
Waveforms stop automatically when the ruler appears.

DSA Analysis
Opens FFT setup window to create FFT data for reviewing the DSA trendgraph
in the Review program.
Frequency Map
Displays frequency maps.
Heart Rate
Heart rate setup
Opens the setup window for displaying heart rate (bpm) on the extended
channel bar.
Trend Display
Trend display setup
Opens the Trend display setting window for displaying up to eight trendgraphs
on the lower screen.
Option Menu
EEG Scope (Comparison)
Starts the EEG Scope program.
Help Menu
About
Shows version information of the program.
Channel Setting Menu

Show Selected Channel
Shows only the waveforms of the selected channels. To select channels, click or
drag on the channel numbers before opening the pop-up menu.
Hide Selected Channel

Hides the waveforms of the selected channels. To select channels, click or drag
on the channel numbers before opening the pop-up menu.
Reset Hidden Channel

Shows all the waveforms.
Pattern Table
Displays the pattern table for the currently selected pattern.

Sensitivity
Opens the Sensitivity window to set amplifier sensitivity. When a channel is
selected, settings are available only for the selected channel and when any
channel is not selected, settings are available for all channels set as ACC.
Time Constant
Opens the Time Constant window to set the time constant (frequency) for the
low-cut filter. When a channel is selected, settings are available only for the
selected channel and when no channel is selected, settings are available for all
channels that are set as ACC.
6
High Cut Filter
Opens the High-cut filter window to set the time constant (frequency) for the
high-cut filter. When a channel is selected, settings are available only for the
Restore Setting to ACC

Changes to ACC amplifier settings for the selected channels.
Wave Color
Changes the color of the waveform.
Unselect All
Resets the channel selection.
Even Layout
Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order. Channels
that are temporarily turned off are omitted.
Channel Layout
spaces are left for hidden channels.
Superimpose
Overlaps consecutive odd and even channels. Channels are omitted if their time
constant is not set to ACC.
Amp Bar
The amplifier settings (sensitivity, time constant and high-cut filter), pattern and
reference electrodes can be changed for all channels at a time by clicking the text
box arrow on the amp bar and selecting the item from the pull down menu.
Sens (Sensitivity selection button)

Selects the sensitivity. This selection applies to all channels whose sensitivity
setting is ACC.

Sensitivity selection list (mV/mm):

1, 2, 3 (2.5), 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 700, 1000
OFF: Only the baseline is displayed.
TC (Time constant selection button)

Selects the time constant (low-cut filter). This selection applies to all channels
whose Time Constant setting is ACC.
Time constant selection list (s):

0.001, 0.003, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10
Low-cut filter selection list (Hz):

0.016, 0.032, 0.080, 0.16, 0.27, 0.53, 1.6, 5.3, 53, 160
HF (High-cut filter selection button)

Selects the high cut filter. This selection applies to all channels whose high-cut
filter setting is ACC.
High-cut filter selection list:

15, 35, 60, 70, 120, 300, 600 Hz, 1.2 kHz, 3.0 kHz
50RP: Reduces frequency components over 50 Hz (−18 dB/oct) to remove

artifacts (EMG). Depending on examination circumstances, use the 50RP
filter to remove EMG.
NOTE
filter dialog box differ depending on the sampling frequency when
acquired. For details of the sampling frequency setting, refer to “Selecting
and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in Section 5.
Pat (Pattern selection button)

Selects a programmed EEG pattern.
Programmed pattern list:

I to VIII A, B, C, D and Free A, B, C, D (36 patterns per set file).
A pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter,
time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveforms color
and amplitude limit.
Ref (Reference electrode selection button)

NOTE
When the reference electrode is set to A1 + A2 in waveform acquisition,
you cannot change this setting during waveform review.
Selects the reference electrode. Only available for monopolar derivation.

Reference electrode selection list:

A1 → A2: Switches all A1 to A2.
A1 ← A2: Switches all A2 to A1.
A1 ↔ A2: Switches A1 and A2.
A1 + A2: Short-circuits A1 and A2 to each other in the electrode junction box.
Vx: Switches all A1 and A2 to CZ.
AV: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for AV derivation.
BN: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for BN derivation.
SD: Switches all A1 and A2 to the reference for Laplacian derivation.
Aav: Switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged reference of A1 and A2.
Org: Switches all A1 and A2 to the averaged voltage of C3 and C4 for the
6
original reference derivation (system reference).
OFF: Cancels the selection of reference electrode and returns to the
programmed setting.
Clock
Displays the current time.
Elapsed time
Displays the elapsed time from the start of filing.
Display Size Bar

Changes waveform display size in steps of one (3 to 100) with the slider.
EEG Bar
Time_Voltage Cursor
Displays two horizontal (voltage) cursors and two vertical (amplitude) cursors on
the screen. The Cursor dialog box also opens.
Ruler
Shows the ruler on the screen.
Frequency Map
Shows the frequency maps on the screen.
/
Smoothed/Normal Waveform
Switches the display of the waveform lines between the smoothed or normal line.
Option Bar
EEG Scope (Comparison)
Opens the EEG Scope window.

Tool Bar
AC Filter ON/OFF
Turns the AC filter on to reduce the AC interference.
Display Pattern Table

channel.
Impedance Check
Opens the Impedance Check dialog box to check the skin-electrode contact
impedance. The impedance check starts when this button is pressed and held for
about two seconds.
CAL Signal
Displays the calibration waveforms.
EEG Signal
Displays the EEG waveforms.
Reset
Returns all waveforms to the baseline position. When this button is clicked, the
“RESET ON/OFF” annotation is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Freeze
Freezes the waveforms. The EEG waveforms can still be acquired while they are
frozen. You can verify the waveforms and measure amplitude or time interval of
the waveform. To display waveforms normally, click this button again.
Display Patient Information

Opens the Patient Information dialog box to enter the patient information.
Display Activation Bar

Opens the activation bar to select the photic stimulation mode, and optional
pulse, frequency and hyperventilation mode.
Remaining Acquisition Time

Displays remaining acquisition time (min).
Start/Stop Filing button

Starts/Stops saving the EEG data in a file. The remaining available data
acquisition time (minute) based on the remaining free disk space is displayed
beside this button.

WEE Bar
Selecting Receiver/Selecting Transmitter/Status
Refer to the WEE-1000 wireless input unit operator’s manual.
Event Bar
You can add an annotation to the current point on the waveform. Each key on the
event bar corresponding to each function keys. 6

Section 7 Review Program
General................................................................................................................................................................. 7.5
Flowchart of Reviewing EEG Waveforms................................................................................................... 7.6
Opening and Closing the Review Program........................................................................................................... 7.7
Opening the Review Program.................................................................................................................... 7.7
Closing the Review Program...................................................................................................................... 7.8
Review Window.................................................................................................................................................... 7.9 7
Extended Channel Bar............................................................................................................................... 7.9
Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu.......................................................................................... 7.10
Waveform Display Area Pop-up Menu...................................................................................................... 7.11
Reviewing the EEG Waveforms.......................................................................................................................... 7.12
Searching for Waveforms................................................................................................................................... 7.13
Searching by the Event Name.................................................................................................................. 7.13
Showing/Hiding Events.................................................................................................................. 7.14
Searching by the Event Jump Bar............................................................................................................ 7.15
Changing the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA Trendgraph Display Area............ 7.15
Continuously Reviewing the EEG Waveforms Annotated by an Event Mark................................. 7.16
Searching by the DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Jump Bar.................................. 7.16
Searching by Time.................................................................................................................................... 7.16
Searching with the Long Term DSA/Event Window.................................................................................. 7.17
Changing the Pattern.......................................................................................................................................... 7.18
Reviewing in Trace Mode.......................................................................................................................... 7.18
Changing the Review Settings........................................................................................................................... 7.20
Changing the Amplifier Settings............................................................................................................... 7.20
Changing the Pattern Name..................................................................................................................... 7.21
Exporting and Importing the Pattern Settings.......................................................................................... 7.21
Exporting the Current Pattern Settings.......................................................................................... 7.21
Importing the Pattern Settings....................................................................................................... 7.21
Exporting the Settings of All Patterns............................................................................................ 7.21
Importing the Settings of All Patterns............................................................................................. 7.21
Changing the Reference Electrode.......................................................................................................... 7.21
Changing the Waveform Display Settings................................................................................................ 7.22
Adjusting the Display Scale............................................................................................................ 7.25
Changing Waveform Display Positions........................................................................................... 7.25
Displaying/Hiding a Waveform........................................................................................................ 7.26
Changing the Number of Displayed Waveforms............................................................................. 7.27
Changing the Waveform Display Speed......................................................................................... 7.28
Changing a Waveform Color.......................................................................................................... 7.28
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform........................................................................ 7.29
Centering Waveforms..................................................................................................................... 7.29
Changing the Waveform Display Size............................................................................................ 7.29
Putting a Mark on the Waveforms.................................................................................................. 7.30
Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler.................................................................... 7.30

Displaying Channel Groups........................................................................................................... 7.31
Displaying Montage Map.......................................................................................................................... 7.32
Using the AC Filter................................................................................................................................... 7.32
Using the ECG Filter................................................................................................................................ 7.32
Zooming in the Waveform......................................................................................................................... 7.34
Displaying Information about a Selected Area......................................................................................... 7.36
Adding and Editing Comments to Measurement Files....................................................................................... 7.37
Explanation of the Clip Comment............................................................................................................. 7.37
Adding a Clip Comment to a Measurement File....................................................................................... 7.38
Editing a Clip Comment............................................................................................................................ 7.38
Editing the Annotation........................................................................................................................................ 7.39
Adding an Annotation............................................................................................................................... 7.39
Changing an Annotation........................................................................................................................... 7.40
Moving an Annotation............................................................................................................................... 7.41
Deleting an Annotation............................................................................................................................. 7.41
Adding a Screen Comment...................................................................................................................... 7.43
Editing a Screen Comment...................................................................................................................... 7.45
Deleting a Screen Comment.................................................................................................................... 7.45
Capturing the Current Waveforms and Patient Image and Saving Them as a Screen Comment............ 7.45
Selecting a Section of the Waveforms................................................................................................................ 7.46
Selecting All Waveforms on a Page.......................................................................................................... 7.48
Displaying a DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph.................................................................... 7.49
Displaying the DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Jump Bar....................................... 7.49
About the Trendgraph Jump Bar............................................................................................................... 7.50
DSA Jump Bar............................................................................................................................... 7.50
Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Jump Bar............................................................................. 7.51
Group List on the Jump Bar........................................................................................................... 7.51
Changing the Range of the Display Area for DSA, Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph..... 7.52
Displaying the DSA Trendgraph in Detail.................................................................................................. 7.52
Printing the Long Term DSA/Event Window................................................................................... 7.52
Changing the Heart Rate Display Mode................................................................................................... 7.53
Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph............................................................................................. 7.53
FFT Settings................................................................................................................................... 7.53
FFT Analysis.................................................................................................................................. 7.54
Creating the Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph................................................................ 7.54
Heart Rate Analysis....................................................................................................................... 7.54
DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Analysis...................................................................................... 7.55
Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings...................................................................................... 7.55
Changing the Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Display Settings.................................... 7.57
Displaying Voltage Maps.................................................................................................................................... 7.58
General..................................................................................................................................................... 7.58
Displaying the 3D Mapping Window......................................................................................................... 7.59
Types of Map............................................................................................................................................ 7.60
Display Mode............................................................................................................................................ 7.60
Buttons on the Tool Bar............................................................................................................................ 7.61
Selecting the Electrodes for the Voltage/CSD Maps................................................................................ 7.62
Displaying the 3D Map for the Specified Time.......................................................................................... 7.63
Setting the Interval for the 3D Map and Cursor........................................................................................ 7.63
Changing the Display Mode..................................................................................................................... 7.63

Changing the Number of the Maps in the Time Sequence Mode.................................................. 7.64
Changing the Scale of the 3D Map.......................................................................................................... 7.64
Printing the 3D Map................................................................................................................................. 7.64
Wide-band EEG Analysis................................................................................................................................... 7.65
Analysis.................................................................................................................................................... 7.65
Explanation of Wide-band EEG Analysis Window.................................................................................... 7.67
Explanation of Result Display Area................................................................................................ 7.68
Displaying the Time and Amplitude of a Selected Area................................................................. 7.69
Setting the Number of Display Channels................................................................................................. 7.71
Displaying Specified Channels................................................................................................................. 7.72
Changing the Time-frequency Analysis Result Display............................................................................ 7.73
Adjusting the Baseline.............................................................................................................................. 7.74
7
Setting Waveform Display Settings........................................................................................................... 7.74
Adjusting the Display Amplitude (Aspect Ratio)............................................................................. 7.75
Displaying or Hiding Items on the Screen................................................................................................ 7.76
Displaying or Hiding Display Areas on the Screen......................................................................... 7.76
Displaying or Hiding Individual Waveform Types............................................................................ 7.76
Analyzing with More Detailed Analysis Conditions................................................................................... 7.77
Reanalyzing.............................................................................................................................................. 7.78
Saving the Analysis Result....................................................................................................................... 7.78
Selecting or Deleting Electrodes for AV Derivation............................................................................................. 7.79
Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation............................................................................................................ 7.80
Changing the Calibration Voltage....................................................................................................................... 7.80
Entering Patient Information............................................................................................................................... 7.81
General..................................................................................................................................................... 7.81
Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box............................................................................................ 7.81
Copying Parts of Waveforms – Note Waveform.................................................................................................. 7.82
Displaying the Note Waveform Window.................................................................................................... 7.82
Displaying the Note Waveform List........................................................................................................... 7.84
Copying a Section of the Waveforms........................................................................................................ 7.85
Copying a Section of the Waveforms with a Mouse....................................................................... 7.85
Copying a Section of the Waveforms at the Center of the Review Window................................... 7.86
Registering the Copied Waveforms as Sample Data............................................................................... 7.87
Changing and Checking the Title and Information of the Copied Waveforms.......................................... 7.87
Displaying the Copied Waveforms............................................................................................................ 7.88
Displaying the Copied Waveforms for the Current Patient............................................................. 7.88
Displaying the Copied Waveforms for All Patients (Sample Data)................................................. 7.88
Displaying Copied Waveforms with the Conditions When They were Registered.................................... 7.89
Deleting the Copied Waveforms............................................................................................................... 7.89
Printing the Copied Waveforms................................................................................................................ 7.89
Reviewing Long Term EEG Waveforms.............................................................................................................. 7.90
Changing the Pattern for Long Term EEG Monitoring.............................................................................. 7.91
Reviewing Two or More EEG Waveform Files Consecutively............................................................................. 7.92
Reviewing EEG Waveforms with Different Pattern Settings at the Same Time on Multiple Review Windows.... 7.93
Slide Show for an Original Measurement File.................................................................................................... 7.95
Creating a Slide Show.............................................................................................................................. 7.95
Reviewing a Slide Show........................................................................................................................... 7.96
Editing a Slide Show................................................................................................................................ 7.96
Exporting a Slide Show in an Original Measurement File as a Library.................................................... 7.97

Creating and Editing the Settings to Clip Slides for a Library........................................................ 7.97
Grouping Waveforms for Review – EEG Library................................................................................................. 7.99
Creating a New Library............................................................................................................................. 7.99
Editing a Library..................................................................................................................................... 7.101
Reviewing a Library................................................................................................................................ 7.101
Exporting an EEG Library to a Portable Media...................................................................................... 7.101
Printing............................................................................................................................................................. 7.102
Setting Up the Printer............................................................................................................................. 7.102
Printing Waveforms and Patient Information.......................................................................................... 7.102
Selecting the Information for Waveform Printing.................................................................................... 7.104
Printing the Currently Displayed Page.................................................................................................... 7.106
Saving the EEG Waveforms............................................................................................................................. 7.107
Saving the Changed Data in the Currently Selected File....................................................................... 7.107
Saving All or Part of the File as a New File............................................................................................ 7.108
ASCII File Format and File Name.......................................................................................................... 7.109
Event Viewer..................................................................................................................................................... 7.111
Opening the Event Viewer...................................................................................................................... 7.111
Displaying Waveforms from the Event Viewer........................................................................................ 7.112
Editing a Slide Show with the Event Viewer Window.............................................................................. 7.113
Adding an Event to a Slide Show from the Review Window................................................................... 7.114
Reviewing a Slide Show from the Event Viewer Window....................................................................... 7.114
Filtering Events....................................................................................................................................... 7.115
Selecting with Keywords.............................................................................................................. 7.115
Changing the Filtering Options............................................................................................................... 7.116
Setting Event Viewer Window Display.................................................................................................... 7.116
Setting Event Tabs.................................................................................................................................. 7.117
Keyboard Operation.......................................................................................................................................... 7.118
Keys on the Keyboard............................................................................................................................ 7.118
Assigning Shortcut Keys........................................................................................................................ 7.118
Setting the Shortcut Key for a Function........................................................................................ 7.118
Resetting all Functions to the Default Shortcut Keys................................................................... 7.119
Importing and Exporting Shortcut Key Settings........................................................................... 7.120
Removing All Shortcut Keys from All Functions........................................................................... 7.120
Explanation of Menus and Bars........................................................................................................................ 7.121
File Menu................................................................................................................................................ 7.121
View Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 7.121
Edit Menu............................................................................................................................................... 7.123
Tools Menu............................................................................................................................................. 7.124
Option Menu........................................................................................................................................... 7.125
Help Menu.............................................................................................................................................. 7.125
Channel Setting Menu............................................................................................................................ 7.125
Amp Bar................................................................................................................................................. 7.126
EEG Bar................................................................................................................................................. 7.127
Tool Bar.................................................................................................................................................. 7.128
Page Control Bar.................................................................................................................................... 7.129
Jump Bar................................................................................................................................................ 7.130

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
General
To review the EEG waveforms saved in a file, use the Review program. The
Review program lets you:
• Sort and search for EEG data files
• Review the waveforms at normal or high speed
• Change the measurement settings (Reformat and Refiltering)
• Edit the patient information and annotations
• Select parts of waveforms to print or save in a file
When reviewing EEG data files saved by an EEG-1100 series, EEG-9100/9200 7

series or EEG-2110 electroencephalograph or a digital EEG system (PC with
QP-111A or QP-223A acquisition program kit), the EEG data file opens on the
Review window with the settings in which the file was acquired. Refer to the
operator’s manual for each instrument.
NOTE
When reviewing an EEG data file saved by another electroencephalograph
or digital EEG system, the file is not added to the database. To register
the file in the database, use the Add to Database function button in the
Data Manager. Refer to Section 9 “Data Manager”.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Flowchart of Reviewing EEG Waveforms
1. Start the Review program.
2. Play the waveforms.
3. Review the waveforms with different settings.
4. Edit the patient information if necessary.
5. Change the patterns and amplifiers if necessary.
6. Print the waveforms and patient information.
7. Save the file.
8. Close the EEG data file.
9. Close the Review program.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Opening and Closing the Review Program
Opening the Review Program

NOTE
• To use the Review program, 100 MB or more hard disk free space is
required.
opening the Review program. Otherwise, the Review program might not
function properly.
7
1. In the Workbench or Data Manager data list, select the file to review. For the
explanation of the Workbench and Data Manager tab page, refer to Section
4 “NeuroWorkbench”. For operation and detailed functions of Workbench
and Data Manager, refer to Section 8 “Workbench” and Section 9 “Data
Manager”.
2. Click the Review function button. The selected file opens on the Review
window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Closing the Review Program

NOTE
Do not remove the CD-R or DVD-R disk until the disk drive access lamp
is off. The disk or disk drive may be damaged if a disk is removed while it
is being accessed.
Select Exit from the File menu to close the Review program. The Review
program closes and the Data Manager window is displayed.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Review Window
You can move the amp bar, page control bar, tool bar and jump bar to any
position on the screen by dragging it.
EEG bar
Shortcut buttons frequently
Page control bar Annotation list box
used for review.
You can play back the EEG You can jump to the
Amp bar
waveforms and scroll the waveform annotated
You can change the amplifier setting for all
frozen waveforms. by the event.
channels whose amplifier setting is set to ACC.
Menu bar 7
Tool bar
Shortcut buttons
frequently used
Electrode
for review.
name display
area
Waveform
Waveform selection bar
display You can change the
area number of displayed
waveforms by
right-clicking the
DSA trendgraph waveform selection
Displays the bar and selecting the
amplitude for number.
each frequency
component.
Heart rate or
DC input
Beginning time of filing Ending time of filing parameter
Jump bar trendgraph
You can display any part of the EEG waveform
by clicking any position on the Jump bar.
Extended Channel Bar

Channel number Montage Extended channel bar
CAL voltage
To display the extended channel bar, check the “Display extended channel bar” check box in the
Display Control dialog box. Refer to “Changing the Review Settings” in this section for details.
You can display either the montage or comment on the extended channel bar. Refer to “Programming
Patterns – Selecting the Item Displayed on the Extended Channel Bar” in Section 5.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Channel Number Display Area Pop-up Menu

You can easily change the measurement settings using pop-up menu. To display
the pop-up menu, right-click the channel number display area or extended
channel bar.
To select channels, click the channel numbers pressing the Shift or Ctrl key, or
drag the pointer on the extended channel bar or waveform display area.
When a channel is selected, the sensitivity setting buttons are displayed. You can
change the sensitivity by clicking the + and − buttons.
Sensitivity setting buttons
* These functions are also available on Show Selected Channel*: Displays only the waveforms for the selected
another pop-up menu which can be channels.
displayed on the waveform display area.
Refer to the “Waveform Display Area
Hide Selected Channel*: Hides the waveforms for the selected channels.
Pop-up Menu” section for details.
Reset Hidden Channel*: Displays all waveforms.
Pattern Table: Displays the pattern table for the currently selected
pattern.
Sensitivity, Time Constant, High Cut Filter:

Displays the corresponding amplifier selection dialog
box. You can change the amplifier settings for all
channels which amplifier settings are set to ACC at
the same time.
Restore Setting to ACC: Changes the amplifier settings for the selected
channels to the ACC amplifier settings.
Wave Color: Changes the waveform color in the selected channel.
Unselect All: Resets the channel selection.
Even Layout, Channel Layout, Superimpose:

Changes the layout of the displayed waveforms.
Refer to “Changing Waveform Display Positions” in
this section for details.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Waveform Display Area Pop-up Menu

On the Review program, you can drag the mouse pointer on the waveform
display area to select waveforms. Right-click on the waveform display area to
open the pop-up menu.
Select Wave: Selects the waveforms in the highlighted area.
Remove Selected Wave: Removes the selected range of waveforms.
Annotation: Opens the Annotation dialog box.
Wide-band EEG analysis: Does wide-band EEG analysis for the highlighted area. 7
Show Selected Channel: Displays only the waveforms for the selected channels.
Hide Selected Channel: Hides the waveforms for the selected channels.
Reset Hidden Channel: Displays all waveforms.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Reviewing the EEG Waveforms
When the EEG data file opens on the Review window, the first page of the
waveforms appears. You can review the EEG waveforms by clicking the buttons
on the page control bar.
If the page control bar is not displayed, click View menu → Bar → Page Control
Bar.
Page Control Bar

Rewind/Forward button 1 s Back/Forward button Play button
Reviews the waveform backward/ Scrolls the displayed waveform Reviews the waveform
forward at high speed. backward/forward one second. continuously.
1 Page Back/Forward button Center button Stop button

Scrolls one page of the displayed waveform backward/ Stops reviewing and freezes the waveform.
forward. You can scroll half a page by selecting Half You can also freeze the waveform by
page from the right-click pop-up menu. clicking the waveform display area.
• When reviewing the EEG waveforms backward or • To add an annotation to a waveform when reviewing
forward at high speed, the Speed Control dialog box the EEG waveforms backward or forward at high speed,
opens. You can select the scroll speed and scroll mode press the “+” key on the number keys. To change the
with the dialog box. settings of annotation added during the high-speed
reviewing, set the default event in the System Settings
dialog box. Refer to “Settings in the Junction Box,
Operation, Display Page” in Section 5.
• To display the EEG waveform by specifying the event

Jumps to the next or previous
event at high speed name (annotation) added to the waveform, use the
annotation list box or jump bar at the bottom of the
Speed control bar: Adjusts the speed of review screen. Refer to “Searching for Waveforms” in this
Stop button: Stops high speed reviewing section.
One page button: Reviews by page
Half page button: Reviews by half page • To display the EEG waveforms by specifying the time,
use the Time Jump dialog box. Refer to “Searching by
• To change the pause time and display mode, click View Time” in this section.
menu → Display control, open Display control dialog
box and set the pause time and display mode. • To move the waveform to the center, use the Center
button. When this button is clicked, the mouse pointer
• To freeze the waveform where events (annotations) are, changes to “ ”. You can move the selected waveform to
click Display Control box → Pause time area → Pause at the center by clicking the waveform with this pointer.
annotations and select ON.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Searching for Waveforms
You can quickly display the waveform by specifying the event name or time. To
search waveforms, freeze waveforms before searching.
Searching by the Event Name

1. Click the Select Event button on the Jump bar, or click View → Bar →
Event Bar. The annotation list box opens.
Click “Annotation” at the top
of the column to sort events.
7
Name of events selected

in the Displayed Events
window
Annotation list box options
Select Event button
Annotation list box options

Single-click: Displays the corresponding waveform by clicking the event in
the annotation list box.
Event/Note
Event: Displays the event names in the list box.
Note: Display the note waveform window and the list of the copied
parts of waveforms in the list box. Refer to “Copying Part of
Waveforms” in this section.
Select: Opens the Displayed Events dialog box to select the event
names. The selected event names are displayed in the
annotation list box and their event marks are displayed in the
Event Jump bar. Refer to “Showing/Hiding Events” in the next
page.
2. Double-click the event name to jump to in the annotation list. The

corresponding waveform is displayed on the screen.
3. Click the Select Event button again. The annotation list box closes.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Showing/Hiding Events
You can select events displayed in the Event jump bar and Event bar.
1. Click Select in the Event jump bar window, or right-click the Jump bar and
click Event Select → Select Events.
The Displayed Events window opens.
Displays all events in the list.
Displays events including

the specified text.
Hides events that include

the specified text.
Enter event name.*
Available only when “Hide selected” is checked.

To hide system events, check this box.
(MARK and MARK OFF are not hidden.)
2. Select “Show selected” or “Hide selected”. Select the event from the pull
down menu or enter the event name (up to 40 characters).
3. Click OK and close the Displayed Events window.
The selected events are displayed in the event jump bar and jump bar.
* The system keeps the latest 6 event names. The latest 6 event names also
appear on the right-click menu. Right-click the Jump bar and click Event
Select.
If you enter the event name with keyboard, all events that include the specified
text are selected.
Ex.) If you enter “Stage”, the program selects “Stage1”, “Stage2” and so on.
To enter two or more events, enter a comma “,” between the events.
Ex.) If you enter “Open,Close”, the program selects “Open eyes”, “Close eyes”
and so on.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Searching by the Event Jump Bar

You can display any part of the EEG waveform by clicking on the Event jump
bar at the bottom of the screen.
Beginning/ending time of filing

Displays the beginning/ending time of filing. You can also display the Previous/Next Event button
beginning or ending of the EEG waveform by clicking the button. Displays the EEG waveform marked
by the previous/next event mark.
Previous/Next Section button
Scrolls the event mark display area backward/forward one
section. To change the section range, refer to “Changing
the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA
Trend Graph Display Area” in this section.
7
Select Event button

Vertical lines indicate event marks
Opens the annotation list box to display the
Currently displayed waveforms EEG waveform by specifying the event name.
Event mark display area

• To display any part of the EEG waveform, click any position on the Jump bar.
• To display the EEG waveform marked by the event mark, click the vertical line.
• To display the clock time information, move the mouse pointer on the desired position
and leave it for about 1 second.
• To display the name of the event mark, move the mouse pointer onto the vertical line and
leave it for more than 1 second.
During measurement, when the date changes, a green vertical line appears.
Manual events which can be deleted are displayed in black and system events which cannot
be deleted are displayed in blue.
Screen Comment:
The screen comment can be displayed when the Display screen comment check box on the
Display Control dialog box is checked. The attached picture can be displayed by clicking
the picture icon on the screen comment.
To select the events displayed in the jump bar, refer to “Searching by the Event
Name – Showing/Hiding Events” in this section.
Changing the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA
Trendgraph Display Area
1. Right-click the event mark display area. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select the range from the menu.
All: Displays the beginning to end of the file.

Hour: Displays an hour of the file.
Hour/2: Displays a half hour of the file.
Hour/4: Displays a quarter hour of the file.
You can scroll the event mark display area backward or forward by clicking
the Previous or Next Section button when “Hour”, “Hour/2” or “Hour/4” is
selected.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Continuously Reviewing the EEG Waveforms Annotated by an Event

Mark
1. Right-click the event mark display area. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select ← or → from the Auto Event Jump sub-menu.
Selection list:
← Reviews the waveforms backward continuously.
→ Reviews the waveforms forward continuously.
Searching by the DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Jump Bar
You can display any part of the waveform by clicking on the DSA, heart rate or
DC input parameter trendgraph jump bar at the bottom of the screen.
To open the trendgraph jump bar, click Tools → Show Trend in Jump Bar.
Click anywhere on this area to review
Searching by Time
1. Select Time Jump from the View menu, or click the button in the clock
display area or Elapsed time display area. The Time Jump dialog box opens.
2. Select the Elapsed time or Clock time option. Selectable dates are displayed
in the Date list box when “Clock Time” is selected.
3. Type the time in the following format.

Elapsed time: “hhhh:mm:ss”
Clock time: “hh:mm:ss”

To cancel, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Searching with the Long Term DSA/Event Window

Settings You can display any part of the EEG waveform by clicking on the DSA
Opens the DSA/Event trendgraph or event mark display area on the Long Term DSA/Event window.
Setup dialog box to set
the time scale.
1. Open the Long Term DSA/Event window with the DSA trendgraph.
• When the Upper arrow on the DSA jump bar is clicked, the Long Term
DSA/Event window with the DSA trendgraph opens.
• When the Upper arrow on the Annotation list is clicked, the Long Term
DSA/Event window without the DSA trendgraph opens.
2. Click on the DSA trendgraph or event mark display area.

7
Long Term DSA/Event window with the DSA trendgraph
Upper arrows
DSA Event Prints the window.

trendgraph display area

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Pattern
A pattern includes the montage and amplifier settings (sensitivity, high-cut filter
and time constant), calibration voltage, waveform display on/off, waveform color
and amplitude limit. When the EEG data file opens, waveforms are displayed
with the pattern settings in which they were acquired (default setting). You can
change the pattern to any of 36 programmed patterns (I to VIII A, B, C, D and
Free A, B, C, D).
1. Click the arrow button beside the Pat text box on the amp bar. A pull down
menu appears.
2. Select the pattern from the pull down menu. For details about the “Trace”
pattern, refer to “Reviewing in Trace Mode” in this section.
Patterns can be changed with the keyboard as follows.
Key Pattern Key Pattern

1 Change the pattern to I. 6 Change the pattern to VI.
2 Change the pattern to II. 7 Change the pattern to VII.
3 Change the pattern to III. 8 Change the pattern to VIII.
4 Change the pattern to IV. 9 Change the pattern to FREE.
5 Change the pattern to V. 0 Switch A, B, C and D.
Reviewing in Trace Mode

You can review the waveforms with the pattern settings in which they were
acquired. This mode is called “Trace mode”. To review the data in the trace
mode, uncheck the “Keep current trace settings for Review” check box in the
Display Control window. To open the Display Control window, select “Display
Control” from the View menu.
Color of the Amp Bar in Trace Mode

When “Trace” is selected, all text for the settings are displayed in blue.
If the ACC amplifier setting or AC filter setting is changed, “Sens”, “TC” and
“HF” are displayed in black and “Pat” and “Ref” are displayed in blue. Under
this condition, montage and electrodes are as they were during the acquisition
and ACC amplifier settings can be different from the settings during the
acquisition.
If the pattern, electrodes or montage is changed, all the settings on the amp bar
are displayed in black.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Using Current Pattern for Next Review

Check the “Keep current trace settings for Review” check box to use the
currently selected pattern the next time you review the EEG data file.
This function is useful when the EEG data file is reviewed in another
electroencephalograph which has different pattern settings. To delete the
currently selected pattern, click the Clear button.
If the pattern settings when acquired are changed, the changed pattern is used
the next time the waveforms are reviewed. To review the data in the trace mode,
uncheck the “Keep current trace settings for Review” check box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Review Settings
During waveform review, you can temporarily change the montage settings
without losing the original montage settings. The changed montage settings,
except for free pattern, are lost when another pattern is selected or when the
Review program is closed. In order to keep the changes, click the Save Changes
button on the pattern table.
NOTE
filter dialog box and pattern differ depending on the sampling frequency
when acquired. For details of the sampling frequency setting, refer
to “Selecting and Saving the Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in
Section 5.
Changing the Amplifier Settings

You can change the settings for sensitivity (Sens), time constant (TC), and
frequency of the high-cut filter (HF).
Amplifier settings can be changed by one of the followings.

• Change all amplifier settings (which are set to ACC) in the pattern setting.
• Change the amplifier settings by channels (individual setting).
• Change the amplifier settings in the pattern table.
For details about changing the amplifier setting, refer to “Changing Amplifier
Settings” in Section 6. The setting procedures are the same as that of the
Acquisition program.

1. To change the montage, click the button on the EEG bar.
2. Change the montage setting. For details of changing the montage, refer to
“Changing the Montage” in Section 6. The setting procedures are the same
as that of the Acquisition program.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM

Refer to “Changing the Pattern Name” in Section 6.
Exporting and Importing the Pattern Settings

Exporting the Current Pattern Settings
You can save the current pattern settings as a file (extension: .ptn) and call them
up again. To save the current pattern settings, select Export from the File menu
of the pattern table.
Importing the Pattern Settings

You can call up pattern settings which were previously saved in a file. 7
To call up the pattern settings, select Import from the File menu of the pattern
table. This function is only available when the same type of electrode junction
box is used.
Exporting the Settings of All Patterns

You can save all pattern settings as files (extension: .ptn) and call them up again.
To save all pattern settings, select All Patterns → Export from the File menu.
Importing the Settings of All Patterns

You can call up all pattern settings which were previously saved in files.
To call up all pattern settings, select All Patterns → Import from the File menu.
This function is not available when the electrode junction box of the saved
pattern differs from the electrode junction box set in the System program.
Changing the Reference Electrode

Refer to “Changing the Reference Electrode” in Section 6.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Waveform Display Settings

You can select the waveform display settings in the Display Control dialog box.
To open this dialog box, select “Display control” from the View menu.
Displaying the Derivation (Montage) and/or Comment beside Each Channel

You can display or hide the derivation beside each channel. To display the
derivation and/or comment beside each channel, click the “Display montage”
and/or “Display comment” check box in the Montage and Comment area. You
can select the derivation and comment display position by clicking the “Left” or
“Right” option button.
Displaying the Time Scale

To display the time scale in the Time Mark area, select the 1 s or 200 ms option
on the Time Scale area.
Off: A vertical line is not displayed.
1 s: Displays a vertical line every one second.
200 ms: Displays a vertical line every 200 ms.
Changing the Display Mode

When reviewing the EEG waveforms continuously in high speed, you can select
the display mode to easily observe the waveform. To select the display mode,
click the “Overwrite” or “Page” option in the Fast Review Mode area.
Overwrite: The waveforms are fixed on the screen and the new waveforms
continuously overwrite the previous waveforms.
Page: The waveforms are fixed on the screen and the display is updated
one page at a time.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Pause Time

When reviewing the EEG waveforms continuously in high speed, you can select
a pause time and display mode to observe the waveform more easily. After each
page sweeps, the waveform is frozen on the screen for the specified pause time.
To select the pause time, click “Off”, “0.500 s”, “1.000 s” or “2.000 s” in the
Page Display Time area.
You can also freeze the waveform where events (annotations) are added by
checking the “Pause at annotations” check box.
Changing the Display Mode When Simultaneously Reviewing the Patient

Images 7
When simultaneously reviewing the EEG waveforms and patient images, you
can select the display mode. To select the display mode, click the “Overwrite” or
“Page” option in the Play Mode area.
Overwrite: The waveforms are fixed on the screen and the new waveforms
corresponding to the patient image continuously overwrite the
previous waveforms.
Cursor: The vertical cursor appears and moves left to right to indicate the
corresponding EEG waveforms with the patient image. When
the cursor reaches the right edge, the next page appears. In the
Cursor mode, the jump function is not available when continuously
reviewing the waveforms.

The waveform display gain can be changed in steps of one (3 to 100) with the
slider in the Waveform Display Size area.
Displaying the Event

To display the events on the screen, check the “Display event” check box.
Drawing High Speed Sampled Waveforms Quicker

When the EEG waveforms are acquired at a high sampling frequency, the review
program can draw the waveforms on the screen quicker when the “Fast screen
draw” and/or “Fast screen draw in high speed review” check box is checked.
Displaying the Extended Channel Bar

You can display the montage and calibration voltage on the extended channel
bar. To display the extended channel bar, check the “Display extended channel
bar” check box.
Displaying Screen Comments

You can display the screen comments by checking the “Display screen comment”
check box. To add a comment, right-click the waveform, open the Annotation
dialog box and click the screen comment button in the dialog box.
Displaying the Measurement Date and Time When Using the Time Cursor
To display the measurement date and time in the Cursor dialog box, check the
“Display date and time with cursor” check box. To open the cursor window,
select Time & Voltage Cursor from the Tools menu.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Display Speed Automatically

When the annotation list box or extend bar is displayed, the waveform display
area becomes small. You can automatically change the display speed so that
all waveforms corresponding to the selected display speed are displayed on the
smaller waveform display area. To automatically change the display speed, check
the “Adjust display speed automatically” check box.
Using the Current Pattern for the Next Review

Check the “Keep current trace settings for Review” check box to use the
currently selected pattern the next time you review the EEG data file.
This function is useful when the EEG data file is reviewed in another
electroencephalograph which has different pattern settings. To delete the
currently selected pattern, click the Clear button.
Increasing the Thickness of the Selected Waveform

You can increase the waveform thickness of the selected channel. To increase the
thickness, check the “Increase thickness of the selected wave” check box.
Displaying the System Reference Electrodes

The system reference electrodes can be displayed on the screen. To display the
system reference electrodes, check the “System reference” check box.
Displaying Calibration Marks

To display calibration marks, check the “Display Calibration Mark” check box.
Changing the Waveform Drawing Mode

You can select waveform display mode. The selectable waveform drawing
modes can be selected on the Color, Text, Size, Other window – Other page of
the System Settings.
For details, refer to “Changing the Review Window Display Settings” in Section
5.
Changing the Length of the Vertical Lines for the Events

You can change the length of the vertical light gray lines beside the manually
entered annotations. To change the length of the vertical lines, select the
appropriate length from the Annotation line list box. You can change the color
of the vertical line for an event. Refer to “Editing Event List for Waveform
Annotations and Item List in the Patient Information Window” in Section 5.
Editing the Annotation List

To edit the event list, click the Edit annotation list button and open the Event
setting window. Changes for these settings are also applied to the event list in the
System program.
Indicating processed waveform drawing mode

To display a “Processed wave” message on the review window when processed
waveform mode is selected, check “Indicate processed waveform drawing
mode”.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying a Clip Comment

To display a clip comment on the review window, check the “Display Clip
comment” check box.
Automatically Backing Up Files at Specified Intervals

To automatically back up a file, check the “Auto backup” check box on the
Display Control dialog box and enter a backup interval of up to 120 minutes in
the text box.
Adjusting the Display Scale

You can adjust the display speed and gain by sliders. To display the Adjust
Display Scale window, click the “Adjust display scale” button in the Display
7
Control dialog box.
Changing Waveform Display Positions

To change the position of all channels:
There are three waveform display position setting modes.
Even Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in
channel order. Channels that are temporarily turned off are
omitted.
Channel Layout: Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in
channel order. Blank spaces are left for hidden channels.
Superimpose: Overlaps consecutive odd and even channels. This is useful
for comparing the waveforms of right part and left part and
checking if they are symmetrical or not. Channels are omitted
if their time constant is not set to ACC.
From the View menu, select Channel Layout. Select the appropriate layout
command from the sub menu to change the waveform display position.
Even layout Channel layout Superimpose

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
To change the position of a specific channel:

1. Click the channel number on the left side of the screen to select the channel.
The selected channel number is highlighted.
2. Drag the highlighted channel to the target position and release the mouse
button. The waveform position is kept for each pattern.
3. To release the channel selection, click the waveform window.
Displaying/Hiding a Waveform
With the Pattern Table
1. Click the Display Pattern Table button on the EEG bar, or select Pattern
2. Click On or Off in Disp. column of the selection list box. The “Display” list
box opens.
3. Select On or Off in the Display text box.
With the Pop-up Menu on the Channel Bar

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the waveforms.
2. Click a channel number to display or hide. To select several channels, press

the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking the channel numbers.
3. Right-click the number of the channel.
4. Select Show Selected Channel or Hide Selected Channel to display or hide

the waveform(s).
With the Pop-up Menu on the Waveform Area

2. Drag on a waveform to select the area of the waveform. Several waveforms

can be selected by dragging over the waveforms.
3. Right-click the selected area.
4. Select Show Selected Channel or Hide Selected Channel to display or hide

the waveform(s).

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Number of Displayed Waveforms

You can change the number of displayed waveforms. Right-click the scroll bar
on the right side of the window and select the number.
All: Displays all waveforms
Half: Displays half the waveforms
Quarter: Displays one quarter of the waveforms
1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32: Displays the selected number of waveforms
You can also select All by double-clicking the scroll bar.
Examples
All Half
Quarter 8

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Waveform Display Speed

From the view menu or pull-down menu of the EEG bar, select Display Time.
0.1 s: Displays a 0.1 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording at
3000 mm/s).
1500 mm/s).
600 mm/s).
1 s: Displays a 1 second page on the screen (corresponds to recording at
300 mm/s).
150 mm/s).
60 mm/s).
30 mm/s).
20 mm/s).
15 mm/s).
10 mm/s).
5 mm/s).
2 min: Displays a 2 minute page on the screen (corresponds to recording at
2.5 mm/s).
about 1.7 mm/s).
1 mm/s).
User: Displays a page on the screen for a user defined number of seconds.

2. Click the Color column of the channel to open the selection list box on the
NOTE
The waveform color can also be changed in the right-click menu of the
channel.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Maximum Amplitude of a Waveform

Width
Table from the Control menu. The pattern table opens.
2. Click the Width column of the channel to open the selection list box on the
7
Centering Waveforms
To place a waveform of the specified time in the center of the screen, do the
following procedure.
1. Click button on the Page Control bar.
2. Click the part of the waveform to place in the center of the screen.

To change the width of all the waveforms, do the following procedure.
1. Select Bar → Display Size Bar from the View menu. The Waveform Display
Size window opens.
2. Move the slider and change the waveform size.
To return the setting to the default (19), click the Initialize button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Putting a Mark on the Waveforms

You can add a vertical line or color a selected time zone of all the waveforms.
• Adding a vertical line
Double-click on the desired point to make a line appear. Double-click again
to delete the line. You can adjust the line with the Shift + ← or → keys of the
keyboard.
• Coloring a selected time zone

Drag the desired area. The area of all the waveforms is shaded. Click anywhere
on the waveforms to delete the shaded time zone.
Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler

You can measure the voltage (amplitude) and time interval by displaying the two
vertical cursors and horizontal cursors or ruler on the screen when the waveforms
are frozen.
Refer to “Measuring Amplitude and Time with the Cursors and Ruler” in Section
6 for details.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying Channel Groups

When using intracranial electrodes such as grid electrodes or depth electrodes,
channel groups can be displayed so that you can recognize the channels easily.
To display the channel groups, the channel electrode names (montage) in

G1 of the Pattern Setting window have to start with alphabetic characters or
punctuation marks. Refer to “Programming Patterns” in Section 5 for details on
the pattern table.
Right-click the channel bar and select Show Channel Group. The group names
appear to the left of the screen in the waveform color.
Channel groups 7
When electrode names

starting with the same
letter are adjacent, they
are shown as a group.
To hide the channel groups, right-click the channel bar and uncheck Show
Channel Group.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying Montage Map

The montage map window displays the montage on the electrode position layout.
Select “Display Montage Map” from the View menu to display the montage map
window.
Montage map window
Using the AC Filter

The AC filter reduces AC artifact from the waveforms. Use this function only
when the electrical noise condition cannot be changed.
To turn on the AC filter, click the AC Filter On/Off button on the EEG bar, or
select AC Filter from the Control menu.
To change the AC filter frequency, right-click the AC Filter On/Off button

and select the frequency.
Using the ECG Filter

NOTE
The ECG filter function is available only when you acquire ECG
waveforms using the ECG electrodes.
When ECG waveforms are superimposed on the EEG waveforms, use the ECG
filter to reduce the ECG waveform on each EEG channel. This filter works in the
following way to subtract the ECG components from the EEG waveforms.
1. The time point when the ECG waveforms exceed the trigger level of the
trigger channel is used as an averaging trigger.
2. The part of the EEG waveforms synchronized with the trigger is averaged in
each channel.
3. The averaged waveform is subtracted from the next trigger point of the EEG
waveform in the averaging period in each channel.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
ECG waveforms superimposed on the EEG waveform
Averaged waveforms when the ECG waveforms

exceed the trigger level.
When the ECG filter is turned on, the EEG
waveforms subtracted from the averaged
waveforms are displayed.
Trigger level
When there is a large artifact

Be careful using the ECG filter when there is a large artifact. The ECG filter is
most effective when the EEG waveforms are stable and there is no large artifact.
The ECG filter detects the ECG waveforms superimposed on the EEG
waveforms. The instrument performs averaging of the EEG waveforms using the
QRS waveform as trigger.
When the ECG filter is turned on, if a large artifact with continuously varying
amplitude, such as body movement, EMG or respiration waveform, is
superimposed on the EEG waveforms, the ECG waveform (averaging result)
cannot be correctly measured. This may distort the EEG waveforms or the EEG
waveforms might not be displayed continuously.
When the EEG waveforms are not displayed continuously, click the Reset button
on the ECG Filter dialog box to reset the ECG filter.
1. Select ECG Filter from the View menu. The ECG Filter dialog box opens.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
2. Click the Trigger Channel box arrow to select the ECG trigger channel.
3. Select the trigger mode.

Auto: The trigger level is set automatically. The trigger level cursor is not
Manual: You can set the trigger level manually with the trigger level cursor
displayed over the trigger channel on the screen. Move the cursor
Trigger level cursor
with the Trigger Level arrow so that the cursor position is at half of
the peak amplitude of the QRS wave.
4. Click the “ECG Filter On” check box to turn the ECG filter on. To turn off
the ECG filter, click it again.

When you close the Acquisition program or change the pattern, the ECG
filter is automatically set to Off.
Zooming in the Waveform

1. Click the Zoom button. The Zoom window opens.
Selected area
Zoom window
2. Drag the cursor over the area to zoom in. The selected area is displayed
enlarged in the Zoom window.
To close the Zoom window, click the close button on the top-right of the
window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Display Settings
1. Select Menu → Setting from the Zoom window tool bar. The Zoom settings
window opens.
Time scale: Select the time scale (X axis).

Voltage scale: Select the voltage scale (Y axis).
Show baseline: Check this box to display the baseline.
Show montage: Check this box to show montage.
Show comment: Check this box to show comment.
Zoom settings window
7
3. Click the OK button to close the Zoom settings window.
Click the Cancel button to cancel setting.
Displaying Cursors
To check the frequency, amplitude and time on the Zoom window, select Cursor
from the Tool menu.
For details on using the cursors, refer to “Using the Time & Voltage Cursor” in
Section 6.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Calculating Frequency and Amplitude

To calculate the frequency and amplitude, select Analysis from the Tool menu.
Frequency Amplitude
Displaying Information about a Selected Area

You can display the following information about a selected area. Right-drag to
select an area of a waveform.
Channel: Montage of the channel

Negative Peak: Negative peak of the area
Positive Peak: Positive peak of the area
Peak-Peak (Peak to peak): Difference between the negative and positive peak
Frequency: Frequency of the area
Interval: The time period of the selected area.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adding and Editing Comments to Measurement Files
Explanation of the Clip Comment

You can add a comment called “Clip Comment” to the waveforms. The clip
comment is displayed on the top-left of the review window. To display or hide
the clip comment, check or uncheck the “Display Clip comment” check box
on the Display control window. For details, refer to “Changing the Waveform
Display Settings” in this section.
When you review several files consecutively, the clip comments are displayed in
the jump bar pop-up menu in addition to the top-left of the review window.
To check the clip comments, right click the jump bar and
select “Select stage” from the pop-up menu.
To check the clip comments when you review the EEG library, right-click the
button on the slide jump bar.
NOTE
When you export the bookmarks in the original measurement files as a
library, bookmark names (event names) are automatically converted into
clip comments. To export bookmarks as a library, refer to “Exporting a
Slide Show in an Original Measurement File as a Library” in this section.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adding a Clip Comment to a Measurement File

1. Select “Modify Clip comment” from the Edit menu. The Rename window
opens.
2. Enter a comment in the text box and click the OK button.
Editing a Clip Comment

1. Select “Modify Clip comment” from the Edit menu, or right click the clip
comment on the top-left of the review window and click “Edit”. The Rename
window opens.
2. Enter a new comment in the text box and click the OK button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Editing the Annotation
You can change and delete event marks (annotations) that were added to the
waveforms during acquisition, or add new annotations.
Adding an Annotation
There are three ways to add an annotation: using Modify Event dialog box, on
screen, and using “+” key in the number key pad.
7
Modify Event dialog box
1. From the Edit menu, select Modify Event. The Modify Event dialog box
opens.
2. Click the Add button. The Add dialog box opens.
3. Type the annotation with up to 40 characters in the text box or select an

annotation from the list box.
4. Type the measurement time in the “hhhh:mm:ss” format.
To cancel adding annotation, click the Cancel button.
On screen
1. Click the Stop button on the page control bar to freeze the EEG
waveforms.
2. Right-click the waveform where you want to add an annotation. The

Annotation dialog box opens.
Input text box with up to 40 characters. The annotation is marked on the
waveform.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
To edit annotations listed in the Annotation dialog box

1. Click the Edit button on the Annotation dialog box. The Event setting
dialog box opens. You can add, delete or replace the annotations. Refer to
“Editing Event List for Waveform Annotations and Item List in the Patient
Information Window” in Section 5 for details.
2. Click the OK button to close the Event setting dialog box.
The “+” key in the number key pad

You can add an annotation to a waveform when reviewing the EEG waveforms
backward or forward at high speed. To add an annotation to a waveform, press
the “+” key. A beep sounds. You can set the event and location for annotation
using the System Program. Refer to “Changing the Settings in the System
Settings Dialog Box” in Section 5.
Changing an Annotation
NOTE
An annotation marked with type “S” cannot be changed.
opens.
2. Click the annotation in the Annotation list. The selected annotation is

highlighted.
3. Click the Modify button. The Modify dialog box opens and the selected
annotation is displayed in the Event text box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
4. Type the annotation with up to 40 characters in the text box, or select the
annotation from the list box.
The annotation displayed in the Event text box is replaced with the selected
annotation. The measurement time of the previous annotation is displayed in
the description box.
To change the time, enter the time in the “Elapsed” text box.
To cancel the change, click the Cancel button.

7
Moving an Annotation
Within the currently displayed EEG waveforms, you can move annotations
displayed in black to another position.
NOTE
• The blue annotations cannot be moved.
• Annotations cannot be moved to the outside of the waveform display.
waveforms.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the annotation.
3. Drag the annotation to the new position. The confirmation dialog box
appears.
To cancel moving, click the Cancel button.
Deleting an Annotation
Modify Event Dialog Box
NOTE
• An annotation marked with type “S” cannot be deleted.
• Freeze the waveforms before deleting annotations.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
opens.
2. Select the event to be deleted in the Annotation list box. The selected
annotation is highlighted.
To select one event:

Click the event.
To select consecutive events:

i) Click the first event.
ii) Press and hold the Shift key while clicking the last event.
Or, drag the cursors to select the events.
To select two or more events out of sequence:

Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking events.
3. Click the Delete button. Or press the Delete key on the keyboard.
The confirmation dialog box opens.
To cancel deleting, click the Cancel button.
On screen
NOTE
The blue annotations cannot be deleted.
waveforms.
2. Double-click the annotation. The confirmation dialog box opens.
To cancel deleting, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adding a Screen Comment

When the waveforms are frozen, you can add text and attach an image file to a
waveform as a screen comment. The attached file is saved together with the EEG
data file.
The screen comment can be displayed when the “Display screen comment”
check box on the Display Control dialog box is checked. The attached image
can be displayed by clicking the picture icon on the screen comment. The screen
comment can be moved anywhere on the page.
waveforms. 7
2. Right-click the waveform. The Annotation window opens.
Screen comment button 3. Click the Screen comment button. The Edit Comment dialog box opens.
The pull down menu items correspond to the

list in Table Items dialog box of the System
Program.
Group
Annotation
Comment title
Select the title from the pull down menu. A
comment color is set for each comment title
Check this box to display the screen and the color is changed when you change the
comment in transparency mode. comment.
You can also change the comment by typing the
title with the keyboard.
Color
Select comment color from the pull When you create a report with NeuroReport,
down menu. You can also select you can group screen comments using text in
comment color by pressing the F1 this text box (up to 8 characters). For details,
to F8 key on the keyboard. refer to the NeuroReport operator’s manual.
4. Enter a comment with up to 384 characters in the text box. You can select
frequently used annotations from the Annotation list box. The annotations in
the Annotation list box can be edited in the Table Items dialog box. Refer to
“Editing Event List for Waveform Annotations and Item List in the Patient
Information Window” in Section 5.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
To attach an image as a screen comment:

i) Click the Ref button on the Edit Comment dialog box. The Open dialog
box opens.
ii) Select the file.

iii) Click the Open button. The Open dialog box closes.
5. Click the OK button. The comment is saved and displayed on the screen.
In the annotation list, this comment is displayed as an event named
“P‑COMMENT”.
To cancel adding the comment, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Editing a Screen Comment

1. Right-click the comment. The screen comment menu opens.
2. Select Edit. The Edit Comment dialog box opens. The comment is displayed
on the text box and the attached image file name is displayed on the Link
text box.
3. Change or add the comment in the text box.

To delete the comment or picture, click the Delete button on the Edit
Comment dialog box.
4. Click the OK button. The changed or added comment is displayed on the 7

screen.
To cancel editing, click the Cancel button.
Deleting a Screen Comment

1. Right-click the comment. The screen comment menu opens.
2. Select Delete. The screen comment is deleted.
Capturing the Current Waveforms and Patient Image and Saving Them as a Screen
Comment
Click the “Add current view” button on the Edit Comment dialog box. The
current displayed waveforms and patient image is added to the files as a screen
comment.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Selecting a Section of the Waveforms
You can select a section of the waveforms and its information in the Wave Select
dialog box. The selected waveform parts can be printed or exported. Up to 100
parts of the waveforms in one second steps can be selected.
There are two ways to select the waveform: using the Wave Select dialog box or
right-clicking on the selected area.
NOTE
When saving several parts of waveforms, the selected parts must not
overlap each other.
Using the Wave Select dialog box

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the waveform.
2. From the Edit menu, select Wave Select. The Wave Select dialog box opens
and two vertical cursors appear on the screen.
Selected part
Wave select
dialog box
Cursors
3. Select the cursor and drag the cursor.
To change a cursor, click the right mouse button.
4. Click the Set button in the Wave Select dialog box. The waveforms between
the two cursors, beginning and ending time, pattern number, and display
speed are saved and displayed in the list.
To review the selected part of the waveform, double-click the data in the list.
5. Click the OK button and close the Wave Select dialog box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Wave Select dialog box options
Rewind button/Forward button:

Reviews the selected waveform data in the list backward or forward at high 7
speed.
Set:
Saves the selected part of waveforms between two cursors.
Replace:
Replaces the waveform data in the list with the selected area of waveforms.
Remove:
Deletes the selected waveform data in the list.
Right-clicking on the selected area

2. Drag on the waveforms to select the range to save.

To select a wider range of the waveforms beyond the currently displayed
screen page, use the mouse wheel or the ← or → key on the keyboard while
dragging on the waveforms.
Selected area is highlighted
in green.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
3. Right-click the selected area.
4. From the pop-up menu, click Select Wave to save the waveforms in the
highlighted area.
To remove the saved waveform data, right-click on the saved waveform data
and select Remove Selected Wave.
Selecting All Waveforms on a Page

To select all waveforms on the page, click the “Select Displayed Page and
Advance” button on the EEG bar. Waveforms on the page are added to the Wave
Select list box and the next page appears on the waveform display.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying a DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter

Trendgraph
components and calculates heart rate and DC input parameter data. The
instrument displays the amplitude for each frequency as a DSA (Density Spectral
Array) trendgraph and heart rate and DC input parameter trendgraphs on the
review window, EEG Scope – Comparison mode and remote monitor. Up to
8 trendgraphs can be displayed.
7
The DSA trendgraph lets you easily find the EEG waveforms when ictus
epileptic seizure occurs or find a specific frequency band of the EEG waveform,
such as alpha waves, delta waves or stage of spindles in sleep study. Also,
effects from heart rate or other parameters such as SpO2 or ETCO2 to the
EEG waveforms can be observed with the heart rate and DC input parameter
trendgraphs.
Displaying the DSA, Heart Rate or DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Jump Bar
From the Tools menu, select “Show Trend in Jump Bar”.
Or,
1. Right-click the display area of the jump bar. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select Display Trend.
The trendgraph jump bars open at the bottom of the screen.
Heart rate or DC
input parameter
trendgraph jump
bar
DSA trendgraph
jump bar Event jump bar

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
About the Trendgraph Jump Bar

You can quickly access and display any part of the EEG waveform by clicking
any place on the trendgraph jump bar.
DSA Jump Bar

The DSA trendgraph displays amplitude for each frequency component every
2.5 seconds.
DSA Setup
Opens the DSA settings dialog box to
Upper Arrow select DSA trendgraph display settings.
Displays the Long term DSA window
to review the DSA trendgraph for
Sensitivity can be adjusted with
long term EEG monitoring data or
the + and − buttons. (Unit: µV)
polysomnography data.
Frequency scale (0 to 20 Hz)
DSA trendgraph
Voltage scale/DSA color scale Amplitude for each frequency component is displayed
The voltage scale shows the selected in color. The amplitude is smaller toward the purple
amplitude range. The DSA color end and larger toward the red end. You can display the
scale shows the corresponding corresponding waveform by clicking any place on the
amplitude (µV). trendgraph. You change the trendgraph display area.
Refer to “Searching by the Event Jump Bar – Changing
the Range of the Event Mark Display Area and DSA
Trendgraph Display Area” in this section.
Group list
Displays the DSA pattern. You can change
Examples:
the DSA trendgraph display settings by
changing the pattern.
Alpha waves Spindle waves Delta waves
Around here, the DSA trendgraph is almost red. This shows that amplitude and frequency components
of the EEG waveforms suddenly change. You can jump to the EEG waveforms by clicking here.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Jump Bar
The scale and unit of Trend 2 set Trend Setup

on the Trend setup dialog box are Opens the Trend Setup dialog box to select
displayed. DC input trendgraph display settings.
The scale and unit of Trend 1 set

on the Trend setup dialog box are
displayed. Group list
Click the minimum or maximum A trend group can
scale button to change the value. be selected.
Red slashes indicate where ECG cannot be analyzed.
Group List on the Jump Bar
DSA group
Trend group
Individual DSA channels
Individual heart rate and

DC input parameters

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Range of the Display Area for DSA, Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter
Trendgraph
1. Right-click the display area. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select the range from the menu.
Selection list:
All: Displays the beginning to end of the file.
Hour: Displays an hour of the file.
Hour/2: Displays a half hour of the file.
Hour/4: Displays a quarter hour of the file.
You can scroll the event mark display area backward or forward by clicking
the Previous or Next Section button when “Hour”, “Hour/2” or “Hour/4” is
selected.
Displaying the DSA Trendgraph in Detail

The DSA trendgraph can be displayed in detail by opening the Long Term DSA/
Event window. To open the window, click the button on the DSA jump bar.
This box is useful to review the long time EEG waveforms, such as in sleep
study.
DSA trendgraph/Event jump bar Use the scroll bar to view information
You can display any part of the EEG waveform by beyond the borders of the window.
clicking any place on the DSA trendgraph or jump bar.
Events
Event marks for up to 5 events can be displayed with a Print OK
vertical color line in the Event jump bar. The selected Prints the window. Closes the Long Term
event names are displayed. Refer to “Changing the DSA/Event window.
DSA Trendgraph Display Settings” in this section.
Printing the Long Term DSA/Event Window

To print the Long Term DSA/Event window, click the Print icon.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Heart Rate Display Mode

The heart rate calculation method can be set on the Heart Rate Setup
dialog box.
To open the dialog box, click Tools → Heart Rate → Heart Rate
Setup.
Average: The heart rate is calculated by a moving average of

the R-R intervals of the latest 12 beats (including
VPC). The heart rate is updated every beat.
Instantaneous: The heart rate is calculated every beat.
Creating FFT Data for the DSA Trendgraph

During waveform acquisition, the instrument can create FFT data for
use in the DSA trendgraph. Refer to “Creating FFT Data for the DSA
Trendgraph” in Section 6. FFT data is required in order to display a DSA
trendgraph.
FFT Settings
1. From the Tools menu, select DSA → FFT setup. The FFT setup
dialog box opens.
2. Select the following options to create the FFT data.
FFT setup dialog box options

FFT pattern:
The settings in the FFT pattern area can be saved with a pattern
name. To rename the pattern name, click the Rename button.

FFT channel:
Selects the electrodes for FFT calculation.
To select all electrodes, click the Select all button.

To cancel electrode selection, click the Clear button.

Reference:
Selects the reference electrode for FFT calculation.

DSA pattern:
In the Review window, select the DSA trendgraph display settings.
Refer to “Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings” in this
section.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
FFT Analysis
1. From the Tools menu, select DSA → FFT reanalysis. The
confirmation dialog box opens.
To create or overwrite the FFT analysis data, click the OK button.

To cancel creating or overwriting, click the Cancel button.
2. When the FFT data is created, the message dialog box opens.
Click the OK button. The DSA jump bar automatically opens and
shows the analysis result.
Creating the Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph

Heart rate and DC input data for another parameter are calculated while
acquiring the EEG waveforms. If the heart rate and DC input data are not
calculated, reanalyze heart rate and DC input to display the trendgraphs. Refer
to “Settings for Displaying Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraphs for
Review Program” in Section 6 for details.
NOTE
• If the date of birth is not entered in the patient information, heart rate
is calculated on the assumption that the patient is an adult . Before
displaying heart rate, check that the patient’s date of birth is entered.
Otherwise, heart rate cannot be calculated correctly and noise or
P waves may be counted as QRS.
• The DC input parameter trendgraph is displayed only when DC
Heart Rate Analysis

1. Click Tools → Heart Rate → Heart Rate Setup. The Heart Rate Setup dialog
box opens.
2. Select the channel(s) and data type to reanalyze and click OK.
ECG channels for HR calculation
HR calculation method

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
3. Click Tools → Heart Rate → Heart Rate Reanalysis to calculate the heart
rate. The confirmation dialog box opens.
To create or overwrite the heart rate analysis data, click the OK button.
4. When the heart rate data is created, the message dialog box opens.
Click the OK button. The heart rate is displayed on the extended channel bar.
DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Analysis

The DC input parameter trendgraph is sampled at 2 Hz.
NOTE
7
The DC input parameter trendgraph is displayed only when DC
1. Click Tools → DC Trend Analysis to reanalyze the DC input data. The

confirmation dialog box opens.
To create or overwrite the DC trend analysis data, click the OK button.

2. When the DC trend data is created, the message dialog box opens.
Click the OK button.
Changing the DSA Trendgraph Display Settings

To change the DSA trendgraph display settings, use the DSA/Event Setup dialog
box.
1. Click the DSA 1 Setup button. The DSA/Event Setup window opens.
2. Click the button beside the DSA pattern text box, and select the pattern
3. Change the display settings of the selected pattern.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
DSA/Event Setup dialog box options
Number of DSA trendgraphs:

Select the number of DSA trendgraphs to display. The maximum number is 8.
DSA pattern:
The settings in the DSA Pattern area can be saved with a DSA pattern name of up
to 40 characters. To rename the pattern, click the Rename button.
DSA Pattern area

FFT channels used for DSA:
The FFT data is saved in every derivation that is selected in the FFT channel area
of the FFT settings dialog box. You can select the derivations to display the DSA
trendgraph.
• To select all derivations, click the Select all button.
• To select two or more consecutive derivations, drag the cursor to select the
derivations.
• To select more than one derivation, click the derivations while pressing the
Ctrl key.
DSA:
Selects whether or not to display the DSA data in the DSA trendgraph.
Edge (%):
Displays the edge frequency for each analysis period. You can set the percentage
from 0 to 100% in the text box.
Peak (Hz):
Displays the peak frequency for each analysis period. You can set the range of
the peak frequency between 0 to 20 Hz in the text box.
Either “Edge” or “Peak” is selectable.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Long Term DSA/Event area

Time scale:
Selects the time range for each row of the DSA trendgraph.
Hide DSA:
Hides the DSA trendgraph on the Long Term DSA/Event window.
Auto close after jump:

Closes the Long Term DSA window when you jump to any part of the waveform.
Transparent DSA window:

Displays the transparent Long Term DSA window.
7
Event bar:
OFF: Closes the Event jump bar.
Normal: Displays all event marks for all events.
Detailed: Displays the event marks for the event that is selected in the Table
Items dialog box in the System program. Refer to “Editing Event List
for Waveform Annotations and Item List in the Patient Information
Window” in Section 5.
Changing the Heart Rate and DC Input Parameter Trendgraph Display Settings
The maximum channel number is 8. Set the scale. Opens the color palette.
Up to two parameters can be

assigned for one trend group.
To set a second parameter,
click Trend 2.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying Voltage Maps
General
The 3D Mapping window displays voltage maps in six different view points
based on electrode potential (standard mode). By moving the vertical cursor or
selecting the event, you can display the voltage maps of any time point.
You can also display a sequence of voltage maps in one head view at the selected
interval (time series mode). The time that is displayed beneath each voltage map
shows the interval from the vertical cursor position on the EEG waveforms. In
time series mode, you can change the view point by rotating the voltage map
horizontally or vertically. The CSD (current source density) display mode is also
provided.
WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based only on data acquired by the
electroencephalograph. Overall judgement must be performed
by a physician who understands the features, limitations and
characteristics of the electroencephalograph and by reading the
biomedical signals acquired by other instruments.
NOTE
This function is not available for data measured by DC input or data
containing electrode names which consist only of numbers.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying the 3D Mapping Window

Click the Display 3D Map button on the Tool bar, or select 3D Map → View
Mapping from the Tool menu.
Voltage maps
7
The cursor indicates the
time of the map
3D Map Window
Tool bar
Map
The time of the map Reference

electrode
Display mode Scale color Interval

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Types of Map
The instrument provides two types of maps: voltage map and CSD (current
source density) map. For detailed operation, refer to “Changing the Display
Mode” in this section.
Example
Voltage Map CSD Map
Display Mode
You can also select the display mode for each type of map according to your
purpose. For detailed operation, refer to “Changing the Display Mode” in this
section.
• Normal mode
Displays 6 voltage maps in different view points
• Time sequence mode
Displays the map of the specified time. When two or more maps display is
selected, the maps before and after the specified time are displayed in the
specified interval. You can select 1 map (1*1), 15 maps (5*3), 35 maps (5*7)
or user defined display.
• 2D map mode
Displays 2D maps. You can select the number of maps.
Examples
Time sequence (1 map)
Normal Time sequence (15 maps) 2D maps

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Buttons on the Tool Bar

Rotation button
Rotates the maps freely by dragging. This button is only available when a time
sequence map is displayed.
Zoom button
Zooms in/out by dragging. Drag downward to zoom in and drag upward to zoom
out. This button is only available when a time sequence map is displayed.
Move button
Moves the maps by dragging. This button is only available when a time sequence
map is displayed. 7
Rotation button (to the left)

Rotates the maps 45˚ to the left when this button is clicked. This button is only
available when a time sequence map is displayed.
Rotation button (to the right)

Rotates the maps 45˚ to the right when this button is clicked. This button is only
Rotation button (vertical)

Rotates the maps 45˚ vertically when this button is clicked. This button is only
Standard/Time sequence display button

Switches between the standard and time sequence display.
Serial arrangement
Opens a pull down menu to select the number of maps in the map window. Select
the display from 5*7, 5*3, 1*1 and user defined.
Option button
Opens a pull down menu to change the maps.
You can also open the menu by right-clicking anywhere on the window.
• Displays 3D whole head mapping
• Displays top meridian projection
• Switches between voltage and CSD display
• Switches between standard and time sequence display
• Displays/hides electrodes on the maps
• Switches between a whole head map and a map that the lower part of the head
is cut off.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Back button
Displays the maps one interval back.
Forward button
Displays the maps one interval forward.
Interval button
Opens the pull down menu to select the interval for the time sequence display.
Select from 1, 2, 5, 10 ms and user defined.
Scale button (increase)

Increases the scale of the maps.
Scale button (decrease)

Decreases the scale of the maps.
Selecting the Electrodes for the Voltage/CSD Maps

You can select the electrodes to display on a voltage map and CSD map with
the Electrode setting dialog box. To open the dialog box, select Voltage Map →
Electrode Setting from the Tool menu.
About the Electrode setting dialog box

Electrode Group: Selects the electrodes on the Electrode list from the
10-20 system or 10-10 system.
Select Electrode list

check box select: Select electrodes to display in the voltage map and
CSD map. You can select two or more electrodes
by pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key on the
State keyboard.
column
state
o: The electrode is selected and saved in the
Label Electrodes to be Saved dialog box.
column d: The electrode name is used for two or more
different electrodes.
e: DC input signal
None: Other than above
label: Electrode name
Setting list box: The settings of the electrode list can be saved as
user settings. Up to 5 user settings can be saved.
Save button: Saves the current settings.
OK button: Closes the dialog box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying the 3D Map for the Specified Time

1. Click the Display 3D Map button on the Tool bar to open
the 3D Map window.
2. Display the waveforms in the main window by selecting the

event or clicking the Jump bar.
3. Drag the cursor on the screen to the point to show the 3D Map.
To adjust the position of the cursor, click the or button

on the Tool bar of the 3D Map window. To change the interval
Cursor of the cursor, refer to “Setting the Interval for the 3D Map and 7
Cursor” in this section.
Setting the Interval for the 3D Map and Cursor

You can set the interval for the 3D Map (time sequence) and for the or
button.
Click the button and select the interval from the menu.
To set the time for interval that is not in the menu;
1. Select “Custom” from the menu. The Custom Value: Delta T window opens.
2. Enter the time for the interval (ms) and click the OK button.
Changing the Display Mode

You can change the display mode of the 3D map.
1. Click the button on the Tool bar of the 3D Map window. A pop-up menu
opens. Or right-click anywhere on the 3D Map window.
2. Select the display mode from the menu.

Switch to Voltage Mapping/CSD Mapping
Switches between voltage map and CSD map.
Show Normal Map/Serial Top Maps

Switches between normal map and time sequence maps.
Show/Hide Electrodes
Switches between hiding or showing the electrodes.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Show/Cut Off Inferior Map

Switches between hiding or showing the inferior part of the map.
3D Map with the inferior part 3D Map without the inferior part
Changing the Number of the Maps in the Time Sequence Mode

You can change the number of the maps displayed in the 3D map window.
Click the button on the Tool bar and select the number of the maps from the
menu.
To set the number of the 3D map that is not in the menu;
1. Select Custom from the menu. The Custom Value: Time Series window
opens.
2. Enter the number of the rows and columns for the map and click the OK
button.
Changing the Scale of the 3D Map

You can change the scale of the maps.
Click the button to increase the scale and click the button to decrease
the scale.
Printing the 3D Map

To print the current 3D map, select 3D Map → Print from the Tools menu of the
main window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Wide-band EEG Analysis
Nihon Kohden developed this function based on the results of the following
joint research with Kyoto University (Akio Ikeda M.D., Ph.D., Department of
Epilepsy, Movement Disorders and Physiology, Kyoto University Graduate
School of Medicine).
Research: Ictal DC shifts and high frequency oscillations (HFO)
You can analyze low frequency and high frequency activity simultaneously
and view the results. Wide-band EEG analysis allows you to see if there is low
frequency baseline shift or low amplitude high frequency waveforms which are 7
difficult to observe with typical filters.
Analysis
On the review window, display the waveforms that you want to analyze with
wide-band EEG analysis, then analyze the waveforms of the specified time
range.
1. On the review window, display the waveforms to analyze.
NOTE
• Only the channels currently displayed on the screen are analyzed.
Turn off display of channels that are not needed for analysis.
• When analyzing, put the center of the analysis range in the center
of the screen (page). The specified time intervals are set using the
center of the page as the reference point.
• Select continuous waveforms for the analysis range. Waveforms that
were joined together or waveforms that have a gap in the recording
cannot be analyzed.
2. Click “Wide-band EEG analysis...” in the Tools menu. The Setup Analysis
window opens.
3. Set the analysis conditions and click the Start Analysis button. Analysis
starts with the set conditions.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
When analysis is complete, the Wide-band EEG analysis window opens and
the analysis results are displayed. (See the next page for details.)
Maximum Frequency
Enter the maximum
frequency to analyze.
Analysis parameters
(Advanced)
Check this to set detailed
analysis conditions for
the analysis method, etc.
See “Analyzing with
More Detailed Analysis
Conditions” (p. 7.77).
Start Analysis Cancel

Starts analyzing with the set Cancels setting changes and
analysis conditions. closes the Analysis Settings
window.
Analysis time range

Set the time range to analyze. To use “Selected range”, you must first
select the waveform range on the review window.
You can also select the waveform range to analyze by dragging the
mouse as shown below.
Selecting the analysis range and analyzing

1. Drag to select the waveforms.
2. Right-click and select “Wide-band EEG analysis...”.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Explanation of Wide-band EEG Analysis Window

When analysis is complete, the Wide-band EEG analysis window opens and the
analysis results are displayed.
NOTE
The Wide-band EEG analysis window shows the results using the
previously set settings.
Menu Tool bar (see p. 7.70)
Result display
7
Displays time
frequency analysis
results and up to
four waveforms
with different filter
conditions. See
“Explanation of Result
Display Area” (p. 7.68)
for more information.
Current baseline
Status information
Analysis conditions Horizontal scroll bar

If not all the channels
Shows the settings for the “Analysis parameters (Advanced)” section of the are displayed on one
Setup Analysis window. If “Analysis parameters (Advanced)” is set to off, page, scroll to see the
the default settings are displayed. previous or next page of
Analysis frequency range Baseline ratio channels. You can also
Time sampling interval scroll with the left and
right arrow keys on the
keyboard.
Analysis method Analysis data beginning time

FFT (Short-term FFT), CDM
(Complex Demodulation), Frequency sampling interval
Wavelet
Scale
The frequency analysis range, analysis result color scale, and other information are
shown at the bottom of the screen.
Frequency analysis Time-frequency analysis Waveform CAL voltage
range result color scale (up to 4 types)

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
When analysis is complete, the analyzed time range is shown in yellow at the top
of the review window.
The Wide-band EEG analysis window opens on the review window. To check
the raw waveforms, minimize the Wide-band EEG analysis window to see the
waveforms.
Analyzed waveform area
Explanation of Result Display Area

The channel montage label and time-frequency analysis result are displayed in
the upper half, and the waveforms are displayed in the lower half. The baseline is
displayed at the very bottom. For more information, see “Changing the Time-
frequency Analysis Result Display” (p. 7.73) and “Adjusting the Baseline” (p.
7.74).
Channel montage label The x-axis (time) and
Time-frequency analysis y-axis (frequency)
result (see p. 7.73) scales are not
displayed if there are
too many channels on
Waveform one screen.
Shows up to four waveforms Baseline
with different filter Current baseline with currently set time
conditions. (see p. 7.74) range (see p. 7.74)
Cursor display
Crosshair cursor When you move the mouse over the time-frequency analysis result
Time- area, a crosshair cursor is displayed. A corresponding vertical line
frequency is also displayed on the waveforms below. The same crosshair
analysis cursor and waveform cursor also appear on the corresponding time
result and frequency position on all channels.
Waveforms If you move the mouse over the waveform area, only the
waveform cursor is displayed on the waveforms of all channels.
Cursor on waveforms
The crosshair cursor is not displayed.
Dragged range Range display

Time- If you drag with the mouse in the time-frequency analysis result
frequency
area, a square frame is shown over the dragged area, and the
analysis
result corresponding range in the waveform area is highlighted in color.
The same square frame also appears on the corresponding time-
Waveforms frequency analysis result area on all channels, along with the color
highlighted area on the waveform area of all channels.
Cursor on waveforms

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Setting the baseline

Selected baseline range When displaying the time-frequency analysis result as TSE or
adjusting the waveforms to the baseline, you can change the
position of the baseline.
Normally, the baseline is automatically set to the beginning of

the waveforms (10% of the range). You can manually adjust the
baseline time (range) by the following procedure.
Current baseline Baseline menu
1. In the time-frequency analysis result area of each channel,
New baseline range
drag with the mouse to select the range for the baseline. When
you release the mouse button, the Baseline menu opens.
2. Click the Baseline menu to change it to the selected range. 7

The baseline of all channels in the analysis result display area
is changed to the new baseline and the baseline ratio (ratio of
baseline time to total time) is shown in the analysis conditions
area.
The following settings are necessary to show the adjusted baseline in the result
display area. (see p. 7.73)
• Time-frequency analysis result display area: Display TSE.
• Waveform display area: In the Waveform Display menu, set “Baseline
Correction” to on.
Displaying the Time and Amplitude of a Selected Area

If you drag the mouse to select an area in the time-frequency analysis results
area, the time of the selected area (time of selected start and end positions and
duration of selected period) and the amplitude and maximum and minimum
potentials of the waveforms of the selected time are displayed.
1. Display the waveform which has the time or amplitude to measure.
2. Drag in the time frequency analysis result display window. The time and
amplitude of the selected range are displayed as shown in the following
example.
Selected range end time

Selected range start time Selected range time
Amplitude Waveform Waveform Minimum Maximum

is shown for name amplitude (μV) potential (μV) potential (μV)
up to four of the selected
waveforms. area

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Explanation of Toolbar
Toggles display on/off
of waveforms for the
result display area
Increases or decreases
Toggles display the gain of the time- Sets display on/off
on/off of time frequency analysis of the waveforms
frequency analysis result display. (1 to 4) that Waveform Sens bar Automatically adjusts
result in the result were set on the Increases or decreases the the aspect ratio of the
display area Toggles TSE Setup waveform sensitivity of each waveform amplitude display.
Reanalyzes. display on and window. (1 to 4). (see p. 7.75)
(see p. 7.78) off.
Opens the [Number TSE change is shown Example: Example:

of Display Channels as logarithmic when Increases the Decreases the
Setting] window to this ON, or as % sensitivity of sensitivity of
set the number of when this is OFF. waveform 2 waveform 4
channels to display on
one screen.
(see p. 7.70)
Captures and saves Result display calculation Opens the [Waveform Settings] window
the current screen as a is by power when this is to set waveform display conditions (filter,
bitmap (BMP) image. ON, or by amplitude when Sens, display color, etc.). (see p. 7.74)
(see p. 7.78) this is OFF.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Setting the Number of Display Channels

You can select the number of display channels on one screen. (Each display
channel shows time frequency analysis result and waveforms.) The number of
display channels is determined by the number of rows and columns. You can set
up to 36 rows and 36 columns.
1. Click “Setup the number of row and columns” in the Display Settings menu.
The Number of rows and columns window opens.
You can also open the Number of rows and columns window by clicking
on the toolbar.
7
2. Enter the number of rows (from 1 to 36) and columns (from 1 to 36) and
click the OK button. The Number of rows and columns window closes and
the set number of channels is displayed.
Sets the number of rows of channels

Sets the number of columns of
channels.
Shows all analyzed channels on one
screen. The number of rows and
columns is automatically set.
Applies the changed Cancels the setting

settings and closes the changes and closes the
window. window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying Specified Channels

You can select which channels (analysis results and waveforms) to display on the
screen.
1. Click a channel (in the analysis result display area) to select it. Selected
channels are shown with a red border.
You can select multiple channels with the keyboard Ctrl key (non-
consecutive channels) or Shift key (consecutive channels).
• Consecutive channels: Click the first channel, press and hold the Shift
key, and click the last channel.
• Non-consecutive channels: Press and hold the Ctrl key and click each
channel.
Selected channel
The montage label
is highlighted in red
and the analysis result
display area has a red
border.
2. Right-click and select display options from the popup menu.
Displays selected
channels on one screen.
Clears channel selection Displays all channels

and displays all analyzed except the selected
channels on one screen. channels on one screen.
Example: “Show Selected Channel” is selected.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Time-frequency Analysis Result Display

In the Time-frequency Analysis Display menu, click the desired display method
for the time-frequency analysis result.
Absolute Power/Amplitude:
Select to display amplitude or power value. The amplitude or power value
is shown in a color scale in the time-frequency analysis result area. You can
check the amplitude or power in each frequency band for each time period.
Temporal Spectral Evolution (TSE) [ ]

Select to display TSE. In a color scale in the time-frequency analysis result
display area, TSE shows the rate of change from the averaged value in the 7
range marked by the baseline. By showing the rate of change, you can check
which amplitude or power has changed in each frequency band for each time
period.
This can also be turned on/off with toolbar button. (see p. 7.70)
TSE Calculation Formula

(A (t,f) − A baseline (f))
TSE change rate (%) = × 100
A baseline (f)
A(t,f)
TSE logarithmic change rate (log) = Log 10
A baseline(f)
A (t,f) = Amplitude or power value for a given time (t) and frequency (f)
A baseline(f) = Averaged amplitude or power value for a given frequency (f)

in the time range indicated by the baseline
Amplitude, Power [ ]
You can select amplitude or power for the data that used in the time
frequency analysis result display.
% display on TSE, Log display on TSE [ ]

You can select amplitude or power for the data that used in the time-
frequency analysis result display.
When TSE rate of change is displayed as %:

Displays values from −100% to +∞ (infinity)
When TSE rate of change is displayed as log:

Displays values of ±∞ (infinity)
Smoothing
When this is ON, the time-frequency analysis result is smoothed.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adjusting the Baseline

To turn adjustment ON/OFF for the baseline in the analysis result display area,
click “Baseline Correction” in the Waveform Display menu. (default setting:
ON)
When this is set to ON, the average waveform amplitude value is the value at the
center of the waveform in the range indicated by the baseline.
Setting Waveform Display Settings

1. Click “Waveform Setup” on the Waveform Display menu. The Waveform
Setup window opens.
You can also open the Waveform Setup window by clicking [ ] on the
toolbar.
2. Set the desired items then click [OK].
Set the settings for

Waveform 1 [ ] on
the toolbar.

Waveform 2 [ ] on
the toolbar.

Waveform 3 [ ] on
the toolbar.
Applies the changed

settings and closes
the window.
Waveform 4 [ ] on
the toolbar.
Cancels the setting
changes and closes
the window.
Settings for Waveforms 1 to 4

Turn on to display the waveform.
Enter the name (type) of the waveform.
Low cut filter and high

cut filter settings
These settings can be
Turn on or off changed when the Low
Current waveform color cut filter or High cut filter
the AC filter.
check box is checked.
Select the sensitivity from the pulldown box. Refer to
the waveform display notes for more information.
Waveform color
Opens the color picker. You can select any color for the waveform.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adjusting the Display Amplitude (Aspect Ratio)

When displaying waveforms (up to four), it is necessary to set the sensitivity
(Sens) for each waveform. When setting the sensitivity, it is necessary to set the
aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio:
When a sensitivity is specified, the aspect ratio determines how many μV per
dot in the waveform display area.
Slider When the Autoscaling checkbox in the toolbar is checked, the display amplitude
(aspect ratio) is automatically adjusted according to the following three
conditions. This is applied to all channels.
Checkbox Auto adjust numerical value
Setting range: 3 to 300 1. Among the channels in which the waveform display is set to ON, the 7
waveforms with the lowest cutoff frequency setting of low cut filter (or low
cut filter OFF) are discovered.
2. Among the displayed channels which meet the conditions in step 1, the
waveforms with the largest absolute value of amplitude are discovered.
3. The aspect ratio is adjusted so that the waveforms discovered in step 2 fit
within the waveform display area.
If the checkbox is unchecked, you can set the display amplitude (aspect ratio)
yourself. To set it, use the slider or enter a numeric value. If the value is large,
the waveform is displayed large.
List of Default Settings

Following are the default settings for all items on the Waveform Setup window.
Initial Setting
Item Setting Range
Waveform 1 Waveform 2 Waveform 3 Waveform 4
Up to 64 alphanumeric
Waveform Name Conventional Slow shift Ripple Fast ripple
characters
Low cut filter ON/OFF ON OFF ON ON
Cutoff frequency — 1.6 Hz 0.3 Hz 80.0 Hz 250.0 Hz
Type Forward*1/Zero phase*2 Forward Zero phase Zero phase Zero phase
Slope — 6 dB/oct 48 dB/oct 48 dB/oct 48 dB/oct

High cut filter ON/OFF ON ON ON ON
Cutoff frequency — 60 Hz 1.0 Hz 250.0 Hz 600.0 Hz
Type Forward*1/Zero phase*2 Forward Zero phase Zero phase Zero phase
Slope*3 — 12 dB/oct 48 dB/oct 48 dB/oct 48 dB/oct
AC filter ON/OFF ON OFF ON ON
Waveform color — Gray Red Blue Green
Sens — 75μV 150μV 10μV 10μV
*1 Filter processing of the data is done in sequential order from older to newer
data. This is the same processing method as the electroencephalograph.
*2 After filter processing of the data is done in sequential order from older to
newer, filter processing is applied again in sequential order from newer to
older data. This method gives stronger suppression of phase variation and
stronger waveform attenuation.
*3 Larger values give larger waveform attenuation for frequencies over the
cutoff filter frequency.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying or Hiding Items on the Screen

Displaying or Hiding Display Areas on the Screen
In the Display Settings menu, you can click the following items to display or
hide them.
Show Time Frequency analysis data
Displays or hides the time frequency analysis result in the result display area.
It can also be turned on/off with toolbar buttons. (see p. 7.70)
Show Waveform
Displays or hides the waveforms in the result display area.
It can also be turned on/off with toolbar buttons. (see p. 7.70)
Show Sens bar
Displays or hides the Sens bar at the top of the window.
Show Montage
Displays or hides the montage labels (channels) in the result display area.
Show Analysis Info
Displays or hides the analysis conditions at the bottom of the window.
Sens bar
(see p. 7.70)
Montage labels
Result display
area
(see p. 7.68)
Time-frequency
analysis result
Waveforms
display area
Analysis
conditions
(see p. 7.67)
Displaying or Hiding Individual Waveform Types

The Waveform Display menu shows the four types of waveforms which can
be displayed. The name of each waveform type is set in the Waveform Setup
window.
You can individually display or hide each type of waveform in the waveform
area of the analysis result display area by clicking the checkbox of each
waveform type in the Waveform Display menu.
You can also use the buttons on the toolbar to show or hide the
four waveform types.
Example: All four waveforms displayed
Waveform
display area

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Analyzing with More Detailed Analysis Conditions

When “Analysis parameters (Advanced)” is set to ON on the Setup Analysis
window, more detailed settings are available for analysis. (The default setting is
OFF.)
1. On the review window, display the waveforms to analyze or select the

waveforms.
NOTE
• When displaying the waveform analysis range on the screen, put
the center of the analysis range in the center of the screen (page).
The time of the analysis range is set to the time of the center of the
page. 7
• Also, select continuous waveforms for the analysis range.
Waveforms that were joined together or waveforms that have a gap
in the recording cannot be analyzed.
• Only the currently displayed channels on the screen are analyzed.
Turn off the display of channels which are not needed for analysis.
See “Analysis” (p. 7.65).
2. Click “Wide-band EEG analysis...” on the Tools menu. The Setup Analysis
window opens.
3. Click “Analysis parameters (Advanced)” to set it to ON. Extended analysis

items can now be set.
4. After completing setting changes, click the Start Analysis button to start
wide-band EEG analysis. When analysis is complete, the analysis results are
displayed on the Wide-band EEG analysis window. See p. 7.67.
For the setting method of the Analysis time range and Maximum frequency
setting, see p. 7.65.
Analysis method with “Analysis parameters (Advanced)” OFF

When the analysis range is 20 seconds or more:
Analysis method is set to “Short-term FFT”.
When the analysis range is less than 20 seconds:
Analysis method is set to “Complex Demodulation”.
Set the other settings depending on the analysis method so that the optimum time
and frequency resolution can be obtained.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
See p. 7.66
Check this to set detailed Set the minimum frequency

analysis conditions for the for the frequency analysis
analysis range.
Select from Short-term FFT, Set the time sampling interval

Complex Demodulation, and for the analysis result.
Wavelet
Set the frequency sampling
This is a parameter for interval for the analysis
Complex Demodulation. result.
Larger values decrease the Note: This cannot be set
frequency resolution but when the analysis method
increase the time resolution. is Short term FFT.
This is a parameter for Cancels analysis and closes the

Wavelet. Larger values Analysis Settings window.
increase the frequency
resolution but decrease the Starts analyzing with the set
time resolution. analysis conditions.
Reanalyzing
Click “Start Analysis” on the Analysis menu. The Setup Analysis window opens
and you can change the analysis conditions and reanalyze. If you reanalyze
without changing analysis conditions, after analysis the new analysis result
display settings are cleared and the original analysis result display is restored.
You can also reanalyze by clicking in the toolbar to open the Setup Analysis
window.
Saving the Analysis Result

If you click “Save as Bitmap” in the File menu, the File Save window opens and
the wide-band EEG analysis result of the currently displayed screen is saved as a
bitmap image.
The wide-band EEG analysis result of the current screen can also be saved by
clicking in the toolbar.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
1. Select AV Delete from the Edit menu. The AV Delete dialog box opens and
the Electrode position layout table and the currently selected montage appear
on the dialog box.
Pattern table Electrode position layout
7
You can change the
AV electrode name
on this window.
To change the
name, select the AV
electrode from the AV
ele list box and enter
the new name in the
Name text box.
Pattern table
Displays the montage for the current pattern. All channels can be displayed
by using the scroll bar.

The reference electrode names are displayed on the Electrode position
layout. The electrodes used for reference voltage calculation are highlighted.
To add or delete an electrode on the electrode position layout, click the
electrode.
2. To select an electrode, click the electrode.
You can also select two or more electrodes by dragging the mouse over
electrodes.
i) Drag the mouse over the electrodes. The selected electrodes are
displayed in blue.
ii) Click the On button to include the selected electrodes. Click the Off
button to exclude the selected electrodes.
“*” appears beside changed electrodes.
3. Click the Save button to save the changed settings. The settings are saved
individually for each pattern.
4. Click the OK button to close the AV Delete dialog box.
When reviewing in TRACE mode, the file cannot be saved.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adjusting BN Balance for BN Derivation
To adjust the voltage balance between the BN1 and BN2 reference electrodes
when the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected, use the BN balance dialog
box.
This operation is available when reviewing the data acquired with the JE-921A
electrode junction box (“Use BN electrodes” is checked in the “Electrodes to be
Saved” window) or with the JE-208A/210A electrode junction box.
1. Select BN Balance from the Edit menu. The BN Balance dialog box opens.
When the reference electrode is changed to BN, the BN Balance dialog box
automatically opens.
Balance:
Shows the voltage balance between the BN1 electrode and the BN2
electrode. The displayed value is the ratio of the BN1 electrode to the BN2
electrode.
2. Adjust the balance to minimize the ECG waveform overlapped on the EEG
waveform. You can also type the ratio with the keyboard.
3. Click the OK button to close the BN Balance dialog box.
Changing the Calibration Voltage
1. From the Edit menu, select Cal. The CAL dialog box opens.
2. Select the calibration voltage from the list box. All channels whose
calibration settings are set to ACC are changed to the selected voltage.
3. Click the OK button to close the CAL dialog box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Entering Patient Information
General
NOTE
The patient’s ID and name must be entered in order to close the EEG file.
You can change the patient information by either mouse or keyboard.
There are two pages in the patient information dialog box. You can enter the
basic patient information on page 1 and the patient condition such as seizure
7
type, sleep disorder, medical history, and medication on page 2.
For details of the Patient Information dialog box, refer to “Patient Information
Settings” in Section 6.
Opening the Patient Information Dialog Box

Click the Display Patient Information button on the EEG bar, or select Patient
Information from the View menu to check or change patient information. The
Patient Information dialog box opens.
• To open page 2, click the 2 tab.

• To close the Patient Information dialog box, click the OK button.
Patient Information dialog box page 1
Check the Read check box when the EEG

waveform data is confirmed by a physician.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Copying Parts of Waveforms – Note Waveform
You can copy any part of the waveforms in the note waveform window. Up to
1000 parts of the waveforms can be copied. You can review the waveforms while
comparing with the copied waveforms. The copied waveforms can be registered
in the instrument as sample data. Up to 100 sample data can be registered. You
can also review waveforms while comparing with sample data.
NOTE
• When several review windows are opened, the note waveform window
is only available for the review window that you open first. To make
the note waveform window available for other review windows, close
all review windows and open the review window to copy in the note
waveform window first.
• After 1000 waveform parts are copied in the note waveform window,
new waveforms overwrite the oldest waveforms.
• After 100 sample data are registered in the instrument, new sample
data overwrites the oldest sample data.
Displaying the Note Waveform Window

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the EEG waveforms.
2. Click the Display Note Waveform button on the tool bar, or select Note
Waveform from the Tool menu. The note waveform window opens.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Note waveform window Note waveform list

Displays the copied part of waveforms. Information about the copied part of
The waveforms are displayed with the current waveform display waveforms are listed. Sample data is
settings. The dotted line shows the center of the copied part of indicated by an “S” mark.
waveforms.
Click the item name at the top of
the column to sort items.
T button
Click to display the
waveforms with the
pattern settings when
the waveforms were
copied.
To change the window size, drag Scroll arrows Single-click

the corner of the window. Moves 1/10 backward or forward. Displays the corresponding waveform
by clicking the event in the annotation
list box.
Event
The time point (measurement date and time) of the dotted line is Displays the events in the list box.
displayed at the bottom of the window. When no part of waveforms
is copied in the note waveform window, the “Drag and drop a note Note
waveform” message appears at the bottom of the note waveform window. Display the list of the copied part of
waveforms in the list box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying the Note Waveform List

The note waveforms can be displayed as a list in the note waveform list window.
To display the note waveform window:
1. Select Bar → Event Bar from the View menu. The event jump bar window
opens.
2. Check Note on the right-bottom of the note waveform list to display the note
waveform window.
Note waveform list

Shows note waveforms of the patient Sample waveform
that is currently reviewed. For sample waveforms, “S”
appears on this column.
Single-click Event/Note list

Check this box to show the note To switch between the Event
waveforms by single-clicking and Note list, select a button.
items in the list.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Copying a Section of the Waveforms

A 20-second section of the waveforms can be copied to the note waveform.
There are two ways to select the section.
• 10 seconds before and after the time point where you click, refer to “Copying
Part of Waveforms with a Mouse” in this section.
• 10 seconds before and after the time point at the center of the review window
refer to “Copying Part of Waveforms at the Center of the Review Window” in
this section.
Copying a Section of the Waveforms with a Mouse 7

The waveforms for 10 seconds before and after the time point where you click
can be copied.
2. Click the Display Note Waveform button on the Tool bar, or select Note
Waveform from the Tools menu. The note waveform window opens.
3. Display the waveforms to copy.
4. Click the center of the area to copy.
5. Drag it to the note waveforms window. The Note waveform information

dialog box opens.
Patient information
6. Type the title of the part of the waveforms in the Title text box with up to 40
characters.
7. Click the OK button. The information of the copied waveforms is displayed

in the note waveform list.
To cancel copying the waveforms, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Copying a Section of the Waveforms at the Center of the Review

Window
The waveforms for 10 seconds before and after the time point at the center of the
review window can be copied.
2. Click the Display Note Waveform button on the tool bar, or select Note
Waveform from the Tools menu. The note waveform window opens.
3. Display the waveforms to copy.
4. Right-click anywhere on the note waveform window. The pop-up menu

opens.
5. Select “Save as note waveform”. The Note waveform information dialog box
opens.
Patient information
6. Type the title of the part of the waveforms in the Title text box with up to 40
characters.
7. Click the OK button. The information of the copied waveforms is displayed

in the note waveform list.
To cancel copying the waveforms, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Registering the Copied Waveforms as Sample Data

You can register the copied waveforms in the instrument as sample data. Up to
100 sample data can be registered.
NOTE
The waveforms that are not registered as sample data cannot be
displayed when reviewing waveforms of other patients.
1. From the note waveform list, select the waveform part to register as a
sample.
2. Right-click anywhere on the note waveform window. The pop-up menu 7

opens.
3. Select “Save in drive C”. The attribute of the registered waveforms changes
to “S” in the note list and the “Save in drive C” in the note waveform
information dialog box changes from “No” to “Yes”.
Changing and Checking the Title and Information of the Copied Waveforms
opens.
2. Select “Note waveform information”. The Note waveform information

dialog box opens.
Patient information
3. Check the registered information. To change the title, type the new title in
the Title text box with up to 40 characters.
To cancel changing, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying the Copied Waveforms

Copied waveforms can be displayed by selecting the copied waveforms in
the annotation list box. You can display the copied waveforms for all patients
registered in the instrument.
NOTE
The waveforms that are not registered as sample data cannot be
displayed when reviewing waveforms of other patients.
Displaying the Copied Waveforms for the Current Patient

1. Click the Stop button to freeze the EEG waveform.
2. Click the Select Event button on the Jump bar, or select Event from the
Jump menu. The annotation list box opens.
3. Select the Note wave option. The list of the copied waveforms for the current
patient is displayed.
4. Select the waveforms to display.
Displaying the Copied Waveforms for All Patients (Sample Data)

The sample data (copied waveforms that are registered in the instrument) can be
displayed for all patients.

opens.
2. To display the list of copied waveforms for all patients, select “Display all
patient list”.
To display the list of sample data for the current patient, select “Show note
waveforms saved in drive C”.
3. Select the waveforms to display.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying Copied Waveforms with the Conditions When They were Registered
Click the button on the right-bottom of the note waveform window to
display the waveforms with the montage and amplifier condition when the note
waveforms were registered. The condition of the review waveforms do not
change.
NOTE
When the note waveforms are displayed as they were registered,
waveforms cannot be enlarged with the button on the tool bar.
Deleting the Copied Waveforms

To delete the copied waveforms, use any of the following commands from the
pop-up menu.
1. Right-click the note display window.
2. Select the command from the following delete option.
Delete:
Delete the selected copied waveforms in the note waveform list.
Delete all unsaved note waveforms:

Deletes the note waveforms that are not registered as sample waveforms.
Delete all saved note waveforms in drive C:

Deletes the note waveforms that are registered as sample waveforms in the
instrument.
Printing the Copied Waveforms

To print the copied waveform, display waveforms to delete on the note waveform
window and select Current Page option in the Print Range area of the Print
dialog box.
For the Print dialog box, refer to “Printing” in this section.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Reviewing Long Term EEG Waveforms
When the EEG waveforms are measured with the long term EEG monitoring
function, the EEG waveforms for each stage are saved as different EEG data
files. You can continuously review these EEG data files for different stages by
using the LIF file which is automatically created during long term recording.
NOTE
• To review long term EEG files, the LIF file is needed. When you copy
the long term EEG file to another drive or instrument, also copy the LIF
file.
• To review the long term EEG waveforms, select one of the EEG files
and start reviewing. If you select two or more files and start reviewing,
you cannot use the EEG slide show function. For details on slide show
function, refer to “Slide Show for an Original Measurement File” in this
section.
• If the long term recording stops because of trouble or error, the links
between the long term EEG waveform files are lost. To link the long
term EEG waveforms files again, select the files in the data list and click
the Merge/Link option button at the bottom of the NeuroWorkbench
window. For details, refer to “Linking Files” in Section 8.
1. Open the EEG data file that is measured with the long term EEG monitoring
function. The data files are displayed as a string of continuous data.
Previous/Next stage button

Displays an EEG data file in the previous or next stage.
2. The waveforms automatically stop at the end or start of each file. To review
the previous or next stage, click the previous or next stage button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Pattern for Long Term EEG Monitoring

When a montage is changed on a stage, you can select if the change is applied to
other stages.
1. Click the button on the EEG bar. The pattern table opens.
2. Click Save Changes button. The Select Pattern and Stages dialog box opens.
3. Select an item to apply the change on which stage(s).
4. Click OK to close the window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Reviewing Two or More EEG Waveform Files Consecutively
You can consecutively review two or more EEG waveform files from the same
examination.
NOTE
• If files belong to different examinations, you cannot review the files
consecutively. One review window is for one examination. If you select
files from different examinations and start reviewing, a different window
opens for each examination.
• When you consecutively review two or more EEG files by selecting the
two or more file in the data list, you cannot use the slide show function.
For details, refer to “Slide Show for an Original Measurement File” in
this section.
Select two or more files that belong to the same examination and click the
Review function button.
To move to the previous or next file, click the or button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Reviewing EEG Waveforms with Different Pattern Settings at

the Same Time on Multiple Review Windows
You can display the same time point of EEG waveforms in multiple pattern
settings and display speed using multiple review windows.
You can display up to four review windows including one main window and
three sub windows.
1. On the Data Manger or Workbench page of NeuroWorkbench, open the file 7

to review. For details, refer to “Opening and Closing the Review Program”
earlier in this section.
2. From the Tools menu on the menu bar, select Multiple Window Review. The
Multiple Window Review window opens.
3. On the Multiple Window Review window, select the number of the sub
windows and click the OK button. The sub windows open.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Screen Example
Main window Sub window
• The green cursor shows the selected time point. When you move the
cursor on the main window, the cursor of the sub windows move to the
time point that is specified in the main window.
• To review the waveforms using different pattern settings, select the pattern
from the Pat list box.
• To review the waveforms using different display speeds, select the speed
from the Display Speed list box.
• To quit the multiple display, close the sub windows by clicking the
button on the upper right of the sub windows.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Slide Show for an Original Measurement File
You can create a slide show of annotated waveforms. Each slide has one screen
page of waveforms with the annotation in the center. You can save a different
pattern and montage for a slide’s waveforms. A slide is also referred to as a
“bookmark” on the screen.
You can arrange the bookmarks in any order. A slide show can contain any
number of bookmarks. Sixteen slide shows are available for one measurement
file.
7
NOTE
If the waveforms come from more than one measurement file, you have to
link the files. Refer to “Linking Files” in Section 9. Long term EEG files are
already linked.
You can also create an EEG library from bookmarks grouped as a slide show.
For details on an EEG library, refer to “Grouping Waveforms for Review – EEG
Library” in this section.
Creating a Slide Show

Sixteen slide shows are available for each measurement file.
NOTE
To add a bookmark to a slide show, freeze the waveforms.
1. On the review window, display the waveforms to add.
2. Freeze the waveforms.
3. Change the patterns and montage if necessary.
4. Add an annotation to the waveforms.
5. Right-click the annotation on the review window.
6. Select “Select Slide Show” from the pop-up menu and select a slide show. A
check mark appears beside the selected slide show.
7. Right-click the annotation on the review window again.
8. Click “Add to selected slide show” on the pop-up menu. A confirmation

message appears.
9. Click the OK button. The selected waveform page with annotation is added
to the slide show as a bookmark.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Reviewing a Slide Show

NOTE
Before reviewing a slide show, freeze the waveforms on the review
window.
1. Open a measurement file which has a slide show.
2. Select “Slide show” from the Tools menu to display the Slide Jump Bar.
3. Click the arrow button beside the slide show name text box and select a slide
show from the pull-down list.
4. Click the button or button to review the previous or next bookmark.
5. To close the slide show, select “Slide show” from the Tools menu.
You can also review a slide show from the Event Viewer window. Refer to
“Reviewing a Slide Show from the Event Viewer Window” in this section.
Editing a Slide Show

1. Open a measurement file which has a slide show.
2. Select “Slide show” from the Tools menu to display the Slide Jump Bar.
3. Click the arrow button beside the slide show name text box and select a slide
show from the pull-down list.
4. Click the button on the Slide Jump bar. The EventViewer window opens.
For details on Event Viewer, refer to “Event Viewer” in this section.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Exporting a Slide Show in an Original Measurement File as a Library

You can export a slide show as an EEG library. For details on EEG library, refer
to “Grouping Waveforms for Review – EEG Library” in this section.
1. Open the EventViewer window and select the slide show from the Slide
Show Name combo box.
2. In the Destination drive combo box, select the drive to save the library in.
3. Click the Save as Library button on the EventViewer window.
Creating and Editing the Settings to Clip Slides for a Library 7

You can change settings to automatically clip slides for creating a library.
The time period for a slide depends on the clipping settings for the events (such
as Spike, Seizure etc.).
1. Open the Event Viewer window.
2. Right-click the Event Column. A pop-up menu opens.
3. Select “Slide clipping settings” from the pop-up menu. The Slide Clipping
Settings window opens.
4. Edit clipping settings using the Slide Clipping Settings window and the Add
window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Explanation of the Slide Clipping Settings Window

You can add and delete clipping settings using the Slide Clipping Settings
window.
List of the clipping
settings. To change the
clipping settings, double
click the settings row.
To add a clipping settings, The Add window opens.
click this button. The Add
window opens.
To delete a clipping
settings, select the
For the events which do not settings from the list and
match any of the settings in click the Delete button.
the list, the default settings
are applied.
To save the clipping settings, click the OK button. To cancel, click the
Cancel button.
Explanation of the Add Window

You can add and edit the clipping settings using the Add window.
Specify the time Select or enter

period before the filter text. The
event. settings are applied
for all events that
Specify the time includes filter text
period after the event. entered in the Slide
name text box.
Check this box to clip the
digital video.
To add a clipping settings to the list in the Slide Clipping Settings window,
click the OK button. To cancel, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Grouping Waveforms for Review – EEG Library
A “library” is like a scrapbook and groups together the original measurement

files which contain bookmarks and clipped data. You can review waveforms in
the library one by one using the slide show function.
This function lets you review the history of a patient in one sequence or perform
case-referent studies more effectively.
In the Workbench tab page of the NeuroWorkbench main window, you can
display EEG libraries only in the Patient List mode. 7
Creating a New Library

NOTE
It is recommended to use clipped files for creating a library. Original
measurement files are not suitable for long time storage because original
measurement files often contain unnecessary waveforms and their file
size is large.
1. In the data list on the NeuroWorkbench main window, select files to add to a
library and right-click the selected files. A pop-up menu opens.
2. Select “EEG Tool → Create new library” from the pop-up menu.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
3. The “Create new library” window appears below the data list and the Set
Library name window opens.
4. Enter a library name in the Set Library name window and click the OK
button.
5. If necessary, add and remove files and change the order of files in the library.
Creating a Library which Contains Files of Two or More Patients

i) Select a patient from the patient list.
ii) In the data list, select files to add from the data list and click the Add
button in the “Create new library” window.
iii) To make it clear that the library contains files of two or more patients,
change the library information by entering new information in the
library row.
6. Click the Start button to create a library. The library is displayed in the data
list.
To cancel creating the library, click the Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Editing a Library
You can add or remove files in a Library and change the order of existing files.
1. Right-click a library in the data list. A pop-up menu opens.
2. Select “EEG Tool → Modify library” from the pop-up menu. The Modify
library window opens below the data list.
3. Add or remove files in the library or change the order of the files.
4. Click the Start button to save the Library. To cancel editing, click the Cancel
button.
Reviewing a Library
1. In the data list, select a library to review.
2. Click the Review button to start reviewing.
Exporting an EEG Library to a Portable Media

NOTE
You cannot export an EEG library to a CD-R or DVD-R disk.
1. Right-click the library in the data list. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select “EEG Tool” → “Export library” from the pop-up menu. The Export
Library window opens.
To refresh the drive

list, click this button.
3. Select a drive from the pull-down list and click the Start export button. The
library is exported to the selected media. To cancel exporting, click the
Cancel button.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Printing
You can print the patient information and event log with waveforms. Set the print
options before printing.
Setting Up the Printer

1. From the File menu, select Print setup. The Print Setup dialog box opens.
2. Select the print options.
3. Click the OK button to close the Print Setup dialog box.
Printing Waveforms and Patient Information

1. From the File menu, select Print. The Print dialog box opens.
Selected printer

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
About the Print dialog box options

Output Type:
You can select print on paper or output to PDF.
Print Range:
Select the EEG waveform data on the screen to print.
Selected Range: Prints the currently selected parts of the EEG waveform
data on the Wave Select dialog box. Each part of the EEG
waveform data is printed with the pattern when it was
selected.
Current Pattern: When printing all selected parts of EEG waveform data
with the current pattern (latest selected pattern), check
this box.
7
Current Page: Prints the page currently displayed on the screen.
Epoch: Prints the selected epochs. One epoch corresponds to 10
seconds of data.
from: Type the beginning epoch.
to: Type the ending epoch.
Print Item:
Select the data to print.
(Patient Information, EEG Data, Event Log, Impedance Check and/or
Pattern)
Print Speed:
Select the printing speed of the EEG waveform data per page. This mode is
in effect when the Print Range is set to Epoch.
5 s/page: Prints 5 seconds of EEG waveform data per page.
5 min/page: Prints 5 minutes EEG waveform data per page.
Wave Print Mode:

Select the pattern to print the EEG waveforms. This option is available when
the Print Range is set to Epoch.
Use Current Pattern: Prints the EEG waveforms in the currently selected
pattern.
Use Acquired Pattern: Prints the EEG waveforms in the pattern in which
they were acquired.
Security options:
Hide patient ID and Name:
Check this box to print “****” instead of the patient ID and name.
Printer Setting:
Select the printer, orientation, and paper type, etc. by opening the Printer
Setup dialog box. Refer to your printer’s instruction manual.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Print Option:
Select what to print.
2. Select the waveforms to print.

• To print the selected part of the EEG waveforms, click the Selected Range
option. To select a part of waveforms, refer to “Selecting a Section of the
Waveforms” in this section.
• To print the currently displayed EEG waveforms, click the Current Page
option.
• To print the EEG waveforms by specifying the epoch:
i) Click the Epoch option in the Print Range area.
ii) Type the beginning epoch in the from box and the ending epoch in the
to box.
3. Click the desired printing item in the Print Item group.
4. Click the desired options in the Print Speed and/or Wave Print Mode area
when the Epoch option in Print Range is selected.
5. Select print options if necessary. For details of the print options, refer to
“Selecting the Information for Waveform Printing” in this section.
6. Click the OK button to start printing.
To cancel printing, click the Cancel button.
Selecting the Information for Waveform Printing

1. Click the Print Option button on the Print dialog box. The Print Option
dialog box opens.
About the Print Option dialog box

Print Information:
Select the information to be printed with the EEG waveform data.
Clock Time: Time of the waveform acquisition
Date: Date of the waveform acquisition
Amplifier Settings: Amplifier settings (Sens, TC and HF) set to ACC.
Annotation: Annotation for the waveforms
ID: Patient ID

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Name: Patient name

Amplitude Scale: Amplitude scale and reduced scale
Montage: Montage
Channel Comment: Comment beside each channel
Extended Channel Bar: Extended channel bar
Screen Comment: Screen comment for each page
Time scale: Time scale
Calibration Mark: Check the radio button to print calibration marks.
Annotation Color Line: Vertical color line for the specified annotation
Display Montage Map: Montage map
Time Scale:
7
Select the time scale interval printing.
1 s Time Scale: Prints a solid or dotted line every second, or off.
0.2 s Time Scale: Prints a solid or dotted line every 200 ms, or off.
Print Quality:
Select the print quality from High, Normal and Low (High Speed).
Header:
The words entered in the text box are printed on every page.
Paper:
Select the paper size. When using A3 paper, select “100% B4 size”.
Selection list: 115% A3 size, 100% B4 size (equal to the screen size), 100%
A4 letter, 84% A4 letter, 71% B5 size, 50% A5 size
Wave:
Enter the thickness of the trace. The default setting is 15.
Folder to Save PDF File:

When saving print data to PDF, set the following settings.
Adobe Reader is needed to view PDF files.
Select the folder when saving the file:

Specify the folder and file name when you save as PDF.
Open the created file after saving:
Check this box to view the created PDF file after saving.
Select the folder to save the file:
The file name is automatically set according to the following pattern:
[examination number]_[patient ID]_[examination name]_
[PC name*]_[examination date]
* The PC where the PDF is saved is used as the PC name.
2. Select the Time Scale and Print Information options. Type the page header, if
necessary.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Printing the Currently Displayed Page

You can print the currently displayed page. Click the button on the tool bar.
The printer set in the Print Setup window is used.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Saving the EEG Waveforms
There are two ways to save files.

• Save the changed data in the currently selected file (overwrite)
• Save all or part of the file in a new file (export)
Saving the Changed Data in the Currently Selected File

This procedure overwrites the original data with the changed data.
7
NOTE
The patient ID and name must be entered in order to save the changed
data.
1. From the File menu, select Save. Or, click the Save button on the EEG
bar. The confirmation message appears.
2. Click the Yes button.
NOTE
The patient ID must be unique for each patient. If there is a patient
information that has the same ID as the current patient but has a different
name, gender or date of birth, the information window appears when
saving the file.
Reenter the duplicated item

The file is not saved. Open the patient information dialog box and check the ID,
name, sex and date of birth and save the file again.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Save the EEG file and change the information in the database
Overwrites the patient information with the current name, sex and date of birth.
Save the EEG without changing the patient information in the database
Saves the file without changing the patient information.
Saving All or Part of the File as a New File

This procedure creates a new file and saves the selected data in it.
NOTE
• When saving a file as an ASCII file, select parts of waveforms that are
less than 5 minutes. 500 Hz sampling time, 20 channels, 5 minutes of
waveforms uses 25 MB file space. If the file is 25 MB or more, other
applications may be unable to open the file.
• If part of the file is not selected, settings in the EEG Data area are not
available and the file cannot be saved as ASCII file.
• When saving more than one part as one file, make sure that the parts
do not overlap each other.
1. Select part of the file. Refer to “Selecting a Section of the Waveforms” in

this section.
2. From the File menu, select Export. The Export dialog box opens.
3. Set each item to save the file.
Export dialog box options

Name, ID, EEG. Date, EEG. No, Clip Comment
Name, ID, EEG. Date and EEG No. and Clip Comment of the file are
displayed.
Name, ID and EEG. Date cannot be changed.
You can display the entered Clip Comment on the waveforms. For details,
refer to “Adding and Editing Comments to Measurement Files” in this
section.
EEG Data
Select the EEG data to save.
All: Saves the currently selected EEG file as a new file.
Selected: aves the currently selected part of the EEG waveforms as
S
a new file.
Unselected: Saves the unselected part of the EEG waveforms as a new
file.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Save Pattern: Select the pattern saved with the EEG file. You can review
the EEG waveforms with the currently selected pattern or
the pattern when the EEG waveforms were acquired.
Save as other format

Select a format to export from ASCII, BINARY or EDF (European Data
Format). NAT is not available. To export the trigger with the EEG data,
click With trigger data.
For details of the EDF format, refer to http://www.edfplus.info/.
Storage Drive
Select the drive in which to save the waveforms and measurement data.
7
4. Click the OK button to save the file.
ASCII File Format and File Name

ASCII File Format
First line
Time Points: Number of data for each channel
Channels: Number of channels
Begin Sweep [ms]: Delay time from 0 point (always 0)
Sampling Interval [ms]: Sampling interval
Bins/uV: Value corresponds to 1 μV (always 1)
Time: Start time of the data
Second line (Montage)

When “org” or “0V” is set to the G2 electrode, only the electrode name is saved.
Example
Montage: Fp1-A1, Fp2-A2, F3-A1, F4-A2 .......
C3-A1, C4-A2, P3-A1, P4-A2 .......
Electrode name: Fp1, Fp2, F3, F4, C3, C4, P3, P4
After third line

Amplitude for all channels (μV) and trigger information in every time point.
NOTE
If “Add the date and time” is checked, the date and time are added to the
beginning of each time point from the third line and after.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
ASCII File Name

A file is named based on the EEG data file name with extension “.m**”. When
selecting parts of waveforms and saving the parts as ASCII files, a different
ASCII file is created for each part. The extension changes according to the
number of files that are created at the same time.
File name example: FA001001 or FC001001 (Default setting)

1st digit: Type of the EEG instrument (Fixed tag)
2nd digit: Language data (Country, A: English, C: Chinese)
3rd to 5th digits: Instrument serial number
6th to 9th digits: Total number of created EEG data files (File Number)
When 5 ASCII files are created from the EEG data file “FA001001”, the
following files are created.
1st part: FA001001.m00 2nd part: FA001001.m01
3rd part: FA001001.m02 4th part: FA001001.m03
5th part: FA001001.m04
Before saving the file, you can change the file name.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Event Viewer
You can review the event list of EEG data files and display a specified event.
Opening the Event Viewer

1. Select a file to review in the data list of the NeuroWorkbench.
2. Right click the Review button and select EEG → Event Viewer. The Review
button changes to the EventViewer button.
7
3. Click the EventViewer button. The EventViewer window opens.
Event lists
Event group tab
Comment
Select events button
Slide show button Create slide button Setting button

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Displaying Waveforms from the Event Viewer

1. Select the event from the event list in the EventViewer window.
2. Click the Open button or double click an event to display the waveforms.
Selected event

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Editing a Slide Show with the Event Viewer Window

You can review several events as a slide show by editing the slide list. For details
on “slide show”, refer to “Slide Show for an Original Measurement File” in this
section.
1. Click the Create slide button to display the slide list in the EventViewer
window.
2. To edit a new slide list, click the Bookmark text box arrow and select an
unused group.
Up to 16 lists can be saved. 7
3. Select an event and click the > button to add the event. To delete an event
from the list, select the event and click the < button.
You can also add or delete events by dragging them.
Slide list
4. Select the event and click the Up or Dw key to change the order.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Adding an Event to a Slide Show from the Review Window

You can also add events to a slide show. Refer to “Adding an Annotation” in this
section.
Reviewing a Slide Show from the Event Viewer Window

1. On the Event Viewer window, select the Slide Show to review.
Select a
slide show.
2. Click the button on the Event Viewer window. The review program
opens and the selected slide show is displayed.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
3. Click an arrow button ( , ) to jump to the previous or next slide.
To review the slide show, use the slide jump bar.
Explanation of the Event Jump Bar

Click this arrow to
Previous event Next event select a slide show.
Returns to the currently Returns to the

selected slide and restores EventViewer window.
7
pattern settings.
4. Click the EventViewer button to return to the EventViewer window.
Filtering Events
You can filter the event list by entering keywords or selecting an event group.
Selecting with Keywords

1. Click the Select events button on the Event Viewer window or right-
click the event list and select “Select events”. The Select Events window
opens.
2. Click Show selected events or Hide selected events and then select keywords
from the pull down menu or enter the keywords. Up to 40 characters can be
entered.
You can also filter by comments or system events.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Changing the Filtering Options

The filtering options are displayed in the event tab. Click the event tab to change
the filtering options. To set the filtering options, refer to “Setting Event Tabs” in
this section.
Event tab
Setting Event Viewer Window Display

1. Click the Setting button. The Setup window opens.
Select the period of one

Number of
event column from the
event columns
following:
1 day, 1 stage (1 long term
file), All, 30 min, 1 hour,
2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours,
12 hours.
Select an item in the column

and click the > or < button to
display or hide the item.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Setting Event Tabs

Adding Event Tabs
1. Right-click the event tab and select Add from the pop-up menu.
2. Right-click the new tab and select Settings. The Filtering options window
opens.
3. Set the filtering options.
Editing Event Tabs 7

1. Right-click the tab to change settings and select Settings from the pop-up
menu. The Filtering options window opens.
2. Set the filtering options.
Deleting Event Tabs

Right-click the tab to delete and select Delete from the pop-up menu.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Keyboard Operation
You can operate the review program with the following keys on the keyboard.
NOTE
Keyboard operation is only available when the review program window is
active.
Keys on the Keyboard

Key (Label) Operation
1: Pattern I (Pat I) Changes to the pattern in the current group.
2: Pattern II (Pat II)
3: Pattern III (Pat III)
4: Pattern IV (Pat IV)
5: Pattern V (Pat V)
6: Pattern VI (Pat VI)
7: Pattern VII (Pat VII)
8: Pattern VIII (Pat VIII)
9 (Free) Changes to the free pattern in the current group.
0 (Group) Changes the pattern group. Pattern I is automatically
selected. Each operation changes the selection as follows:
A→B→C→D→A
Assigning Shortcut Keys

You can assign shortcut keys to functions such as start/stop continuous play, page
forward/back, Sens, TC, HF, etc..
Setting the Shortcut Key for a Function

In the Tool menu, select Key Assign…. The Key Assign window appears.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Use the pulldown menu beside a function to select its shortcut key.
NOTE
You cannot assign the same key for different functions.
After finishing setting, click the OK button to close the Key Assign window.
After changing a shortcut key setting, check that the shortcut key activates its
assigned function.
Resetting all Functions to the Default Shortcut Keys

To reset all functions to the default shortcut keys, click the Default button on the
Key Assign window.
Default Settings
Function Key Function Key
Page Control
Play Space Stop (Play/FF/FR) 0
FR 7 FF 9
EventFR None Event FF None
SpeedUp(FF/FR) 8 Speed Down(FF/FR) 5
1/10 page BW 1 1/10 page FW 3
1 page BW Left 1 page FW Right
Event BW None Event FW None
Add Annotation None Add Annotation during FF/FR +
Amp Control
Sens Up Down Sens Down Up
TC Up None TC Down None
HF Up None HF Down None
Pattern Up None Pattern Down None
Display Control
Change Channel Layout None Show/Hide Annotation List None
Cursor Control
Cursor BW None Cursor FW None

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Importing and Exporting Shortcut Key Settings

You can export and import shortcut key settings to or from another review
terminal.
Exporting shortcut key settings

Click the Export button on the Key Assign screen. The File Save dialog box
appears.
Set the folder and file name to save the settings.
Importing shortcut key settings

Click the Import button on the Key Assign screen. The File Select dialog box
appears.
Select the file which saves shortcut key settings and import the settings.
Removing All Shortcut Keys from All Functions

To remove the shortcut keys for all functions (i.e. the functions are not activated
by a shortcut key), click the All Clear button on the Key Assign screen. This sets
the shortcut key for each function to “None”.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Explanation of Menus and Bars
The menus and bars have the following functions.
File Menu
Open
Opens another data file in another review window.
Save
Overwrites the current file. 7
Export
Saves selected parts or all of the waveform as a file.
All Patterns
Import (I)
Reads all pattern settings saved in files.
Export (E)
Saves all pattern settings as files.
Print
Opens the Print dialog box to print the waveform.
Print Setup
Opens the Print Setup dialog box to set the printer.
Recorder, DC output
Check this command to export the waveforms as analog data. Available when the
QD-120A analog output is connected.
Exit
Closes the file and the Review program.
View Menu
Display Control
Opens the Display control dialog box to select waveform display settings.
Display Time
Set the time of waveform displayed on a screen.
Channel Layout
Even Layout
Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels on the screen in channel
order. Channels that are temporarily turned off are omitted.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Channel Layout
spaces are included to indicate undisplayed channels.
Superimpose
Overlaps consecutive odd and even number channels.
Time Jump
Opens the Time Jump dialog box to display the EEG waveform by specifying the
time.
Impedance Check
Displays the most recent impedance check result before the currently displayed
waveforms.
Patient Information
Opens the Patient Information dialog box to review and change the patient
information.
Display Montage Map

Displays the montage on the electrode position layout.
Digital Video
Opens the video files recorded with the optional QP-110AK digital video
software or QV-101A digital video unit.
Bar
Turns the following bars on/off.
• Event Bar
• EEG Bar
• Jump Bar
• Amp Bar
• Page Control Bar
• Display Size Bar
• Option Bar
• Tool Bar
• Spike/Seizure Bar
AC Filter
Turns the AC filter on to reduce the AC interference.
ECG Filter
Opens the ECG Filter dialog box to reduce the ECG waveform superimposed on
the EEG waveform.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Edit Menu
Wave select
Opens the Wave Select dialog box to select a part of the waveforms.
Modify Event
Opens the Modify Event dialog box to change, add or delete the event name
(annotations).
Modify Annotation Table

Opens the Annotation table to modify events.
Modify Clip comment 7

Opens the Rename window to modify clip comments for a slide show.
Copy page
Copies the current waveforms to the clipboard so you can copy them to another
Windows application such as Word.
BN Balance
Opens the BN Balance dialog box to adjust the voltage balance between the BN
reference electrodes when the balanced noncephalic derivation is selected. This
function is only available for data acquired with the JE-921A electrode junction
box (“Use BN electrodes” is checked in the “Electrodes to be Saved” window) or
the JE-208A/210A electrode junction box.
AV Delete
Opens the AV Delete dialog box to select or delete reference electrodes in the AV
derivation.
Cal
Opens the CAL Control dialog box to select the calibration voltage.
Pattern Table
channel.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Tools Menu
Time & Voltage Cursor
Displays the two horizontal cursors to measure the voltage (amplitude) and two
vertical cursors to measure the time interval. This function is available only when
the screen is frozen.
Ruler
Displays the ruler to measure amplitude and time interval of the waveform. This
function is available only when the screen is frozen.
Zoom
Displays the selected part of waveforms enlarged.
Note Waveform
Displays the note waveform window. You can copy the waveforms in the note
waveform window to compare the waveforms.
Slide Show
Displays the Slide Jump Bar to review a slide show.
Multiple Window Review

Opens sub review windows to display EEG waveforms of the same time point
with different display settings.
Show Trend in Jump Bar

Displays the DSA , heart rate and DC input parameter trendgraphs.
DSA
FFT setup
Opens the FFT settings dialog box to select the FFT analysis settings for the
EEG frequency analysis.
FFT reanalysis
Analyzes the EEG data according to the settings in the FFT setup dialog box.
Delete FFT data

Deletes the FFT data saved with the EEG waveform data.
Heart Rate
Heart rate setup
Opens the heart rate settings dialog box to select the channel and data type.
When Show heart rate is checked, heart rate is displayed on the extended
channel bar.
Heart rate reanalysis

Analyzes the heart rate according to the settings in the Heart rate setup dialog
box.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
DC Trend Analysis
Calculates the DC input data. Only the DC input data which can be calculated
is subject for analyzing the DC input parameter trendgraph. The DC input
parameter trendgraph is sampled at 2 Hz.
FFT map
Opens the FFT Map window.
3D Map
View Mapping
Opens the 3D Map window.
Electrode Setting 7
Opens the Electrode Setting dialog box to set the electrodes for the 3D map.
Print
Prints the 3D Map window.
Wide-Band EEG Analysis

Opens the Setup Analysis window.
Key Assign
Opens the Key Assign window.
Option Menu
Starts a program set in the option menu of the Review program.
Help Menu
About
Shows version information of the program.
Channel Setting Menu

When right-clicking any channel number, a pop-up menu opens to set channels.
Show Selected Channel

Displays waveforms of the selected channel.
Hide Selected Channel

Hides waveforms of the selected channel.
Reset Hidden Channel

Displays all the waveforms.
Pattern Table
Opens the TRACE PATTERN window.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Sensitivity
Opens the Sensitivity window to set amplifier sensitivity. When a channel is
selected, settings are available only for the selected channel and when any
channel is not selected, settings are available for all channels set as ACC.
Time Constant
Opens the Time Constant window to set the time constant (frequency) for the
low-cut filter. When a channel is selected, settings are available only for the
High Cut Filter

Opens the High-cut filter window to set the time constant (frequency) for the
high-cut filter. When a channel is selected, settings are available only for the
Restore Setting to ACC

Changes to ACC amplifier settings for the selected channels.
Wave Color
Changes the waveform color.
Unselect All
Resets the channel selection.
Even Layout
Evenly spaces the baseline positions for all channels in channel order. Channels
that are temporarily turned off are omitted.
Channel Layout
spaces are left for hidden channels.
Superimpose
Overlaps consecutive odd and even channels. Channels are omitted if their time
constant is not set to ACC.
Amp Bar
Sens (Select Sensitivity)

Sets amplifier settings. You can also change this setting with the ↑ or ↓ key on the
keyboard.
TC (Select Time Constant/Low-cut Filter)

Sets the frequency of the low-cut filter (time constant).

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
HF (Select High-cut Filter)

Sets the frequency of the high-cut filter.
Pat (Select Pattern)

Select a pattern from the memory of the instrument.
Ref (Select Reference)

Change the reference electrodes. This function is available only when the
monopolar derivation with both ears is used.
Clock Time
Displays the time of the left side of the screen. Click this area to open the Time
7
Jump window. Enter the time to review waveforms.
Elapsed (Elapsed Time)

Displays the elapsed time of the left side of the screen. Click this area to open the
Time Jump window. Enter the elapsed time to review waveforms.
Epoch
Display the epoch number of the current screen. 1 epoch means 10 seconds of
data.
EEG Bar
Display Speed
Select the display speed per page from the pull-down menu.
Save
Overwrites the current file.
AC Filter On/Off
Turns the AC filter on/off.
Display Pattern Table

Opens the pattern table and shows the current settings.
Display Patient Information

Opens the Patient Information dialog box to review and change the patient
information.
Print Current Page

Prints the current page as one page.
Digital Video
Opens the video files recorded with the optional QP-110AK digital video
software or QV-101A digital video unit.
Select Displayed Page and Advance

Adds the current waveforms into a note waveform list.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Tool Bar
Display Time-Voltage Cursor
Displays the two horizontal cursors to measure the voltage (amplitude) and two
vertical cursors to measure the time interval. This function is available only when
the screen is frozen.
Zoom
Displays the selected part of the waveforms enlarged.
Display Ruler
Displays the ruler to measure amplitude and time interval of the waveform. This
function is available only when the screen is frozen.
ECG Filter On/Off

Turns the ECG filter on/off.
Display Trendgraph
Shows the DSA, heart rate and DC input parameter trendgraphs.
Add a Screen Comment

Adds text and attaches an image to a waveform as a screen comment.
Display Note Waveform

Displays the note waveform window. You can copy waveforms to the note
waveform window to compare waveforms.
Display 3D Map
Displays a 3D map.
Frequency Map
Shows the frequency maps on the screen.
Waveform Drawing Mode

Raw This selects raw or processed waveform drawing mode. The tool button that is
Hi-Res Fast (Raw) displayed for each mode depends on the settings on the Color, Text, Size, Other
window – Other page. For details, refer to “Changing the Acquisition Window
and Review Window Display Settings” in Section 5.
Processed
Smoothed Fast (Processed)
You can also switch the waveform drawing mode by pressing the D key on the
keyboard.
NOTE
When using the Processed waveform drawing mode, also check the
waveforms in the Raw waveform drawing mode. Small fluctuations or high
frequency waveforms might not be precisely displayed in the Processed
waveform drawing mode.

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Page Control Bar

Rewind
Rewinds the waveforms at high speed.
Fast Forward
Reviews the waveforms at high speed.
1 Page Back
Plays the current page back by one page or half a page. The ← key on the
keyboard has the same function.
1 Page Forward 7
Plays the current page forward by one page or half a page. The → key on the
1/10 Page Back

Plays the current page back 1/10 page.
1/10 Page Forward

Plays the current page forward 1/10 page.
Centering
When this button is clicked, the cursor changes into . Click the waveform
with this cursor to place the waveform in the center of the screen.
Stop
Freezes the waveforms. The space key on the keyboard has the same function.
Play
Plays the waveforms at the speed when they were acquired. The space key on the

7. REVIEW PROGRAM
Jump Bar
Hour
Displays the start time and end time of current waveforms. Click this button to
jump the displayed time.
Next Section/Previous Section

Displays the start and end time of the current waveforms. Click this button to
jump the displayed time.
Previous Event
Jumps to the previous event.
Next Event
Jumps to the next event.
Select Event
Opens the Event Jump bar window. You can review the waveforms by specifying
events.

Section 8 Workbench
General................................................................................................................................................................. 8.2
Examination Status.................................................................................................................................... 8.2
Explanation of the Main Window and Each Mode...................................................................................... 8.3
Schedule Mode................................................................................................................................ 8.3
Examination Mode........................................................................................................................... 8.3
Review Mode................................................................................................................................... 8.4
Patient List Mode............................................................................................................................. 8.4
Displaying Examinations by Workflow Status....................................................................................................... 8.5
Working with Examination Schedules.................................................................................................................. 8.6
Entering a New Schedule........................................................................................................................... 8.6
8
Editing a Schedule..................................................................................................................................... 8.7
Importing and Exporting Schedules........................................................................................................... 8.8
Importing a Schedule....................................................................................................................... 8.8
Exporting a Schedule..................................................................................................................... 8.10
Displaying a Schedule for a Specified Date............................................................................................. 8.12
Adding a Memo to a Schedule................................................................................................................. 8.13
Starting an Examination from a Schedule.......................................................................................................... 8.15
Changing the Workflow Status of an Examination.............................................................................................. 8.16
Filtering the Displayed Examinations................................................................................................................. 8.17
By Criteria................................................................................................................................................ 8.17
By Archive Status..................................................................................................................................... 8.18
By Selecting Patient................................................................................................................................. 8.19
Searching for a Patient....................................................................................................................................... 8.20
By ID, Patient Name and Date.................................................................................................................. 8.20
By Detailed Patient Information................................................................................................................ 8.20
Reviewing an Examination................................................................................................................................. 8.23
Changing the Review Application Program for Reviewing EEG files....................................................... 8.24
Editing Patient Information in the Database....................................................................................................... 8.25
Copying, Deleting and Archiving Files................................................................................................................ 8.26
Copying Files............................................................................................................................................ 8.26
Deleting Files............................................................................................................................................ 8.28
Archiving Files.......................................................................................................................................... 8.28
File Management................................................................................................................................................ 8.31
Removing Read Only Attribute................................................................................................................. 8.31
Combining Files........................................................................................................................................ 8.31
Linking Files............................................................................................................................................. 8.32
Copying an LIF (Long-term) File to a Disk Drive...................................................................................... 8.33
Checking the Patient Information for Consistency.................................................................................... 8.34
Exporting a Library to a Portable Media................................................................................................... 8.35
Remote Monitoring............................................................................................................................................. 8.36
Creating Reports................................................................................................................................................ 8.37
Starting NeuroReport............................................................................................................................... 8.37
Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk.............................................................................................................. 8.38
Creating a Review Disk............................................................................................................................ 8.38
Reviewing a Review Disk......................................................................................................................... 8.42
8. WORKBENCH
General
From the Workbench tab page, you can manage the entire examination workflow,
from saving to ending and reviewing the examination.
Examination Status
The status of each examination is shown in the data list of the Workbench tab
page by the following icons.
: Scheduled
: Ready to start (can be applied manually by right clicking the

examination)
: Now examining
: Reviewing (examination ended and now diagnosing)
: Completed (diagnosis ended)

(No icon): No status
Each file belongs to an examination. When the file rows are displayed in the data
list, icons are displayed beside each file. The meaning of the icons are as follows.
: EEG data which contains only waveforms (if the icon is green, it is a
clipped data)
: EEG original data with video file (white icon)
: EEG clipped data with video file (green icon)
: EEG slide file (brown icon)
: Finalized NeuroReport file (red icon)
: NeuroReport file (blue icon)
: Exported NeuroReport file
The Workbench tab page has four modes.

• Schedule mode
• Examination mode
• Review mode
• Patient List mode
The available functions depend on the selected mode and user account.

8. WORKBENCH
Explanation of the Main Window and Each Mode

Schedule Mode
The Schedule mode is for entering and checking the examination schedule. All
examinations except examinations with “No status” are displayed in the data list.
You can enter, edit, import, export and check the examination schedule and add
descriptions for an examination schedule. You can also start an examination from
the data list.
Refresh button
Filter area
Mode text box
Function buttons
Calendar
8
Data list
Weekly schedule
Schedule window
Option button
Examination Mode
The Examination mode shows examinations that are being performed.
Examinations with “Now examining” status are displayed in the data list. You
can also check the history of examinations and list all examinations for one
patient.
Data list
Refresh button
Mode text box Filter area
Function buttons
Patient list
Option button
Schedule window
8. WORKBENCH
Review Mode
The Review mode is for reviewing and diagnosing. Examinations in
“Reviewing” status are displayed in this mode. You can also check the history of
examinations and list up all examinations for one patient.
Data list
Refresh button
Function buttons
Patient list
Option button
Schedule window
The examinations that are displayed in the Review mode can be changed by
changing user account settings. Refer to “User Accounts” in Section 4.
Patient List Mode

The Patient List mode shows all examinations. You can search examinations by
patient ID, patient name, examination date and detailed information. You can
also filter examinations by specifying whether the examination is archived or not.
Refresh button
Function buttons
Search area
Patient list
Option button Data list

8. WORKBENCH
Displaying Examinations by Workflow Status
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select a mode from the
list. All examinations for the selected mode are listed.
The following examinations are listed for each mode.

• Schedule mode: All examinations other than “No status”
• Examination mode: “Now examining”
• Review mode: “Reviewing”
• Patient list mode: All examinations
2. To display files for all listed examinations, click the Expand button on the
top right of the data list.
Expand button
Examination row
File row
To display details for a specified examination, click the “+” button beside the
examination.
“+” button

8. WORKBENCH
Working with Examination Schedules
Entering a New Schedule

You can enter the patient information, the instrument used for examination,
physician, and examination type with examination schedule.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select the Schedule
mode from the list.
2. Click the New Schedule function button. The Schedule window

appears below the data list.
Schedule window
Search buttons
Click this button to select

examination protocol.
3. Enter patient information and examination information. Patient ID, patient

name and Exam type are necessary to register the examination schedule to
the database.
If there is a schedule with the same patient ID or name in the database as in

the Patient ID or name text box, you can read the patient information from
the previous schedule by clicking the Search button beside the ID or
Name text box.
To clear all items in the schedule window, click the Clear button.
To cancel entering the schedule, click the Cancel button.
8. WORKBENCH
Editing a Schedule
mode from the list.
2. Click the examination schedule to edit. The Schedule window appears below
the data list.
Selected examination
schedule
8
Schedule window
3. Click the Edit button at the bottom of the Schedule window.
4. Enter or change the Patient Data and Exam Data in the Schedule window
and click the OK button.

8. WORKBENCH
Importing and Exporting Schedules

You can import or export examination schedules and share the examination
schedule with instruments which are not connected to the network.
Importing a Schedule
mode from the list.
2. Right-click the blank area in the data list. A pop-up menu opens.
3. Click the “Import schedule” on the pop-up menu. The Import Schedule
window opens.
4. Click the “Browse...” button. The Browse for Folder window opens.
5. Select the schedule file to import and click the OK button. Repeat this step to
add more schedule files to the list in the Import Schedule window.

8. WORKBENCH
6. Check the schedule files to import in the Import Schedule window and
click the Start button. The schedule files with a check mark beside them are
imported.
Or,
mode from the list.
2. Click the New Schedule function button on the right column.

8
The Schedule window appears below the data list.
Import schedule
button
Schedule window
3. Click the “Import schedule” button. The Import Schedule window opens.

8. WORKBENCH
5. Select the schedule file to import and click the OK button. Repeat this step to
add more schedule files to the list in the Import Schedule window.
6. Check the schedule files to import in the Import Schedule window and
click the Start button. The schedule files with a check mark beside them are
imported.
Exporting a Schedule
mode from the list.
2. Click a schedule to highlight, and right click the schedule. A pop-up menu
opens.
To export two or more schedules, select all the schedules that you want to
export. You can select two or more schedules by clicking the schedule while
holding the Ctrl key on the keyboard.

8. WORKBENCH
3. Select “Export schedule” from the pop-up menu. The Export Schedule
window opens.
5. Select the folder to export the schedule and click the OK button on the
Browse for Folder window.
6. Check the list on the Export Schedule window and click the OK button. The
schedules with a check mark are exported.
You can check all schedules in the list by clicking the “Check all” button.
You can uncheck all schedules in the list by clicking the “Clear all” button.

8. WORKBENCH
Displaying a Schedule for a Specified Date

mode from the list.
2. Click the day in the calendar on the top left of the screen.
Calendar
The weekly schedule including the specified date is displayed in the weekly
schedule area below the calendar.
Weekly schedule
3. Check the schedule. The numbers after the “AM” and “PM” is the number of
examinations scheduled in AM and PM on the day.

8. WORKBENCH
Adding a Memo to a Schedule

mode from the list.
2. Click the day in the calendar on the top left of the screen.
8
The weekly schedule including the specified date is displayed in the weekly
schedule area below the calendar.
3. Double click the date on the weekly schedule area to add a memo. The
“Schedule Information” window opens.
4. Enter a memo, check the Attention or Lock check box if necessary, and click
the Update button.
Examples:
Normal Attention Locked

(yellow) (red)
If both the Attention and Locked check boxes are checked, the color of the
locked status is applied.

8. WORKBENCH
5. The memo entered in step 4 is displayed in the Weekly Schedule area.
First 19 characters of the memo are displayed in the weekly schedule area.

8. WORKBENCH
Starting an Examination from a Schedule
You can start an examination from the examination schedule in the data list.
When the measurement finishes, the measured data is displayed in the file row.
Examination row
File row
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select the Schedule 8
mode or Patient List mode from the list.
2. Select the examination from the data list.
3. Click the Examination function button. The Protocol buttons for

the selected examination appears.
4. Click the protocol button to start the examination.

8. WORKBENCH
Changing the Workflow Status of an Examination
NOTE
The workflow status can be changed only by a user who has permission
to change workflow status.
1. Right-click the examination to change workflow status. A pop-up menu

opens.
2. Select “Change workflow status” and select the workflow status from the sub
menu. The character “●” shows the current workflow status.

8. WORKBENCH
Filtering the Displayed Examinations
By Criteria
You can filter examinations in the data list by up to four criteria.
1. Click the arrow button beside the text box in the upper row of the Filter area
and select the filtering criteria from the pull-down list.
8
2. Click the arrow button beside the text box in the lower row of the Filter area
and select the keyword from the pull-down list.
The examinations which match all the specified criteria are displayed in the
data list.
To clear the filter items, click the arrow button beside the text box in the upper
row and select “None” from the pull-down menu.
Filtering Item List
Options
Item Displayed in the Description
Pull-down List
Archive Yes, No Whether archived in the database or not
Deleted Yes, No Whether archived file which is deleted from
the data list or not
Refer Dept. All refer Refer department
departments which
are registered in
database
Physician All physician Physician
names which
are registered in
database
Exam. EEG, PSG, EP/ Examination type
EMG, IOM

8. WORKBENCH
Options
Item Displayed in the Description
Pull-down List
Status Complete Whole examination flow has been finished
Schedule Scheduled but not started examination yet
No Status The examination imported from another
network system and workflow status is not
assigned
Offline Schedule Examination schedule imported from a
portable instrument
Old Database Examination schedule imported from old-
version Access database.
Ready to Start Ready to start examination
Now Examining Now examining
Reviewing Examination was finished and not reviewed
yet
Operator All operator Operator
names which
are registered in
database
Data Type Data, Report, Data (file) type
Clipped, Slide
Copied Yes, No Original file or copied file
Read Yes, No Whether the Read check box on the Patient
Information window is checked or not.
Assistant — Assistant
Anesthesiologist — Anesthesiologist
Surgeon — Surgeon
Protocol Title — Title of the protocol button.
Protocol Group Sub title of the protocol button.
—
Title
Nerve — Nerve (Not used)
Muscle — Muscle (Not used)
Side — Side (Not used)
By Archive Status
This function is available only in the Patient List mode.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select the Patient List
mode from the list.

8. WORKBENCH
2. Click the check box above the data list.
“Show un-archive data” check box:

Check this check box to display files which is not archived in the data
list.
“Show archive data which is not deleted yet” check box: 8
Check this check box to display the archived files which is not deleted
from the data list.
By Selecting Patient
This function is available in the Examination, Review and Patient List modes.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select the Examination,
Review or Patient List mode from the list.
2. Select a patient from the patient list area in the left bottom of the screen. All
examinations for the selected patient are displayed in the data list.
To display the examinations of all patients, select “Show All Patients” which
is the last item on the patient list.

8. WORKBENCH
Searching for a Patient
By ID, Patient Name and Date

This function is available only in the Patient List mode. To change the mode,
refer to “Displaying Examinations by Workflow Status” in this section.
mode from the list.
2. Enter keyword(s) and/or select date in the Search area.

Search area
3. Click the Search button. The search result is displayed in the patient list.
To clear the strings and date in the search area, click the Clear button.
By Detailed Patient Information

This function is available only in the Patient List mode. To change the mode,
refer to “Displaying Examinations by Workflow Status” in this section.
mode from the list.
2. Click the More button in the Search area. The detailed search area appears.
Detailed
search area

8. WORKBENCH
3. Enter the “Item 1” and/or “Item 2” text boxes in the Patient Search area.
i) Click the arrow button beside the text box in the top for each item and
select the search item.
ii) Enter a keyword or a range for the item selected in step i).
To hide the detailed search area, click the Less button on the search area.
Search Items
Item Name Description

ID Patient ID
Patient Name Patient name
Sex Select gender from “Male”, “Female” and “Unknown”. 8
Refer.Dept. Select the department which is registered in the
database from the pull-down list or enter keyword with
the keyboard.
In/Out Select the patient status from “In”, “Out” and
“Unknown”.
Birth date Birth date. Select date from the calendar to specify the
search range.
Hand Select dominant hand from “Right”, “Left”, “Both” and
“ Unknown”.
Physician Select the physician who is registered in the database
from the pull-down list or enter keyword with the
keyboard.
Operator Select the operator who is registered in the database
keyboard.
Exam. Select examination type from “EEG”, “IOM”, “EP/
EMG” and “PSG”.
Exam. No. Examination number
Protocol Title Select the protocol which is registered in the database
keyboard. (e.g. “SEP”, “ABR”)
Protocol Sub Title Select the description for protocol which is registered in
the database from the pull-down list or enter keyword
with the keyboard.
Status Select workflow status from the pull-down list.
Start The date when the examination was started. Select date
from the calendar to specify the searching range.
OR No. Operating room (only IOM)
Assistant Select the assistant who is registered in the database
keyboard. (only IOM)
Anesthesiologist Select the anesthesiologist who is registered in the
the keyboard. (only IOM)
Nerve Select the nerve which is registered in the database
keyboard. (only MEB)
Muscle Select the muscle which is registered in the database
keyboard. (only MEB)

8. WORKBENCH

Side Select the measured side from the pull-down list or
enter keyword with the keyboard. (only EP/EMG)
Comment(Tech) Comment of the technician. Enter a keyword.
Surgical Procedure Comment for the surgical procedure. Enter a keyword.
Comment (only IOM)
Diagnosis Comment Diagnosis comment. Enter a keyword. (only IOM)
Disk Volume Select the disk number which is registered in the
the keyboard.
Instrument Instrument used for measurement. Select the instrument
from “EEG”, “MEB” and “IOM”.
Machine The machine used for measurement. Select the machine
which is registered in the database from the pull-down
list or enter keyword with the keyboard.

8. WORKBENCH
Reviewing an Examination
You can review the measured data from the Workbench.
1. Click the “+” button beside the examination to review. The files are
displayed below the selected examination.
“+” button
2. Select the file to review.

8
Examination
File
3. Click the Review function button. The review program for the
selected file starts. For operations of the review program, refer to Section 7
“Review Program”.

8. WORKBENCH
Changing the Review Application Program for Reviewing EEG files

In addition to EEG review program and EventViewer (both are included in the
EEG-1200 program), the following application programs can also be available.
• QP-211A EEGFocus
• QP-214A MultiView
• QP-260AK Polysmith software
To use these programs, install the program on your PC.
You cannot use EEGFocus and MultiView at the same time. To switch between
EEGFocus and MultiView, click the Review Settings option button (for EEG) at
the bottom of the NeuroWorkbench main window and check or uncheck the “Use
MultiView instead of EEGFocus” check box on the Review Settings window.
Refer to “Opening the System Program” in Section 5.
For details on installation and details of each application program, refer to

EEGFocus, MultiView or Polysmith manual.
To change the application program for review:
1. Right click the Review function button.
2. Select “EEG” on the pop-up menu and select the application to review from
the sub menu.
3. The Review function button turns into the function button for the selected
application.

8. WORKBENCH
Editing Patient Information in the Database
NOTE
You cannot change patient information saved in the measurement file
(raw data) from NeuroWorkbench.
In the NeuroWorkbench Workbench page, patient information registered in the

database can be changed, but patient information saved in the measurement file
(raw data) cannot be changed.
To change patient information saved in the measurement file, open the file with
the Review program and change the information from the Review program.
Refer to Section 7 “Review Program”.
8
1. Right-click an examination in the data list. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select Edit from the pop-up menu. The Edit window opens.
3. Enter or change the patient information and click the OK button to close the
Edit window.
4. Click the Refresh button at the top left of the window to display the
latest information and check that the patient information is changed in the
data list.

8. WORKBENCH
Copying, Deleting and Archiving Files
CAUTION
• When archiving data, make multiple copies and manage the
archived data properly.
• After copying data to a CD-R, DVD-R or DVD-RAM disk, check that
the data was copied correctly by opening the files.
NOTE
• If you select a CD/DVD recorder as a target drive, the drive starts
formatting media before copying and it may take several minutes.
• When you copy the data to a CD/DVD disk, the preset number of copies
are automatically created. To change the number of copies, refer to
“Setting the Preset Number of Copies for CD/DVD Disks” in Section 4.
Copying Files
You can copy the examination files from the Workbench to another drive or disk.
You can also create a Review Disk by copying measured data to a CD-R or
DVD-R disk using the optional NeuroPortaView software. For details, refer to
“Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk” in Section 9.
1. Select the examination or file in the data list.
If an examination is selected, all files for the examination are copied. To

copy one of the file, click the Expand button to display files and select the
file to copy.
You cannot copy examinations which do not have files.

8. WORKBENCH
2. Click the Copy function button. The destination window opens.
Destination window
3. Select the destination drive and click the Add button.

Click this arrow button to show the drive list.
You can also specify the folder to copy data to by selecting “Browse” from
the pull-down list.
NOTE
• When “Browse” is selected and a folder is selected as a destination,
the following sub folders are automatically created and data is
copied to the EEG-2100 sub folder.
[Selected folder]\NKT\EEG2100
• If you select a folder which cannot be accessed from the network,
the data cannot be registered to the database. To register data
to the database, select a folder which can be accessed from the
network.
4. Check the Copy List and click the Start button.
To cancel copying one of the files, select the file and click the Remove
button.
To cancel copying, click the Cancel button.

8. WORKBENCH
To register the examination and file to the database when copying, check the
“Add to database” check box.
5. Click the OK button on the confirmation message window to start copying.
Deleting Files
If an examination is selected, all files for the examination are deleted. To

delete one of the files, click the Expand button to display files and select the
file to delete.
2. Click the Delete function button.
3. If you entered a user account at log in, a confirmation window appears. Enter
the password and click the OK button.
If you do not use user accounts, a confirmation window appears. Click the
OK button.
The selected file is deleted.
Archiving Files
You can copy the examinations and files from the Workbench to another drive or
disk and register it in the database as archived file. You can trace the destination
of archived files from the Workbench even if you delete the original files.

8. WORKBENCH
If a patient information is selected, all files for the patient are archived. To
archive one of the files, click the Expand button to display files and click the
file to archive.
You cannot archive the examinations which do not have a file.
2. Click the Archive function button. The destination window

opens. 8
Destination window
3. Select the destination drive and click the Add button.

Click this arrow button to show the drive list.
4. Check the Archive List and click the Start button.
To cancel archiving one of the files, select the file and click the Remove
button.
To cancel archiving, click the Cancel button.

8. WORKBENCH
5. Click the OK button on the confirmation message window to start archiving.

8. WORKBENCH
File Management
Removing Read Only Attribute

You can remove the read only attribute of examination files.
1. In the data list, click the “+” button beside the examination to show the files.
2. Right-click a file and select “EEG Tool” → “Remove read-only attribute”. 8
The read only attribute is removed.
Combining Files
You can combine EEG data files for a patient. This is useful if the EEG
measurement data for a patient is saved in several different files during
acquisition. If patient images were recorded, patient image files can also be
appended. For EEG measurement files that were acquired with the long term EEG
monitoring function, you can continuously review these files by using a long term
monitoring information file (LIF file). You do not have to combine these files.
NOTE
If total file size exceeds 2 GB, this operation cannot be performed.
1. In the data list, select two or more files to combine and click the Merge/Link
option button at the bottom left of the screen.

8. WORKBENCH
2. Select the drive to save in and check the files to combine.

Check the files to merge.
Click the Merge

radio button.
Click this button to

select the drive.
3. Click the Start button to start combining the files.
Linking Files
If long term recording stops due to trouble or error, the links between files
get broken. You can re-link the files. If you link the files, you can review the
bookmarks in the files using the slide show function.
1. In the data list, select two or more files to link and click the Merge/Link

8. WORKBENCH
2. Check the Link radio button in the Merge method area.

Check the files to link.
Click the Link

radio button.
8
3. Click the Start button. An LIF file is created.
When the files contains two or more slide shows, Select slide window
appears. Select the bookmarks to add to the new slide show from the list and
click the OK button.
Copying an LIF (Long-term) File to a Disk Drive

When copying long term EEG data to a removable media, the LIF file is required
in addition to the long term EEG files.
NOTE
• LIF files can only be copied with the instrument which acquired the
data. Copy the LIF file from the instrument which acquired the long term
data.
• You cannot copy an LIF file to a CD or DVD disk. If you want to
consecutively review the long term EEG files on a CD or DVD, select all
long term files and start reviewing.
1. Copy the long term EEG files from the other electroencephalograph. For
details, refer to “Copying Files to Another Drive or Media” in this section.
2. In the data list, right-click the LIF file in the data list and select “EEG Tool”
→ “Copy long term link file” from the pop-up menu. The Select LIF Copy
Drive window opens.

8. WORKBENCH
3. Select the drive to copy the LIF file to. Select the same drive where you
copied the long term EEG files.
Checking the Patient Information for Consistency

If the examination has more than one file or long term files, the patient
information might be changed during examination and be different from the
patient information in the database.
You can check whether the patient information in the database and measurement
files is the same, and if the patient information is not consistent, you can correct
the patient information from the NeuroWorkbench.
NOTE
If an examination has several measurement files, you must correct patient
information for all the files when correcting information. To change patient
information for one of the files, refer to “Editing Patient Information in the
Database” in this section.
1. Right-click the examination in the data list. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select “Check patient information for consistency” from the pop-up menu.
The Check Patient Information for Consistency window opens and shows
any patient information that does not match the information in the database.
The following patient information are checked.

• Patient name
• ID
• Gender
• Birth date
3. To correct the patient information, click the Accept button for each
information then click the Change button.

8. WORKBENCH
A message box appears.
4. Click the OK button of the message box. 8
Exporting a Library to a Portable Media

NOTE
You cannot export an EEG library to a CD-R or DVD-R disk.
1. Right-click the library in the data list. The pop-up menu opens.
2. Select “EEG Tool” → “Export library” from the pop-up menu. The Export
Library window opens.
To refresh the drive

list, click this button.
3. Select a drive from the pull-down list and click the Start export button. The
library is exported to the selected media. To cancel exporting, click the
Cancel button.

8. WORKBENCH
Remote Monitoring
You can view the waveforms and trendgraphs of this EEG on another instrument
in the network.
NOTE
Remote monitoring function is only available for examinations that are
started from NeuroWorkbench.
1. Click the Remote function button. The Remote window

opens.
Or, select the examination in the data list and click the Remote
function button. The Remote window appears.
If you select the examination and open the Remote window, skip steps 2 and
3.
2. In the Instrument area, select EEG.
3. Click the arrow button beside the Computer Name text box and select the
instrument.
The instruments sharing the same main database are listed in the Computer
Name list. To select an instrument which is not in the list, enter the computer
name with the keyboard.
4. Click the OK button. The review program for the file on the selected
instrument starts. Refer to Section 7 “Review Program” for reviewing files.

8. WORKBENCH
Creating Reports
With NeuroReport, you can quickly create a report based on a template by

selecting files in the data list in the Workbench or Data Manager screen.
To create reports, assign NeuroReport to an option button. For details on

NeutoReport, efer to the NeuroReport operator’s manual. To assign NeuroReport
to an option button, refer to “Using Optional Programs” in Section 4.
Starting NeuroReport
1. In the data list, select the files to create a report.
8
2. Click the “Create Report” option button. NeuroReport starts.
To create reports, refer to the NeuroReport operator’s manual.

8. WORKBENCH
Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk
With the optional NeuroPortaView program, you can create a review disk that
can be reviewed on a PC which does not have EEG review program.
NOTE
• The review disk can be reviewed on a PC with the following OS.
• Windows XP Professional Service Pack 2 or 3
• Windows 7 Professional
• Windows 8.1 Professional
• Windows 10 Pro
• The review disk can contain only EEG measurement files. You cannot
create a review disk for EEG reports.
You can create a review disk on the following media.

• CD-R
• DVD-R
You cannot create a review disk on a Blu-ray or HD DVD disk.
Creating a Review Disk

1. Insert a disk into the drive.
2. Click the Data Manager or Workbench tab.
3. Select files from the data list and click the NeuroPortaView option button.
The NeuroPortaView wizard opens.
4. Click the Next button.

8. WORKBENCH
5. Select the disk drive or folder and click the Next button. A list of files
appears.
You cannot directly copy to a Blu-ray or MO disk. Select a folder on the

hard disk to save the data with review components. Afterwards, you can
copy the data to a Blu-ray or MO disk.
6. Select the files to copy to the review disk and click the Next button.
7. To include pattern files, check the “Include pattern files” check box, select a
pattern from the list, then click the Next button.

8. WORKBENCH
8. If necessary, change the patient name and ID to protect privacy and click the
Next button.
9. Enter a disk name and comment and click the Next button.
10. In the following screen:

i) If you use a password to review the disk, check the “Use Password”
check box and enter the password.
ii) Check that the required components are selected.
If the components are already installed in the PC where this disk will
be used, these components are not needed. If you are not sure, leave the
components check boxes checked.

8. WORKBENCH
iii) Click the Burn button.
8
11. A confirmation message appears. Click the OK button.
12. Burning starts and the following window appears.
13. When burning finishes, the following window appears. Click the Finish
button.

8. WORKBENCH
Reviewing a Review Disk

1. Insert a review disk into the disk drive of the PC. A window that shows the
contents of the review disk opens.
If this window does not open automatically, double click “DotNetChecker.

exe” in the review disk.
2. To review EEG measurement files, select the pattern from the EEG Pattern
area.
3. Select a file from the list and click the Review button.
For operation of the Review program, refer to Section 7 “Review Program”.

Section 9 Data Manager
General................................................................................................................................................................. 9.2
Explanation of the Main Window for Each Mode........................................................................................ 9.4
Database Mode................................................................................................................................ 9.4
File Mode......................................................................................................................................... 9.4
Explanation of Icons......................................................................................................................... 9.5
Displaying Data.................................................................................................................................................... 9.6
Selecting the Data Source.......................................................................................................................... 9.6
Grouping Data by Patient or Examination.................................................................................................. 9.6
Displaying All Data for a Patient................................................................................................................. 9.7
Sorting the Data List................................................................................................................................... 9.7 9
Searching for a Patient......................................................................................................................................... 9.8
By ID, Patient Name and Date.................................................................................................................... 9.8
By Detailed Patient Information.................................................................................................................. 9.8
Filtering the Data List......................................................................................................................................... 9.10
Reviewing an Examination................................................................................................................................. 9.12
Changing the Review Application Program for Reviewing EEG Files...................................................... 9.13
Handling Information in the Database................................................................................................................ 9.14
Printing the Patient Information and Data List.......................................................................................... 9.14
Backing Up the Database......................................................................................................................... 9.15
Restoring the Database........................................................................................................................... 9.16
Editing Patient Information in the Database............................................................................................. 9.17
Deleting an Examination.......................................................................................................................... 9.18
Adding a Memo to an Examination.......................................................................................................... 9.19
Managing Measurement Files............................................................................................................................ 9.21
Copying Files to Another Drive or Media.................................................................................................. 9.21
Moving Files to Another Drive or Media................................................................................................... 9.23
Archiving Files.......................................................................................................................................... 9.24
Adding an Examination in the Database.................................................................................................. 9.26
Deleting Files............................................................................................................................................ 9.26
Removing Read Only Attribute of Files.................................................................................................... 9.27
Combining Files........................................................................................................................................ 9.28
Linking Files............................................................................................................................................. 9.29
Copying an LIF (Long-term) File to a Disk Drive...................................................................................... 9.30
Checking the Patient Information for Consistency.................................................................................... 9.30
Disk Management............................................................................................................................................... 9.32
Assigning and Changing a Disk Number.................................................................................................. 9.32
Creating Reports................................................................................................................................................ 9.33
Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk.............................................................................................................. 9.34

9. DATA MANAGER
General
The Data Manager tab page lets you manage patient information and measured
data.
When you start an examination from the NeuroWorkbench, patient information

and examination information for the examination are automatically registered in
the database when the examination ends.
You can edit or delete patient information and examination information in the
database. You can also add measurement data to the database for examinations
that are not started from the NeuroWorkbench.
There are two modes: database mode and file mode.
Database mode is for managing examination and patient information that are
registered in the database. When you select examination and patient information
from the database, open the Data Manager in Database mode.
File mode is for editing measurement data and registering measurement data
from the hard disks and external media to the database regardless of whether the
measurement data is registered to the database. When you select examination and
patient information from a hard disk or external media, open the Data Manager
in File mode.
Database mode
• Displaying measurement data with the Review Program for each instrument
• Filtering the data list
• Searching for patient information
• Printing patient information and the data list
• Copying measurement data
• Archiving measurement data
• Backing up patient information
• Restoring patient information
• Deleting patient information from the database
• Editing patient information
• Remote monitoring

9. DATA MANAGER
File mode
• Displaying measurement data with Review Program for each instrument
• Filtering the data list
• Searching for patient information
• Copying measurement data
• Moving measurement data
• Archiving measurement data
• Formatting disks and assigning disk numbers
• Enabling or disabling read-only setting of EEG files
• Merging EEG files
• Copying the EEG LIF (long term) files to a disk
• Deleting measurement data
NOTE
• You can review EEG data files which were acquired and saved in
another Nihon Kohden Electroencephalograph or digital EEG system
9
(PC with the QP-223A or QP-111A Acquisition Program Kit). However,
the patient information is not added to the system database in this
instrument. To add the patient information to the system database, refer
to “Adding an Examination in the Database” in this section.
• Back up the database periodically (every week is recommended) to
prevent loss of data. If the hard disk drive is damaged, you may lose
important patient data.
Each drive is initially set as follows.
Drive C: Built-in hard disk drive (for system data)

Drive D: Built-in hard disk drive (for data storage)
Drive E: DVD disk drive
Drive R: Built-in hard disk drive (for temporary CD/DVD data storage)

9. DATA MANAGER
Explanation of the Main Window for Each Mode

Database Mode
Database mode shows only patient information and measurement data that is
registered in the database.
Refresh button
Mode text box

Filter area
Data list
Search area
Patient list
Function buttons
Option buttons
File Mode
File mode shows all measurement data in the selected drive.
Refresh button
Mode text box

Filter area
Data list
Search area
Patient list
Function buttons
Option buttons

9. DATA MANAGER
Explanation of Icons
When the file rows are displayed in the file mode, icons are displayed beside
each file. The meaning of the icons are as follows.
: EEG data which contains only waveforms (if the icon is green, it is a
9
clipped data)
: EEG original data with video file (white icon)
: EEG clipped data with video file (green icon)
: EEG slide file (brown icon)
: Finalized NeuroReport file (red icon)
: NeuroReport file (blue icon)
: Exported NeuroReport file

9. DATA MANAGER
Displaying Data
Selecting the Data Source

1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box to select the database, a
drive or a folder.
• When “Database” is selected, the data list is displayed in Database mode.
• When a drive or folder is selected, the data list is displayed in File mode.
NOTE
• When you switch to Database mode or NeuroWorkbench is started
in Database mode, the data list is blank. Search for a patient or click
the Refresh button to display the data list.
• When selecting a folder from the Browse menu, select the folder
which has the following sub folders.
[Target folder]\NKT\EEG2100
Do not select the EEG2100 folder as a target folder.
2. Click the “Expand” button on the top-right of the data list to display the file
rows.
To display all files for an examination, click the + button beside the
examination on the list.
Examination row
File row
Grouping Data by Patient or Examination

In File mode, you can group the Data List items by patient ID and name or
display a list of individual files. Select the list mode in the List Mode area.
Individual: Displays all files in the selected drive.

Group by Patient: Displays data according to patient IDs and names.
9. DATA MANAGER
Displaying All Data for a Patient

Select a patient from the patient list. All examinations for the selected patient are
displayed in the data list.
If filter conditions are set, only the examinations that match the filter conditions
are displayed in the list. For filtering, refer to “Filtering the Data List” in this
section.
• To display examinations for all patients, select “Show all patients” which is the
last item in the patient list.
• To display multiple patients in the patient list, click the patients to display
while holding the Ctrl and Shift keys on the keyboard.
• To search for a patient in the patient list, refer to “Searching for a Patient” in
this section.
Sorting the Data List

Click the column heading of the item to sort the examinations. Each time you
click an item, the order toggles between ascending and descending.

9. DATA MANAGER
Searching for a Patient
By ID, Patient Name and Date

1. Enter keyword(s) and/or select date in the search area.
Search area
To clear the strings and date in the Search area, click the Clear button.
By Detailed Patient Information

1. Click the More button in the Search area. The detailed search area appears.
Detailed
search area
2. Enter the “Item 1” and/or “Item 2” text boxes in the Search area.
i) Click the arrow button beside the text box in the top for each item and
select the search item.
ii) Enter a keyword or a range for the item selected in step i).
To hide the detailed search area, click the Less button on the search area.
Search Items

ID Patient ID
Patient Name Patient name
Sex Select gender from “Male”, “Female” and “Unknown”.
Refer.Dept. Select the department which is registered in the
the keyboard.
In/Out Select the patient status from “In”, “Out” and
“Unknown”.
Birth date Birth date. Select date from the calendar to specify the
search range.
Hand Select dominant hand from “Right”, “Left”, “Both” and
“Unknown”.

9. DATA MANAGER

Physician Select the physician who is registered in the database
keyboard.
Operator Select the operator who is registered in the database
keyboard.
Exam. Select examination type from “EEG”, “IOM”, “EP/
EMG” and “PSG”.
Exam. No. Examination number
Protocol Title Select the protocol which is registered in the database
keyboard. (e.g. “SEP”, “ABR”)
Protocol Sub Title Select the description for protocol which is registered in
the database from the pull-down list or enter keyword
with the keyboard.
Status Select workflow status from the pull-down list.
Start The date when the examination was started. Select date
from the calendar to specify the searching range. 9
OR No. Operating room
Assistant Select the assistant who is registered in the database
keyboard.
Anesthesiologist Select the anesthesiologist who is registered in the
the keyboard.
Nerve Select the nerve which is registered in the database
keyboard. (Only MEB)
Muscle Select the muscle which is registered in the database
keyboard. (Only MEB)
Side Select the measured side from the pull-down list or
enter keyword with the keyboard. (Only MEB)
Comment(Tech) Comment of the technician. Enter a keyword.
Surgical Procedure Comment for the surgical procedure. Enter a keyword.
Comment
Diagnosis Comment Diagnosis comment. Enter a keyword.
Disk Volume Select the disk number which is registered in the
the keyboard.
Instrument Instrument used for measurement. Select the insturment
from “EEG”, “MEB” and “IOM”.
Machine The machine used for measurement. Select the machine
which is registered in the database from the pull-down
list or enter keyword with the keyboard.

9. DATA MANAGER
Filtering the Data List
You can filter examinations in the data list by up to four criteria.
1. Click the arrow button beside a text box in the upper row of the Filter area
and select the filtering criteria from the pull-down list.
2. Click the arrow button beside the text box in the lower row of the Filter area
and select a keyword from the pull-down list.
Filtering items differ for Database mode and File mode.
The available filtering items are as follows.
Filtering Items for Database Mode
Options Displayed in
Item Description
the Pull-down List
Archive Yes, No Select data if it is archived in the
database or not
Deleted Yes, No Select data if it is an archived file
which is deleted from the data list or
not
Refer Dept. All refer departments Select data for specified referring
which are registered in department
database
Physician All physician names Select data for specified physician
which are registered in
database
Exam. EEG, PSG, EP/EMG, Select data for specified examination
IOM type

9. DATA MANAGER
Item Description
the Pull-down List
Status Complete Entire examination flow is finished
Schedule Examination scheduled but not started
yet
No Status The examination is imported from
another network system and workflow
status is not assigned
Offline Schedule Examination schedule is imported
from a portable instrument
Old Database Examination schedule is imported
from an old version Access database.
Ready to Start Ready to start examination
Now Examining Now examining
Reviewing Examination was finished but not
reviewed yet
Operator All operator names which Operator
are registered in database
9
Data Type Data, Report, Clipped, Data (file) type
Slide
Filtering Items for File Mode
Item Description
the Pull-down List
Exam. EEG, PSG, EP/EMG, Examination type
IOM
Data Type Data, Report, Clipped, Data (file) type
Slide

9. DATA MANAGER
Reviewing an Examination
You can review measurement data from the Data Manager.
1. Click the “+” button beside the examination to review. The files are
displayed below the selected examination.
2. Select the file to review.
3. Click the Review function button. The review program for the
selected file starts.
For operation of the Review program, refer to Section 7 “Review Program”.

9. DATA MANAGER
Changing the Review Application Program for Reviewing EEG Files

In addition to the EEG review program and EventViewer (both are included in
the EEG-1200 program), the following application programs can also be used.
• QP-211A EEGFocus
• QP-214A MultiView
• QP-260AK Polysmith software
To use these programs, install the program on your PC.
You cannot use EEGFocus and MultiView at the same time. To switch between
EEGFocus and MultiView, click the Review Settings option button (for EEG) at
the bottom of the NeuroWorkbench main window and check or uncheck the “Use
MultiView instead of EEGFocus” check box on the Review Settings window.
Refer to “Opening the System Program” in Section 5.
9
For details on installation and details of each application program, refer to
EEGFocus, MultiView or Polysmith manual.
To change the application program for review:
1. Right click the Review function button.
2. Select “EEG” on the pop-up menu and select the application to review from
the sub menu.
3. The Review function button turns into the function button for the selected
application.

9. DATA MANAGER
Handling Information in the Database
Patient information, the measurement file path and status of the file can be saved
in the database. You can back up and restore the database, and edit and delete
patient information in the database. In Database mode, you cannot edit and delete
the measurement files and patient information contained in the measurement
files.
Printing the Patient Information and Data List

You can print the patient information and data list.
NOTE
The Windows default printer is used to print the list.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select Database from
the pull-down list.
2. Click the Print function button. The Print preview window opens.
3. Click the Print icon at the top left of the Print preview window.
4. Click the OK button to print the list.

9. DATA MANAGER
Backing Up the Database

You can back up the following items from the Data Manager:
• User account
• Patient information and the examination file path which is registered to the
database*
• Schedule
* You cannot back up the measurement files in Database mode.
the pull-down list.
9
2. Click the Database Backup function button. The Database
Maintenance window opens.
3. Click the arrow button beside the Target Database text box, select the items
to back up from the pull-down list and click the Backup button. The Backup
window opens.
4. Select the folder or drive to save in and enter the file name.
5. Click the Save button to save the database.
Click the Cancel button to cancel backup.

9. DATA MANAGER
Restoring the Database

You can restore the database from the backup files.
NOTE
The current database is overwritten when you restore the database. Back
up the current database before restoring a previously saved database.
the pull-down list.
2. Click the Database Restore function button to open the Database

Maintenance window.
3. Click the arrow button beside the Target Database text box, select the item to
restore from the pull-down menu and click the Restore button. The Restore
Files window opens.
4. Select the files to restore.
5. Click the Open button to start restoring.
NOTE
If restoration fails, a failure message appears. Wait five minutes and do
this procedure again from step 2.

9. DATA MANAGER
Editing Patient Information in the Database

NOTE
You cannot change patient information saved in the measurement file
(raw data) in the Database mode.
In the Database mode, patient information registered in the database can be

changed, but patient information saved in the measurement file (raw data) cannot
be changed.
To change patient information saved in the measurement file, open the file with
the Review program and change the information from the Review program.
Refer to Section 7 “Review Program” for details.
the pull-down list.
9
2. Right-click an examination in the data list. The pop-up menu opens.
3. Select Edit from the pop-up menu. The Edit window opens.

9. DATA MANAGER
4. Enter or change the patient information and click the OK button to close the
Edit window.
5. Click the Refresh button at the top left of the window to display the
latest information and check that the patient information is changed in the
data list.
Deleting an Examination
NOTE
• In Database mode, you can delete only the patient information in the
database and measurement file path information in the database. You
cannot delete measurement files and patient information contained in
the measurement file.
• To delete measured EEG waveforms and patient images, refer to
“Deleting Files” in this section.
the pull-down list.
2. In the data list, select the examination to delete.
When you select a file, only the file path information is deleted from the
database. The patient information for the file is not deleted.
3. Click the Delete function button. The Delete window appears.
4. On the Delete window, click the OK button.
The files listed on the Delete window are deleted.

9. DATA MANAGER
Adding a Memo to an Examination

A memo can be saved with an examination in the database. This memo is only
displayed in the data list in the Database mode. It cannot be seen from the
measurement files in the drive or the Review program.
the pull-down list.
2. Click the “+” button beside the examination.
3. Right-click a file to add a memo. The pop-up menu opens.
4. Select “Edit Memo” from the pop-up menu. The Memo window opens.
5. Enter a memo (up to 256 characters) in the text box and click the OK button.

9. DATA MANAGER
6. Check that the memo is displayed in the Memo column in the data list.

9. DATA MANAGER
Managing Measurement Files
CAUTION
• When archiving data, make multiple copies and manage the
archived data properly.
• After copying data to a CD-R, DVD-R or DVD-RAM disk, check that
the data was copied correctly by opening the files.
NOTE
• If you select a CD/DVD recorder as a target drive, the drive starts
formatting media before copying and it may take several minutes.
• When you copy the data to a CD/DVD disk, the preset number of copies
are automatically created. To change the number of copies, refer to
“Setting the Preset Number of Copies for CD/DVD Disks” in Section 4.
9
Copying Files to Another Drive or Media

1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select Database or the
drive which contains the file to copy. The file list opens in the File mode.
2. Select the file to copy from the data list.
If you select a patient, all files for the patient will be copied.
To copy one file, click the “+” button beside the examination and select the
file.

9. DATA MANAGER
3. Click the Copy function button. A destination window appears

below the data list.
Destination window
4. Click the arrow button beside the text box in the destination window and
select the target drive from the pull-down list.
To add files to copy, select the files in the data list and click the Add button
in the destination window.
To register the file to the database when copying, check the “Add to
database” check box.
5. Click the Start button. A confirmation message appears.
6. Click the OK button to start copying.
Creating a Review CD by Copying Files

You can create a Review Disk by copying measured data to a CD-R or DVD-R
disk using the optional NeuroPortaView software. For details, refer to “Creating
and Reviewing a Review Disk” in this section.

9. DATA MANAGER
Moving Files to Another Drive or Media

NOTE
The instrument deletes the source files automatically when moving files.
Copy important files to prevent accidental deleting.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select the drive which
contains the file to move. The file list opens in the File mode.
2. Select the file to move from the data list.
If you select a patient, all files for the patient will be moved.
To move one file, click the “+” button beside the examination and select the
file.
3. Click the Move function button. A destination window appears

Destination window

9. DATA MANAGER
To add files to move, select the files in the data list and click the Add button
in the destination window.
6. Click the OK button to start moving.
Archiving Files
You can copy files to a removable media such as a CD/DVD disk drive for
backup. The archive location of files that are copied using the archive function
can be checked in the data list in Database mode.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select Database or the
drive which contains the files to archive. The file list opens in the File mode.
2. Select the files to archive from the data list.
If you select a patient, all files for the patient will be archived.
To archive one file, click the “+” button beside the examination and select
the file.

9. DATA MANAGER
3. Click the Archive function button. A destination window appears

Destination window
9
To add the files to archive, select the file in the data list and click the Add
button in the destination window.
6. Click the OK button to start archiving.

9. DATA MANAGER
Adding an Examination in the Database

Even if an examination was acquired with an instrument that does not have
NeuroWorkbench and the examination was started from the Acquisition program,
you can add the examination to the database.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select a disk drive. The
file list opens in the File mode.
2. Select the examination to add to the database.
3. Click the Add to Database function button. When the registration

is complete, a message opens.
4. Click the OK button to close the message window.
Deleting Files
NOTE
When an examination file is deleted, the patient information for the file is
also deleted.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select the drive which
contains the files to delete. The file list opens in the File mode.

9. DATA MANAGER
2. Select the files to delete.
3. Click the Delete function button. A confirmation message appears.
9
Click the OK button to delete the files.
Removing Read Only Attribute of Files

You can remove the read only attribute of the examinations.
1. In the data list, click the “+” button beside the examination to show the files.
2. Right-click a file and select “EEG Tool” → “Remove read-only attribute.”
The read only attribute is removed.

9. DATA MANAGER
Combining Files
You can combine EEG data files for a patient. This is useful if the EEG
measurement data for a patient is saved in several different files during
acquisition. If patient images were recorded, patient image files can also be
appended. For EEG measurement files that were acquired with the long term
EEG monitoring function, you can continuously review these files by using a
long term monitoring information file (LIF file). You do not have to combine
these files.
NOTE
If total file size exceeds 2 GB, this operation cannot be performed.
1. In the data list, select two or more files to combine and click the Merge/Link
2. Select the drive to save in and check the files to combine.

Check the files to merge.
Click the Merge

radio button.
Click this button to

select the drive.
3. Click the Start button to start combining the files.

9. DATA MANAGER
Linking Files
If long term recording stops due to trouble or error, the links between files
get broken. You can re-link the files. If you link the files, you can review the
bookmarks in the files using the slide show function.
1. In the data list, select two or more files to link and click the Merge/Link
2. Check the Link radio button in the Merge method area.

Check the files to link.
Click the Link

radio button.
3. Click the Start button. An LIF file is created.
When the files contains two or more slide shows, Select slide window
appears. Select the bookmarks to add to the new slide show from the list and
click the OK button.

9. DATA MANAGER
Copying an LIF (Long-term) File to a Disk Drive

When copying long term EEG data to a removable media, the LIF file is required
in addition to the long term EEG files.
NOTE
You cannot copy an LIF file to a CD or DVD disk. If you want to
consecutively review the long term EEG files on a CD or DVD, select all
long term files and start reviewing.
1. Copy the long term EEG files from the other electroencephalograph. For
details, refer to “Copying Files to Another Drive or Media” in this section.
2. In the data list, right-click the LIF file in the data list and select “EEG Tool”
→ “Copy long term link file” from the pop-up menu. The Select LIF Copy
Drive window opens.
3. Select the drive to copy the LIF file to. Select the same drive where you
copied the long term EEG files.
Checking the Patient Information for Consistency

If the examination has two or more files or long term files, the patient
information might be changed during examination and be different from the
patient information in the database.
You can check whether the patient information in the database and measurement
files are same. If the patient information is not consistent, you can correct it from
the NeuroWorkbench.
NOTE
If an examination has several measurement files, you must correct the
patient information for all the files when correcting information. To change
patient information for one of the files, refer to “Editing Information in the
Database” in Section 8.
1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select Database. The
file list opens in the Database mode.
2. Right-click the examination in the data list. The pop-up menu opens.

9. DATA MANAGER
3. Select “Check patient information for consistency” from the pop-up menu.
The Check Patient Information for Consistency window opens and shows
any patient information that does not match the information in the database.
9
The following patient information are checked.
• Patient name
• ID
• Gender
• Birth date
4. To correct the patient information, click the Accept button for each
information then click the Change button.
A message box appears.
5. Click the OK button of the message box.

9. DATA MANAGER
Disk Management
Every disk must have a disk number. You can assign disk numbers and format
disks in the File mode of the Data Manager.
• If the disk does not have a disk number, the disk number is automatically
assigned when the Acquisition program is started or waveforms are saved.
• For double-sided disks, both sides of the disk must have a different disk
number.
• The disk number can be numbers and text.
Assigning and Changing a Disk Number

1. Click the arrow button beside the Mode text box and select a disk drive. The
file list opens in the File mode.
2. Click the Disk Volume function button to display the Disk

Number window.
3. Click the EEG radio button in the Instrument area and enter a disk number
and comment.
• Click the arrow button beside the Drive text box to select a drive.
• The disk number is automatically assigned. To change the disk number,
enter a new number in the Disk Number text box.
• Enter a disk comment if necessary.
4. Write the disk number on the disk label.
5. Click the OK button to assign the disk number.
6. Eject the disk and attach the label to the disk.

9. DATA MANAGER
Creating Reports
Refer to “Creating Reports” in Section 8.

9. DATA MANAGER
Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk
Refer to “Creating and Reviewing a Review Disk” in Section 8.

Section 10 Troubleshooting
How to Troubleshoot........................................................................................................................................... 10.2

Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. 10.3
Instrument................................................................................................................................................ 10.3
Closing the Program and Shutting Down Windows when Program Malfunction Occurs................ 10.5
EEG Measurement................................................................................................................................... 10.6
DVD Drive................................................................................................................................................. 10.7
Printer....................................................................................................................................................... 10.7
Error Messages.................................................................................................................................................. 10.8
Acquisition Program/Review Program...................................................................................................... 10.8
System Program..................................................................................................................................... 10.11
SpO2 Error Messages............................................................................................................................. 10.12
10
CO2 Error Messages.............................................................................................................................. 10.13
Input Box Converter............................................................................................................................... 10.13
Connection of the Optional JE-120A Electrode Junction Box................................................................ 10.13
Errors on the Optional JE-120A Electrode Junction Box........................................................................ 10.14
Acquiring Clear EEG Waveforms...................................................................................................................... 10.15
Instrument Location................................................................................................................................ 10.15
AC Interference ..................................................................................................................................... 10.15
Occasional Noise................................................................................................................................... 10.16
Unstable Waveform Fluctuation.............................................................................................................. 10.16
ECG Artifact........................................................................................................................................... 10.16
Flash Lamp Artifact................................................................................................................................ 10.16

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
How to Troubleshoot
Use this section to locate, identify and solve a problem in the operation of the
instrument or an error message displayed on the screen. The troubleshooting
tables in this section are divided into general problems and error messages. If the
function of the instrument is suspected to be faulty as a result of checking, attach
an “Unusable” or “Repair required” label on the instrument and contact your
Nihon Kohden representative.
CAUTION
To turn the power off, follow the procedure in “Closing the EEG-1200
Program” in Section 3. Do not press the power button on the PC
unit. If the power button is pressed while a program is running, the
program, data file in the hard disk may be damaged.
1. Determine which troubleshooting table to use.
2. In the “Problem” or “Error Message” column, find the trouble item that
matches the problem or error message.
3. Do the action recommended in the “Action” column. (Begin with the first
recommended action.)
4. If the problem or error message is not solved, do the next recommended

action in the “Action” column. (If this does not solve the problem, do the
next recommended sections.)
5. If none of the actions solve the problem, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Instrument
Problem Possible Cause Action
When the power is turned on, the The AC power cord is not connected to Connect the AC power cord correctly.
instrument does not operate. the isolation unit or AC outlet on the wall
correctly.
The power switch of the PC unit is not Turn on the power switch of the PC
turned on. unit.
When the power is turned on, The power of the display is not turned on. Press the power switch of the display to
nothing is displayed on the screen. turn the display on.
The brightness or contrast of the display is Adjust the brightness or contrast. Refer
not appropriate. to the Operator’s manual of the display.
The display cable is not connected to the PC Connect the display cable to the video
unit correctly. connector on the PC unit correctly.
The input line (BNC/D-Sub) is not correct. Select the correct input line. Refer to
the Operator’s manual of the display.
When the power is turned on, A disk, such as CD-R or DVD-R, is inserted Remove the disk. 10
Windows does not start. into the disk drive.
When the power is turned on, one The backup battery of the PC unit is Contact your Nihon Kohden
of the following messages appears discharged. representative.
and Windows does not start.
• “Strike the F1 key to continue,
F2 to run the setup utility”
• “Invalid configuration
information” – please run the
SETUP program.
• “Time-of-day is not set” – please
run the SETUP program.
The mouse or keyboard does not The mouse is not connected to the PC unit. Turn the power off, then connect the
function. The mouse is connected to the keyboard mouse cable to mouse connector on the
connector. PC unit correctly.
The keyboard is not connected to the PC Turn the power off, and then connect
unit. the keyboard cable to keyboard
The keyboard is connected to the mouse connector on the PC unit correctly.
connector.
The displayed window is inactive. The title Click the title bar of the window so that
bar of the window is dimmed. the window is active.
Faulty mouse. Use the Task Manager to close the
Faulty keyboard. program, then shut down Windows.
Program malfunction. Refer to “Power Off Procedure” in
Section 3.
The Acquisition program does not The USB cable from the electrode junction Turn the power off, then connect the
open. box is not connected to the PC unit. USB cable to the PC unit correctly.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

The flash lamp does not light. The AC power cord is not connected to the Connect the AC power cord correctly.
photic stimulator control unit correctly.
The flash lamp assembly cable is not Turn the power off and wait for several
connected to the photic stimulator control minutes, then connect the flash lamp
unit correctly. assembly cable to the PHOTIC LAMP
connector on the photic stimulator
control unit correctly.
The RS-232C cable is not connected to the Turn the power off, then connect the
photic stimulator control unit and PC unit RS-232C cable to the photic stimulator
correctly. control unit and PC unit correctly.
The power of the photic stimulator control 1. Close the Acquisition program.
unit is turned on after the Acquisition 2. Turn on the photic stimulator control
program opens. unit power.
The “Use photic stimulation” check box on Check the “Use photic stimulation”
the Photic Stimulation dialog box (System check box.
program) is not checked.
The photic stimulation mode is set to Select the correct photic stimulation
“Single”. mode.
The flash lamp is faulty. Replace the flash lamp.
The photic stimulation mark or The photo mark connection cable is not Turn the power off, then connect the
HV mark does not appear. connected to the electrode junction box and photo mark connection cable to the
the photic stimulator control unit correctly. electrode junction box and the photic
stimulator control unit correctly.
The manual mark (MARK ON, The mark cord is not connected to the Connect the mark cord to the electrode
MARK OFF) does not appear. electrode junction box. junction box correctly.
The Activation bar cannot be The “Use photic stimulation” check box on Check the “Use photic” stimulation
opened. the Photic stimulation dialog box (System check box.
program → Photic icon) is not checked.
The EEG-1200 application A screen saver program is active. Close the screen saver program.
program does not operate Another Windows application program is Close all Windows application
correctly. active. programs. Or, delete the application
program if it conflicts with the
EEG-1200 application program.
The USB cable from the electrode junction Turn the power off, then connect the
box is not connected to the PC unit. USB cable to the PC unit correctly.
The layout of the window is The size of the window is changed. When Change the size of the window
changed. the size of the window is changed, the properly.
position of buttons changes.
The date and time is not correct. The date and time setting is not correct. Set the correct date and time. Refer to
the Windows online help.
The backup battery of the PC unit is Contact your Nihon Kohden
discharged. representative.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Closing the Program and Shutting Down Windows when Program

Malfunction Occurs
1. Open the Windows Task Manager.
When the mouse does not operate:
i) Press the Ctrl + Shift + Esc key. The Windows Task Manager dialog box
opens.
ii) Select the Application tab.
When the keyboard does not operate:

i) Right-click the task bar. The pop-up menu opens.
ii) Select Task Manager to open the Windows Task Manager dialog box.
iii) Select the Application tab.
2. Select the program to close.
3. Select the End Task button.
4. Shut down Windows. 10

i) Click the (Start) button on the task bar then click the Shut down
button on the menu. Or press the Ctrl + Esc key → the “→” key → the
Enter key.
ii) The PC unit is automatically turned off.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
EEG Measurement
Noise or artifact is superimposed The electrode lead is faulty. Check the continuity of the electrode
on the waveforms. lead with a multimeter. If it is faulty,
replace it with a new one.
One or more of the leads from the Z, C3 Attach these leads to the patient
and C4 input jacks are not attached to the because the Z, C3 and C4 electrodes are
patient. necessary for EEG measurement.
The bed is not grounded. When the bed is metallic, ground it.
The instrument is not grounded. When the AC outlet on the wall does
not have a ground terminal, ground the
instrument with the provided ground
lead.
The provided AC power cord is not used. Only use the provided AC power cord to
correctly ground the instrument.
Several medical electronic instruments are Perform equipotential grounding.
used together.
There is an AC outlet or table tap near the Arrange the measurement environment
patient or bed. so that there is no influence from an AC
power line.
The CC-120A PC unit and optional devices Arrange the measurement environment
other than electrode junction box are placed so that unintended radio frequency does
near the patient. not affect the measurement. (Place the
PC unit and optional devices other than
electrode junction box far from the
patient.)
A desk lamp or fluorescent light is turned Turn the desk lamp or fluorescent light
on. off.
The patient touched some metal part. Prevent the patient from touching metal
parts.
The patient is using an electric blanket. Use another warming method or place
the shield cover around the blanket.
There is a cellular phone near the patient. Turn the cellular phone off.
The waveform is not stable. One or more of the leads from the Z, C3 Attach these leads to the patient
and C4 input jacks are not attached to the because the Z, C3 and C4 electrodes are
patient. necessary for EEG measurement.
New and old electrodes or different types of Do not use new and old electrodes or
electrodes are used together. different types of electrodes together.
This may cause high polarization
voltage.
The waveform becomes flat. The skin-electrode contact impedance of the Clean the electrode attachment to
C3 or C4 is high. reduce the impedance, and reattach the
electrode.
The skin-electrode contact One or more of the following electrodes Attach these electrodes for the
impedance check cannot be used for the impedance check are not impedance check.
performed. attached to the patient.
Z, A1 and A2 (or Fp1 and Fp2), C3 and C4

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

The waveform is not displayed. The color of the waveform and background Use a different color for waveform and
is the same. background.
The Display setting in the Pattern table is Set the Display setting to “On” for
set to “Off”. necessary channels.
AC filter does not function. The AC filter setting is not correct. Select the correct AC filter setting (50 or
60 Hz) in the System program.
Noise is not caused by AC line influence. Use the proper filter according to artifact.
Noise when AV derivation The unused electrode for AV derivation is Delete unnecessary electrodes for AV
selected in the AV Delete dialog box. derivation in the AV Delete dialog box.
The electrode name on the The electrode that is used for measurement Select the electrode for the storage
screen is indicated in red. is not selected for the storage electrode. electrode in the Electrode to be Saved
dialog box of the System program.
The electrode is selected for the AV Select all electrodes which are selected
derivation but not selected for the storage for the AV derivation for the storage
electrode. electrode.
The amplifier setting does not The amplifier setting is not set to “ACC”. Set the amplifier setting to “ACC” with
change with the Amp bar. the pattern table in the System program.
You can temporarily change the amplifier
setting in the Acquisition program and
Review program. 10
DVD Drive
The following table explains the general troubleshooting. For details, refer to PC
unit operator’s manual and CD-R or DVD-R recorder software online help.

Cannot read/write a file from/to The CD-R or DVD-R disk is faulty. Clean the CD-R or DVD-R disk. Refer to
the CD-R or DVD-R disk. the Operator’s manual of the PC unit.
The DVD drive is not recognized by the Check that the DVD drive is recognized
Windows operating system. as a Compact Disk in the My Computer
window. If not, the PC unit is faulty.
Replace the PC unit.
Printer
The following table explains general troubleshooting used with the instrument.
For details, refer to the printer operator’s manual.

The printer does not operate. The printer power cord is not connected to Connect the AC power cord correctly.
the power supply.
The printer cable is not connected to the PC Connect the printer cable correctly.
unit or printer.
The printer does not print The printer driver is not installed or an Install the correct printer driver.
correctly. incorrect printer driver is installed.
An error message appears on the printer. Refer to the operator’s manual of the
printer.
The size of the recording paper does not Match the size of the recording paper and
match the size of the printing data. printing data.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Error Messages
Following is a list of error messages during operation or the power on self

check for the PC unit. To solve the problem if an error message appears, find the
displayed error message from the table, then do the action recommended in the
Action column.
Acquisition Program/Review Program

Error Message Possible Cause Action
A communication error in the Photo Faulty communication between the Check that the RS-232C cable is
Drive unit. photic stimulator control unit and PC correctly connected to the photic
Please restart the unit. unit. stimulator control unit and PC unit,
then open the Acquisition program.
If the same error message appears
again, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Acquisition or Review program is You tried to open another EEG- Close the Acquisition or Review
open. 1200 application program when the program, then open the required
Please close it and start again. Acquisition or Review program was program.
open. Only one EEG-1200 application
program can be open at a time.
An error was detected by the Faulty RS-232C cable connection. Check that the RS-232C cable is
diagnostic program of the Photo correctly connected to the photic
Drive unit. stimulator control unit and PC unit, then
Please restart the unit. open the Acquisition program.
Faulty PHOTO STIM board. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
An error was detected during Faulty communication between the Check that the RS-232C cable is
operation of the Photo Drive unit. photic stimulator control unit and PC correctly connected to the photic
Confirm that the unit is connected unit. stimulator control unit and PC unit, then
and the power is on. open the Acquisition program.
Another file with the same name was The Acquisition program did not close Check for disk error with the Check
found in this disk. correctly and the registry settings are not Disk function. Refer to “Checking for
A new file name has been set. correct. Disk Damage Using Check Disk” in
There was a possibility of abnormal Section 3.
exit last time.
To be on the safe side, please
check your disk and system with
SCANDISK.EXE.
Another file with the same name was You tried to save the ASCII file with Use a different file name.
found in this disk. a file name that already exists in the
Overwrite the previous file? folder.
Another software of this EEG system You tried to open an EEG-1200 Close the EEG-1200 application
is working. application program when another program, then open the required
Please close it and start again. EEG-1200 application program was program.
open. Only one EEG-1200 application
program can be open at a time.
Can open the file no more. You tried to open an EEG data file when No more than four EEG data files can be
four EEG data files were open. open at the same time.
Cannot access the patient register. The database file cannot be opened. Open the Acquisition program to
recreate the database file.
Cannot access the selected file. The drive which saves EEG data file of Check the drive with the Windows
the selected patient has a malfunction. Explorer or Check Disk function.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

Cannot revise the multiple events at Two or more events are selected when Change the event name one at a time.
the same time. changing the event name.
Date or Date of Birth was not entered You tried to enter the “Date” or “Date of Check the format of the Date and Date
correctly. Birth” in an incorrect format. of Birth in the Windows Control Panel.
Please re-enter it using the date
format in the Windows Control
Panel.
Error found while saving data. Faulty storage drive (the hard disk which Check for disk error with the Check
Check the drive or media. saves the EEG data file). Disk function. Refer to “Checking for
Disk Damage Using Check Disk” in
Section 3.
Event was not created correctly. The system resources are low. Restart the PC unit. If necessary add
system memory.
The %d channel is used for ECG You tried to set the “Display” setting Do not change the “Display” setting to
trigger. of the channel that is set to the trigger “OFF” when the channel is set to the
Cannot set this channel to Off. channel for the ECG filer to “OFF”. trigger channel for the ECG filter.
The input boxes have the same ID. Two electrode junction boxes are Set the ID number of the second
Disconnect one input box or set used and the ID number of the second electrode junction box to “2”. Refer to
different ID’s for each input box. electrode junction box is not set to “2”. “EPJ CPU Board” in Section 4.
The IMPEDANCE CHECK key on When the power is turned on, the Do not press the IMPEDANCE CHECK 10
the electrode junction box has been IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the key when the power is turned on. If the
pressed. electrode junction box is pressed, or the IMPEDANCE CHECK key is faulty,
IMPEDANCE CHECK key makes a replace the EPJ INPUT board.
short-circuit.
The Photo Drive unit is not Faulty RS-232C cable connection. Check that the RS-232C cable is
connected or the power is off. correctly connected to the photic
stimulator control unit and PC unit, then
open the Acquisition program.
The photic stimulator control unit is not 1. Close the Acquisition program.
turned on. 2. Turn the photic stimulator control
unit on.
If the same error message appears again,
check the fuses on the photic stimulator
control unit.
Faulty RS-232C cable. Replace the RS-232C cable.
Faulty PHOTO STIM board. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Faulty photic stimulator control unit. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
The SELECTOR key on the When the power is turned on, the Do not press the SELECTOR key
electrode junction box was pressed SELECTOR key on the electrode when the power is turned on. If the
during startup. junction box is pressed, or the SELECTOR key is faulty, contact your
SELECTOR key makes a short-circuit. Nihon Kohden representative.
The disk is full. The storage drive (the hard disk which Click the OK button on the message
Close the current file to exit the saves the EEG data file) is almost full. dialog box, then end the measurement
acquisition program. Insert a new and save the file. Refer to Section 8.
disk. After saving the file, delete unnecessary
[CAUTION] files in the hard disk.
Do not turn off the power of the
main unit or connected instruments.
This can cause loss of EEG data and
damage to the hard disk.
The file has not been saved yet. From the File menu, New is selected Select the proper button on the dialog
Save the file and open a new file? after the Start/Stop Filing button is box. Refer to “Starting and Ending EEG
clicked. Measurement” in Section 6.
If you select [No], the data will be
lost.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

The file has not been saved yet. You tried to close the Acquisition Click the appropriate button on the
Save the file? program without saving the EEG data message dialog box. Refer to “Starting
file. and Ending EEG Measurement” in
The data will be lost when you select Section 6.
[NO].
The file is being saved. The EEG data file is being saved. No operation can be done until this
Please wait for moment. message disappears.
The following character cannot be You tried to enter a “ ’ ” or “ | ” The characters “ ’ ” and “ | ” cannot be
entered. character. entered.
| ’
The maximum number of events The number of saved events has reached No more events can be added. Delete
have been registered. 5000. unnecessary events.
Cannot add more.
The number of information in the The maximum number of registered No more patient information can be
patient register is over the maximum patient information in the system added. Delete unnecessary patient
number. database has reached. information.
Save the current register to a file and
delete the register by using the Data
Manager.
The printer driver is not installed. The printer driver is not installed. Install the correct printer driver.
Please install the printer driver.
The specified Time has no EEG data. There is no waveform data Enter the correct time corresponding to
Type a new time "hhhh:mm:ss". corresponding to the specified time to the waveform data.
jump to.
The specified epoch number is not There is no epoch data corresponding to Enter the correct epoch number
correct. the specified epoch number. corresponding to the epoch data.
Please input the epoch number again.
The starting option parameter is not Invalid shortcut target or the target file Correct the shortcut target description
correct. does not exist. in the Properties of the shortcut icon, or
Please check the setting of the make a correct shortcut icon.
shortcut.
The value for Time is invalid. You tried to enter the time in an Enter the time in the “hhhh:mm:ss”
Type a new time "hhhh:mm:ss". incorrect format. format.
There was a possibility of abnormal The EEG-1200 application program did Check the disk damage with the Check
exit last time. not close correctly. Disk function. Refer to “Checking for
To be on the safe side, check your Disk Damege Using Check Disk” in
disk and system with SCANDISK. Section 3.
EXE.
<< USB 901 >> The electrode Faulty USB cable connection. Check that the USB cable from the
junction box has been disconnected. electrode junction box is correctly
The Acquisition program will be connected to the PC unit, then open the
closed after saving the acquired data. Acquisition program.
Please connect the electrode junction
box, and restart the program.
<< USB 902 >> No electrode The electrode junction box is not Check that the USB cable from the
junction box was detected. recognized. electrode junction box is correctly
Confirm the electrode junction box is connected to the PC unit, then open the
connected and restart the Acquisition Acquisition program. If the same error
program. message appears again, reinstall the
electrode junction box driver, or replace
the electrode junction box.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING

<< USB 903 >> The electrode Faulty data communication between the 1. Close the Acquisition program.
junction box is disconnected or there electrode junction box and PC unit. 2. Turn the PC unit off.
is a data transmission error. 3. Check that the USB cable is
After the Acquisition program closes, correctly connected to the PC unit.
turn off the power, 4. Restart the PC unit.
confirm the electrode junction 5. Open the Acquisition program.
box is connected and restart the
Acquisition.
<< USB 904 >> An overflow Overflow during data transfer. 1. Close the Acquisition program.
occurred during data transmission 2. Turn the PC unit off.
from the electrode junction box. 3. Check that the USB cable is
Restart the Acquisition program. correctly connected to the PC unit.
4. Restart the PC unit.
Windows data format must be set to This message appears when a two digit Change the year format to 4 digits
4 digit year. year format is used from the year 2009. (Control panel → Regional Options
Data page → Short date area → Short
date format).
10
System Program
At least one electrode must be No electrode is selected and saved for Select and save the proper electrodes.
selected. waveform acquisition. Refer to “Selecting and Saving the
Electrodes for Waveform Acquisition” in
Section 5.
Please close Review program before You tried to open the System program Close the Review program, then open
you start the System program. when the Review program was open. the System program.
The storage folder and the automatic The same directory is selected for the Change the directory for the “Automatic
copy folder cannot be the same “Storage drive” option and “Automatic copy after acquisition” option, or
folder. copy after acquisition” option. uncheck the “Automatic copy after
acquisition” option.
Time-out error (over 30 seconds). The system setting file is faulty. Reinstall the EEG-1200 system program.
The settings file may be damaged.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
SpO2 Error Messages

SpO2 error message is displayed on the SpO2 channel of the extended channel bar
and event bar. Solve the problem referring to the following table. When an SpO2
error message is displayed, the SpO2 value becomes 0%.
Alarm Display Possible Cause Action

SpO2 UNSTABLE PULSE Patient body movement. Check the patient condition. Remove the
cause by changing the attachment site,
etc.
Probe attachment is unstable. Firmly attach the probe to the patient.
CONNECTOR OFF SpO2 adapter is disconnected from the Firmly connect the SpO2 adapter to the
electrode junction box. electrode junction box.
Faulty SpO2 adapter. Replace the SpO2 adapter.
SpO2 CHECK PROBE Probe is detached from the patient. Check the probe attachment condition.
Probe is disconnected from the SpO2 Firmly connect the probe to the SpO2
adapter. adapter.
SpO2 WEAK PULSE Poor peripheral circulation. Check the patient condition. Remove the
etc.
Probe is attached too tight and prevents Reattach the probe.
circulation.
SpO2 PULSE SEARCH Searching for correct pulse waveform. Wait until the pulse waveform is
detected.
Pulse waveform is rough and SpO2 cannot Check the probe attachment condition.
be measured.
Probe is detached from the patient. Reattach the probe.
SpO2 NO PULSE Poor peripheral circulation. Check the patient condition. Remove the
etc.
Probe is attached too tight and prevents Check the probe attachment condition.
circulation.
Probe is detached from the patient. Reattach the probe.
SpO2 CHECK PROBE SITE Probe attachment site is inappropriate. Refer to the probe operator’s manual and
attach the probe on the appropriate site.
Probe is past the expiration date. Replace the probe with a new one.
SpO2 LIGHT INTERFERE The measurement site is under surgical Cover the probe with a blanket or cloth.
light, bilirubin light, sunlight, etc.
The AC filter setting is not correct. Check the AC filter setting in the System
Program.
SpO2 PROBE FAILURE Faulty probe. Replace the probe with a new one.
SpO2 hardware failure Faulty SpO2 adapter. Replace the SpO2 adapter.
Unknown Adapter Unspecified SpO2 adapter is connected. Use the specified SpO2 connector.
NOTE
When the optional JL-550T1*/T2 SpO2 Adapter is connected to the
electrode junction box and there is an extreme power surge, an “SpO2
UNSTABLE PULSE” message appears. To prevent noise from the AC
power line, ground the electroencephalograph with a low impedance
ground lead (i.e. 1.5 m or less), connect the AC power cord to another AC
outlet and/or turn off the power of surrounding equipment.
* Only available for EEG-1200A electroencephalograph

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
CO2 Error Messages

CO2 error message is displayed on the CO2 channel of the extended channel bar
and event bar. Solve the problem referring to the following table. When a CO2
error message is displayed, the CO2 value becomes 0 mmHg.
Alarm Display Possible Cause Action

Unknown Adapter Unspecified CO2 sensor kit is connected. Use the specified CO2 sensor kit.
Connector OFF CO2 sensor kit is disconnected from the Firmly connect the CO2 sensor kit to the
electrode junction box. electrode junction box.
CO2 sensor kit is faulty. Replace the CO2 sensor kit.
Light Source Failure CO2 sensor is faulty or deteriorated. Replace the CO2 sensor kit.
Apnea The patient is in apnea. The previous value is displayed on
the screen until the next inspiration is
detected. Check the patient ventilation.
Auto Zero Zero calibration is performed. Wait until zero calibration is finished.
Sensor Failure CO2 sensor is faulty. Replace the CO2 sensor.
Module Failure CO2 module is faulty. Replace the CO2 sensor kit.
CO2 Adapter Failure CO2 sensor kit is faulty. Replace the CO2 sensor kit.
10
Input Box Converter

Cannot find Input box converter. The power of the input box converter is Close the Acquisition program and turn
Make sure the following setting. turned off. on the power of the input box converter.
Check the power supply. The network cable is disconnected. Close the Acquisition program and turn
Check the network connection. off the power of the input box converter,
Setting of the IP address is then connect the network cable firmly.
illegal. The first 3 numbers of the IP addresses To find the Input box converter,
between the Input box converter and set or change the IP address of the
electroencephalograph doesn’t match. electroencephalograph.
Connection of the Optional JE-120A Electrode Junction Box

Cannot find Input box converter. The power of the input box converter is Close the Acquisition program and turn
Make sure the following setting. turned off. on the power of the input box converter.
Check the power supply. The network cable is disconnected. Close the Acquisition program and turn
Check the network connection. off the power of the input box converter,
Setting of the IP address is then connect the network cable firmly.
illegal. The first 3 numbers of the IP addresses To find the input box converter,
between the input box converter and set or change the IP address of the
electroencephalograph do not match. electroencephalograph.
The two CO2 sensors are Two CO2 sensors are connected to the SpO2 Disconnect one of the CO2 sensors.
connected to the SpO2 adapter/ adapter/CO2 sensor kit jacks on the JE-120A
CO2 sensor kit jacks. electrode junction box.
Disconnect one of the CO2
sensors.
The two SpO2 adapters are Two SpO2 adapters are connected to the Disconnect one of the SpO2 adapters.
connected to the SpO2 adapter/ SpO2 adapter/CO2 sensor kit jacks on the
CO2 sensor kit jacks. JE-120A electrode junction box.
Disconnect one of the SpO2
adapters.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Errors on the Optional JE-120A Electrode Junction Box

When an error occurs in the JE-120A electrode junction box, one of the
following messages appears on the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph screen
together with error code and error details.
• Error detected in the electrode junction box. The Acquisition Program will
close. You cannot use the electrode junction box. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
• Error detected in the electrode junction box.
Error Details
Message Possible Cause Action

DC input circuit power error. The EEG Error occurred in the DC input circuit Contact your Nihon Kohden
waveforms are recorded but DC input power of the electrode junction box. representative.
cannot be recorded. Contact your Nihon
Kohden representative.
Electrode jack group selector error. The electrode jack group selector is Check that the electrode jack group
Check that the selector is not being being pressed. selector is not being pressed.
pressed.
Error detected by ROM diagnosis. Error occurred in the ROM of the Contact your Nihon Kohden
electrode junction box. representative.
Failed to write to flash memory. Flash memory error occurred. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Floating circuit power error. Error occurred in the floating circuit Contact your Nihon Kohden
power of the electrode junction box. representative.
FPGA configuration error. FPGA configuration error occurred. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Impedance check circuit power error. Impedance check circuit power error Contact your Nihon Kohden
occured. representative.
Impedance check key error. Check that The impedance check key is being Check that the impedance check key
the key is not being pressed. pressed. is not being pressed.
Over current. Power error occurred in the electrode Contact your Nihon Kohden
junction box. representative.
Over voltage or low voltage Power error occurred in the electrode Contact your Nihon Kohden
junction box. representative.
SDRAM memory error. SDRAM memory error occurred. Contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Acquiring Clear EEG Waveforms
Instrument Location
Avoid locations where the instrument may receive strong electromagnetic
interference such as radio or TV stations, cellular phones or mobile two-way
radios. Electromagnetic interference causes the screen image to bounce, wavy
oscillations, or the trace to become thick. Also, locate the instrument as far away
as possible from devices which emit high radio frequencies.
Refer to “EMC RELATED CAUTIONS” at the beginning of this manual and

“Instrument Location” in Section 2.
AC Interference
AC Interference Superimposed on All Channels
If AC interference is superimposed over all channels on the recording, check for
10
ground connection and other possible external causes around the patient.
If it is difficult to eliminate the AC interference, press the AC Filter On/Off
button on the tool bar. This function reduces a 50 or 60 Hz AC interference to
1/25 or better of the original amplitude.
AC Interference Superimposed on Specific Channels

Check for poor electrode placement or poor electrode tip connection to the jacks
on the electrode junction box.
Press the IMPEDANCE CHECK key on the electrode junction box or the
Impedance Check button on the tool bar on the screen to perform the skin-
Constant amplitude and interval electrode contact impedance check to detect a faulty electrode.
Causes of AC interference
• Dirty or corroded lead wire tips or electrodes
• Loose electrode connection
• Patient or technician touching an electrode during recording
• Patient touching any metal part of a bed or examination table
• Broken lead wire or power cord
• Electrical devices in the immediate area, lighting, concealed wiring in walls or
floors
• Improper equipotential grounding

10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Occasional Noise
Occasional noise may be caused by the patient’s movement or by EMG artifacts
due to the patient’s nervous condition. Instruct the patient to relax.
Causes of EMG
• Patient is uncomfortable, tense, nervous or apprehensive.
• Patient is cold and shivering.
• Patient has a neuro or muscular disorder (e.g. Parkinson’s disease).
• Examination chair or bed is too narrow or short to support limbs
comfortably.
Amplitude and interval vary

If EMG artifact cannot be removed depending on the examination circumstances,
use the 50RP high-cut filter.
Unstable Waveform Fluctuation

Sweat Artifact Waveform fluctuation may be caused by the patient’s perspiration or respiration,
unstable electrode mounting, or electrode lead wire movement.
Causes
• Patient is sweating. Examination room is too warm.
• Dirty or corroded electrodes.
• New and old electrode or different types of electrodes are used together.
• Insufficient or dried out EEG paste.
• The skin-electrode impedance of the C3 or C4 is high.
Respiration Artifact
• Rising and falling of chest during normal or apprehensive respiration.
ECG Artifact
Noise appears synchronized with ECG. Change the patient position or change
the reference electrode to Aav when monopolar derivation is used. If noise is not
reduced, use the ECG filter.
Synchronized with ECG
Flash Lamp Artifact

An electrode or paste is exposed to the photic stimulation light. Cover the
electrode with a black tape to avoid the flash lamp light.

Section 11 Maintenance
Check Items After Use........................................................................................................................................ 11.2

Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing ................................................................................................................ 11.3
System Components................................................................................................................................ 11.3
Cleaning......................................................................................................................................... 11.3
Disinfecting..................................................................................................................................... 11.3
KD-029A/KE-122A Cart........................................................................................................................... 11.4
Cleaning......................................................................................................................................... 11.4
Electrodes and Leads............................................................................................................................... 11.4
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing............................................................................................. 11.4
Optional Instrument.................................................................................................................................. 11.4
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing............................................................................................. 11.4
Checking the Electrode Lead............................................................................................................................. 11.5
Periodic Inspection............................................................................................................................................. 11.6
11
Repair Parts Availability Policy........................................................................................................................... 11.7
Disposal.............................................................................................................................................................. 11.7

11. MAINTENANCE
Check Items After Use
After use, check the following items for the next use.
Overview
• All external instruments power are turned off.
• No peeling or tears on the keyboard.
• No electrode is dirty, frayed or damaged.
Accessories
• Enough electrodes.
• Enough EEG paste.
• Enough paper for printer.
Storage
• Electrode leads are washed.
• The power is turned off.
• No chemical or water is near the instrument.
• Acceptable storage temperature and humidity.
• Recording results are properly stored.

11. MAINTENANCE
Cleaning, Disinfecting and Sterilizing
System Components
CAUTION
Before maintenance, cleaning or disinfection, turn the
electroencephalograph power off, disconnect the power cord
from the AC socket and then remove the electrodes, sensors and
probes connected to the electroencephalograph from the patient.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in electrical shock and
electroencephalograph malfunction.
NOTE
• Do not sterilize the system components.
• Do not use unspecified disinfectants.
• When using a flammable solvent such as ethanol for cleaning and
disinfecting, ventilate the room adequately.
• For the items not listed in this section, refer to instructions provided with 11
the item.
Cleaning
NOTE
Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine, because these will
cause the materials to melt or crack.
After use, clean the surface of the system components with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent diluted with water, and wipe with a dry cloth.
To remove any attached paste, immediately wipe the paste off the component
with a wet cloth before the paste dries.
For the display and printer, refer to the operator’s manual for each instrument.
Disinfecting
NOTE
• Use disinfectants in the correct concentration.
• Wipe the system components thoroughly after disinfecting it with spray.
• Do not disinfect the system components with sodium hypochlorite.
• Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine, because these
will cause the materials to deform or crack.
• Do not sterilize or disinfect the communication cable with ultraviolet light
or ozone.

11. MAINTENANCE
To disinfect the exterior surface of the system components, wipe them with a
non-abrasive cloth moistened with any of the disinfectants listed below.
Disinfectant Concentration (%)

Chlorhexidine gluconate solution 0.5
Benzethonium chloride solution 0.2
Glutaraldehyde solution 2.0
Benzalkonium chloride 0.2
Alkyldiaminoethylglycine hydrochloride 0.5
KD-029A/KE-122A Cart
Cleaning
NOTE
Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine, because these will
cause the materials to deform or crack.
After use, clean the surface of the cart with a soft cloth moistened with neutral
detergent diluted with water, and wipe with a dry cloth.
To remove paste from the cart, immediately wipe the paste off with a wet cloth
before it dries.
To clean the cart, following disinfectants can be used.
Disinfectant Concentration
Chlorhexidine gluconate solution 0.5
Benzethonium chloride solution 0.2
Glutaraldehyde solution 2.0
Benzalkonium chloride 0.2
Alkyldiaminoethylglycine hydrochloride 0.5
NOTE
Select the appropriate disinfectant.
Electrodes and Leads

For how to clean, disinfect and sterilize the electrodes and leads, refer to the
manual of the electrodes and leads.
Optional Instrument
For how to clean, disinfect and sterilize the optional instrument, refer to the
manual of the instrument.

11. MAINTENANCE
Checking the Electrode Lead
When any of the following trouble occurs during measurement, check the
electrode lead wire with a multimeter.
• An artifact is superimposed on the waveform of a specified channel during
recording.
• An artifact (AC interference) is superimposed on the waveforms of all
channels during recording.
(Z, C3, C4, A1 or A2 electrode may be broken or not properly attached.)
• The skin-electrode impedance is not decreased even after reattaching the
electrode.
CAUTION
Before disposing of a lead wire, check with your local solid waste
officials for recycling options or proper disposal.
NOTE
11
A broken lead wire cannot be repaired. Discard it.

11. MAINTENANCE
Periodic Inspection
If the periodic inspection is not performed, degradation or loss of function may

go unnoticed and lead to misdiagnosis.
Service personnel should perform the periodic inspection at least once every
6 months. Make sure that the instrument operates properly and replace the
consumables.
If you found abnormalities as a result of inspection and the instrument is

suspected to be faulty, attach an “Unusable” or “Repair request” label to the
instrument and contact your Nihon Kohden representative. For inspection, refer
to the Service Manual.
Check Items
• Instrument is not dirty, damaged or rusty.
• No label is torn.
• Ground lead is properly connected.
• Calibration waveform is properly recorded.
• Electrode junction box input jacks are connected properly.
• The sensitivities and time constant are correct.
• Screen brightness can be adjusted.
• Screen display is correct.
• Clock is correct.
• System settings are correct and saved correctly.
• Flash lamp assembly is properly connected and operates correctly.
• Analog output unit operates properly.
• Printer operates properly.
• Mouse operates properly.
• Hard disk drive operates properly. Use “Check Disk” to check the hard disk.
Refer to “Checking for Disk Damage Using Check Disk” in Section 3.
• No current leakage.
• The components are correctly mounted on the cart.
• No loosen screw on the cart.

11. MAINTENANCE
Repair Parts Availability Policy
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to
maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 8 years (PC unit:
4 years) from the date of delivery. In that period NKC or its authorized agents
will repair the instrument. This period may be shorter than 8 years (PC unit:
4 years) if the board or part necessary for the faulty section is not available.
11
Disposal
CAUTION
Dispose of Nihon Kohden products according to your local laws and
your facility’s guidelines for waste disposal. Otherwise, it may affect
the environment. If there is a possibility that the product may have
been contaminated with infection, dispose of it as medical waste
according to your local laws and your facility’s guidelines for medical
waste. Otherwise, it may cause infection.
For detailed information about disposal, contact your Nihon Kohden

representative.

Section 12 Reference
Specifications..................................................................................................................................................... 12.2
Data Acquisition....................................................................................................................................... 12.2
Data Processing....................................................................................................................................... 12.2
Display...................................................................................................................................................... 12.3
Acquisition Program................................................................................................................................. 12.3
Photic Stimulator...................................................................................................................................... 12.3
Review Program....................................................................................................................................... 12.4
Safety....................................................................................................................................................... 12.4
Mechanical Strength................................................................................................................................. 12.5
Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................................. 12.5
Dimensions and Weight............................................................................................................................ 12.5
Power Requirements................................................................................................................................ 12.5
Operation Conditions................................................................................................................................ 12.6
Transport and Storage Conditions............................................................................................................ 12.6
Electromagnetic Emissions...................................................................................................................... 12.6
12
Electromagnetic Immunity........................................................................................................................ 12.7
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communications
Equipment.............................................................................................................................................. 12.10
System Composition for EMC Test......................................................................................................... 12.11
EEG-1200A.................................................................................................................................. 12.11
EEG-1200J/K............................................................................................................................... 12.11
Standard Accessories...................................................................................................................................... 12.12
Options and Consumables............................................................................................................................... 12.14
Options................................................................................................................................................... 12.14
Consumables......................................................................................................................................... 12.15
Reference Literature: Wide-band EEG Analysis............................................................................................... 12.17

12. REFERENCE
Specifications
Data Acquisition
JE-921A electrode junction box
Number of input jacks
EEG input jacks 25
Extra inputs 4
Bipolar input jacks (pairs) 7
The extra jacks (X1-X4) can be used as bipolar jacks. To select extra jack or
bipolar jack, refer to Section 5 “System Programs”.
DC input jacks 4
SpO2 connector 1
CO2 connector 1
Input impedance
EEG input/extra input 100 MΩ
DC input 1.5 MΩ
Input circuit current 5 nA or less
Internal noise level
EEG input/extra input 1.5 µVp-p or less (0.53 to 60 Hz)
DC input 10 mVp-p or less
CMRR
EEG input/extra input 105 dB or greater (60 Hz)
Bipolar input 100 dB or greater (60 Hz)
Low-cut filter 0.08 Hz (Time constant: 2.0 s)
The time constant of 2.0 s can be extended to 5.0 s or 10 s by digital filtering.
Refer to “Time constant (Low-cut filter)” in “Data Processing” on the next page.
High-cut filter 300 Hz (−18 dB/oct)
Offset tolerance ±600 mV
A/D conversion 16 bits (97 nV/LSB)
Sampling and hold All electrodes at the same time
Sampling frequency 100, 200, 500, 1000 Hz, selectable
Data Processing
Sensitivity
EEG INPUT OFF, 1, 2, 3 (2.5), 5, 7, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 700,
1000 μV/mm
DC INPUT OFF, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 500, 700, 1000 mV/mm
Time constant (Low-cut filter) 0.001, 0.003, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 0.6, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0, 10.0 s
0.016, 0.03, 0.08, 0.16, 0.27, 0.53, 1.6, 5.3, 53, 159 Hz (−6 dB/oct)
When the JE-921A electrode junction box is used and the time constant is set to
5.0 s or 10 s, the 5.0 s and 10 s settings are obtained by digital filtering which
extends the 2.0 s time constant. Refer to “Low-cut filter” in “Data Acquisition”
on the previous page.
High-cut filter JE-921A electrode junction box
15, 30, 35, 60, 70, 120 (−12 dB/oct), 50 (RAPID), 300 Hz (−18 dB/oct)
AC filter 50 or 60 Hz, (rejection ratio: 1/25 or more)

12. REFERENCE
Calibration waveform
Waveform shape 0.25 Hz step wave or 10 Hz sine wave
Voltage 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 μV (×1000 for DC input signal)
ECG elimination filter Available in acquisition and review programs
Impedance check
Indication on the screen All electrodes are displayed on the screen in electrode position layout.
Impedance for each electrode is displayed and electrodes with impedance higher
than the preset impedance threshold are highlighted.
Indication on LED LEDs on the electrode junction box with impedance higher than the preset
impedance threshold light.
Impedance threshold 2, 5, 10, 20 and 50 kΩ
Pattern 36 sets of programmable montages combined with programmable individual
amplifier settings
Reference electrode selector A1 → A2, A1 ← A2, A1 ↔ A2, A1 + A2, VX, AV (with unsuitable electrode
deletion function), Aav, Org, SD, BN and OFF
Marking signal Photic stimulation mark, Hyperventilation mark
Display
Display resolution Up to 1600 dots × 1200 lines
Number of display channels Up to 64 and one mark channel
When multi-channel electrode junction box and mini junction boxes are used: 12
Up to 300 and one mark channel
Display modes Overwrite and page-by-page
Waveform display color 16 colors
Waveform display on/off Provided
Waveform position adjustment Provided
Waveform freeze Provided
Patient image display Available when the optional QI-120A Camera Capture Unit and video camera are
used.
Waveform sweep speed 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 s or 2, 3, 5 min/page
Timing mark 0.1, 1 s
Time scale off, 0.2, 1 s
Event mark Displays at the bottom of the screen
EEG scale Provided
Dual display Available
Acquisition Program
Timer function Manual timer, recording timer, HV timer
Data storage device Hard disk drive (standard)
Photic Stimulator
Optional LS-120A photic stimulator control unit
Maximum flash energy 1.28 J/Single
Stimulation modes 3 automatic (30 steps, programmable), manual, and single
Mode of operation Continuous operation with intermittent loading
Duty cycle Max. 5 minutes continuous operation in 30 minutes

12. REFERENCE
Automatic stimulation
Stimulus rate 0.5, 1 to 33 (1 Hz steps), 50 and 60 Hz
Stimulation period 1 to 99 seconds in 1 second steps
Pause period 1 to 30 seconds in 1 second steps
Manual stimulation Manually set frequency and stimulation period

Photic frequency 0.5 Hz, 1 to 33 Hz in 1 Hz steps, 50 and 60 Hz
Stimulation time 1 to 99 s in 1 second steps and continuous stimulation (FREE: Max. 5 min)
Pulse mode Normal, random, and double

Random stimulation 1 to 33 Hz in 1 Hz steps within ± 50%
Single stimulation Manual key operation single stimulation or automatic single stimulation by
external trigger signal
Trigger input TRIGGER IN connector (1 to 5 V)
Trigger output TRIGGER OUT connector (3 V or more)
Review Program
Changeable items Montage, sensitivity, high-cut filter, time constant, reference electrode, and
display speed
Jump functions Specified event, page by page, and specified time
Display modes Continuous, high speed, high speed with pause, manually page-by-page,
manually second-by-second and manually waveform centering
Display information Event, channel number, montage and comment
Safety
Safety standard
EEG-1200A IEC 60601-1: 1988
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1: 1991
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 2: 1995
IEC 60601-1-1: 2000
IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
IEC 60601-1-2 Amendment 1: 2004
IEC 60601-2-26: 2002
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.601.1-M90: 1990
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.601.1S1-94
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.601.1B-90
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.60601-1-1-02 (R2002)
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.60601-2-26-04
EN 60601-1: 1990
EN 60601-1 Amendment 1: 1993
EN 60601-1 Amendment 2: 1995
EN 60601-1 Amendment 13: 1996
EN 60601-1-1: 2001
EN 60601-2-26: 2003
EEG-1200J/K IEC 60601-1: 2005 + Amendment 1: 2012
IEC 60601-1-6: 2010 + Amendment 1: 2013
IEC 60601-2-26: 2012
IEC 62366: 2007 + Amendment 1: 2014

12. REFERENCE
Type of protection against electric shock: Class I

Degree of protection against electric shock
JE-921A or JE-922A
Type BF applied part: Electrode jacks, bipolar jacks
JE-120A with JE-125AK/225AK/226AK/227AK/228AK, and PE-210A with JE-0011/0012/0013
Type BF applied part: Electrode jacks, bipolar jacks (JE-125AK only)
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
Non-protected (IPX0)
Degree of safety of application in the presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture with air or oxygen or nitrous
oxide: Not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anaesthetic mixture with air
or oxygen or nitrous oxide
Mode of operation Continuous
Mechanical Strength
Indoor stationary equipment
(including when mounted on the optional KD-029A or KE-122A cart)
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EEG-1200A IEC 60601-1-2: 2001
IEC 60601-1-2 Amendment 1: 2004 12
CISPR11 GROUP 1 CLASS B: 2003
CAN/CSA C22.2 No.60601-1-2-03
EEG-1200J/K IEC 60601-1-2 : 2007
IEC 60601-2-26: 2012
Dimensions and Weight

JE-921A electrode junction box 185 (W) × 72 (D) × 167 (H) mm, 1.0 kg
CC-120A PC unit 289.6 (W) × 323.6 (D) × 85.2 (H) mm, 6.48 kg
The dimensions and weight differ according to model. Refer to the Operator’s
manual of the PC unit.
SM-120AJ isolation unit 150 (W) × 320 (D) × 140 (H) mm, 12 kg
SM-120AK isolation unit 181 (W) × 320 (D) × 140 (H) mm, 13 kg
LS-120A photic stimulator control unit
155 (W) × 300 (D) × 75 (H) mm, 4.10 kg
QD-120A analog output unit 155 (W) × 300 (D) × 75 (H) mm, 2.32 kg
Power Requirements
Line voltage SM-120AJ isolation unit: AC 110 to 120 V
SM-120AK isolation unit: AC 220 to 240 V
Line frequency 50/60 Hz
Power consumption 750 VA (for PC unit and display)
1 kVA (PC unit, display, photic stimulator control unit and analog output unit)

12. REFERENCE
Operation Conditions
Temperature 10 to 35˚C (50 to 95˚F)
Humidity 30 to 80% (noncondensing)
Atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa
Transport and Storage Conditions

Temperature −20 to +60˚C (−4 to +140˚F)
Humidity 10 to 80%
Atmospheric pressure 70 to 106 kPa
Electromagnetic Emissions
The EEG-1200’s essential performances in EMC standard satisfy the following criteria.
EEG-1200 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.

The customer or the user of the EEG-1200 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The EEG-1200 uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore,
CISPR 11 its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class B The EEG-1200 is suitable for use in all establishments, including
CISPR 11 domestic establishments and those directly connected to the public low-
Harmonic emissions Class A voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
IEC 61000-3-2 purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/ Complies
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3

12. REFERENCE
Electromagnetic Immunity
The EEG-1200’s essential performances in EMC standard satisfy the following criteria.
This Model EEG-1200 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the EEG-1200 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic environment -
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level
guidance
Electrostatic discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or
(ESD) ±8 kV air ±8 kV air ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2 synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast transient/ ±2 kV for power supply ±2 kV for power supply Mains power quality should be that
burst lines lines of a typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output environment.
lines lines
Surge ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differential mode
Mains power quality should be that
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode of a typical commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips, short <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) <5% UT (>95% dip in UT) Mains power quality should be that
interruptions and for 0.5 cycles for 0.5 cycles of a typical commercial or hospital
voltage variations on environment.
power supply input lines 40% UT (60% dip in UT) 40% UT (60% dip in UT) If the user of the EEG-1200 requires
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 1 cycle continued operation during power
mains interruptions, it is recommended
12
70% UT (30% dip in UT) 70% UT (30% dip in UT) that the EEG-1200 be powered from
for 25 cycles for 2 cycles an uninterruptible power supply or a
(for 1 cycle*1) battery.*2
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) <5% UT (>95% dip in UT)

for 5 s for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should
(50/60 Hz) be at levels characteristic of a typical
magnetic field location in a typical commercial or
IEC 61000-4-8 hospital environment.
NOTE: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
*1 When the QI-120A is connected to the EEG-1200.
*2 It is recommended that the EEG-1200 be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a battery if the power
quality is not stable.

12. REFERENCE
IEC 60601 test

Immunity test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the EEG-1200,
including cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms d = 1.2 P

IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the

transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as

determined by an electromagnetic site survey*1, should
be less than the compliance level in each frequency
range*2.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
* Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
1
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the EEG-1200 is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the EEG-1200 should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the EEG-1200.
*2 Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than for all other functions.
Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference (Impedance Respiration)

Impedance respiration measurement is very sensitive and affected by electromagnetic interference. Technological
limitations do not allow immunity levels higher than 1 Vrms for conducted disturbances induced by RF fields.
Electromagnetic fields with conducted disturbances above 1 Vrms may cause measurement error. Do not use electrically
radiating equipment near the impedance respiration measurements.

12. REFERENCE
When the JE-921A electrode junction box is connected to the EEG-1200 electroencephalograph
IEC 60601 test

Immunity test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
The JE-921A that is connected to the EEG-1200 must
be used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF
shielding effectiveness and, for each cable that enters
the shielded location, a minimum RF filter attenuation
Radiated RF 3 V/m 0.3 V/m of 31 dB over the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz.
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz Refer to the note below this table.
Field strengths outside the shielded location from fixed

RF transmitters, as determined by an electro-magnetic
site survey*, should be less than 3 V/m. Refer to the
note below this table.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 2: It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be verified to
assure that they meet the minimum specification.
* Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be 12
considered. If the measured field strength outside the shielded location in which the JE-921A that is connected to
the EEG-1200 is used exceeds 3 V/m, observe the JE-921A that is connected to the EEG-1200 to verify normal
operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as relocating the JE-921A
that is connected to the EEG-1200 or using the shielded location with a higher RF shielding effectiveness and filter
attenuation.
NOTE
The JE-921A that is connected to the EEG-1200 should be used in a shielded location with an RF filter
attenuation of 31 dB over the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz. If the JE-921A that is connected to the
EEG‑1200 is used outside shielded location, use it in a location where the measured field strength is less than
0.3 V/m. To measure shielding effectiveness, consult a service engineer.

12. REFERENCE
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF

Communications Equipment
The EEG-1200 is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the EEG-1200 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the EEG-1200 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)

power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
(W) d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
JE-921A electrode junction box
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)

power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
(W) d = 1.2 P d = 12 P d = 23 P
0.01 0.12 1.2 2.3
0.1 0.38 3.8 7.3
1 1.2 12 23
10 3.8 38 73
100 12 120 230
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.

12. REFERENCE
System Composition for EMC Test
EEG-1200A
The EEG-1200A electroencephalograph is tested to comply with IEC 60601-1-2: 2001 and Amendment 1: 2004 with
the following composition. If any part which is not specified by Nihon Kohden is used, the EMC specifications may not
comply.
Units Cable length

EEG-1200A electroencephalograph —
CC-120AJ/AK PC unit —
SM-120AJ/AK isolation unit —
VL-120A/121A/122A LCD display unit or compatible 2.0 m
JE-921A electrode junction box 5.0 m
LS-120AJ/AK photic stimulator control unit 0.7 m
LS-703A flash lamp assembly 5.0 m
JE-922A mini electrode junction box 5.0 m
JL-951T3 SpO2 adapter 2.5 m
TL-201T SpO2 probe 1.6 m
TG-921T3 CO2 sensor kit 3.5 m
QI-120A camera capture unit 0.8 m
QD-120A/AK analog output unit 0.7 m
QI-122A/AK input box converter 10 m
12
EEG-1200J/K
The EEG-1200J/K electroencephalograph is tested to comply with IEC 60601-1-2: 2007 with the following composition. If
any part which is not specified by Nihon Kohden is used, the EMC specifications may not comply.
Units Cable length

EEG-1200J/K electroencephalograph —
CC-120AJ/AK PC unit —
VL-120A/121A/122A LCD display unit or compatible 2.0 m
LS-703A flash lamp assembly 5.0 m
QI-120A camera capture unit 0.8 m
JE-922A mini electrode junction box 5.0 m
JL-550T2 SpO2 adapter 2.5 m
TL-201T SpO2 probe 1.6 m
TG-921T3 CO2 sensor adapter 2.0 m
TG-121T CO2 sensor 1.5 m
LS-120AJ/AK photic stimulator control unit 2.0 m
QD-120A/AK analog output unit 0.7 m
QI-122A/AK input box converter 5.0 m
QI-123AK input box converter 5.0 m
PE-210AK switch box 5.0 m
JE-125AK/225AK mini flat electrode junction box 10.0 m
JE-226AK mini flat electrode junction box 10.0 m
MS-120BK extension unit 2.0 m
JS-102B stimulation pod 5.0 m

12. REFERENCE
Standard Accessories
NOTE
When ordering the following accessories, specify the supply code. When
the accessory does not have a supply code, specify the code number.
1 2 3 4 5
1 1 2 2 3 3
6 7 8 9
4 4 5 5 6 6
10
7 7 8 8 9 9
For EEG-1200A
No. Model, Description Q’ty Code No. Supply Code
1 Marker cord 1 277825 —
3 10 10
Earth lead 11 11 1 098029 —
12 12
4 Mouse pad 1 6123-902964 —
Ferrite cores in the blue bag (for JE-921A)
E04SR301334 1 913504 —
RFC-H13 2 9000-061784 —
GRFC-6 4 9000-005041 —
GTFC-41-27-16
13 13 14 14
-15-15 1 9000-063724 —
5
Ferrite cores in the yellow bag (for QI-120A)
MRFC-5HFL 2 9000-063723 —
E04SR170730A 3 907387 —
Ferrite core in the pink bag (for isolation unit)
RFC-20 1 9000-060058 —
6 QP-0051 system program 1 — —
7 Protective earth lead 1 516399 —
8 NE-133A collodion EEG disk electrode (24 pcs/set)* 1 2154-000575 —
9 NE-311A EEG ear clip electrode 1 — H540A
* The NE-133A EEG disk electrode is only available as an accessory of the EEG-1200A. To order these electrodes
separately, order the NE-134A EEG disk electrode (12 pcs/set). The NE-134A is the same electrode as the
NE-133A; only the quantity is different.

12. REFERENCE
For EEG-1200J/K
No. Description Q’ty Code No. Supply Code
1 Marker cord 1 277825 —
EEG-1200J: 094577
2 Power cord 2 —
EEG-1200K: 314839
3 Earth lead 1 098029 —
4 Mouse pad 1 6123-902964 —
Ferrite cores in the blue bag (for JE-921A)
E04SR301334 1 913504 —
RFC-H13 2 9000-061784 —
GRFC-6 4 9000-005041 —
GTFC-41-27-16 1 9000-063724 —
5
Ferrite cores in the yellow bag (for QI-120A)
MRFC-5HFL 2 9000-063723 —
E04SR170730A 3 907387 —
Ferrite core in the pink bag (for isolation unit)
RFC-20 1 9000-060058 —
6 QP-0051 system program 1 — —
7 Protective earth lead 1 516399 —
Camera capture unit case 1 6113-924737 —
10 Bottom case (QI-120A) 1 6113-924736 —
Bottom case 2 (QI-120A) 1 6113-924735 —
12

12. REFERENCE
Options and Consumables
When ordering the following options, specify the model. When ordering
consumables, specify the supply code. When the supply code is not provided
with the option or consumable, specify the model or code number.
Options
Electrode Junction Box and Mini Electrode Junction Box
In addition to the JE-921A electrode junction box (standard accessory), other
optional electrode junction boxes and mini electrode junction boxes are
available. The mini electrode junction box provides EEG data to the electrode
junction box. The following table shows the combinations of electrode junction
boxes.
Electrode junction box Mini electrode junction box

(Number of electrode jacks) (Number of electrode jacks)
JE-921A, standard composition • JE-922A
JE-120A (64 ch) • JE-125A or JE-225AK
• JE-125A or JE-225AK
JE-120A (128 ch)
• JE-226AK
JE-120A (192 ch) • JE-226AK
• JE-227AK
• JE-226AK
JE-120A (256 ch)
• JE-227AK
• JE-228A
Photic Stimulation
• LS-120A photic stimulator control unit
• LS-703A, LS-706A flash lamp assembly
Software
• QP-110AK digital video software
• QP-112A review program
• QP-150A EEG examination support software
• QP-160A EEG trend program
• QP-220A EEG mapping program
• QP-251AK spike detector software
• QP-260AK polysmith software
Digital Video
• QI-120A camera capture unit

12. REFERENCE
Cart/Hardware/Electrical
• HIT-100 hyper isolation transformer
• KC-001A stand (for the electrode junction box and flash lamp assembly)
• KD-029A cart
• KE-122A cart
• KH-121A LCD pole
• KH-122A LCD stand
• DI-120A adapter
• SD-120A multiple portable socket outlet
• SD-903A multiple portable socket outlet
Other Units
• QD-120A analog output unit
• QI-122A input box converter
• QI-123A input box converter
Consumables
Electrodes and Paste
Model Description Q’ty Supply Code

NE-113A EEG disk electrode, 1.5 m 26 H503A
NE-114A EEG disk electrode, 0.8 m 26 H503B 12
NE-116A EEG disk electrode, 1.8 m 26 H503C
NE-117A EEG disk electrode, 3.0 m 6 H503D
NE-134A Collodion EEG disk electrode 12 H526

NE-136A EEG electrode, 0.7 m 12 H527
NE-301B EEG earlobe clip 10 H541

NE-311A EEG ear clip electrode 1 H540A
BC-112B ECG electrode lead 2 K512A

— ECG clip-on electrode (Fastclip) 1 H068A
BE-403A EEG electrode set 1 H467A*1

BE-0006 Electrode (with plastic holder) 1 H542A*1
— Electrode pad sheet 100 H561A*1
— O-ring guide and O-ring Guide: 1, H569*1
O-ring: 50
BE-0007 Headcap strap 1 H564A*1
BE-0008 Chin strap 1 H551A*1
BE-403B EEG electrode lead, 1.5 m 30 K516A*1
BE-911A*2 EEG disk electrode 24 —

(shielded type)
BE-912A*2 EEG disk electrode 12 —
(shielded type)
NE-090S1 Disposable electrode for EEG (Z 1 H548B*1

electrode)

12. REFERENCE
Model Description Q’ty Supply Code

NE-091S7 Disposable electrode for EEG 1 H548A*1
(EEG electrode)
BE-090AS Headband for EEG (Size S) 1 H564B*1
BE-090AM Headband for EEG (Size M) 1 H564C*1
BM-090Y Shield junction cord, EEG 1 K640A*1
NE-118A EEG disk electrode, 0.15 m 6 H503E*1
NE-05IS3 Disposable electrode 1 H544A*1

BM-120A Shield junction cord 1 K640*2
YZ-0019 Skin preparation gel (skinPure), 2 F020

135 g
Z-181BE Paate for EEG (ELEFIX), 180 g 2 F507
Z-181JE Paste for EEG (ELEFIX), 180 g 10 F509
Z-401CE Elefix EEG paste, 400 g 3 F510
*1 Not available for EEG-1200A

*2 No CE marking
SpO2 Measurement
Model Description Supply Code

JL-550T1 SpO2 adapter* —
JL-550T2 SpO2 adapter* Y095A
TL-201T Finger probe BluPRO P225F
TL-220T Multi-site probe BluPRO P225G
TL-260T Multi-site Y probe P205A
TL-271T SpO2 probe (for adult, disposable) P203A
TL-272T SpO2 probe (for child, disposable) P203B
TL-273T SpO2 probe (for neonate and adult, disposable) P203C
TL-274T SpO2 probe (for adult and infant) P204D
TL-051S SpO2 probe (for adult and neonate), 0.8 m P228A
TL-052S SpO2 probe (for adult and neonate), 1.6 m P228B
TL-061S SpO2 probe (for adult, child and infant), P229A
0.8 m
TL-062S SpO2 probe (for adult, child and infant), P229B
1.6 m
* For differences between JL-550T1 and JL-550T2, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative
CO2 Measurement
Model Description Supply Code

TG-921T3 CO2 sensor kit P908
YG-120T Nasal Adapter (for nasal breathing) V921
YG-121T Nasal Adapter (for naso-oral breathing) V922

12. REFERENCE
Reference Literature: Wide-band EEG Analysis
Refer to the following literature for medical and technical information about the
wide-band EEG analysis function used in this device.
• Ikeda A, Terada K, Mikuni N, Burgess R, Comair Y, Taki W, Hamano T,

Kimura J, Lüders HO, Shibasaki H: Subdural recording of ictal DC shifts in
neocortical seizures in human. Epilepsia. 1996;37:662-674.
• Ikeda A, Yazawa S, Kunieda T, Araki K, Aoki T, Hattori H, Taki W, Shibasaki
H: Scalp-recorded focal, ictal DC shift in a patient with tonic seizure.
Epilepsia. 1997;38:1350-1354.
• Ikeda A, Taki W, Kunieda T, Terada K, Mikuni N, Nagamine T, Yazawa
S, Ohara S, Hori T, Kaji R, Kimura J, Shibasaki H: Focal ictal DC shifts
in human epilepsy as studied by subdural and scalp recording. Brain.
1999;122:827-838.
• Ikeda A, Lüders HO, Shibasaki H: Ictal direct current (DC) shifts. In: Lüders
HO and Noachtar S (eds): The Epileptic Seizures: Pathophysiology and
Semiology. Churchill Livingstone, New York. 2000; pp. 53-62. (contributing
author)
• Ikeda A, Shibasaki H: Special EEG recording with ictal pattern. (contributing 12
authors) In: Rosenow F, Lüders HO (eds). Handbook of Clinical
Neurphysiology: Epilepsy, Elsevier, Amsterdam. 2004; pp. 135-145.
• Ikeda A: DC recordings to localize the ictal onset zone. (contributing author)
In: Lüders HO (eds), Textbook of Epilepsy Surgery. Informa UK Ltd., London.
2008; pp. 659-666.
• Imamura H, Matsumoto R, Inouchi M, Matsuhashi M, Mikuni N, Takahashi
R, Ikeda A: Ictal Wideband ECoG: direct comparison between ictal slow shifts
and high frequency oscillations. Clin Neurophysiol. 2011;122:1500–1504.
• Kanazawa K, Matsumoto R, Imamura H, et al. Intracranially- recorded
ictal direct current shifts may precede high frequency oscillations in human
epilepsy. Clin Neurophysiol. 2015;126:47-59.
• Kanazawa K, Matsumoto R, Kinoshita M, Ikeda A: Novel electrophysiological
approaches to clinical epilepsy: diagnosis and treatment. Brain and Nerve
63(4), 355-364, 2011.
• Kanazawa K, Ikeda A: Ictal DC shifts: Parameter for ictal glial activity.
Epilepsy Vol.6 No.1, 27-33, 2012.
• Ikeda A: Generator Mechanism of Epileptic Seizure: Where is a Red Slow?
Japanese Journal of Neurosurgery. 2016; 25(2), 128-136, 2016.

Manufacturer
NIHON KOHDEN CORPORATION NIHON KOHDEN ITALIA S.r.l.
1-31-4 Nishiochiai, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 161-8560, Japan Via Fratelli Bronzetti 28, 24124 Bergamo, Italy
Phone +81 3- 5996 -8041 Phone + 39 035-219543
Fax + 39 035-232546
North and South America NIHON KOHDEN UK LTD.

Trident Court 118, 1 Oakcroft Road
Chessington, Surrey KT9 1BD, UK
NIHON KOHDEN AMERICA, INC. Phone + 44 20-8391-6800
15353 Barranca Parkway, Irvine, CA 92618, U.S.A. Fax + 44 20-8391- 6809
Toll-free +1-800-325-0283
Phone +1 949- 580 -1555
Fax +1 949- 580 -1550
Asia
NIHON KOHDEN MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Insurgentes Sur 730, Piso 9 Oriente, Col. Del Valle SHANGHAI KOHDEN
C.P. 03100, Delegacion Benito Juarez, Ciudad de Mexico MEDICAL ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CORP.
Phone +52 55-8851-5550 No. 567 Huancheng Bei Road
Fax +52 55-8851-5580 Shanghai Comprehensive Industrial Development Zone
Fengxian District, Shanghai 201401, China
NIHON KOHDEN DO BRASIL LTDA. Phone + 86 21-5743-6998
Rua Diadema, 89, 1º andar, conjuntos 11 a 17, bairro Mauá Fax + 86 21-5743-6939
no Município de São Caetano do Sul, Estado de São Paulo
CEP 09580-670, Brasil NIHON KOHDEN SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Phone +55 11-3044-1700 1 Maritime Square, #10-34 HarbourFront Centre
Fax +55 11-3044- 0463 Singapore 099253
Phone + 65 6376-2210
Fax +65 6376-2264
Europe
NIHON KOHDEN INDIA PVT. LTD.
European Representative 308, Tower A, Spazedge, Sector 47, Sohna Road
Gurgaon-122 002 Haryana, India
NIHON KOHDEN EUROPE GmbH Toll-free +91 1800-103-8182
Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany
Phone + 91 124-493 -1000
Phone + 49 6003- 827- 0
Fax + 91 124-493 -1029
Fax + 49 6003- 827- 599
NIHON KOHDEN MIDDLE EAST FZE

NIHON KOHDEN DEUTSCHLAND GmbH JAFZA One Tower A, 19th floor, Office No. 1912
Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany
P.O. Box 261516, Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai, U.A.E.
Phone + 49 6003- 827- 0
Phone + 971 4- 884-0080
Fax + 49 6003- 827- 599
Fax + 971 4- 880-0122
NIHON KOHDEN FRANCE SARL NIHON KOHDEN KOREA, INC.

8, rue Francois Delage, 94 230 Cachan, France
3F, Cheongok Bldg., 88, Dongmak-ro, Mapo-gu,
Phone +33 1- 49- 08 -05 -50
Seoul, 04075, Republic of Korea
Fax + 33 1- 49- 08- 93 -32
Phone + 82 2-3273-2310
Fax + 82 2-3273-2352
NIHON KOHDEN IBERICA S.L.
C/Ulises 75A, E-28043 Madrid, Spain
Phone +34 917-161-080
Fax + 34 913- 004-676
Contact information is accurate as of December 2018. Visit https://www.nihonkohden.com/ for the latest information.
The model and serial number of your device are identified on the rear or bottom of the unit.
Write the model and serial number in the spaces provided below. Whenever you call your representative concerning
this device, mention these two pieces of information for quick and accurate service.
Model Serial Number
Your Representative
EEG1200_0614-010086Q
1st Edition: 09 Oct 2007
18th Edition:08 Mar 2019

Electroencephalograph: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electroencephalograph: Operator's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual (this manual)

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................. i 3

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.1

Section 2 Installation.............................................................................. 2.1

Section 3 Preparation............................................................................. 3.1

C.2 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

T1 and T2 Electrodes................................................................................. 3.14 1

Section 4 NeuroWorkbench................................................................... 4.1

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.3

Using the Active Directory Accounts when Logging in to NeuroWorkbench........ 4.13

Section 5 System Program.................................................................... 5.1

C.4 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Programming Patterns.................................................................................................... 5.10 1

Selecting the Page Display Time................................................................ 5.33

Section 6 Acquisition Program.............................................................. 6.1 6

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.7

Changing the Waveform Display Speed..................................................... 6.32

Displaying Heart Rate..................................................................................................... 6.62 1

Section 7 Review Program..................................................................... 7.1

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.9

Continuously Reviewing the EEG Waveforms Annotated by an Event

C.10 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.11

Displaying or Hiding Display Areas on the Screen..................................... 7.76

C.12 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Saving the Changed Data in the Currently Selected File................................... 7.107 1

Section 8 Workbench.............................................................................. 8.1

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.13

Exporting a Schedule................................................................................. 8.10

Section 9 Data Manager......................................................................... 9.1

C.14 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Section 10 Troubleshooting................................................................... 10.1

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 C.15

Section 11 Maintenance......................................................................... 11.1

Section 12 Reference.............................................................................. 12.1

C.16 Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

5. To Shutdown After Use

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

8. Maintenance and Inspection

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 i

In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.

ii Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

6. Use with other equipment:

7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 iii

9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

10. Use with radiation therapy equipment:

iv Operator’s Manual EEG-1200

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Operator’s Manual EEG-1200 v

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Standby (power on/off) Video connector

Headphone connector Network connector

Audio jack (Microphone) Serial port

Audio jack (LINE OUT) USB connector

EEG-1200A: A ttention consult

Message that indicates a warning or

Option button Close button

Type BF applied part Type CF applied part

Serial number Date of manufacture

EEG-1200A: A ttention consult